JP7097142B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a symbol is variablely displayed by a display means and a predetermined game value is given when the display result becomes a specific display result. A plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs are provided in this type of gaming machine, and a light emitting effect of causing these light emitting bodies to emit light in various modes is executed (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-017517

By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the light emitting body emits light, the reflection efficiency on the mounting surface with respect to the light of the light emitting body deteriorates depending on the mode of the mounting surface of the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting body is provided, and the amount of light of the light emitting body decreases. As a result, the light emission effect becomes dark, or the light emitting body becomes mottled due to uneven illumination, and the effect of the light emission effect is reduced, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In order to achieve the above object, in the present invention,
A game that includes a game board and a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win. It ’s a machine,
A staging display device that can display images and
Multiple light emitting boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, and
An effect control means for controlling the effect display device and a plurality of light emitters according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
Equipped with a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board provided on the game board among the plurality of light emitting boards, and a notation unit for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting bodies by yellow on the white coating film. Is formed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the specific light emission control for controlling a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board into a pseudo-golden light emission mode in which yellow light emission having different brightness or color tone is mixed. While you can do
The pseudo-golden light emitting mode is a plurality of light emitting bodies mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting board provided on the game board separately from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards during the specific light emitting control. It executes special light emission control that controls different special light emission modes.
When it is detected that the state detecting means is in an abnormal state during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mount surface of the specific light emission board has not been completed. Also, the specific light emission control is terminated to control the abnormal light emission mode different from the pseudo-golden light emission mode, while the special light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emission substrate is terminated. It is possible to continue until the special light emission control is completed without
The light emitter mounted on the specific light emitting board is capable of multicolor light emission.
It is characterized by that.
moreover,
A lottery means capable of drawing a winning or not based on the operation of the start lever is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied for the player. It is a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous special gaming state,
A staging display device that can display images and
Multiple light emitting boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, and
An effect control means for controlling the effect display device and a plurality of light emitters according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
Equipped with a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate among the plurality of light emitting substrates, and a notation portion for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting bodies is formed on the white coating film by yellow.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the specific light emission control for controlling a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board into a pseudo-golden light emission mode in which yellow light emission having different brightness or color tone is mixed. While you can do
A plurality of light emitting bodies mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting board provided separately from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards during the specific light emitting control are different from the pseudo-golden light emitting mode. It executes special light emission control to control
When it is detected that the state detecting means is in an abnormal state during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mount surface of the specific light emission board has not been completed. Also, the specific light emission control is terminated to control the abnormal light emission mode different from the pseudo-golden light emission mode, while the special light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emission substrate is terminated. It is possible to continue until the special light emission control is completed without
The light emitter mounted on the specific light emitting board is capable of multicolor light emission.
It is characterized by that.

With the above configuration, it is possible to make the light emitting body emit light more effectively, and it is possible to improve the light emitting effect.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a staging operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front and upper, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory diagram of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same portion as (a) in the conventional door frame. It is sectional drawing which shows. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end upward, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the staging operation unit in a state where is moved to an ascending position. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the staging operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detection bodies in the staging operation unit of the staging operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of a plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the staging operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of Wu. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the oo line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state where the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a transparent outer layer in (a) while leaving the inner layer as it is. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state of. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the staging operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of a tank rail in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which shows the part of the tank rail enlarged when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of another embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail or the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a perspective view as seen. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111A disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111A disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 111 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the cook line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. FIG. 11 is a bottom view showing a portion rearward of the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a sectional view. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 121 (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the board unit of FIG. 119. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. It is a front view of the game board which made the center accessory etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 129 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 129 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring routing from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the sooth line in (a), and (c) is (a). It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front by disassembling each of the main members. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and (b) is the portion of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. It is a side sectional view seen from the right side cut to the left and right with. (A) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and (c) is a disassembled gate member viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the 1st attacker unit and the 2nd attacker unit in FIG. 144. It is a front view of the game board which shows the arrangement of a magnetic sensor. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor that can detect the magnetic field lines from the magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor that cannot detect the magnetic field lines from the magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the detection range by a magnetic sensor by the perspective view, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body which cannot detect the magnetic field line from a magnet, (e). Is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a holding. It is an exploded view which shows the member in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. It is a front view of the back front staging unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front staging unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front staging unit in the back unit as seen from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back front staging unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and (c) is (a). It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in). It is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit of the back front staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. The back front left decorative unit is disassembled, and only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base are viewed from behind in an exploded perspective view. be. (A) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left decorative body shown in the state, and (c) is the front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front staging unit and the decorative substrate for light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit, and (b) is a guide in the back front staging unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light plate and the decorative substrate for making the decorative body of the back front lower staging unit emit light, and is shown from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which made the back front left decoration unit light-emitting decoration. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission composition of the 2nd picture of a light guide plate. It is a front view of the back front staging unit which shows the state that the 2nd picture of a light guide plate is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved to the descending position with the back rear upper first decorative part of the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper staging unit of the back unit facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back-back-up second decorative part is turned forward in the state where the back-back-up movable decorative body in the back-back-up staging unit is moved to the descending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back rear left movable decoration body and the back rear right movable decoration body in the back rear lower staging unit of the back unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back front lower middle decoration body in the back front lower middle production unit of the back front lower production unit of the back unit is raised. The state in which the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front left decoration unit 3120 are luminescently decorated. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of a back unit is light-emitting decoration. A game in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated, and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear lower staging unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of a board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of a back unit is light-emitting decoration. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is the front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. There is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and is a top view (b) in a state where a control ROM having a leadless type package is attached to the ROM socket. It is a P arrow view of FIG. 173 (a). It is sectional drawing of the through hole which shows the outline of the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the peripheral control board, and the through hole formed in a conversion board. There is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and a ROM socket having a leadless type package mounted on a conversion board, and is a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless type package attached to the ROM socket. .. It is schematic diagram (a)-(c) which shows the substrate management number of the peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the main control input circuit with an error detection function. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box which shows the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body, and the base body is slid and moved so as to cover the opening side of a cover body, and the cover body and the base body are sealed. It is a perspective view (b) of the main control board box sealed by a mechanism. It is a perspective view (a) seen from the front right oblique view of the setting key switch, is a perspective view (b) seen from the front left oblique view of the setting key switch, and is a top view (c) of the setting key switch. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of a main control board box. It is a figure (a) which shows the mounting surface (a surface) of the main control board on which a setting key switch is mounted, and is the soldering surface of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which a setting key switch is mounted. It is the figure (1) (b) which shows (the back surface), and is the figure (2) which shows the soldering surface (back surface) of the main control board which corresponds to the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which a setting key switch is mounted. ) (C). FIG. 186 is a continuation of FIGS. 186, which is a diagram (No. 3) (d) showing a mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and a solder surface (back surface) of the corresponding main control board, and is a setting key. It is a figure (4) (e) which shows the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which a switch is mounted, and the solder surface (back surface) of the corresponding main control board. It is a schematic diagram explaining the outline of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board explaining the outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole for an input signal wiring pattern which concerns on the mounting surface (the surface) of a main control board, and covers the land of the through hole. It is a schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of the X-ray line in the above, and is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of (b). It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole for an input signal wiring pattern which concerns on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and covers the land of the through hole. It is a schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of the X-ray in a), and is the schematic diagram (c) of the modification of (b). It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment which is formed on the mounting surface (surface) of a main control board, and covers the insulation film. It is a schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of the X-ray line in the above, and is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of (b). It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern which concerns on the 4th Embodiment which is formed on the mounting surface (surface) of a main control board, and covers the insulation film. It is a schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of the X-ray line in the above, and is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of (b). (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) shows a part of the game board of the second embodiment enlarged at the same part as (a). It is a front view. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front staging unit is light-emittingly decorated in (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 195 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is light-emittingly decorated. It is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate and the cell in the game board of the third embodiment disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a), and (c) is a front view of the function display unit of (a). It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the function display unit of FIG. 198 and looked at from the front. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198, and a player. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the function display unit of 3rd Embodiment, and a player. It is sectional drawing of the function display unit of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting of a magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing mounting of a magnetic sensor of (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory view of (b). It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment of the magnetic sensor by disassembling, and (d) is the exploded perspective view of the attachment of the magnetic sensor which shows by the holding member different from (c). (A) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the positioning hole for the second member in a cross section, and (b) is the first drawing for removing the decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the closed space is formed by the 2nd member behind the separation hole of 1 member in the cross section, (c) is the state which the decorative body of different thickness is attached in (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in which the separation hole of the 1st member for removing a decorative body is also used as the attachment hole of a decorative body in the cross section. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front with a decorative body attached to the first member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decorative body different from (a) attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st member from the front. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with the decorative body and a 1st member provided symmetrically, and (d) is the explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with a decorative body and a 1st member provided symmetrically with a shape different from (c). be. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a sectional view taken along the starter line in (a), and (c) is (a). ) And (c) are explanatory views showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) shows the relationship between the decorative body having a different form from (a) and the movable first member from the front. It is explanatory drawing, and (e) is the cross-sectional view cut by the cheat line in (d). It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 210. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 216. Following FIG. 217, it is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit symbol determination table (B), and a small hit symbol determination table (C). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process (step S235A). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the rainbow color production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a door frame. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of a rainbow-colored production. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of the rainbow color effect at the time of an abnormality. (A) is a front perspective view of the back-rear-upper movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the back-rear-upper movable decoration body cut along the line AA. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of the rainbow color effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of the rainbow color effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the rainbow color effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the rainbow color effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a golden production. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of a golden production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the low expectation golden production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of effect processing in a golden staging. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of light amount adjustment at the time of a golden production. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of volume adjustment at the time of a golden production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an information display.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the ascending position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the ascending position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is performed by an operation of a player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 may display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or display the back front effect unit 3100 and the back back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect or a movable effect by the upper effect unit 3200, the back back lower effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion through the flat plate-shaped hook piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook 653 on the lower side that penetrates the hook piece 25b back and forth. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface moves backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to communicate with each other through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) is resonated and amplified by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is slanted upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the effect sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extended flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca is gradually narrowed, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 after the handle mounted to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) that is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the front entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the ball passage port 101g for the upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 and the hooking member 116 are provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b which penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear pieces that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a rear piece on the left side mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a rear piece on the right side mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The crossguard member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the crossguard member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the crossguard member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

In this door frame lower hinge member 125, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the front, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state rotated by 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at the portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at the portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation in the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. In the second cam member 135, the lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about the respective rotation axes. is doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state where the shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

The cylinder lock 130 is in a state in which the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Under normal conditions, the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, as shown in FIG. 36 (a). In addition to being attached to the right portion, the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from a normal state in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction at an angle of 90 degrees, respectively, by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, since the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 is larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from a normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are mounted so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees are used. Since the rotation is transmitted by connecting with, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 regardless of the rotation position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132). The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked in a good manner.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 (rotation transmission member 133) with respect to the axis of the cylinder body 131. Since the shaft core of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the door.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 is connected to the first arm 136 and the portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees, the second arm 137 is connected to each other. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, so that the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape on the surface, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the one using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 is shown. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprocket and a chain, and a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a to which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b which opens to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are rear-covered 142 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a sphere holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 169) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and is on the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move downward of the operation transmission unit 242b. Along with this, the working plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner of the ball feeding port 142a in the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as manipulating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the ball passage 150a and the penetrating ball passage 150a and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b and.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the foul ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper plate 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disk-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and a handle 195 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted on the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative boards 184, one in the center, three with a certain interval in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am doing it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. When the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, a set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the front handle lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting decorated by appropriately causing the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decorative substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the handle 195 is being rotated, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. The handle cover decorative board 293 is provided with an annular board cover 294 that covers the decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylinder portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a toward the front. The inner circumference of the cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to penetrate through the middle wall portion 291b and the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (here, three) ridges 291d, which are projected inward from the ridge and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape having an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portions 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. The handle cover base 291 is provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction with an interval of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g, the U-shaped guide portion is formed. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening portion 291h has a length from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an annular base portion 292a extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portion 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 sets can be controlled by a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 has two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying electric power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short time. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a steering wheel front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outer side of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety that the hand (finger) is thrust into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side thereof. Can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 via the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch opening 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 through the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for driving the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily changed by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visually closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, the handle in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. It is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291). When the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player is entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is generated by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transferred to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , It is possible to surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, entertain the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By cooling the inside of the unit 290 and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 or The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blade portions 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and the damage to the handle unit 180 makes it unsuitable for players. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile, so that the handle of a conventional pachinko machine is used. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to make it easy to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating are provided in a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel unit can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile by the portion 195c, can be operated by hooking a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b, or can be operated so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as picking the inside and the outside of the 290 with a finger and capable of driving a variety of game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by the fingers so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form of extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) is supported by the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a is not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is driven, so that only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on the plate and projects forward, the dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and the ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It is equipped with.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the staging operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. The unit is provided with a relay board unit 330.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 can be projected upward from the staging operation unit cover unit 310, and is attached to the staging operation unit unit 350 provided with the staging operation unit 301 and the staging operation unit base 315 to perform the staging operation. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and the staging output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward output of the staging operation unit 350 by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the staging operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the staging operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the staging operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 73). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

In the state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50A is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view showing the main portion of the door frame by cutting the same portion as in (a). It is sectional drawing which shows the main part. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the staging operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d faces the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side of the lower plate 202 closes in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally to the left front. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the left side wall of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball After the removal, the game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower plate ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though there is a sufficient area in the lower plate 202 where the game ball B can be stored.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 has a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate lending operation unit 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-drilling unit (not shown) and a pre-dish ball pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-dish ball pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is equipped with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball ejection port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is inside the upper plate 201. The game ball B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in the middle portion of the upper plate main body 212 in the left-right direction, and a part of the staging operation unit 300 is mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the rented game ball B and return them, adjust the volume, and adjust the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has transparency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball removal button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and the character "ball" is given on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased. In this example, the volume can be set in 6 steps from the volume 1 to the volume 6 by pressing the volume control button 227.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount (luminance) of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The light amount adjusting button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjusting button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed. The brightness of the display screen of the staging display device 1600 may be adjusted in addition to the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. In this example, the light amount (brightness) can be set in 6 steps from the brightness 1 to the brightness 6 by pressing the light amount adjustment button 228.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the staging operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the staging display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. The loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light will be changed, and it will take time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open toward the front. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving port downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end of the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed in the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extraction portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The withdrawal button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact with the ball pulling member 143 can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively, separated from each other to the left and right. The left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

A dish left decorative unit 270 and a dish right decorative unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes a staging operation unit mounting portion to which the staging operation unit 300 is mounted. .. The staging operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has transparency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate left decorative body 271 can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has transparency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decoration 276 and has transparency. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish right decoration 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction thereof so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish right decorative body 276 can be luminescently decorated.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step raised on the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 side with the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger by using the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and bottom. be. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and FIG. 55 (b) is the effect operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the staging operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit in a state where the staging operation unit is in the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The staging operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the staging operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303. In the staging operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the staging operation unit 300.

The staging operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape. The operation unit base 315 to be attached and the effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 adjusts the staging operation unit 350 having the staging operation unit 301, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the staging operation unit 350, and the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350. It is equipped with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The staging operation unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move upward and backward from the upper surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The staging operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the staging operation unit 300 (around the staging operation unit 350) at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is equipped with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape having a diameter of 216 mm.

The staging operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

In the staging operation unit cover unit 310, at least the unit upper cover 312 has translucency, and can be light-emitting decorated by light emission of a plurality of LEDs of the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the staging operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper portion is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the staging operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The staging operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, on the main body 315a, a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the staging operation unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the substrate base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body unit 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the staging operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit top cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The staging operation unit 350 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The staging operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparently formed. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the staging operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the staging operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inside having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat plate-shaped downward extending piece 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detector 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal, so that the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed, and false detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be decorated with light emission in a state of being.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) with the upper surface or the side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparently formed. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a protrusion from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shaft 362 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper end of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the staging operation unit 301 (staging operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the staging operation unit 301. Further, the vibration of the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and a sensor IC and an output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In this embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the staging operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the staging operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The staging operation unit 350 is supported by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit top cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the staging operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the staging operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the staging operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the staging operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the player can be more entertained.

In the above, the button main body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower side may be difficult to see through the button main body 351 and may be opaque or translucent. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351 so that the appearance of the staging operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Staging operation unit elevating mechanism]
The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the staging operation unit unit 350. The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the staging operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns arranged symmetrically, the lower end of which is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper end of which extends upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. The guide shaft 362 and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of elevating springs 365 having a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therein and urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It has a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which are attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft projects upward. It is rotated by a spur gear-shaped driven gear 368 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368. A lift cam drive gear member 370, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the pressing detection sensor 373 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is equipped with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascending / descending of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 has an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by abutting the lower protrusion portion on the upper protrusion portion of the gear cover 372. can.

The decorative substrate 364 in the button has a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface thereof as full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and is notched at two facing points, and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. The second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and the third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (directing operation unit unit 350) urged upward by the elevating spring 365. Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protrusion portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the staging operation unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the staging operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the staging operation unit 350 lowers the staging operation unit 350 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 causes the button base 354. 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, the elevating cam member 371. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the staging operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The staging operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the staging operation unit unit 350 (the staging operation unit 301) with respect to the staging operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately emit light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button to illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55A). See). In this normal state, the staging operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the staging operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit top cover 312 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the staging operation unit 350 coincide with each other, and the staging operation unit cover unit 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the descending position), it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c Together, the button base 354 rises, and the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the press detection sensor 373, the press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the staging operation unit 350 is raised by the protrusion output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

When the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55B, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the third of the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, in the state where the staging operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire staging operation unit 350 (staging operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the staging operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in this raised position, the staging operation unit 350 causes the elevating spring 365. It moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the staging operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

To return the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the staging operation unit 350 to the lowering position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 was moved downward by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also applied. It becomes weak and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and the damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the staging operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is set to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 a clock in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved to the third cam 371e by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Will move upward along. Then, when the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the descending position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first start port 2002 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button main body 351 different (according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button main body 351 (staging operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protruding amount, and the variation in the protruding amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the staging operation unit 350 upward, so that the staging operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward (the momentum (pressing operation unit 303)). The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjustment screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery thereof, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjustment screw. It is provided with an elevating spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365.

The protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the base main body 361a and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b that penetrates up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The guide shaft 362 penetrates the elevating spring lower holding member 385 at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

The protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 moves the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 becomes smaller (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the staging operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward. And, the urging force for urging the staging operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350 can be adjusted upward by the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating spring lower holding member by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, further compression of the elevating spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects the staging operation unit 350 so as to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is selected according to the gaming state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the staging operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lift spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the elevating spring 365 at an early stage. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of staging operation unit]
Next, the operation of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative substrate of the effect operation unit, the decorative substrate outside the button, and the decorative substrate inside the button in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the staging operation unit is in the raised position. The staging operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a staging operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The staging operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state where the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (staging operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the staging operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical staging operation unit 300. This makes it easier for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the staging operation unit 301.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the staging operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the staging operation unit 300, the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (staging operation unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button are arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The staging operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emission effect such that light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 (staging operation unit 350) is in a descending position where the upper surface thereof coincides with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image urging the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effect, and the like. Then, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give an operation feeling to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted by the player. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image urging the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a voice, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 becomes the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 to reach the ascending position (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player's It can attract a lot of interest.

After that, the process shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit top cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed by the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player by the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the movement range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (staging operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 allows the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 projecting upward and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button body 351 (staging operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the fingers and the like of the player, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like suggests the player's expectation for the game. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong protrusion output by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect of performing a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the bump output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect such that the protruding button body 351 is touched may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contacted. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation) can be made difficult. The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button is raised and lowered. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the staging operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery drawn, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365. May be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the staging operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the staging operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present a production and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers and the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), and a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect it in multiple stages and utilize it for the production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and the game. By dividing the stage where the person's fingers etc. are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the staging operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the descending position, and the elevating spring lower holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56A, the staging operation unit 350 is set to the descending position and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type effects, it is possible to entertain the players with various effects and make the players bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the staging operation unit 300, an annular (combining two arcs) outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 for the staging operation unit is provided on the upper part of the spherical staging operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer periphery of the staging operation unit is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the staging operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the staging operation unit 350, a decorative board 364 in the button whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, there is a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the staging operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the staging operation unit unit of the staging operation unit. FIG. 60 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the contact detection sensor main body and a plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the staging operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the staging operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body are changed. Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the static electricity of the contact detector right 390R. The capacity is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation of a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , It is possible to further enjoy the player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 is operated. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like on any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact detection body 393 can detect the contact, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "a switch by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "a switch by another electronic circuit", and "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the staging operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the staging operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the staging operation unit 300. When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the staging operation unit 300 to project the staging operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the staging operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the staging operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the staging operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the staging operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the staging operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like, and the staging is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the staging operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's fingers or the like are detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the movement of the staging operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance is notified to the player, and the staging operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward only in the non-detection state of the second contact detection body 393b to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the staging operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is made into a star shape so as to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance by the contact detector 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the staging operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the staging operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the wooline in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame left side base 421 and the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed above and below at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward, and the upper and lower door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LEDs 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LEDs 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the two LEDs 423b). Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The reflector 424 on the left side has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in the shape of a dish that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing from the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in the shape of a dish that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing more is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the door frame left. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The tips of each of them are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. is doing.

The light guide member 427 on the left side has four light guide shafts 427a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a. , Formed from a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed from a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the upper side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed from a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position slightly rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the light guide member 427 on the left side, and the light guide member 428 on the left side. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly displayed. It can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be difficult to understand, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 429a can be difficult to understand. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the right side unit of a door frame from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame right side base 431 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed above and below at regular intervals are mounted on the front surface. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It is equipped with a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433. A right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate to the left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 with a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and is curved to the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the lower end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At the height of the decorative portion 441a) of the 441, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, that is, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LEDs 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the two LEDs 432b). Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems are controlled, which are 3 systems for 1 set on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c which is divided into 2 sets.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and an LED. Two power lines (one is the ground line) that supply power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and LEDs. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 sets, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 sets, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 sets, and 2 in the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the grouped groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LEDs 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame can control only up to 24 systems, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame has the third LED 433c which is divided into two sets. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (staging control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through hole 434a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a tubular holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. is doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed from a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the tip surface is on the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Formed from a transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the tip surface is on the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig.). 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located on the left side of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is luminescently decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig.). 71 (a)). When molding the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a on the right side right side of the door frame is formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame in a radial pattern. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is luminescently decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the color of the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 is decorated on the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, forming a stand. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, which makes it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that the other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431 to emit light. It is fitted into the decorative hole 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be decorated with light emission. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the door frame in a tsuitate shape can be light-emittingly decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the front side first of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration body 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being decorated with light emission. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independently decorated by light emission. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. It is provided with a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The decorative substrate 457 on the right side of the door frame top is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters, and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit which shows in the transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the effect operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the decorative board 432 on the upper right side, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the central decorative board 455 on the door frame top, the decorative board 456 on the left side of the door frame top, and the decorative board 457 on the right side of the door frame are arranged, these decorative boards are arranged. By appropriately emitting light from the LED of the door window 101a, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical production operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button main body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. This pachinko machine can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can enhance the appeal to the player. It is possible to make it easy to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the staging operation unit 301 of the staging operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical staging operation unit 300, the staging operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) is located. And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the staging operation unit 301 to see the entire staging operation unit 301, and the staging operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 is to entertain the player participation type production. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since the member is different from the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the transmittance of light, and the like, the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without incurring a cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which a circular or radial pattern is formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the decoration of the polka dot pattern is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are respectively transmitted. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decorations. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the appearance is changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmission rates on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be relatively clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be obscured through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is made invisible from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the view of the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be obscured by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern depending on the shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) can be made on the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since it is equipped with the third LED 433c of 433 and the inner layer 3a is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the door frame is right. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be decorated by light emission, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be shown beautifully. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the attention of the player. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multicolor molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, the player can be given a chance or change the driving operation (for example, "right-handed") due to the change in the decoration of the decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (view) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner of the front view to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b having the central hub portion 195a extending outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and the handle decorative board 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative boards 184, one in the center, three with a certain interval in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference and 2 on the lower side. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 72, these 12 LEDs 293a have two from the center on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 in the lower right and 2 in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

As described above, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can be used to illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative board 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative board 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided toward the front.

More specifically, on the dish left decorative board 273, four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for causing the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (The figure is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece and 3 pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 422c, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a are mounted. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by 21 systems by the LED driver 423c, and the first LED 423a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece and 3 pieces. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 third LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, and the decoration on the right side of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the front surfaces of each. The number of one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and the system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. This makes it easy to create data on the lighting pattern of the LED for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, LEDs 455a, LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 456 on the left side of the door frame top is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 457 on the right side of the door frame top is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player "haha" by the light emission effect that shines in a spot.

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative board 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative board 455 of the door frame top, the left decorative board of the door frame top. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated, or the light can be emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the light emitting effect of spot light emission is executed on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In FIG. 72, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is irradiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting brightly and brightly as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426a. Even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front end of the ridge that is the front end of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward (the front end that protrudes forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the light of the spot emission is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness can direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, high-brightness spot light emission can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) for guiding the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the staging operation unit is provided. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are spaced on the middle circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the staging operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322, 4 are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining 6 pieces are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining 6 pieces are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 have three sets of two on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 73. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a one-dot chain line, and the four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. The three are divided into three sets, one for each, and the nine on the outer circumference are divided into two sets, three each near both ends, for a total of seven sets. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 and 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates in the staging operation unit 301 and light emission such that the light is concentrated in the center are emitted. It is possible to show the player a production and a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 101a facing the game area 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of each of the left and right directions and the other so that the protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction are different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make a surface-like light emitting decoration (surface emission), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from the front end (front end surface) of the door frame. Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot emission) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescently decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame is luminescently decorated in a dot pattern on the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 can be luminescent and decorated in dots, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 432 on the side and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are separated from each other is symmetrical to each other, and in each case. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (at the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player various light emission effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emission effects with high effect, and the door window. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED422a, first LED423a, first LED432a, first LED433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are always turned on at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially emitting in dots, and it emits brightly in dots. The light-emitting effect can attract the player's attention strongly, and the light-emitting effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the right of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, the identification of various decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, using the door frame 3 as an example. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. A side upper decorative substrate 432, a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used for the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am doing it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board is reflected to the front side so that the decoration body and the like in the front can be brighter and decorated, and the front side (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material itself of the substrate may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), attaching a sticker, applying a paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the staging operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b) is provided on the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decorative substrate having a similar shape. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected to the front side on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped at the time of assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare as many decorative substrates as necessary, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unattractive by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative board, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Action effect of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired site is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more effect means (for example, movable decorative body, light emitting decorative body, effect display device, etc.) by the control means, more various effect can be given to the player by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detection body 393 is provided at each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detection body 393 provided at the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 while relatively reducing the number of channels that can be used for the production. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved to appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, a connection terminal is provided in advance on the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. Therefore, the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of handling the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the players touch the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected, so that the button main body can be detected via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the approach or contact of the player to the staging operation unit 350 is detected by using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the staging operation unit elevating and lowering are detected. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, the effect entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can function as a contact operation unit. Since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button main body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit unit 350 that is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of staging operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with a player-participatory staging, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button main body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in a state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the player can approach or contact the staging operation unit unit 350 (button main body 351) by executing the player participation type staging. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the staging operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be hard to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decorative substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is provided on the staging operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing operation, the contact detection body made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit It can be made that the 350 is not easily deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the staging operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the staging operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the staging operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player-participation-type production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same plate thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Further, in the staging operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching it, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the staging means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. It is provided so that a predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be achieved. It is possible to surely enjoy the effect output (via) through the operation unit unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the staging means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detection body 352 is in a state of covering the staging means, and the contact detection body 352 (staging operation unit unit 350) and the staging means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can easily provide a staging operation unit 350, a staging means, etc. that exert such an action effect at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Can be facilitated.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the staging operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. When the player's approach or contact with the staging operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the staging operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the staging operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the staging operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player and the player is in contact with the staging operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect not found in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the staging operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operation unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the staging operation unit 350 can be projected with various projecting outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of the staging by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to operate the staging. It is possible to entertain the production by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the protruding output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the staging operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the staging operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes the player strongly think that there may be something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous). It is possible to raise expectations for the situation and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 capable of a pressing operation, when a player participation type staging is executed, the player is made to press the staging operation unit 350 to perform a game. The player can participate in the person-participation-type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the staging operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) can press the staging unit 350 at any time. When the player-participation-type effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without guiding the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the staging operation unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the staging operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-mentioned effects can be more easily exerted.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the staging operation unit unit 350 is detected, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the staging operation unit 350 in multiple stages. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a more diverse effect to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can be brought into the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the staging operation unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the staging operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or makes contact. Since it is possible to capture the change in the capacitance of the detector 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the staging operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing / retreating (pressing) the staging operation unit 350 by the player, the staging operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button middle decorative board are used. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can be made to work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the staging operation unit 350, the staging is executed, so that the staging operation unit 350 can function like the staging operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory staging, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the staging operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of thresholds of the capacitance for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, the staging operation unit 350 that allows the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detection body 352 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the staging operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor main body 358 are provided. Therefore, in the player participation type production, an operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and an operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type staging, the player can be less likely to get bored by various operations using the staging operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the staging operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the staging operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, the staging operation unit 350 can be prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371 until the staging that moves the staging operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the staging operation unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, and the staging operation unit 350 makes the staging more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separated. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above-mentioned, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. When the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 are brought into close contact with each other, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is provided. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is irradiated with light by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light shining on the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is used as the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type staging is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or the fingers or the like are approached or brought into contact with each other. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different depending on the distance from the button outer decorative board 355, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed to show the player a wider variety of effects, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button are pressed. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, a game for the button body 351 or the surface member 396. The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be used as a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by thickening the vapor deposition film to have a metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and due to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by an effect presenting means such as a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a button inner decorative substrate 364, a protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect display device 1600. A predetermined contact detection body 395 or the like (including a contact detection body 352, a contact detection body left 390L, a contact detection body right 390R, a contact detection body 393, a contact detection body 397, etc.) is provided with design. Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the above, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can have a strong impact on the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351) can be strongly interested. It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 or the like that detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, the effect is presented depending on the player at first glance. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like is used. The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like comes into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 or the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 or the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed because it is easy to clean.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil stamping is used, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing it at an early stage by touching it, and it is possible to improve the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes the player to feel uncomfortable, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. The contact detector 395 and the like can be formed by the corresponding material.

Further, when the electrostatic capacity of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 can be changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or touches the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, and the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives an operation feeling. Can be added, and the operation using the button main body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to operate the contact detector 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry into the detection area of a finger or the like, the game is played through the button main body 351 by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative board 355 outside the button and a plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative board 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that irradiates the person with light, effect that vibrates the player's fingers etc. that are in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and protrusions upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. At this time, the player is given effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351. Therefore, the effect can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, in a state where the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and the button body 351 is pressed downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detection body The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the button main body 351 is provided by the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine can be used. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the staging operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily give effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the range of the height of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting unit 501c and a game board restricting unit 501d that projects upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board mounting unit 501c and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. The door frame 3 can be smoothly closed by being guided in the closing direction.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also enters the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the main body frame 4). It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 91).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at the right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball ejection passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. Main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to form a narrower gap from each other to the rear and front, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form the side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-extracting movable piece 592 can move to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b due to the contact force, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 555. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is communicated with the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full) by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!"), And the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until it becomes.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball ejection passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending up and down. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, the speaker unit 620a is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 provides a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board 1310 or the like of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the vertically extending axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the lock unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 555, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at the position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 555. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side is open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. This overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the same direction.

In the front view of the tank rail 553, the right end side (upstream side) communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lower toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions become one line toward the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By distributing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable staging unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the detour portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j having a height lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with the shape of the front view extending vertically. It is extended to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction, and are outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes from the slanted rear end so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that has submerged under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has the right end side in the front view from the position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, and the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the anteroposterior direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d. From there, it is formed in a shape extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction parallel to the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending in the lateral direction and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 555 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )is doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped rearward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backwards.

The external terminal board 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 555 in the state of being assembled on the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102. The left corner portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to being supplied from the island facility, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height among the upper edge of the outer circumference. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m beyond the overflow portion 552f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B in the detour passage 552g rolls). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be in a line with respect to the width direction as the plurality of game balls B are directed toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552 g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed to the rear and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment of a tank rail or the like]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of another embodiment. FIG. 107 (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front, (c). Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in a cross section. In the tank rail 555A and the like of another embodiment, in addition to the tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A are the tank rail 555, the first of the above-described embodiments. It is different from the one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 555c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the center of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end side extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 555A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A or the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (shown by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 555A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B abuts on the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be fully exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the sphere rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the distribution speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A are used. Place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which the electric wires are connected, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of a tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), a terminal board, or the like.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of the Board Unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. 111 (a) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is the substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the coffee line in (a), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the cake line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 111A on the rear side of the door frame.

The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-mentioned substrate unit 620, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out ball passage 663 and the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guide unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and guides it to the right in front view. The game ball B guided by the ball ejection guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball ejection discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open forward. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging and the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, the downward guiding section 663c that guides the gaming ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying section 663b downward, and the lower guiding section 663c. It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d that discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharging receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball ejection receiving section 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guide portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranking portion of the downward guide portion 663c. Since the portion of the downward guide portion 663c that is bent in a crank shape is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 115 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately abuts on the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving unit 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to eject the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide unit 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 make it possible to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning prize. The number of game balls B that have been accepted and discharged from the game board 5 by the winning openings such as the opening 2005 and the winning opening 2006, and without being accepted by any winning opening after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and is the number of game balls B (number of shot balls) driven into the game area 5a. be.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the playing state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is "payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. Since the game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the game. Since the person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example,). It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the space for the game board 5 to detect the ejected game ball B is secured. By providing a staging device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is meandering is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball ejection / discharging passage 665, whereby the game ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that it is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the ejected game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to be scattered from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since the game ball B driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 only by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The simple (simple) configuration can be made, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion (out receiving portion, bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Ball Discharge in a Substrate Unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts on the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket,) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) from the front of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the out-ball passage 663 is caused by electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out ball rectifying portion 663b in the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and detects the main body portion 668a whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the main body portion 668a from the base end side and elastically deformable. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the outer side opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened on the lower surface of the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object (for example, the outer frame 2) shown by the alternate long and short dash line. There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside or inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that has been interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). It is largely applied to the end side of the base unit 660), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 664 is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 119 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 121 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a sectional view cut along a coco line in (a), and (c) is a processor line in (a). It is a cut sectional view, and FIG. 122 is a sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 121 (a).

FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 disassembled and viewed from the rear. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned board unit 620 and the above-mentioned board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. The same components as those of the board unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A described above. The board unit 700 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball b can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and the game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects b, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 in the game board 5 circulates in the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 has a general prize. The game ball b received in the opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. That is, the out ball is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, fraudulent acts are performed against the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 of the game board 5. If this is done, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, and it is possible to detect fraudulent acts against the winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided between the rear base 712 and the front base 711 and the rear base 712, which have a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and have a ball ejection passage 705. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 accommodated therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball-extracting passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side of the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides the game ball B backward, and then discharges the game ball B downward, and the second of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens toward the front. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guidance unit 712a and the second discharge guidance unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide unit 712a and the second discharge guide unit 712b is open to the rear of the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located on the left side of the front base 711's elimination port 711b, and are on the left. They are arranged in order from the right to the right. The outlet of the ball ejection passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guidance unit 712a and the second discharge guidance unit 712b (FIG. 120 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball ejection passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to be lowered from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to be lowered from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located at a portion to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion 713j extending to the left from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b of the lower wall portion upper 713j. The middle wall portion 713k that is exposed, the eaves portion 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf portion 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m. The lower portion between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f in the lower wall portion lower 713n is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the upper wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion 713n back and forth.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. It has a notch 713q of. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the substrate unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor accommodating portion and 713t after the sensor accommodating portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the portions between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cable extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extends to the left from the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t to the left of the middle wall portion 713k. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward and vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so that the left end side becomes narrower toward the left so that one game ball B can pass through. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the eliminating port 711b, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the eliminating opening 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten by the tool. You can eliminate the ball jam by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Is penetrated from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf portion 713f (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool is further inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 701). There is a risk that the game board 5 provided above may be cheated by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern not only in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d provided with the notch portion 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extended downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip The movement can be prevented and further insertion of fraudulent tools can be prevented (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from performing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities.

In the parts on the right side of the middle wall part 713k in the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower wall on the lower side and the left and right sides thereof are not provided with the notch part 713q. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf portion 713j and the middle wall portion 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout portion 713q of the corresponding portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the unauthorized tool is not inserted from below. No cheating is done through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notched portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downwardly passed through the notch portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see Figure 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor accommodating portion 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are collected in the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the front 713s of the sensor accommodating portion and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating portion by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It protrudes to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left from the middle wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the middle wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a to be locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open in a state in which the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward and made vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 711b) from the elimination port 711b. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is a contact-risk object (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height (height shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 122) of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43. Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The security cover 714 is in contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the security object may come into contact from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the dangerous contact object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the dangerous contact object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712a. (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guide unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), a part of the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 is formed from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball b that has fallen to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, it is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 in order to remove the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is handed over to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of notched portions 713q, dust is passed through the notched portions 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Further, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball is clogged with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch portion 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e, and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be used from the clearing port 711b to the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the security cover 714 is to be closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructing rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of unauthorized tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from performing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guiding section 712a and the second discharging guiding section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure space for the configuration, and by providing a staging device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the count number of the safe balls in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the game. Since the person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball ejection passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is distributed by the out ball and the second ball path 702 is distributed by the safe ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may be distributed through the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball regardless of the safe ball and the out ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one that opens and closes the elimination port 711b by rotating the security cover 714 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through any of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 137. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. .. FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory view of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area in which the game ball is distributed and the obstacle nail.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate 2003 that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. , The second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In the game board 5, the game ball B is used in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the like in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the game board holder 1200, and is played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169 and the like) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the front unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And, further equipped.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the staging display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large winning opening sensor 2402, an accessory winning opening sensor 2601, V. The purpose is to relay the connection with the winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the gaming ball B driven into the gaming area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the gaming area. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate 2003, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at a further different position in the game area 5a. A game to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B being accepted by the gate 2003. To the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 where the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the ball B. The game ball B is accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B. It is provided with a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 in which an opportunity for acceptance is given to B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021. It includes a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. ..

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have an accessory winning opening 2006. A gate having a side right middle unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. It is provided with a member 2800.

The first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a large prize opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. And have. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a bonus winning slot sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the bonus winning slot 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the staging display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 detects the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. After being accepted by the first start port sensor 3002, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted by the winning opening 2006, and the winning opening 2006. It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

Further, the back unit 3000 has a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. It is provided with a V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010 and a back back upper effect provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It includes a unit 3200 and a back-back-lower effect unit 3300 provided at the lower part in the back box 3010 below the back-back-up effect unit.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, FIG. 139 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line of the line in (a), and FIG. 139 (c) is (c). It is an exploded perspective view which a) was disassembled for each main member and was seen from the front.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the front component 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range from the abutment portion 1006 in the upper right corner of the front view along the right rail 1005, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. The spec sticker sticking part 1021 to which the spec sticker 1020 is stuck, the insertion pin 1022 for positioning the abutting part 1006 protruding from the rear of the spec sticker sticking part 1021 in a columnar shape, and the center of the insertion pin 1022. It is provided with a separation hole 1023 that penetrates back and forth in the above.

The spec sticker affixing portion 1021 is formed to be one size larger than the outer shape of the spec seal 1020, and is deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the spec seal 1020 and is recessed rearward (FIG. 139). See (b)). In the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, the horizontally extending portion at the lower end and the straight portion extending vertically from the right end of the portion to the upper end serve as a contact surface for affixing the spec seal 1020. It is set.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker affixing portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The abutment portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates from the front side to the rear side of the front component 1000. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends back and forth with a constant inner diameter. The separation hole 1023 is closed on the front side by the spec seal 1020 attached to the spec sticker affixing portion 1021 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is closed on the rear side by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is provided at a position near the end edge of the spec seal sticking portion 1021 (spec seal 1020).

The separation hole 1023 of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) for separation inserted into the separation hole 1023 becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the spec seal 1020. This is because if the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1023 in the spec seal 1020, and the appearance of the spec seal 1020 may be deteriorated.

According to the front component 1000 of the present embodiment, when the spec seal 1020 cannot be correctly attached to the spec seal affixing portion 1021 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the rear of the front component 1000. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1023 and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear to the front with the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the spec seal 1020 can be removed so as to be rolled forward, and the rolled portion can be removed by the operator. The spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker sticking portion 1021 by pulling, and the spec sticker 1020 can be reattached.

Further, with the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the spec seal 1020 is pressed from the rear by the tip of the rod-shaped member. Can be easily removed from the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, so that the replacement work of the spec sticker 1020 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated from each other, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal affixing portion 1021 by using the separation hole 1023, so that the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the constituent parts of the above, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front by attaching the spec seal 1020 to the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1023 and the separation hole for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of 1023, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 assembled on the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec seal 1020 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, it is necessary to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the spec seal 1020 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) does so. Since it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned rearward insertion (intrusion), it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, and that an illegal act is performed. In addition to being able to prevent fraudulent tools from penetrating the spec seal 1020, traces remain on the spec seal 1020, which makes it possible to hesitate to execute fraudulent activities and provide a pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent activities. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole is provided in the part where the sticker is affixed such as the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012. It may be provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge by a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating the front and rear and a short elongated hole. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions, which are formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 138, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through port 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each projecting forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It comprises two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can play the game. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed in the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) that controls the game content, payout of the game ball B, and a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 133) that can set the game performance. It includes a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not they have been tampered with). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2601. It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value. It is equipped with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the center line between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the center line between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder to be rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a pressing operation unit is provided above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged therein.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion slot, the other equipment is arranged in a row facing the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions completely different from the function of turning on the setting key and the function of turning on the decision key can be realized only by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the decision key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are via openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, there is a "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch. As a wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is kept away from each other (separated from each other). At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. (That is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern in which the signal of (1) is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f is formed. The wiring pattern with which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the setting value will be briefly described, and then the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, as the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and the operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is used. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the setting key is turned ON. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the opening work, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value increases by 1 and reaches the maximum value of the set value 6, the value returns to the initial value of the set value 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, simply turn off the setting key switch 1311a to determine the setting value and remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder. It becomes possible to improve workability.

A person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310 g, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the setting value. To complete.

When confirming the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is directed clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power of 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). It is necessary that the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is inserted into the switch, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and a normal probability from the time of change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, and a jackpot symbol. The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition judgment table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the transition decision from the probability change time to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. It is not possible to do this), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game ball B recovered by the out port 1008 is detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169 and the like), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position to the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. The enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the opening and the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Detection from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "variation example (3) of decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later The firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the determination key is determined based on these firing reference pulses. It may be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the emission reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a range-finding sensor capable of performing is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input. It may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the determination key is turned ON. While it can be determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "variation example (5) of the determination key"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the input pulse signal to turn on the setting key and the decision key. It is possible to determine which of the information is transmitted, which is the information of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a may be described as "a modification of the determination key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the decision key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU1310a, the main control MPU1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the decision key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. With a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error canceling switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker with the name of each button printed is affixed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation unit of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the press operation unit). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error canceling switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit. A different type of switch may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not routed close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When it is done, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off 1311a. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder, turn OFF, and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise.) Second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out in the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. Can be done. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention portion covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not routed close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'may be used (a mode of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off 1311a. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise.) Second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port input of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that monitors and creates a command in the process, sends the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and receives this command. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described in "Modification example (13) of the decision key." May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The input may be determined by the main control MPU 1310a based on these detection signals whether or not the determination key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has been transmitted to the main control board 1310 and received this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (16)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the main body frame 4 is still open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In addition to preparing for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch). 2 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. The enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the wire or the like cannot invade through the "gap" formed in the opening and the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the external shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (20)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). 3 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2003 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2801, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2401, large winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), main body frame 4 The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the out sensor 664 of the above is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be used as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2003 in order to turn on the decision key, or various winning openings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The operation of the movable body (feature) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (feature) is controlled based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be used as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (role). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 and enter various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5. When a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity to make a ball is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (25)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves for a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio wave sensors for detecting fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing the various sensors of the various winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). The mode of the unit (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is different. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by invading a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, and when the cover body is configured to be open or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is relative to the base body. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open / close switch can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as “a modification of the determination key (28)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern in which the key ON signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting switching button 1311b. As a wiring pattern to which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is formed. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control board 1310. (Wiring pattern in which the signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the signal of OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so that the wiring pattern and the wiring pattern to be transmitted are not close to each other (separated from each other), but the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Regarding the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , The connector of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the MSCN (connection between boards), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. The other connector provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of wiring the wiring pattern may be described as "variation example (29) of the determination key").

Further, from the above-mentioned modified examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an embodiment selected and combined as appropriate may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of Probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, a game specification such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (degree of advantage) exists only in a single setting value in advance and the setting does not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not necessary at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since it is not necessary to use it at all, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be assigned as the following contents by design change by the software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of the object), lighting of the light emitter)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of the movable body (role)" is assigned and set as the setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (role) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port)") is assigned, and "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the setting value 6. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. (Characteristics) can be operated and the light emitter can be turned on. Depending on the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the setting mode for changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is "a modification example by a common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to give a variation to the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4. 4 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama style effect" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the demo effect setting that specifies "historical drama style effect, movable body (character)" as the setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "modification example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume control button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By pressing the volume control button 227, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 for specifying "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved to the end where the volume control button 227 is moved in the direction of lowering the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume). When it is completed and adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is that the volume control button 227 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume) and moved to the end of the maximum volume side. When it is completed and adjusted to the maximum side volume, it may be the maximum volume or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume control button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of the error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, are not dependent) by operating the volume control button 227 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a pachinko machine that emits an error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is played. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk in the hall to notice it, it may be jarring to a player playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness can be increased or decreased from the default brightness for the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 3. A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". be). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant to turn on, blink, and set the gradation point of the illuminant. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the lamp changes from the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low and the lamp can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) to the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant to turn on, blink, and make a gradation point of the illuminant. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) due to the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). The embodiment may be described as "modification example (8) due to common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification example (30).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is set to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for specific areas, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the above-mentioned predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is used. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (the case may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one of the main control side timer interrupt processes described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt permission when the modification of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (occurrence of momentary power failure). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt enable setting or the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B that has been counted is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modification of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. At the same time, when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification (30).

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the modification examples (1) to (8) by the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 129 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and two normal lottery results drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2003. It includes a normal symbol display consisting of LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132, 136 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The staging display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixed piece 1601 protruding from the left side surface to the left and two right fixed pieces 1602 protruding from the right side surface to the right. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the right inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two right fixed pieces 1602 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the left fixed piece 1601 side forward, insert the left fixed piece 1601 into the opening of the lock mechanism, and move the lock mechanism upward in the rear view. By sliding it, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. FIG. 145 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the portions of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and the gate 2003, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A game to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003. The large winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the ball B, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided at different positions. A prize winning opening 2006 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. And the V winning opening 2007, which gives an opportunity to accept the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The grand prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located behind the game panel 1100 at a height between the winning combination winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004.

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit 2300, which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The first, which is provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has the second start port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out port 2021. It includes an attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have an accessory winning opening 2006. A gate having a side right middle unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. It is provided with a member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the staging unit 3160.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends to the left of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Can be handed over to.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. .. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 144 and the like).

In the first attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the big winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the large winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a large prize opening sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. It includes 2402 and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169 and the like). Two large winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery result in which the second starting port door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 and the second starting port door 2411 are drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003. The start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the above, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 that accepts the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first shelf portion 2421 extending to the left from the vicinity of the upper right corner and a first shelf portion 2421 extending from the left end to the left side of the first shelf portion 2421 in the front view. It is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2421 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421. The second shelf portion 2422 forming the second starting port 2004 between the two, and the second shelf portion 2422 to the left of the left end and lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B. The third shelf 2423, which extends shorter than the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are spaced from the left end to the left by a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and the third shelf. It has a fourth shelf portion 2424, which extends from a position lower than the portion 2423 so as to be lower to the left and forms a large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2423.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2421 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400. The first shelf portion 2421, the second shelf portion 2422, and the third shelf portion 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2421 and the like. ing.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425 vertically extending downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421. The second standing wall portion 2426 extending to the same height as the second shelf portion 2426, the third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and the third shelf. The fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the portion 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400, the fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, and the fourth shelf. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the portion 2424, and a seventh vertical wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424.

The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2430 extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424 and then lower to the right. Above, further down, it extends to the bottom of the first attacker unit 2400. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is a first horizontal wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2425, the second standing wall portion 2426, and the third standing wall portion 2427, and the right side of the first attacker unit 2400. From a position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, the fourth standing wall portion on the left side is tilted so as to be lowered to the left with a space between the first side wall portion 2432 and the game ball B. It has a second side wall portion 2433, which is inclined so as to be higher toward the middle of 2428. The second lateral wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is located at the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430, respectively, from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2434 extending to the vicinity and a partition portion 2435 extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2434 to each other. There is.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 extends stepwise along the upper side so as to be lowered to the left, and the space between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 is such that the game ball B can be distributed. It has an upper shelf portion 2436 provided so as to be open. The right end of the upper shelf 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2421, and the left end is slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424. Further, the upper shelf portion 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 forms the space in the space where the game ball B between the upper shelf portion 2436 and the large winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the left. A plurality of abutment portions having a triangular shape in a plan view project into the space so as to be staggered in the left-right direction from the front wall and the rear wall. These plurality of contact portions distribute the game ball B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the large winning opening 2005 is in the closed state.

The second starting port door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward due to the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protruding due to the urging force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. There is. Further, in the state where the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves backward by the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retreating against the urging force of the spring, and the second starting port door 2411 is started. The mouth 2004 is open.

When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The big prize opening door 2413 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by advancing and retreating the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 in the front-rear direction. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves forward due to the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protruding due to the urging force of the spring, and closes the large winning opening 2005. Further, in the state where the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves backward by the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 retreating against the urging force of the spring, and opens the large winning opening 2005. is doing.

When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 projects forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the big prize opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the game ball B cannot be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. That is, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421 in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2421, and the upper surface of the second start door 2411 and the first After rolling the second shelf portion 2422, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the big prize opening door 2413 according to the momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. When the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422 abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 May enter.

At this time, the game balls B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 are provided in a space between the upper shelf portion 2436 and the large winning opening 2005. The contact portions are alternately contacted, and the vehicle rolls to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the grand prize opening door 2413 is released from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2421, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425 and falls near the right end of the second side wall portion 2433, and falls to the vicinity of the right end of the second side wall portion 2433. Due to the inclination of the portion 2433, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2021. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423, the game ball B passes between the third standing wall portion 2427 and the fourth standing wall portion 2428 and of the second horizontal wall portion 2433. It falls near the left end and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2433 to enter the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and the fifth. It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B distributed on the right side of the first shelf portion 2421 and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 are both second. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2021, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, the plunger is turned on against the urging force of the spring. It retracts and the second starting door 2411 moves backward. Then, when the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. That is, the second starting port 2004 is in the open state.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427 and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it is discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the third discharge passage 3183 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below from the third discharge passage 3183.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts against the urging force of the spring, and the large winning opening door 2413 moves backward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 to the rear, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. That is, the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430, and then partitions from the fifth standing wall portion 2429. After being detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 through the section 2435 or between the sixth vertical wall section 2430 and the partition section 2435, it is placed on the third lateral wall section 2434. It falls and is discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 and discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is handed over to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. , Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below from the fourth discharge passage 3184.

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2435, and each is detected by a different large winning opening sensor 2402. Since the game ball B is released backward after the game is released, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large winning opening sensor 2402, and a large number of game balls B can be released in a short time. Can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 (b) is a separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. It is a side sectional view seen from the right side by cutting left and right at the site of. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end portion protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 having a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from entering the rear (back unit 3000) through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so as to be accessible at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The warp outlet 2512, which is made capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed toward the front. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513a) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the first guide passage 2521. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center and a second guide passage 2522. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 projects to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. In this lower right guide passage 2530, the entrance opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, a second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700, and a gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

More specifically, the center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, and the like, and a lower right guide passage 2530. A transparent flat plate-shaped front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the aisle, and a lower right guide passage decoration attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and printed with a predetermined decoration. With a seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 forms a part of the flange portion 2502 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a guide passage flange portion 2540a extending to the right in a flat plate shape and a peripheral wall portion 2501 along the lower side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. The guide passage wall 2540b extending to the right from the portion of the outer peripheral surface in front of the flange portion 2502 so as to be lower than the guide passage flange portion 2540a, and the right end near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. After extending vertically along the side and extending forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, the flat plate-shaped standing wall portion 2540c and the lower end side of the standing wall portion 2540c extend diagonally to the lower left. It has a left guide portion 2540d that extends diagonally to the lower right and bends. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B, which has flowed down from above to the guide passage wall 2540b, to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then causes the game ball B to flow downward from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged diagonally to the lower left by the left guide portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 constitutes most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange portion 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the standing wall portion 2540c, and the left guide portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right end side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, and the upper end side is above the upper end side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. The lower end side is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 includes a sticking recess 2531a that is recessed from the front to the rear along the outer peripheral shape, and a separation hole 2531b that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the sticking recess 2531a that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in the front view. It has a plurality of mounting bosses 2531c for mounting on the center base plate 2540, which protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface.

The sticking recess 2531a is recessed rearward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 (see FIG. 141 (b)). In the sticking recess 2531a, the portion on the left end side and the portion on the upper end side near the left end side are set as a contact surface for sticking the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole having a circular inner shape. When the separation hole 2531b is assembled into the center accessory 2500, the front side is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 attached to the attachment recess 2531a, and the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540. The rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2531b of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and makes it impossible to sufficiently press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. This is because if the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 may be deteriorated. Because.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, when the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the front member A rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear to the front by the tip thereof so that the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be rolled forward. The lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be reattached.

Further, with the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. Since the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a, the replacement work of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated from each other, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a by using the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front by attaching the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 to the attachment recess 2531a, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2531b and to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2531b.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, it is separated by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is attached. Since the hole 2531b is closed from the rear and does not penetrate the hole that passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the hole in the game board 5. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being inserted into the inside or the part where the game ball B is distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and inserted into the separation hole 2531b. Since the guide passage wall 2540b can prevent further rearward insertion (invasion), an unauthorized tool invades the inside of the game board 5 or the part where the game ball B is distributed from the front through the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities, and the fraudulent tool pierces the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 to leave a trace on the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532. It is possible to hesitate to execute the above, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent acts.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory in the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge of 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The decoration of the back unit 3000 can be made easier to see.

Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support unit 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further improved as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the staging display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

In the above embodiment, the front member 2531 is provided with one separation hole 2531b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole 2531b is provided at a portion corresponding to the guide passage wall 2540b in the front view. You may provide more than one.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion inside the bent left guide portion 2540d in the center base plate 2540 (a portion on the right side in the front view). When the separation hole 2531b is provided in the relevant portion, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, in this case, even if the illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the front, the tip of the illegal tool is pushed by the left guide portion 2540d to the game ball in the lower right guide passage 2530 or the like. It is possible to prevent B from entering the area where it is distributed. Further, in this case, since the right side of the left guide portion 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, a separation hole is provided from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled. A tool can be inserted into 2531b and the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with an accessory winning opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a bonus winning slot sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the bonus winning slot 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects an illegal magnetism acting near the bonus winning slot 2006 (Fig.). 146) and. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 is for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the accessory winning opening door 2611 for closing the accessory winning opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable. A transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the bonus winning opening solenoid 2612 and the bonus winning opening door 2611 to move the bonus winning opening door 2611, and the game accepted in the bonus winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the sphere B and discharges it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the character winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the character winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. 2611 is provided.

The accessory winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a lower side that bulges to the left from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called wing shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the door. The accessory winning opening door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link pin protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. (The figure is omitted). The lower rotation shaft of the accessory winning opening door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 and a link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so as to be slidable. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the accessory winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 are located. A space in which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the right side and the right side of the above. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the bonus winning port solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the accessory winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed by the accessory winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the prize winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the winning combination When the prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the accessory winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the accessory winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the accessory winning opening door 2611 is tilted to be low. It will be in the state of. That is, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the accessory winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is handed over to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front staging unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is either V winning opening 2007 or losing opening 2008. After being sorted into crabs, it is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 for guiding the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear and a second guide passage B for guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear. It has a two-guide passage 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, which extends backward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further to the rear. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2022 to the lower side than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends backward. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire area (see FIG. 144).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back. It can be handed over to the first back guidance passage 3156 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back front lower effect unit 3160. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be handed over to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of 3000. The game ball B delivered to the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back front lower effect unit 3160.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, FIG. 142 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (c) shows the gate member disassembled from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 in which a lottery for a normal lottery result is performed to open and close the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2003. ,have. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 to the lower left. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. The sphere B forms a gap through which it can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

Further elaborating the gate member 2800, the gate member 2800 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and holds the gate sensor 2801, and the gate body 2810 is attached to the front surface of the gate body 2810 and is predetermined. It has a gate seal 2811 on which the decoration is printed. The gate body 2810 is transparently formed.

The gate main body 2810 is provided in a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2810a that is long to the left and right, a sticking recess 2810b that is substantially rectangular and recessed rearward on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and an upper left corner of the sticking recess 2810b. An erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c, a separation hole 2810d penetrating the front plate portion 2810a back and forth near the right end of the sticking recess 2810b, and a pair of arm portions extending rearward from both left and right ends of the front plate portion 2810a. It includes a 2810e and a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2810f that extends outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the pair of arm portions 2810e and is connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e facing each other are far apart from each other by a diameter larger than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

Further, the gate main body 2810 is recessed at a constant height in the vertical direction between the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and the facing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e, and the accommodation groove 2810g for accommodating the gate sensor 2801g. And the rear extending portion 2810h extending rearward so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the accommodating groove 2810g from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e, and the rear extending portion 2810e from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e. It is provided with a locking portion 2810i for locking the gate sensor 2801 that extends rearward from 2810h and has a rear end bent to the left and is accommodated in the accommodating groove 2810g.

Further, the gate body 2810 is provided with a protrusion 2810j protruding into the accommodating groove 2810g at the intersection of the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The sticking recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143 (b)). The erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed in a C chamfer shape that is larger than the chamfering of other corners in the sticking recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (attachment recess 2810b) has a long rectangular shape to the left and right, it is difficult to understand the vertical orientation of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be attached upside down. However, the mis-sticking prevention portion 2810c can specify the sticking direction of the gate seal 2811, and the gate seal 2811 is in the normal direction (the direction in which the notch 2811a of the Kate-seal 2811 coincides with the mis-sticking prevention portion 2810c). Can be pasted. When the gate seal 2811 is turned upside down and is to be attached to the attachment recess 2810b, a part of the gate seal 2811 protrudes from the attachment recess 2810b due to the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c, and the gate is directed to the operator. It is possible to notice the erroneous attachment of the sticker 2811.

In the sticking recess 2810b, a portion on the left end side and an oblique portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c are set as a contact surface for sticking the gate seal 2811. As a result, it is possible to secure a clearance for attaching the gate seal 2811 not only in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction of the diagonally extending portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the effective clearance directions when pasting the gate seal 2811 are three directions, that is, the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction, which facilitates the pasting work (see FIG. 207 (a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole extending vertically. When the separation hole 2810d is assembled in the Kate member 2800, the front side is closed by the gate seal 2811 attached to the attachment recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g. It is closed and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2810d of the present embodiment has a long side and a short side in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the gate seal 2811. This is because if the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the gate seal 2811, and the appearance of the gate seal 2811 may be deteriorated.

The inner peripheral surface on the right side of the separation hole 2810d is on the same surface as the bottom surface (the surface facing left) of the accommodating groove 2810 g formed in the arm portion 2810e on the right side. Further, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is formed smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is formed with respect to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. Is shortly protruding to the left.

In addition to the function of removing the gate seal 2811 described later, the separation hole 2810d is inserted with a core for forming the rear end of the locking portion 2810i which becomes an under part when the gate body 2810 is injection-molded. It can also function as an insertion hole, facilitating injection molding of the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is formed slightly longer in the left-right direction with respect to a shape offset inward by a certain distance from the outer shape of the sticking recess 2810b. In the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, a C-chamfered notch 2811a corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed, and the normal sticking direction (here, the vertical direction) with respect to the sticking recess 2810b can be known. It has become like. The entire back surface of the gate seal 2811 is a glue surface having adhesive strength.

According to the gate member 2800 of the present embodiment, when the gate seal 2811 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the gate body 2810 (front plate portion) By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of 2810a) and pressing the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be removed so as to be rolled forward. The gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the gate seal 2811 can be reattached.

Further, with the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof to attach the gate seal 2811. Since it can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, it is possible to easily replace the gate seal 2811 when the model is changed.

Further, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated from each other, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2810b by using the separation hole 2810d, which is a component of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, it is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2810d can be suppressed, and the separation hole 2810d can be prevented from being deteriorated by the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2810d.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810 g of the gate main body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Unlike conventional pachinko machines, it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side, so a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole in the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted into the machine, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being carried out.

Further, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the gate seal 2811 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d is further closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) into the rear of the game board, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, which is illegal. It is possible to prevent the act from being performed, and since the illegal tool penetrates the gate seal 2811 and leaves a trace on the gate seal 2811, it is possible to hesitate to execute the illegal act, and the deterrent to the illegal act is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is provided in the sticking recess 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is stuck, if the gate seal 2811 is to be stuck upside down, the gate seal 2811 can be stuck correctly. It can be eliminated, the operator can be made aware of the incorrect sticking of the gate seal 2811, and the gate sticker 2811 can be stuck in the normal orientation, and the gate sticker 2811 can be stuck upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped as it is attached.

Further, in the gate main body 2810, since the protrusion 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g, when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodation groove 2810g from the rear in a direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, The front surface of the gate sensor 2801 abuts on the protrusion 2810j before abuting on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, so that the locking portion 2810i cannot be locked on the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. That is, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodating groove 2810 g in the direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 coincide with each other, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801 and the gate is gated. Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong direction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect related to the gate sensor 2801.

Further, by accommodating the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the accommodating groove 2810 g of the gate main body 2810 and locking the locking portion 2810i to the gate sensor 2801, the accommodating groove 2810 g, the locking portion 2810i, and the pasting recess 2810b are rearranged. Depending on the side, the movement of the gate sensor 2801 in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction can be restricted and positioned, and the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) can be easily assembled on the pachinko machine 1. The cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the front portion of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate main body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is opened from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. It will be closed. Therefore, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is provided by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (attached). Since it is closed from the rear and does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from being carried out.

Further, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810, the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted, so that the gate seal 2811 and the separation hole 2810d are penetrated from the front. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pushed backward by an unauthorized tool, the locking portion 2810i can be locked to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from moving backward, and the gate sensor 2801 can close the separation hole 2810d from the rear. It can be maintained to prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810 is projected within the front projection range of the separating hole 2810d, the separating hole 2810d is also used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. The gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be grasped.

[Technical Thought A]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
It has a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorated portion back and forth and presses the attached decorative body from the rear so as to be separable. With the front member
A passage member is provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and has a passage portion through which a game medium can flow.
The front member
An accommodating portion that extends from the rear side to the rear of the decorated portion and is recessed from the rear end to the front and the separation hole is located on the front end side so that at least a part of the passage member can be accommodated from the rear. It is characterized by having "more."

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. , 2810 g of the accommodating groove corresponds to the accommodating portion, respectively.

As a result, in the front member, the separation hole is located in the front part of the accommodating portion. Therefore, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the aisle member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has the same effect as described above.

Further, since the front member has an accommodating portion, by accommodating at least a part of the passage member in the accommodating portion from the rear, the accommodating portion allows the passage member to move up and down, left and right, and forward. It can be regulated and positioned, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by facilitating the assembly of the gaming machine.

[Technical Thought B]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
It has a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorated portion back and forth and presses the attached decorative body from the rear so as to be separable. With the front member
A passage member is provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and has a passage portion through which a game medium can flow.
The front member
It is characterized in that it protrudes behind the decorated portion into the front projection range of the separation hole and further has a locking portion for locking the passage member. "

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. , The locking portion 2810i corresponds to the locking portion, respectively.

As a result, the locking portion locked to the passage member is projected within the front projection range of the separation hole. Therefore, when the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decoration portion and the locking portion, the separation hole can be closed by the passage member, and the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

Further, as described above, since the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the passage member is moved backward from the front by an unauthorized tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even if it is pressed, it is possible to prevent the passage member from moving backward by locking the locking portion, and it is necessary to maintain the closure of the separation hole from the rear by the passage member to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be done.

Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical Thought C]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
A decorated portion that is recessed rearward from the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative body and is attached to the decorative body from the front, and the decorative body that penetrates the decorated portion back and forth and is attached to the rear. A separation hole that can be separated by pressing from, an accommodating portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion, is recessed from the rear end to the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side, and the above. A front member having a locking portion that protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion, and
A passage portion in which at least a part thereof is accommodated from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear and is locked to the locking portion so that the game medium can flow is provided. It is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage member that it has.

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated portion, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage portion, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. The accommodating groove 2810g corresponds to the accommodating portion, and the locking portion 2810i corresponds to the engaging portion.

As a result, a decorative body having a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorated portion, which is the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage portion through which the game medium is distributed. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed behind the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the decorated portion in the front member is subjected to. Since the surrounding part is in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion protruding forward of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine by making it easier to exert.

In addition, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward, the decorative body is placed in the correct position by using the protruding circumference of the decorated portion in the front member as a guide to attach the decorative body. It is possible to facilitate the contact, reduce the failure of the decorative body to be attached, and suppress the increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, since the decorated portion of the front member is recessed rearward, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated portion must be in a recessed position when the decorative body is in contact with the decorated portion. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the decorative body that is attached to the decorated portion, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the separated hole is provided in the decorated portion, the decorative body is pressed forward by passing the rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, thereby easily releasing the contact with the decorated portion. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member at the time of manufacturing, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. By doing so, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the decorative body can be reattached. Further, with the front member and the passage member separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof, thereby facilitating contact with the decorated portion. Since it can be released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion by using the separation hole. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work and reduce the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

In addition, since the separation hole is provided in the decorated portion, the separation hole can be obscured or hidden from the front by attaching the decorative body to the decorated portion, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole.

Then, at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the front member from the rear, and the locking portion is locked to the aisle member, whereby the accommodating portion, the locking portion, and the rear side of the decorated portion are formed. , The movement of the passage member in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction can be restricted and positioned, and the assembly of the gaming machine can be facilitated and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front part of the accommodating portion in the front member, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the aisle member. It will be. Therefore, in the state of being assembled in the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member assembled to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a machine, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the gaming machine through the hole, and fraudulent acts are performed. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body from the front and inserted into the separation hole, the passage member allows further rearward insertion (invasion). Since it can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, and it is possible to prevent the unauthorized act from being performed, and the unauthorized tool can prevent the decoration. Since the ornamental body is left with a trace by penetrating it, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide a game machine having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

Further, as described above, since the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the passage member is moved backward from the front by an unauthorized tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even if it is pressed, it is possible to prevent the passage member from moving backward by locking the locking portion, and it is necessary to maintain the closure of the separation hole from the rear by the passage member to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be done.

Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the portion on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so as to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B distributed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly circulates on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and driven from the left side to the upper part along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 137, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N induces the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to the portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the first start port sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, the first special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B distributed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be accepted by the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. There is no sex.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center character 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”).

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the position directly above the gate 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is located on the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate 2003, by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. , The right side of the gate member 2800, and so on, so that the probability is lowered in this order, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front staging unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the back front lower effect unit 3160. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2022. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front staging unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is handed over to the guide passage 3156, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 through the back front lower staging unit 3160. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided by the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flow down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the character wins. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received by the prize winning mouth 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 is detected by the character winning opening sensor 2601 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in front of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the staging unit 3100. By detecting the game ball B by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Then, the game ball B delivered to the distribution passage 3158 is distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by the drive of the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, but is detected by the loss opening sensor 3004 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is received in the V winning opening 2007, the privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the character winning opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the character winning opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center character 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf portion 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and rolls the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf 2422. Then, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the left. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the big prize opening door 2413 according to the momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Then, after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2424 from the large winning opening door 2413, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2424 to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the ball does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2421 but to the upper shelf portion 2436. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2436 rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged from the left end of the upper shelf 2436 to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the large winning door 2413, the large winning door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 are rolled to the left to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400. Is released to. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2436, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2436 and the timing at which the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the large winning opening 2005 may be used. May be accepted.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the contact with the right end of the upper shelf 2436, etc., and the first shelf 2421. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2421 may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 passes between the first standing wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second side wall portion 2433. Then, due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2433, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below from the fifth discharge passage 3185.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003, the second starting port Since the door 2411 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling to the left on the first shelf portion 2421 can be received by the second starting port 2004. There is sex. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2422, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are performed. As a result, when the "big hit" is drawn, the big winning opening door 2413 moves and the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released from the second shelf portion 2422 to the left is released. , It will be accepted in the big prize opening 2005 with high probability. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2422, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and flow diagonally to the lower right to flow down to the second shelf 2422 and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2423. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 passes between the third vertical wall portion 2427 and the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2433 and is received by the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is not accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2021. If this is the case, it is discharged downward from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the rear and lower part of the game panel 1100 which is outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the large winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and the game ball B is accepted to "hit the winning opening" or "feature hit". It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result such as "big hit" or the second special lottery result. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the gate 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) a "normal hit" as a result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the game ball B to be accepted by the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the "feature hit" or "big hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery, the big winning opening 2005 or the winning combination opening 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 or the character winning opening 2006, and the large winning opening 2005 or the character winning opening 2006 It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B in the game.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate 2003 by the guide passage to be distributed. Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2022, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can be made to use the game ball B. You can enjoy the driving operation of.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the first in the open state. (Ii) Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the starting port 2004 and a "feature hit" or a "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Subsequently, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor capable of detecting the magnetic field lines from the magnet, and FIG. 147 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor unable to detect the magnetic field lines from the magnet (c). ) Is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor by a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which the magnetic field lines from the magnet cannot be detected. e) is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, and FIG. 148 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated. Is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross section.

A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5, and are for detecting illegal magnetism (magnetic force lines) acting in the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052 having a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, a sensor board 1052, and a sensor body 1051. It is equipped with a transparent sensor case 1053 that covers the surface. Although not shown, an IC, a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a connector for connection, and the like are mounted on the sensor board 1052 in addition to the sensor main body 1051.

The magnetic sensor 1050 has a rectangular shape in a plan view, is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape having a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one portion of the side in the height direction is C-chamfered. The magnetic sensor 1050 can visually recognize the internal sensor body 1051 and the sensor board 1052 from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic force lines parallel to the longest side of a rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship between the magnet 1055 as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass in the direction parallel to the long side, so that the magnetic (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 Can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship between the magnet 1055 as shown in FIG. 147 (b), the magnetic force lines of the magnet 1055 are in the direction perpendicular to the long side (with respect to the rectangular surface of the long side and the short side). Because it passes in the vertical direction), the magnetism (magnetic force lines) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

Therefore, as shown by shading in FIG. 147 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection region of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction centered on the magnetic sensor 1050. Has DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection region DA in which two spheres are combined.

Then, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided in appropriate directions, respectively. Each magnetic sensor 1050 has an illegal magnetism acting in the vicinity of the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the warp inlet 2511 in the game area 5a. Is arranged so that it can be detected. That is, each magnetism is included in the detection region DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the region indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 146) in the game region 5a where the cheating using the magnet is predicted to be performed. The sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate orientation.

Further, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is from a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a bonus winning port solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid, a drive motor provided in the back unit 3000, and the like. In order not to detect magnetism (lines of magnetic force), each detection area DA is prevented from being applied to the solenoid or the drive motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (d), when the magnetic body 1056 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, the magnetic force lines are attracted to the magnetic body 1056. The number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic lines of force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055 may not be detected by the magnetic sensor 1050.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (e), when the magnetic body 1057 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic force lines from the magnet 1055, the magnetic force lines are attracted by the magnetic body 1057, resulting in magnetism. The lines of magnetic force passing through the sensor 1050 can be increased. This makes it possible to detect the magnetism of a distant magnet 1055 or a magnet 1055 having a weak magnetic force.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board by using a screw made of a magnetic material, depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, the magnetic field line from the magnet for cheating is generated. There is a problem that the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor are reduced due to being attracted to the screw having a high magnetic permeability, and the approach of the magnet cannot be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has an accommodating portion 1061 capable of accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 locked to the magnetic sensor 1050 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061. Further, the holding member 1060 has a protrusion 1063 protruding from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062 into the accommodating portion 1061. The holding member 1060 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the accommodating portion 1061 from the outside, the holding member 1060 is elastically deformed in the direction in which the elastic claw 1062 moves away from the accommodating portion 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061, the elastic claw 1062 is elastically deformed. The 1062 returns and is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against a portion of the inner surface of the accommodating portion 1061 opposite to the elastic claw 1062. There is.

By locking the elastic claw 1062, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of exiting from the accommodating portion 1061, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the accommodating portion 1061 by the contact of the protrusion 1063, rattling of the magnetic sensor 1050 in the accommodating portion 1061 can be prevented.

In this way, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting magnetic force lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, and the magnetic sensor. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic force lines passing through the 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act using the magnet at an early stage, and the fraudulent act is notified by notifying the detection of the suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material can prevent the magnetic force lines from being attracted from the magnet and prevent the magnetic force lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing, the number of magnetic forces is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine. The sensor 1050 makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. ..

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1060. Therefore, it is made of a metal made of a magnetic material like a conventional pachinko machine. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1062 without using the screw of, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated, which increases the cost of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged (pressed) to the accommodating portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. It is possible to reduce the disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or the occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and provided on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 to be attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection region DA in the game region 5a. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 reliably detects the magnetism acting on the game area 5a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts using magnets.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visually held by the transparent holding member 1050 and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor main body mounted on the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. The 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, it is possible to make the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and the person who tries to cheat using the magnet by seeing the magnetic sensor 1050 is cheated. It is possible to hesitate to execute the above, increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts, and reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor board 1052 is a decorative board on which the LED is mounted. Can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it is not a concern for a normal player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated.

Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the sensor main body 1051 is damaged, so that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily performed. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 149 and the like. FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 149 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. It is equipped with a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the staging display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010 and a back back upper effect provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It includes a unit 3200 and a back-back-lower effect unit 3300 provided at the lower part in the back box 3010 below the back-back-up effect unit.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame to the right on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which a lock mechanism is attached, in the vicinity of the center of the left side in the vertical direction.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. A lock mechanism is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the back front staging unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back unit 3000 detects the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. After being accepted by the first start port sensor 3002, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted by the winning opening 2006, and the winning opening 2006. It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

Further, the back unit 3000 has a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. It is provided with a V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. These general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, V winning opening sensor 3003, loss opening sensor 3004, V winning opening door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front staging unit 3100. ..

[5-9a. Back front production unit]
Subsequently, the back front staging unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back front staging unit in the back unit. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back-front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back-front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front effect unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, FIG. 152 (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and FIG. It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit of the back front staging unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. In FIG. 154, the back front left decorative unit is disassembled and only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base are viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, FIG. 155 (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and FIG. It is a front view of the back front left decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is the front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 156 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front staging unit and the decorative substrate for light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit, and FIG. 156 (b) is a back front staging unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for making the decorative body of the back front lower staging unit emit light, and is shown from the front. FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is light-emittingly decorated. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and FIG. 158 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back-front staging unit showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

The back front staging unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end in the back box 3010. The back front staging unit 3100 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3110 provided in the center of the front view, a back front left decorative unit 3120 provided on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end portion of the light guide plate 3110. The back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the side and the lower ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other. It includes a back front lower effect unit 3160, and an upper connection base 3190 that connects the upper ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 was received by the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. The V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B that was later distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and the game ball B that was distributed to the losing opening 2008 after being accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 are detected. It is equipped with a loss opening sensor 3004. Further, the back front right decorative unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for distributing the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. It is equipped with a 3006 and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for advancing / retreating (opening / closing) the V winning door 3006.

The back front lower effect unit 3160 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the above is provided.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back-front effect unit 3100 has only the first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158 (a)), which is displayed by reflecting only the light from the left and right forward, and the light from the specific part below. The second pattern 3112 (see FIG. 158 (b)), which is light-emittingly displayed by reflecting the image forward, is provided. That is, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of LEDs 3128 g for the light guide plate of the back front left decorative board 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120, which will be described later, and the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right in the back front right decoration unit 3140. When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate of the decorative substrate 3150 for the front right light guide plate are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be made to emit light. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are made to emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be emitted and displayed.

As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern in which the letter "A" in the center is stylized and a pattern in which the "wings" on both the left and right sides thereof are spread out. .. As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 is configured so that the shade and the degree of light emission of the light emitting display differ depending on the portion of the pattern, and the design and decorativeness of the pattern are enhanced. More specifically, in FIG. 158 (a), the first pattern 3111 is composed of a plurality of points in which the shaded area is the same as the color of the light from the LED, and the shade is the lightest. The portion is composed of a plurality of points that emit light by dispersing the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shaded portions are composed of a plurality of lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, the cocktail light is a color containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the components of the yellow light are dispersed into red light and green light, and the red or green light is dispersed in the portion. A part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the components of the white light are dispersed into red light, green light, and blue light, and the part that looks red, green, or blue in the relevant part or , Light of a color in which they are appropriately mixed appears, and it is possible to show rainbow-colored glittering light emission. When the spectroscopic light emitting unit is irradiated with light of only one of the three primary colors of light, the light has no component to be separated, so that the light of the color is used for light emission. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting unit can emit light in a single color or in multiple colors with glitter depending on the color of the emitted light, and can produce a wider variety of light emission effects. can.

The LEDs (LED 3128g for the light guide plate, etc.) for displaying the first pattern 3111 by light emission are the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right first decorative board 3148 of the back front right decoration unit 3140. , The back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward centering on a plurality of portions spaced in the left-right direction near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the LED 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, which will be described later. The plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are formed so as to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each can independently display light emission. ing.

In the second pattern 3112, a plurality of lines 3113 have five line groups 3114, from the left, the first line group 3114a, the second line group 3114b, the third line group 3114c, the fourth line group 3114d, and the fifth line group 3114e. It is divided into. Each line group 3114 is composed of five lines 3113 from the left: first line 3113a, second line 3113b, third line 3113c, fourth line 3113d, and fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 of the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114 have their lower ends arranged at the same positions, and extend upward radially with the lower end positions as the center.

With the light emission display of the second pattern 3112, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect like a searchlight from below on the concert stage, and it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a look gorgeous and entertain the player. It can be done, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

The LED 3176 for displaying the second pattern 3112 by light emission is mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decoration unit]
The back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long back front left logo composed of character strings of a plurality of alphabets. It is provided above the decoration part 3121, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, which is a design of the letter "A", and the back front left logo decoration part 3121. It has a back front left sub-decorative part 3123 and.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 is a rectangular and transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 whose front view shape is long vertically, and a transparent back front left provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second decorative body 3125, the transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left third decorative body 3126. It is equipped with a front left decorative base 3127.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 is used to illuminate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123. The front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 for light emitting decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back for making the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 light emitting decoration. The front left lower decorative substrate 3130 and the like are provided.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a back front upper left reflector 3132 provided under the back front upper left decorative board 3129. The back front lower left lower reflector 3133 provided on the upper side of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is provided.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a left diffuser lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is a back front left decorative body base so as to sandwich the left end portion of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, the left diffuser lens 3134, and the light guide plate 3110. It is attached to the front surface of 3127. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is a transparent flat plate and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partitioning decorative portion 3124a extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion having a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b penetrating the front and back. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end and the lower end, and near the upper side of the right end of the partition decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed in a rhombus shape in which the four sides of a square are replaced with arcs that bulge inward.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3124a on the front surface, and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, and the front front left logo decorative portion 3124c. It has a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration portion 3124d provided at a portion corresponding to the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape along the character strings of the logos of the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3124a on the back surface, and forms a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122e. And a plurality of first left sub-decorative portions 3124f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e constitutes the outermost portion of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is formed into a cloisonne pattern in which circles of the same size are stacked in quarters and a part of one circle is extracted, and a rhombus pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonne pattern is eliminated. It is lined up and down.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (a). The first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e, and the first left sub decoration portion 3124f can be visually recognized.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 in a state of being assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, so that the right side side is located rearward with respect to the left side side. It is installed in an inclined state (see FIG. 152). Further, in the assembled state, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is positioned so that the left side surface is in contact with the right side surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the back side thereof is on the left side. The first lower LED 3128a and the first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are located. Further, in the assembled state of the back front left first decorative substrate 3124, the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is located above the upper surface, and the first LED of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is located below the lower surface. One LED 3130a is located.

When the back front left first decorative body 3124 emits light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the substrate holding portion of the back front left second decorative board 3125 The first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part are caused by the light incident inside from the part below the partition decoration part 3124a on the left side surface via 3125b and the light incident inside from the lower surface. The 3124d and the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f are luminescently decorated. At this time, the inner surface of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part thereof is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a, and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3124a. Light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 on the back front causes the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e above the partition decoration portion 3124a to be almost emitted (emission decoration). Only the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, and the first left sub decoration portion 3124f can be brightly emitted and displayed.

Further, when the back front left first decorative body 3124 emits light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the substrate of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is emitted. The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e emits and decorates the light emitted from the portion above the partition decoration portion 3124a on the left side surface via the holding portion 3125b and the light incident inside from the upper surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3124a and the penetrating decoration portion provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a are also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof. A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part thereof is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a, and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3124a. Light from the first LED 3128b on the left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED on the upper left decorative substrate 3129 on the back front causes the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d below the partition decoration portion 3124a. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is hardly light-emitting (light-emitting decoration), and only the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the upper penetrating decorative portion 3124b can be brightly light-emittingly displayed.

As described above, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light-emitting display) with the partitioning decoration portion 3124a as a boundary.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparently formed, and the flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the periphery excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3125a ( It has a substrate holding portion 3125b provided on the left side, the upper side, and the lower side). The substrate holding portion 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed from the rear surface side to the front. The substrate holding portion 3125b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 to sandwich and hold the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left decorative substrate 3130. It is for doing. In the back front left second decorative body 3125, the front surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side side is located behind the left side side. ing.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a partition decorative portion 3125c extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3125a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. There is. The partition decorative portion 3125c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3125c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped second back left logo decorative portion that constitutes a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. It has 3125d. The right side of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3125c on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. And a plurality of second left sub-decorative portions 3125f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decorative portion 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is one size smaller.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (b). The second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e, and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f can be visually recognized.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled on the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. At the same time, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is located behind. Further, in the assembled state, the back front left second decorative board 3125 has a board holding portion 3125b recessed forward, a front end side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and a back front left reflector 3131, and a back front upper left decorative board 3129. The front end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the front end side of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130, and the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is on the upper side, and the back front is on the lower side. The second LED 3130b of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 is located respectively.

When the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the partition decorative portion 3125c on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3125a emits light. The second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f are luminescently decorated by the light incident on the inside from the lower portion and the light incident on the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part thereof is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. Light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 on the back front causes the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e above the partition decoration portion 3125c to be almost emitted (emission decoration). Only the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f can be displayed brightly.

Further, when the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the partition decorative portion on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3125a is emitted. The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e is luminescently decorated by the light incident on the inside from the portion above the 3125c and the light incident on the inside from the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof. A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part thereof is reflected to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. Most of the second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the second left sub decoration part 3125f below the partition decoration part 3125c due to the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decoration board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decoration board 3129. There is no light emission display (light emission decoration), and only the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e can be brightly displayed by light emission.

As described above, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light-emitting display) with the partitioning decorative portion 3125c as a boundary.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent, and is a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion parallel to the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left second decorative body 3125. It has a 3126a and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3126a. In the back front left third decorative body 3126, the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side side is located behind the left side side. There is.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partition decorative portion 3126c extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3126a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. There is. The partition decoration portion 3126c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative portion that constitutes a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. It has 3126d. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3126c on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. And a plurality of third left sub-decorative portions 3126f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and has the same size between the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f. It is formed in a unique shape.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (c). The third back left logo decoration portion 3126d, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left first decorative body 3124 are in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a. (Ii) The decorative plate portion 3125a of the decorative body 3125 is located, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located rearward. Further, in the assembled state of the back front left third decorative body 3126, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the back is above the upper surface. The third LED of the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is located below the lower surface, and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is located below the lower surface.

When the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the partition decorative portion 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a The third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f emit and decorate with the light incident on the inside from the lower portion and the light incident on the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also luminescently decorated.

In the partitioning decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3126c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partitioning decorative portion 3126c. Light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 on the back front causes the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e above the partition decoration portion 3126c to be almost emitted (emission decoration). Only the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f can be brightly displayed.

Further, when the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the partition decorative portion on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a is emitted. The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e emits and decorates the light emitted from the portion above the 3126c and the light incident inside from the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof. A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3126c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3126c. Most of the third back left logo decoration part 3126d and the third left sub decoration part 3126f below the partition decoration part 3126c due to the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decoration board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decoration board 3129. There is no light emission display (light emission decoration), and only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be brightly displayed by light emission.

As described above, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light-emitting display) with the partitioning decorative portion 3126c as a boundary.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and is a substrate provided on a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3127a and a periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3127a. It has a holding portion 3127b and. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The substrate holding portion 3127b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3127a, and its rear surface is located rearward, and is recessed from the front side to the rear. The substrate holding portion 3127b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 to sandwich the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130. It is for holding. Further, in the substrate holding portion 3127b, the left end portion of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion, and the upper left end portion of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower staging unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion.

Further, the back front left decorative body base 3127 extends up and down at a constant height over the entire width near the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, and is provided at intervals in the upper and lower sides. The three back front left band decoration parts 3127c and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d which is provided in a relief shape near the upper part on the rear surface of the decoration plate part 3127a and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. ,have. The base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the back is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (d). The front left band decoration part 3127c and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a in the state where the back front left decorative body base 3127 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120. Further, in the assembled state, the back front left decorative body base 3127 has the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left reflector 3131 rear end side, and the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in the board holding portion 3127b recessed rearward. The rear end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130, and the rear end side of the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The lower base LED 3128h and the upper base LED 3128i of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are located on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3127a, respectively.

When the back front left decorative body base 3127 emits light from the under-base LED 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a can be illuminated and decorated. The three back front left band decoration portions 3127c can be independently luminescently decorated. Further, in the back front left decorative body base 3127, when the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is made to emit light, the logo decoration portion 3127d on the upper left of the base can be made to emit light.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 has a long flat plate shape in the vertical direction, and the plate surface is oriented in the left-right direction. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left reflector 3131. ing.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and is provided below the partition decorative portion 3124a with a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a and a back front left first decorative body. It is located on the left side of the 3124, and is located on the left side of the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It is located to the left of the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c provided below the portion 3125c and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and is provided above the partition decorative portion 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the back front. It is located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the left third decorative body 3126, and is provided with a plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f provided above the partition decorative portion 3126c.

Further, the back front left decorative substrate 3128 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), and the back front of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Three base lower LEDs 3128h located to the left of the left band decorative portion 3127c, and a plurality of bases located to the left of the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. It is equipped with an upper LED 3128i.

When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are made to emit light. Can be done. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the like of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light.

Further, when the plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

When a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted and displayed via the left diffusion lens 3134. When the plurality (three) under-base LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be made to emit light. When the LEDs 3128i on the plurality of bases of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be made to emit light.

First lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base mounted on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128. The LED 3128h and the LED 3128i on the base are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, the back front left decorative substrate 3128 can be made difficult to see, and the light from the mounted LED can be reflected. The first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo. The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub decorative portion 3123, and the like can be brightly luminescently decorated. Further, on the back front left decorative board 3128, the characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are inks of a color having high lightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in addition to the LED.

The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and the plate surface is directed in the vertical direction. The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 has a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged above the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front upper left reflector 3132. ing.

Although not shown, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 has a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs provided above, and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the like of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

The plurality of first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 difficult to see, and at the same time, it is possible to reflect the light from the mounted LED, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like can be brighter and decorated. Can be made to. Further, on the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are inks of a color having high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 in addition to the LED.

The front left lower left decorative substrate 3130 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and the plate surface is directed in the vertical direction. The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative board portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative board portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged below the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left lower left reflector 3133. ing.

The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is provided below a plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the back front left first decorative body 3124 and below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When a plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, and the like of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

The plurality of first LEDs 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third LED 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the decorative substrate 3130 on the lower front left of the back is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 difficult to see, and at the same time, it is possible to reflect the light from the mounted LED, and the back front left logo decoration part 3121 etc. can be brightly lit up. Can be made to. Further, on the back front lower left decorative board 3130, the characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are inks of a color having high lightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 in addition to the LED.

The left diffuser lens 3134 is arranged between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decorative substrate 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and also has the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127. It is sandwiched between. The left diffuser lens 3134 diffuses light from a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and irradiates the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, and the back front left second decoration 3125 of the back front left first decoration 3124. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d of the back front left third decoration body 3126 form one back front left logo decoration part 3121 by overlapping the front and back. Since the positions of the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d are different in the front-rear direction, the game is played. When the position of a person's eyes moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, and a predetermined logo composed of a plurality of alphabets can be made to appear three-dimensionally.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first lower LED 3128a, the second lower LED 3128c, the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are independently made. It can be light-emitting decorated, and the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be light-emitting decorated in various light-emitting modes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. , The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 form one back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 by overlapping the front and back. is doing. These are the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different, so that the position of the player's eyes is different. If you move it, the degree of overlap between them will change, and you will be able to make the logo with the letter "A" look three-dimensional.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 has a first upper left logo decoration unit 3124e, a second upper left logo decoration unit 3125e, a third upper left logo decoration unit 3126e, and a base upper left logo decoration unit 3127d, which are located at substantially the same position when viewed from the front. Even with a logo such as, by sequentially illuminating the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, the game is played. It is possible to show a pseudo animation with movement to a person, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player. In the light emitting effect like this animation, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are sequentially made to emit light decoration. However, the same effect can be achieved.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128, the second upper LED 3128d, the third upper LED 3128f, the base top LED 3128i, and the first LED and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129. By appropriately emitting the LED and the third LED, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d are independently emitted. It can be decorated, and the logo decoration portion 3122 on the upper left of the back front can be decorated by light emission in various light emitting modes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a first left sub-decorative portion 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a second left sub decorative portion 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125. , The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126, overlaps back and forth to form one back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. Since the positions of the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f, and the front-rear direction are different, when the position of the player's eyes moves, they overlap. Will change, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 can be shown three-dimensionally.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first lower LED 3128a, the second lower LED 3128c, the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f can be independently emitted and decorated. The unit 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a back front left first decorative body 3124 partition decoration portion 3124a, a back front left second decorative body 3125 partition decoration portion 3125c, and a back front left third decorative body 3126 partition decoration portion. Since the 3126c is provided, the lower side (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left sub decoration part 3123) and the upper side (back side) are bordered by the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c. The light emitting decoration of the front left logo decoration part 3122) can be clearly separated, and the decoration effect of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. Can be further enhanced. At this time, since the partition decoration unit 3124a, the partition decoration unit 3125c, and the partition decoration unit 3126c are also light-emitting decorated, the appearance of the partition decoration unit 3124a, the partition decoration unit 3125c, and the partition decoration unit 3126c can be improved and the light emission can be achieved. You can entertain the decoration.

Further, when the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits light of the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is delimited decoration. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be light-emitting decorated. Further, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is made to emit light. The part 3124b can be decorated with light emission. The appearance can also be improved by the light emitting decoration of these penetrating decoration portions 3124b.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits light of the light guide plate LED 3128 g of the back front left decorative board 3128, so that the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right second decorative board in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are emitted. The first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted and displayed in cooperation with the 3149 and the LED for the light guide plate of the decorative substrate 3150 for the front right light guide plate.

As described above, according to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the transparent three-dimensional decoration such as the back front left logo decoration unit 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122, and the back front left sub decoration unit 3123 is used. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes, the player is bored with various light-emitting effects. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In the above, the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, and the partitioning decorative portion 3126c that block the light from the LED are shown as penetrating the front and rear, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the groove shape is used. , A ridge, may be used. Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided with a protrusion to be inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124 so that the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. May be. That is, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as the positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decoration unit]
The back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long back front right logo composed of a plurality of alphabet character strings. Decorative part 3141 and back front right logo Decorative part 3142 (see Fig. 151 (b)), which is provided above the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and is a design of the letter "A", and the back front right logo. It has a back front right sub-decorative portion (not shown) provided in the vicinity of the decorative portion 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 has a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 having a long front view shape, and a transparent back front right second decorative body 3144 provided behind the back front right first decorative body 3144. The decorative body 3145, the transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the transparent back provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146. It is equipped with a front right decorative base 3147 (see FIG. 152).

In the back front right decorative body base 3147, the right end portion of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion, and the upper right end portion of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower staging unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion. In addition, the back front right decorative body base 3147 extends up and down at a constant height over the entire width near the center in the vertical direction, and is provided with three back front right band decorations spaced apart from each other. It has a portion 3147a (see FIG. 151 (b)).

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is used to illuminate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decoration portion 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, and the back front right sub decoration portion. The right first decorative substrate 3148, the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for emitting and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142. It is provided with a back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for luminescent decoration and a back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 (see FIG. 156).

Further, the back front right decorative unit 3140 is located between the upper right diffuser lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decorative substrate 3148, and between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decorative substrate 3149. The right middle diffuser lens 3154 provided in the above, and the lower right diffuser lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the decorative substrate 3150 for the back front right light guide plate are provided (see FIG. 156). .. The upper right diffuser lens 3153, the right middle diffuser lens 3154, and the lower right diffuser lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

Further, the back front right decorative unit 3140 receives the game ball B which is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and is guided backward by the first guidance passage 2701, and is guided downward by the first back guidance passage. It is provided with a 3156 and a second back guidance passage 3157 that receives the game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guidance passage and guides it downward. .. A general winning opening sensor 3001 is provided in the first back guide passage 3156. The game ball B guided to the first back guide passage 3156 and the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

Further, in the back front right decorative unit 3140, the game ball B received by the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided backward by the guidance passage 2613 is distributed, and the V winning opening 2007 and the losing opening 2008 are distributed. The distribution passage provided, the V prize opening door 3006 that advances and retreats in the distribution passage and distributes the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the loss opening 2008, and the V winning opening door 3006. The V distribution solenoid 3007 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door 3006, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and the losing opening that detects the game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008. It is equipped with a mouth sensor 3004. The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and the losing opening sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

The configuration of the back front right logo decoration unit 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub decoration unit, etc. in the back front right decoration unit 3140 is the same as that of the back front left decoration unit 3120. Omit.

Further, in the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 have a back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and a back front upper right. It has a partition decoration portion 3144a extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth between the logo decoration portion 3142 and the logo decoration portion 3142. With this partition decoration portion 3144a, the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b penetrating the front and back. These plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b can exert the same effect as the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Thus, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration unit 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub decoration unit, and the like. The transparent three-dimensional decoration can improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player.

In addition, since the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes, it is difficult for the player to get bored with various light-emitting effects. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right logo decoration part 3142 which are substantially the same position when viewed from the front, the back front right first decoration body 3144, the back front right second decoration body 3145, and the back front right first decoration part 3142. By sequentially emitting and decorating the three decorative bodies 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147, it is possible to show the player a pseudo animation with movement, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front and bottom production unit]
The back front lower middle decoration unit 3160 in the back front directing unit 3100 has a disk-shaped back front lower middle decoration body 3161 and a back front lower middle decoration body 3161 in which the characters "SPIN" are given to the upper part in the center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a back front lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back front lower lift drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 has translucency.

Further, the back front lower left inner decoration unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, and has a disk-shaped back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 and a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 of the same size. A disk-shaped back front lower left outer decoration body 3164 of the same size and a disk-shaped back front lower right inner decoration of the same size provided on the left side and a disk-shaped back front lower right inner decoration provided on the right side of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 It is provided with a body 3165 and a disk-shaped back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 provided on the right side of the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have translucency.

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and includes the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 with the characters "Queen". The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 has translucency.

Further, the back front lower left effect unit 3160 has a back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for light emitting decoration of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and a back front lower left for making the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 light emitting decoration. Inner decoration board 3169, back front lower left outer decoration 3164 for light emission decoration, back front lower left outer decoration board 3170, back front lower right inner decoration 3165 for light emission decoration, back front lower right inner decoration A substrate 3171, a back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for light-emitting decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for light-emitting decoration of the back front lower right logo decorative body 3167, and a back front lower right outer decorative board 3173. (See FIG. 156 (b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo decoration The substrate 3173 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back front. It is provided behind the lower logo decoration body 3167.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 3173, and the surface thereof is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to reflect light from the LED or from the front, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the decorative bodies provided in front of each.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo. On the decorative board 3173, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a highly bright and saturated color (for example, yellow). Is given by. As a result, characters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be surely exhibited.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 are top view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173. The plurality of LEDs are side view type LEDs.

Further, in these decorative boards, members other than LEDs that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface) so as not to interfere with the light emission decoration. There is.

Back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo decoration As shown in FIG. 156, the 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is invisible from the player side (front). In addition, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 are the upper ends of each. However, as shown in FIG. 160, the light guide plate 3110 is located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112, and is left and right at intervals corresponding to each line group 3114 constituting the second pattern 3112. Arranged in the direction.

More specifically, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is in the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 is in the second line group 3114b, and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 is in the first line group 3114a. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 is provided to correspond to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 corresponds to the fifth line group 3114e, respectively. Therefore, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 emit light (upper end). When only the part is made to emit light or the whole is made to emit light), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is as if the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, The light from the back front lower right inner decoration 3165 and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 can make the player illusion that the light is displayed, creating a light emission effect not found in conventional pachinko machines. Can be shown to others.

In addition, the back front lower effect unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative board 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, a back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, a back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, and a back front lower right outer. It is provided behind the decorative substrate 3172 and the back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173, and is provided under the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower for displaying (light emitting decoration) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. A right decorative substrate 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156 (a)).

The light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 each have five LED groups 3177 composed of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the order of the first LED 3176a, the second LED 3176b, the third LED 3176c, the fourth LED 3176d, and the fifth LED 3176e from the right. Further, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and from the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, and the fourth. The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

The LEDs 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 of the light guide plate. The LEDs 3176 of the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate.

The plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are side-view type full-color LEDs. The surface of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). The decorative substrate 3175 on the lower right side of the light guide plate is made inconspicuous. Further, on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LED3176 and other decorative boards to be mounted have lightness and saturation. It is applied by screen printing with a high color (eg, yellow) ink. As a result, characters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, when the first LED 3176a is made to emit light in each LED group 3177, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is emitted. Can be displayed (light emitting decoration). Further, when the second LED 3176b is made to emit light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the third LED 3176c is made to emit light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the fourth LED 3176d is made to emit light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the fifth LED 3176e is made to emit light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration).

As a result, each of the plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently displayed with light emission (light emission decoration), and various light emission effects can be shown to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 has a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and a back front lower right outer. Decorative body 3166, back front lower logo decoration body 3167, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower It supports the right outer decorative board 3172, the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, and the like, and has a long flat plate-shaped unit base 3178 on the left and right. .. The lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140 are attached near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges the game ball B to the lower substrate holder 1200, and the start opening unit 2100. The second discharge passage 3182 that receives the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and discharges it to the lower substrate holder 1200, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400 are received. A third discharge passage 3183 that discharges to the lower board holder 1200, and a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200. , A fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the lower substrate holder 1200.

The first discharge passage 3181 is provided with three delivery ports so as to correspond to the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning opening sensors 3001 are provided so as to correspond to the respective delivery ports. Has been done. Further, the first starting port sensor 3002 is provided in the second discharge passage 3182.

The back front lower staging unit 3160 has a back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration. The body 3166 and the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a to improve the appearance, and by illuminating them, the player can be entertained by the luminescence effect. can. Further, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back front lower rotation drive motor and can be moved up and down by the back front lower elevating drive motor 3162, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect. ..

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 can display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, and the second pattern can be displayed. It is possible to entertain the player with the light emission effect by 3112.

[5-9b. Back and top production unit]
Next, the back-back-upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 149. The back-back-upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear upper part of the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back-back-up staging unit 3200 has a back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 that can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right and can be raised and lowered, and a back-front left decorative body 3120. A back-rear left side decorative body 3220 having three back-rear left-strip decorations 3221 extending in the front-rear direction so as to be followed by three back-front left-strip decorations 3127c in the base 3127, and a back-front right. Back front right of the decorative unit 3140 Back front right with three back front right band decorations 3317a in the back front right decoration base 3147 and three back back right band decorations 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to follow. It comprises a side decoration 3230 (see FIG. 131).

The back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the back side of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 (see FIG. 129 etc.) in which five 7-segment display portions are arranged side by side and the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. It has a back-back upper second decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

In the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210, the back-back-up first decoration part 3211 is capable of emitting light independently for each segment in the five 7-segment display parts, and various characters and numbers can be obtained by combining each segment. Pictures, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are expected to be "big hits". Can be displayed. Further, in the second decorative portion 3212 on the back and back, each character can independently emit light.

In the normal state, the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 is in the ascending position with the back-back-up first decorative portion 3211 facing forward. The back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or V. Depending on the acceptance (distribution) of the game ball B to the winning opening 2007, it rotates 180 degrees with respect to the axis extending to the left and right, and the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is directed forward or descends from the ascending position. Move to a position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

According to this back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, by rotating and moving up and down, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

The three back-back left band decorations 3221 of the back-back left side decoration unit 3220 are the three back-front left-band decoration parts 3127c extending to the left and right in the back-front left decoration body base 3127 of the back-front left decoration unit 3120. It is provided so as to extend backward from the right end of each. The back-rear left band decorative portion 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

The three back-back right band decorations 3231 of the back-back right side decoration 3230 are the three back-front right band decorations 3147a extending to the left and right in the back-front right decoration base 3147 of the back-front right decoration unit 3140. It is provided so as to extend backward from the right end of each. The back-rear right band decorative portion 3231 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

[5-9c. Back and bottom production unit]
Next, the back-back lowering effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to 135 and the like. The back-back lower effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part behind the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and below the back-back upper effect unit 3200.

In the back / rear lower staging unit 3300, the back / rear / left movable decorative body 3301 and the back / back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back / rear / left movable decorative body 3301 and the back / rear / left movable decorative body 3301 and the back / rear / left movable decorative body 3301 in which the base end sides adjacent to each other on the left and right are rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction and are supported in an ascending / descending manner, respectively. It has a rear right movable decorative body 3302. The back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 are formed so as to rotate in opposite directions as the base end side moves up and down.

Under normal conditions, the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-back right movable decoration body 3302 rotate in a direction in which the tip sides of the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the back-front staging unit 3100 and forward (game). The evacuation position is invisible from the person's side) (see FIG. 129 and the like).

The back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The right side of the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the left side of the back-back right movable decoration body 3302 hit each other. It will be in contact with you. As a result, the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3301 are integrated to form one large decorative body, and the appearance position is visible from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

As a result, a large decorative body with the letter "A" in the design appears in the center of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302, which can surprise the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that there is something good. The back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 are provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the appearance is improved by luminescent decoration by the plurality of LEDs. At the same time, it can attract the attention of the player.

As shown in FIG. 167, the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3301 are positioned so as to overlap the rear of the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the state of the appearance position. As a result, a large decorative body consisting of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be luminescently decorated by the first pattern 3111, so that the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3301 can be decorated. It is possible to show the player a deeper decoration by the three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the light emission display of the plane by the first pattern 3111, which can give a strong impact to the player and attract the interest of the player. It can be strongly attracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back rear upper first decorative portion of the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper effect unit of the back unit is moved to a descending position while facing forward. .. FIG. 162 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back / rear / upper second decorative portion is directed forward in a state where the back / rear / upper movable decorative body in the back / rear / upper staging unit of the back unit is moved to a descending position. .. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back rear left movable decoration body and the back rear right movable decoration body in the back rear lower staging unit of the back unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back front lower middle decorative body in the back front lower middle effect unit of the back front lower effect unit of the back unit is raised.

FIG. 165 shows a light emitting decoration of the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front left decoration unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made it made. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated. In FIG. 167, the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated, and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear lower staging unit are moved to the appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back front staging unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparently, under normal conditions. , As shown in FIG. 134, through them, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, and the back front lower production unit of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. 3160 back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo The decorative body 3167, the back rear upper movable decoration 3210, the back rear left side decorative body 3220, the back rear right side decorative body 3230, etc. The staging image displayed on the staging display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of 2500.

More specifically, the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 are located near the left side portion of the center accessory 2500, and about half of them are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. .. Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144 and the like of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are located near the right side portion of the center accessory 2500, and a part of the back front right decoration unit 3140 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower effect unit 3160 extends to the left and right at the lower part of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of the back front lower effect unit 3160 is good through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized.

Further, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The upper part of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 is the center character. It is located within the frame of 2500. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 is located in the lower left corner of the game area 5a outside the center accessory 2500.

Further, since the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 of the back-back-up effect unit 3200 is located in the ascending position, it extends to the left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of it can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 faces the back / rear / upper first decorative portion 3211 having a plurality of 7-segment portions to the front.

The back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 are in the state of the rear retracted position of the back front lower effect unit 3160, and can be visually recognized from the front (player side). It is impossible.

The game board 5 has a back-front effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100, the back-back upper effect unit 3200, the back-back lower effect unit 3300, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 of the back-back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161 it has five 7-segment portions. The back-rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the ascending position to the descending position while the back-rear-upper first decorative portion 3211 is kept facing forward. As a result, most of the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the back / rear / upper first decorative portion 3211 can be visually recognized in good condition. At this time, by variablely displaying the five 7-segment parts of the back-back upper first decoration part 3211, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the desired numbers and patterns are displayed in the five 7-segment parts. Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the player can be thrilled.

Further, as an effect using the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, after moving the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 to the descending position while facing forward, as described above. In addition, it is rotated 180 degrees around the axis in the left-right direction to turn the back-back upper second decorative portion 3212 having a plurality of character strings forward. As a result, since the characters of "JACKPOT" face forward, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a "big hit", and the expectation for an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as an effect using the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around an axis in the left-right direction, the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are intermediate. Either the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 or the back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 may be stopped rotating forward by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation at the site. As a result, depending on whether or not the "JACKPOT" of the second decorative part 3212 on the back and back faces forward, the player can be thrilled and excited, raising the player's expectation and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, as an effect using the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, while the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 is used, the back / rear / upper second decorative portion 3212 is directed forward by rotating it 180 degrees around the axis in the left-right direction. You may do so.

Further, as an effect using the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, the tips of the respective tips are separated from each other and downward. From the state of the retracted position where they are located, on the base end side of each, rotate and raise each other in opposite directions around the axis extending back and forth so that the tips of each rise and touch each other. Is moved to the appearance position where it is in contact. As a result, in the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302, one large decorative body in which the letter "A" is designed is generated in the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the staging display device 1600. Since it will appear in the center of the game, it can surprise the player greatly, attract the player's attention strongly, and I think there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as an effect using the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 in the back front lower effect unit 3160 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Or rotate it. As a result, in the lower part of the center in the game area 5a, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rotates, so that the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game. Can be increased. Further, since the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is provided directly above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rotates or moves up and down to play a game. It is possible to urge a person to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002, and to enjoy the original game ball B driving operation of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as an effect using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front left lower decorative board. By appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the 3130, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left band decoration part 3127c, etc. are emitted. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect to decorate. For example, in the back front left logo decoration unit 3121, the first front left logo decoration unit 3124c, the first back left logo decoration unit 3124d, the second back left logo decoration unit 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration unit 3126d are sequentially arranged. By decorating with light emission, it is possible to show a light emission effect like a neon sign flowing back and forth, which can entertain the player.

Although not shown, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also perform the same light emission effect as the back front left decoration unit 3120, and can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back The back front right first decorative board 3148, the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150's plurality of light guide plate LEDs in the front right decorative unit 3140 are made to emit light, and the first pattern is emitted. The 3111 is displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). As a result, the large first pattern 3111, which is a design of the letter "A", is emitted and displayed in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the player think that there is something good.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the first pattern 3111 is displayed by light emission, and the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 are displayed. The decorative body 3302 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the first pattern 3111 and the large decorative body formed by the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to raise the expectation for.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, a plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are appropriately emitted. The second pattern 3112 is light-emitting and displayed (light-emitting decoration). As a result, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer in the back front lower right inner decoration unit 3160. Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward from the upper part of the five decorative bodies of the decorative body 3166 are displayed in light emission, the player can produce a light emission effect as if it were a searchlight from below on the concert stage. It can be shown, and the inside of the game area 5a can be shown brilliantly to entertain the player.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the back front in the back front lower effect unit 3160 with the second pattern 3112 being emitted and displayed. The upper end portion or the whole of the lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 may be luminescently decorated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the line group 3114 that is light-emittingly displayed in the second pattern 3112 may be light-emittingly decorated. As a result, the line 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 becomes the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, and the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165. It is possible to make the player feel as if the light emitted from the decorative body such as the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. is displayed, and it is possible to show the player an unprecedented light emitting effect and entertain. can.

Further, although not shown, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be displayed by light emission, and the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to the descending position. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the back / rear / upper movable decoration 3210 is illuminated by a searchlight from below, so that the back / rear / upper movable decoration 3210 can be made to look gorgeous and entertaining. can.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect and the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, various effects can be used to make the player. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to input detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. The circuit 1310d, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error display, and the game board 5 It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a where the section is formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly treated as being affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is performed without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

Further, the main control MPU1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "main") that updates a special random number to be used for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit with built-in control".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit, when the main control MPU1310a is reset, first, a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU1310a with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to do.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. Large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting, accessory winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2007. , The loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the loss opening 2008, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, and the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. , And the detection signal from the vibration sensor that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are (without going through), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the input circuit. On the other hand, each of the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor. The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , The accessory winning port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, each drive signal is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the function display unit is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. 1400 status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, first special hold number display, second special symbol display, second special hold number display, round display, Each drive signal is output to, without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that this launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when launching is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that reverses the launch permission logic when firing is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor are used. The detection of the game ball B by 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2402 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2402. Further, since the game ball B launched in the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the detailed description of the main control MPU 1310a will be described later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201) to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cutout detection sensor 574 is paid out. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the firing timing control circuit, the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is satisfied, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are connected based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that the two are electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching is not output toward the game area 5a, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, a RAM, various I / O interfaces, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various types. A peripheral control ROM that stores processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC. I have.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door side drive data for outputting, and door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the frame decorative drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the bump output detection sensor 375 of the staging operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and is provided with a top center speaker, a top side speaker, etc. on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 controls to play sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Direction display control unit]
The staging display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the staging display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a production display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the staging display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the staging display control unit 1512 is input to the staging display device 1600, the staging display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the staging display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is used as the basis for the drawing data. As the main scan, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 171 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 171, the terminals of the various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from, it is omitted because it is easy to see the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 and electricity. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front thereof, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm). The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are projected rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooled fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring drawer recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at the position (position having). When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof, and a volume control button. The position corresponding to 2271510d is a closed, almost horizontally long rectangular area (to be exact, a convex area with the volume control button 2271510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. The 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed by protruding. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are located at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control button 2271510d, respectively. It is formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control button 2271510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume control holes 1501ac8 are exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front surface thereof. A position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular areas (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The cover body 1501 is formed so as to project toward the opening side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 have connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. It will be exposed from each.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front surface thereof. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can communicate with the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and close the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501a) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) inserted into the through hole 1503a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503. The protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable. In a flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data are arranged in parallel to the effect display device 1600, and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wire from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hanging portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , And the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. Each of the 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and the 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 has a wiring pattern formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. The 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The bearing surface of the metal pan head screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The periphery of the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to insert the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the 1501a. In this state, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting boss projecting portions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal. The bearing surface of the pan head screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the ground of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

In this way, in a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. Is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control button 2271510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and at the same time, the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume control button 2271510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the gaps formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The area (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gap formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), and the volume control button 2271510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan small, but when the wing of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, this rotation sucks air through the wing and surrounds it. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are projected forward (on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

The base flat plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side of the base plate 1502a so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connector CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted. Since it protrudes from 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 warps and peripherals due to the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at the position where it does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being broken.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cc and 1502cad are formed at the corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cc and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, with the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf in contact with the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 is referred to as a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Datachment), hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”. ), And the peripheral control IC1510a in which various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various types that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player). Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data (effect data) that defines the progress of the program and the effect in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred and stored. A SDRAM 1510c composed of a SRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can be used, a slide-type volume control button 2271510d that can adjust the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown) that can be powered even when the power is turned off. It is provided with a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying data, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) for creating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip. It also has the functions of the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (excluding the functions of various ROMs).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, and the like, and is of 256 Mbit (or 128 Mbit). The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Examples of various serial I / O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Synchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, SPI communication or I2C communication is used to provide an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame. Drive data can be transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids that communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data for the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN7) provided in the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Is transmitted, signals from various sensors (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3) are received. It receives signals from (communication) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the position of the origin are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object provided on the game board 5 side (connector CN6) are sent from the GPIO. It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer data to the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards are further provided. I have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal methods include a plurality of types such as an RGB method, an LVDS method, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) method, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) method, and a clockless method. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that uses, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, LEDML1 is further located near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 is located near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 is located near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 is located near the special connector SCN2. , Is equipped. In the peripheral control board 1510, various voltages (+ 24V, + 12V, and + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied via the interface 635. LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 24V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 24V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided include connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connector SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket, respectively.

By inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it into the socket and the plug. Fits. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface of the machine 1. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the back surface of the 1501a.

By inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug can be separated. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range (direction between the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (the function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) and the like. Including.). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high-speed transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by the inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x as the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. This makes it possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, whereby the progress of the game effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, to the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state does not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey that you are approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration that is performed while waiting for the player). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the boards of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x on the surface (mounting) of the peripheral control board 1510. (Surface) The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in 1510x and pushed in. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely established. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism capable of, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position).

[7-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the mounting surface) 1520x and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 to be formed, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the metal (not shown) is not shown in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510. Dimensional dimensions provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinged hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, a state in which the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw into which an anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea and the sealed portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 is inscribed. The front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been enhanced.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and is on the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engaging portion 1502ca side) formed in the game panel 1100 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the above-mentioned assembly method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 covers the peripheral control board 1510). It is also possible to fix the body 1501 to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the above-mentioned is pushed is absorbed, and the plug and the socket can be used. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to surely form a transmission path between the boards of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its surroundings. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines with different gaming specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as a staging display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these two types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of the various boards.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 172, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, angles in multiple directions. The surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is originally kept in a lighting state in a state where + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which + 5V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the control ROM 1510b brightly, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin can be matched. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the state of the IC pin. Are arranged in a distributed manner so that the data can be visually recognized, that is, a large area where the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pin can be substantially confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be modified into a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the above. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state in a state where + 24V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state where + 24V is supplied, but the surface (mounting surface) of the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. ) The special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on the 1520x. The special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. A region larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (a shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). They are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be. As a result, the inter-board connector can be modified by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having a function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are printed on the surface of the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAM 1510c1, so that the model and the state of the IC pin of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the DRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and the state of the IC pin can be confirmed from multiple angles. The regions are dispersed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state in a state where + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which + 12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1) is further provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility between the surface of 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). It is possible to confirm the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Is also suitable for use as lighting. When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space thus formed.

Further, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted with respect to the region of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the periphery thereof. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the generated light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. As the reflective portion (not shown), a colored paint having a gloss may be used in addition to the colored paint having a bright color such as white, or a metal sheet having a gloss may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so that a ball path composed of these is arranged. In, the game balls rub against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and be affected by noise. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that invades through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Noise can be removed by flowing it to a substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[7-5. Implementation of control ROM]
Here, a method of mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and is a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless type package attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 174 is a view taken along the line P of FIG. 173 (a). FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an outline of the positional relationship between the through hole formed on the peripheral control board and the through hole formed on the conversion board. FIG. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and a ROM socket having a leadless type package mounted on a conversion board, and is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless type package attached to the ROM socket (a top view). b).

First, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 176, a plurality of pads 1510v having a rectangular shape are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is arranged, and a predetermined distance dimension is formed. They are arranged in two rows at a distance of only one. Specifically, the pad 1510v is a read-type ROM to which a control ROM 1510b having a read-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter may be referred to as a “lead-type package”) is attached / detached. It is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both sides in the longitudinal direction of the socket. The lead terminal of the read-type ROM socket is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the lead-type ROM socket is attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) Fixed to 1510x. The pad 1510v is arranged in the vicinity of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface side such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged. A surface showing the attributes of the electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The side notation is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that is more noticeable than green (for example, component number 1510v1 and control ROM 1510b of the control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173 (b). Position (inner area indicated by symbols (L-shaped symbols) indicating the four corners) 1510v2, mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangular symbol (Δ))) 1510v3).

Further, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the surface on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted may be hereinafter referred to as “non-mounting surface”) 1510y includes resistors, capacitors, and various electronic components mounted on the back surface side. In addition to the IC, the attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the part number of the back-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is placed (furthermore, the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, The back side notation part indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. It is printed on the resist by silk printing.

In the present embodiment, the control ROM 1510b having a read-type package has a storage capacity of 256 Mbits, and has 35 lead terminals (70 lead terminals in total on both sides) from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the outside. ) Is protruding.

The control ROM 1510b has a read-type package, but if the supply is insufficient or the production is discontinued, it is necessary to substitute a control ROM 1510b with another package. However, when the package is changed, the leadless type (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter, may be referred to as "leadless type package") is a leadless type package. Since the lead terminal does not protrude from the side and the connection terminal is arranged on the bottom of the leadless type package, it is necessary to correct the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v and the wiring pattern routing to the pad 1510v, which is called a package change. For this reason, it is necessary to manufacture the peripheral control board 1510 even though there are no electrical problems in the other circuits.

Therefore, the pad 1510v is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both sides in the longitudinal direction in the read-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having the lead-type package is attached and detached. By forming it on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and changing the target to be soldered to the pad 1510v, a mechanism capable of responding to the change of the package is adopted. That is, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, it is not necessary to modify the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 and the wiring pattern routing to the pad 1510v (shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v, to the pad 1510v). It is a mechanism that can be used in common (with the same wiring routing), and 35 pads 1510v per row are arranged in two rows with a predetermined distance dimension apart, and the peripheral control board. It is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510.

As described above, the number of lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is 70 in total, whereas the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package are on the bottom surface of the leadless type package. 56 (the number of connection terminals may be smaller than 56) is arranged, and the number is small. This is a power supply terminal to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, a ground terminal to be electrically connected to ground (circuit ground) (GND), and an NC terminal that is not connected (non-connection). This is because the number of lines is decreasing.

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from the read type package to the leadless type package, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the control ROM 1510b having the leadless type package can be detached from the ROM socket 1510s and the terminal. It is possible to cope with this by using a conversion board 1510t whose number is changed. The ROM socket 1510s can be attached to and detached from the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type by using a dedicated tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and a plurality of lead terminals 1510sc. ing. The mounting portion 1510sa mounts a control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, and the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb and 1510sb mounts a control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package on the mounting portion 1510sa. When placed, it is in an open state, whereas when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is placed and held on the mounting portion 1510sa, the upper surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is placed. Is rotated and held so that a force acts toward the bottom surface in a closed state.

When the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb and 1510sb are closed, the force acting on the upper surface of the control ROM 1510b having the leadless type package toward the bottom surface is maintained, and the leadless is mounted on the mounting portion 1510sa. The state in which the 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b having the mold package and one end of the corresponding lead terminals 1510sc (56) are electrically connected is maintained.

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are soldered and fixed to pads 1510ta (56) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t formed so as to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm). It has the same shape as the rectangular shape), its size is the same, and the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm). The distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to small.

The outer shape of the conversion board 1510t is a plate shape having a rectangular shape, which is larger than the outer shape of the IC package, and is almost the same as the outer shape of the read type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having the read type package is attached and detached. There is.

The plate thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the plate thickness (1.6 mm) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are , Non-mounting surface) A green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on a layer (copper plane) on which a pad 1510ta, a wiring pattern, and a land are formed on 1510y. .. The conversion board 1510t may be described as a through hole (hereinafter, “through hole”) having a wiring pattern electrically connected lands formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. ) Are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to have conductivity. The holes of the through holes other than the end face through holes 1510tb, which will be described later, are filled with an insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the holes of the through holes are the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface). ) It is processed so as to be flush with 1510ty, and together with the land, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that has closed the through-hole holes are completely covered with a green coating film (“resin filling”). ).

As shown in FIG. 174, on both sides of the conversion board 1510t in the longitudinal direction, the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package protrudes outward from both sides in the longitudinal direction in the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b is attached and detached. Semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of lead terminals, and the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb is plated with copper to have conductivity. The end face through hole 1510tb is formed into a circular shape at the time of manufacture and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. In the end face through hole 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t, respectively.

The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces in the longitudinal direction of the conversion board 1510t are arranged at the same positions as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package, and are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) The distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads of the pads 1510v formed in 1510x is the same (for example, 0.8 mm).

As described above, the difference between the control ROM 1510b having a read-type package and the control ROM 1510b having a leadless-type package is a power supply terminal to which an external control power supply is electrically connected and a ground (circuit ground). This is the number of ground terminals that are electrically connected to (GND) and NC terminals that are not connected (non-connection). Therefore, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, the number of connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a through-hole type package, and the number of power supply terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals are used. To match, the wiring pattern is routed so as to be electrically connected to the end face through holes 1510tb so that the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having the lead type package are arranged.

Returning to FIG. 173, a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, and a total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces in the longitudinal direction of the conversion board 1510t. As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the point (center point) where the line connecting the center of the upper side and the lower side of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t and the line connecting the center of the left side and the right side intersect. And the point (center point) where the line connecting the center of the upper side and the lower side of the ROM socket 1510s and the line connecting the center of the left side and the right side intersect with each other (including the case where they almost match). , The pad 1510ta and the end surface through hole 1510tb are arranged apart from each other with a predetermined distance dimension zd as a clearance so as not to be in electrical contact with each other.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t in the longitudinal direction include the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb and the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Is soldered so that the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact with each other (that is, the conversion board 1510t is the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is,). Mounting surface) It is surface-mounted on 1510x and fixed in a state without gaps).

The surface of the exposed copper portion on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered (coated with solder) by a solder liberator and is exposed. It is treated to protect the surface of the copper part and improve the wettability during mounting. The solder liberator for the conversion substrate 1510t may be a water-soluble flux.

The lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Is soldered, it is in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is in a state of being electrically conductive. This is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface of the pad 1510v is treated by a solder leveler and pre-soldered (coated with solder), and the conversion board. Since the land of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510t of 1510t is also treated by a solder liberator and pre-soldered (coated with solder), the end face through hole 1510tb When the inner peripheral wall 1510tba and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered, the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. This is because the land is in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The solder liberator for the peripheral control board 1510 may be a water-soluble flux.

In the end face through hole 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t, respectively, but the lands may not be formed. In this case, the clearance is predetermined so that the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through hole 1510tb and the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the end face through hole 1510tb do not electrically contact each other. It is preferable that they have a distance dimension zd (for example, 0.5 mm or more) and are arranged apart from each other. Further, in this case, a lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb may be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. The shape of the lower pad is smaller than the shape of the pad 1510v (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 1). It has a rectangular shape of .5 mm to 1.6 mm × 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm), and the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads is the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Is the same as (for example, 0.8 mm). As mentioned above, this lower pad is soldered (coated with solder) by a solder liberator, and is treated to protect the surface of the exposed copper part and improve the wettability during mounting. It has been subjected. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb. When the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered, the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is in surface contact with the pad 1510v. It becomes electrically conductive. Further, with this configuration, the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) When the lower pad formed in 1510ty is soldered, the pad 1510v can further increase the peeling strength of peeling from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface side such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged. A surface showing the attributes of the electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The side notation is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that stands out against green (for example, the position where the component numbers 1510s1 and ROM socket 1510s of the ROM socket 1510s are arranged). (Inner area indicated by symbols (L-shaped symbols) indicating the four corners) 1510s2, mounting orientation of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbols indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangular symbol (Δ))) 1510s3).

The total number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is 56, whereas the total number of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 56. The number is 70, which is larger than the number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Further, as described above, the shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. And the size is also the same. Further, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t. Contact area between the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is smaller than the joint area), it is formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t and the land (or land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. Instead, the bonding strength between the above-mentioned lower pad) and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is the pad 1510ta formed on the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Compared to the joint strength with, it is higher.

Therefore, when the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peeling strength that the pad 1510ta peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is peripheral. Lands formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the control board 1510. In this case, the pad 1510v is smaller than the peeling strength at which the peripheral control board 1510 is peeled off from the base material.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peeling strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Since the pad 1510v formed on the mounting surface) 1510x is smaller than the peeling strength of the peripheral control board 1510 peeling off from the substrate, the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s. Since the pad 1510ta formed in the above can be peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t Since the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the formed land can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 Damage can be prevented.

On the other hand, the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is easily deformed because it is a thin metal wire when a force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction. The load applied to each of the lead terminals 1510sc is increased, and a force is applied to peel off the wiring pattern formed on the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the conversion board 1510t. As a result, there is a high possibility that pattern peeling will occur in the soldered portion on the ROM socket 1510s side having a thin metal wire, but the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and Soldering of a land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and a pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Part) can be said to have a low probability of pattern peeling.

As described above, the ROM socket 1510s is not directly mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing the damage of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. can do. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component on the peripheral control board 1510, can be changed to a new mode to improve convenience.

Further, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are as described above. In both cases, a green resist layer is formed by the green coating film, and the colors are unified. In this way, by making the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), the existence of the conversion board 1510t can be made difficult to understand with respect to the peripheral control board 1510, and it is a target of fraud. It can be difficult to have the recognition of.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting direction of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the arrangement position of the first terminal (triangular symbol (Δ))) 1510v3 is opposed to the green color of the resist. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. As a result, when the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t have the same color (green), it is difficult to know the arrangement direction of the conversion board 1510t when mounting, so a white resist that is easy to recognize for the green resist is used. The direction of the conversion board 1510t can be easily understood by indicating the 1-pin location (arrangement position of the first terminal). That is, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a pin location (first terminal arrangement position) and the conversion board 1510t also has a pin location (first terminal arrangement position), the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t have one pin location. Even when the resist has the same color (green), the direction of the conversion substrate 1510t can be easily understood.

Further, the through-hole holes other than the end face through-holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t are filled with an insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole holes are the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty are processed to be flush with each other, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closed the through-hole holes are coated with a green coating film together with the through-hole lands. It is completely covered (filled with resin). As a result, by eliminating the metal exposed portion of the through hole, it is possible to avoid contact with the metal exposed portion of the through hole formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble.

This will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 175. For example, as shown in FIG. 175, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not overlap by chance. When they happen to overlap, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t are electrically connected to be electrically connected, and in order to avoid this, conversion is performed. The holes of the through holes formed in the substrate 1510t are filled with the above-mentioned resin.

Further, for example, when a board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted is provided with a connector for connecting to the peripheral control board 1510 and the board is electrically connected by connecting to the connector on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the board is mounted. The control ROM is close to the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the influence of external noise becomes strong. On the other hand, the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment is connected by the above-mentioned soldering in a state where the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are in surface contact with each other. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be kept away from the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, so that it is less likely to be affected by external noise.

Further, the number of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 70 in order to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package, whereas the number of pads 1510v is 70. The number of connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a package is 56 on the bottom surface of the leadless type package (the number of connection terminals may be as small as 56). Therefore, the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is not connected (non-connection) in advance to the lead terminal of the control ROM 1510b having a read type package, for example. In some cases, the number of NC terminals is excessive as a result. Due to the presence of the excess pad 1510v, it is formed on the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t). It has the effect of reinforcing the land to be soldered and the soldered portion of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the strength of the joint surface of the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Can contribute. That is, the number of NC terminals is increased, and the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the land formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t). The joint surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the soldered portion with the pad 1510v) is strengthened.

Further, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t is a land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t (or the lower pad described above instead of the land). Since they are connected by (copper foil), the bonding strength can be increased compared to soldering using a simple pad. The soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad having only the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t). ) And the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. Since the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side is connected by the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) (copper foil) formed in 1510ty, the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side is compared with the soldered portion on the conversion board 1510t side. The structure can have a strong bonding strength.

Further, the shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm × 0. It has the same shape as the 5 mm rectangular shape), its size is the same, the distance dimension between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm), and the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion substrate 1510t. ) The distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510ta formed on 1510tx is smaller than the distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , It is longer than the distance dimension (pitch) between the pads. The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are the same as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 0). It is 0.8 mm). The distance dimension of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t (that is, the distance dimension between both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t) is a pad formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Of the distance dimension between the two rows of 1510v, it is larger than the inner distance dimension of the pad 1510v between the two rows and smaller than the outer distance dimension of the pad 1510v between the two rows, and further. It is longer than the distance dimension between the two rows of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t. As a result, the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510. By lengthening the pitch of the joint portion between the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect of preventing bending of the peripheral control board 1510 can be enhanced. Further, in order to enhance the bending prevention effect of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, the board thickness of the conversion board 1510t can be increased.

Further, a soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (a soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and a soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (conversion board 1510t). On the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the formed soldered portion with the pad 1510v can be surface-mounted in a state where the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact with each other. It is a structure that can be done. As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without a gap, so that the distance from the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be increased. It can be a connection method that is resistant to noise.

Further, the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510. By soldering the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, it is electrically connected via this solder. As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without a gap, so that the distance from the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be increased. It can be a connection method that is resistant to noise.

Further, the through-hole holes other than the end face through-holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t are filled with an insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole holes are the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty are processed to be flush with each other, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole hole are coated with a green coating film together with the through-hole land. The conversion board is completely covered (filled with resin), and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 can be surface-mounted in a state of surface contact, so that the conversion board is connected without a gap. It is possible to prevent a short circuit between the 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, although the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, there is a possibility that a human hand intervenes in this work and accidentally damages the control ROM 1510b and the wiring pattern. Therefore, when the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the control ROM 1510b or the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the conversion board 1510t is removed from the peripheral control board 1510 and replaced with a new one. The peripheral control board 1510 can be used as it is (the same one).

Further, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, when the ROM socket 1510s is damaged or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and replaced, only the smallest unit ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t are required.

Peripheral control to be soldered to the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 is arranged in the vicinity of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. Since the peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC having a large package and is a surface mount type electronic component, such a surface mount type electronic component is particularly vulnerable to the deflection of the substrate (the connection terminal and lead terminal of the electronic component are vulnerable). It may come off from the surface of the board). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, it is possible to reinforce the deflection of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, even if the control ROM 1510b having a read-type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is a conversion board 1510t provided with a removable ROM socket 1510s. Can be supported by mounting on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 and the pad 1510v can be changed. It is not necessary to modify the wiring pattern routing (the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v and the wiring routing to the pad 1510v are the same), and the wiring pattern can be used in common.

Further, the control ROM 1510b is controlled when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, when a sampling inspection (sample) for inspecting the presence or absence of a defect is performed in the manufacturing process, and when the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a dedicated tool. Even when the ROM 1510b is caught in the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peeling strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as described above. In addition, since the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is smaller than the peeling strength of peeling from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, the conversion soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t by peeling off the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the board 1510t from the base material of the conversion board 1510t. Since the pad 1510v formed on the (mounting surface) 1510x can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented. As a result, the conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted is removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the conversion board 1510t on which the new ROM socket 1510s is mounted is mounted on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) It may be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510x, and can be used without replacing the peripheral control board 1510 itself with a new peripheral control board 1510.

Further, since the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and fixed in a state without a gap, the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and its periphery It is possible to make it difficult to illegally arrange electronic components with respect to the gap between the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x.

Further, when changing from the control ROM 1510b having a read type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, as described above, it is necessary to use the conversion substrate 1510t, but the thickness of the conversion substrate 1510t is different. As described above, since the peripheral control board 1510 is thinner than the plate thickness (1.6 mm) (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm), the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box). The predetermined height distance dimension from the upper surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is also converted at the maximum. The thickness of the substrate is about 1510 tons, and it is possible to maintain high noise resistance against noise invading from the cover body 1501.

Further, as described above, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s by using a special tool when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused or when a sampling inspection (sample) for inspecting the presence or absence of a defect is performed in the manufacturing process. Is done. That is, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted uses a dedicated tool from the ROM socket 1510s when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused and when a sampling inspection (sample) for inspecting the presence or absence of a defect is performed in the manufacturing process. Will be removed. When changing from the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, as described above, although it is necessary to use the conversion board 1510t, the lead terminal is directed to the outside from the conversion board 1510t. Even if a person who is doing the work of removing the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s by using a special tool accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, the conversion board 1510t is not projected. Unlike the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package, the lead terminal does not bend, and it is possible to prevent the lead terminal from becoming unusable.

Further, as described above, end face through holes 1510tb having a semicircle shape are formed on both side surfaces of the conversion substrate 1510t in the longitudinal direction, and the diameter of the holes of the end face through holes 1510tb is the surface (mounting) of the conversion substrate 1510t. Surface) The pad 1510ta formed on the 1510tx is formed so as to have substantially the same width dimension (0.5 mm) as the shape (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm). Instead of this, the diameter of the hole of the end face through hole 1510tb is changed to the width dimension of the shape (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t. The size may be larger than (0.5 mm) (for example, 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm). In this case, the end face through hole 1510tb has an arc shape shorter than that of the semicircle.

Further, the pad 1510v is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals protruding outward from both side surfaces in the longitudinal direction in the lead type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having the lead type package is attached and detached. By forming it on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and changing the target to be soldered to this pad 1510v, a mechanism that can respond to the change of the package was adopted, but other You may adopt the mechanism of. For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of the lead-type ROM socket 1510s'to which the control ROM 1510b having the lead-type package is attached / detached to the pad 1510v are soldered (that is, 70). The conversion board 1510t'to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is soldered is mounted on the mounting portion 1510sa'of the ROM socket 1510s'. , The pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb'and 1510sb' are closed. The mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the plurality of lead terminals 1510sc' are the mounting portion 1510sa of the ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173 (a), and the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb. , 1510sb, since the functions are the same as those of the plurality of read terminals 1510sc, the description thereof is omitted here.

Pads, wiring patterns, and lands to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is soldered are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx'and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t'. A green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on a layer (copper plane). The conversion board 1510t'may be described as a through hole (hereinafter, referred to as “through hole”) having a wiring pattern electrically connected lands formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. .) Are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to have conductivity. The holes of the through holes are filled with an insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the holes of the through holes are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx'and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty'. One end and the other end of the insulating resin that closed the hole of the through hole are completely covered with the green coating film (resin filling) together with the land.

Further, protrusions protruding downward are formed at both ends of the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty'of the conversion substrate 1510t'in the longitudinal direction, and pads are formed on the protrusions. This pad is arranged at a position corresponding to the lead terminal 1510sc'of the ROM socket 1510s', and a total of 70 pads are formed by 35 at one end and 35 at the other end.

A conversion board 1510t'to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is soldered is placed on a mounting portion 1510sa'of a ROM socket 1510s', and a pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb'and 1510sb' are closed. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the point (center point) where the line connecting the center of the upper side and the lower side of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' and the line connecting the center of the right side of the left side intersect. The points (center points) where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the ROM socket 1510s and the lines connecting the centers of the left side and the right side intersect are arranged so as to coincide with each other (including cases where they almost match).

When changing from the control ROM 1510b having a read type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, it is necessary to correct the board control number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the board control number of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. Will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 177. FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c) are schematic views showing board control numbers of peripheral control boards. Since the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it becomes necessary to change the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 177 (a), a foil removal region KBRGN (that is, a wiring pattern) is placed on a predetermined position (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510) of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. On the formed copper foil surface, a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern) is formed, and a common part of the control number (a common part of the control number (region) is left-justified in the foil removal region KBRGN. In the figure, “XYZA”) is used as the board control number to form the foil removal character KBNUM in the wiring pattern, and the foil removal area KBRGN is formed by the green resist liquid solidly applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. Each of the foil-free characters KBNUM is covered.

When the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, for example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), a laser marker is used to left in the foil removal region KBRGN. Following the foil-free letter KBNUM placed in the packing, the symbol HKBNUM (alphabet A in the figure) is printed (drilled to a predetermined depth from the surface along the symbol HKBNUM), and a conversion board is used with a laser marker. For each substitution (including restoration) of 1510t, the substrate control number (“XYZAA” in the figure) can be obtained by printing the symbol HKBNUM after the foil removal character KBNUM. The board control number may be changed by erasing a part of the foil-free characters with a laser marker, or the board may be erased by erasing a part of the foil-free characters and adding characters. You may change the control number.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the foil removal character KBNUM is formed by the wiring pattern using the common part of the control number (“XYZ-” in the figure) as the board control number, and the foil removal area KBRGN is formed. Is another region, and the foil removing regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are formed in the vicinity region (in the figure, directly below the foil removing region KBRRGN), and symbols are formed in the foil removing regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 (in the same figure). The foil-removed characters are formed by a wiring pattern as alphabetic characters A, B, and C), and the foil-removing area KBRGN and the area RGN1 are formed by a green resist liquid that is solidly applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. , RGN2 and RGN3 are covered, respectively. Perforations are formed around the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 by a router so that the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510. In the state where the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from the peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC". When changing from the control ROM 1510b having a read type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, any one, two, or all of the areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are removed from the peripheral control board 1510. By doing so, it can be used as a board control number.

The peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power supply creation circuit (not shown) for creating various power supply voltages. In this power supply creation circuit, various electronic components are mounted on a board having a rectangular shape, and the back surface side of this board is It is in a state of being directly soldered in a state of being in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) of this substrate is covered by being crimped so as to sandwich the end pieces of the substrate by a metal cover body. When the board of the power supply creation circuit is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is not a removable electronic component, but if the power supply creation circuit is damaged, the board of the power supply creation circuit is replaced and a new board is replaced with a peripheral control board. The peripheral control board 1510 itself is replaced instead of being directly soldered in a state of being in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510.

It should be noted that conventionally, a gaming machine provided with an effect control board on which an electronic component such as a ROM is mounted has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0061], FIG. 5)). However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the method of mounting electronic components on the control board.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game, is provided. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM in which effect data is stored, is mounted, and a ROM. The conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted, is provided. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, a position 1510v2 for arranging the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion boards 1510t are mounted so as to overlap each other, is formed. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

As described above, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing the damage of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component on the peripheral control board 1510, can be changed to a new mode to improve convenience.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game, is provided. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM in which effect data is stored, is mounted, and a ROM. The conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted, is provided. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, a position 1510v2 for arranging the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion boards 1510t are mounted so as to overlap each other, is formed. The conversion board 1510t is a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a solderable first plate surface portion, and the conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a second plate surface portion. It has an inner peripheral wall 1510tba of a side through hole 1510tb formed on both side surfaces, and the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t are a lead terminal 1510sc which is a lead terminal portion of the ROM socket 1510t and a first conversion board 1510t. The pad 1510ta, which is a plate surface portion, is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering), and the peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is the peripheral control of FIG. 173, which is the plate surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510. The pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 and the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the side through hole 1510tb which is the second plate surface portion of the conversion substrate 1510t are connected (soldered). (Electrically connected).

As described above, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing the damage of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component on the peripheral control board 1510, can be changed to a new mode to improve convenience.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game, is provided. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM in which effect data is stored, is mounted, and a ROM. The conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted, is provided. The conversion board 1510t is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t of FIG. 174, which is a first terminal portion for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. Inside the side through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t, which is the second terminal portion for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the mounting surface on which the pad 1510ta and the ROM socket 1510s are mounted. A peripheral wall of 1510 tba is provided. The first terminal portion and the second terminal portion have different modes, and the second terminal portion is electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510 via solder. Has been done.

As described above, the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, thereby reducing the damage of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s. be able to. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component on the peripheral control board 1510, can be changed to a new mode to improve convenience.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the backup power supply, the power supply supplied to each control board, and the like will be described. The substrate ground (GND) of various substrates and the substrate ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island facility in the game hall. It is plugged in. In the island equipment of the game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are supplied as one group to each of the AC power supplies (AC 24V) for one transformer. For example, in the island facility of the game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group. Since a system is adopted in which an AC power supply (AC 24V) is supplied (by a total of five transformers), a transformer having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC power supply (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on, while the power switch 630a is used. When is turned off, the AC power supply (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is not supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off. The power switch 630a is normally maintained in the ON-operated state, and when a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall starts business, the breaker installed in the game hall is turned on (turned on) to turn on the island of the game hall. The power of the pachinko machines 1 installed in a plurality of rows in the equipment is turned on all at once. Then, after the business is closed, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall turns off (turns off) the breakers installed in the game hall to shut off the power of the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows in the island equipment of the game hall all at once. conduct. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows in the island facility of the game hall, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or off individually, for example, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When the power switch 630a is sometimes turned off and the power switch 630a is turned on again when the maintenance is completed, the pachinko machine 1 in which some trouble has occurred is to be solved by a clerk in the game hall, etc. The case where the person in charge of the power switch 630a is turned off and the power switch 630a is turned on again when the trouble is solved can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 178, the power supply board 630 includes fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, noise suppression circuit 630b, rectifier circuit 630c, power supply destruction circuit 630g, power factor improvement circuit 630d, smoothing circuit 630e, and power supply, in addition to the power supply switch 630a. It is provided with a creation circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power supply (AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V”)) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is an interface board via the power supply board 630 regardless of the ON operation / OFF operation of the power switch 630a. It is supplied to 635, and is supplied from the interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the noise suppression circuit 630b via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and the power switch 630a, and noise is generated in the noise suppression circuit 630b. Will be removed. The AC24V from which noise has been removed is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, and is rectified (converted from alternating current to direct current (AC-DC conversion)) in the rectifier circuit 630c to become a direct current power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a DC + 35V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) having an improved power factor is created in the power factor improving circuit 630d. Will be done. The created + 35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, and the + 35V ripple is removed and smoothed in the smoothing circuit 630e. This smoothed + 35V is supplied to the power supply making circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to the power supply destruction circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, a large current exceeding the allowable current upper limit (predetermined breaking current) is passed through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to blow them from the island facility of the game hall. It electrically cuts off the supplied AC24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit (disruption current) flows in the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portion of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is blown and the AC24V to the subsequent fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. To shut off.

The power supply creation circuit 630f to which the smoothed + 35V is supplied includes a + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, a + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and a + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc. The + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa creates DC + 5V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb creates a direct current + 12V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc creates a direct current + 24V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which + 5V is applied and supplied is a + 5V power supply line, and the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power supply. The line and the power supply line (power supply system) to which + 24V created by the power supply board 630 is applied and supplied become the + 24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”), and the capacitor BC1 is used for payout control in the payout control board 633. A backup power supply is supplied to the RAM built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”).

+ 5V of the power supply making circuit 630f + 5V created by the power supply making circuit 630fa is supplied to the payout control board 633. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes a + 5V power supply line in the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and is a RAM with a built-in payout control via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the power supply terminal of. The + 12V created by the + 12V power supply making circuit 630fb of the power supply making circuit 630f is supplied to the + 5V making circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V from + 12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source to be a control power source for the main control MPU 1310a. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control board side creation + 5V”) is created by the main control board side in the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h + 5V power supply. It becomes a line and is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. The + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the + 5V (created by the main control board side + 5V) created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 are electric. They are not connected to each other and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 633. That is, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply of the discharge control built-in RAM which is forward by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1.

As described above, in the capacitor BC1, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply making circuit 630fa of the power supply making circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is electrically returned from the payout control board 633 and again from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. + 5V is supplied and can be charged by various connection methods. As a result, when the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the payout control MPU633aa does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 at the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The stored contents of the RAM with built-in payout control are retained.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 has a built-in main control of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, the + 5V (created on the main control board side + 5V) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is forwarded by the diode MD0 to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. , Current flows toward the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0.

In this way, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical connection method in which + 5V (+ 5V created on the main control board side) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, + 5V created on the main control board side is supplied and can be charged. As a result, + 12V created by the + 12V power supply creating circuit 630fb of the power supply creating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is + 5V. When (main control board side creation + 5V) cannot be created, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 633. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 at the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but the main control is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. The stored contents of the built-in RAM are retained.

[8-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the power supply mainly supplied to the payout control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board will be described.

The three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, respectively, created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are as shown in FIG. 178. Of these three types of power supplies, two types of power supplies, + 12V and + 24V, are supplied to the payout control board 633, and are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The three types of power supplies created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are transferred to the interface board 635. In addition to being supplied, the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like are supplied via the interface board 635, respectively.

The three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., are blown by the overcurrent flowing to each of these power supply lines. A + 5V fuse (not shown), a + 12V fuse (not shown), and a + 24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like, respectively.

In particular, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line are monitored for a decrease in potential by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the potential of the + 12V power supply line and the potential of the + 12V power supply line decrease. When the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The payout control MPU633aa performs a payout control unit power cutoff process in the payout control unit power on time process described later to stop the payout progress (operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball). Will be done.

Therefore, when a + 12V fuse (not shown) and a + 24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, the main control board 1310 constituting the main board is provided. When the payout control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635 and the door frame main are in the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line such as the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame clothing relay board 105. An electrical trouble to the relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. may cause a leakage current or a short circuit (short circuit), resulting in an interface board 635, a door frame main relay board 104, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the door frame clothing relay board 105 and the like, the + 12V fuse and the + 24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105 and the like are blown. be able to. As a result, the drop in the potential of the + 12V power supply line and the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is mainly controlled by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It is not necessary to output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later, and the payout can be continued. The control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on time process described later.

The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 via a fuse for + 5V, a fuse for + 12V, and a fuse for + 24V, which are not shown. ing.

The + 5V fuse (not shown) has a capacity that includes the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the + 5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used by the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510. It is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around the + 5V power supply line. The + 5V fuse (not shown) is supplied via a + 5V fuse (not shown) when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 5V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element portion of the + 5V fuse (not shown) is blown. The + 5V power supply line to the following is cut off.

The + 12V fuse (not shown) is used for the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent board such as various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is preset in consideration of the current and the current used in the succeeding device via the peripheral control board 1510, and the current flows up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the peripheral control board of the + 12V power supply line. Can be done. The + 12V fuse (not shown) is supplied via a + 12V fuse (not shown) because the element portion of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line peripheral control board flows. The + 12V power supply line to the following is cut off.

The + 24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity of the + 24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 in consideration of the current used in the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510, and the + 24V power supply line peripheral control board. A current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current). When the peripheral control board 1510 uses + 24V to provide an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) with a + 24V system driver circuit, the peripheral control board in the + 24V power supply line has a capacity of a + 24V fuse (not shown). The current used by the 1510 itself and the current used in the succeeding substrate via the peripheral control board 1510 are added and set in advance. The + 24V fuse (not shown) is supplied via a + 24V fuse (not shown) because the element portion of the + 24V fuse (not shown) is blown when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the + 24V power supply line peripheral control board flows. The + 24V power supply line to the following is cut off.

The + 5V fuse, + 12V fuse, and + 24V fuse, which are not shown, are the original fuses to which the + 5V power supply line, the +12 power supply line, and the + 24V power supply line are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to the succeeding board, and the current flowing through them. Is large and may generate heat. Therefore, each electronic component (for example, micro) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 is prevented from being affected by the heat generation and causing a failure due to the thermal shutdown built in the IC. It is preferable to place it away from the processor, VDP, etc.), and the power supply near the connector to which + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the interface board 635 (particularly, the power supply to which + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the interface board 635). It is preferably placed near the connector of the terminal to which the line is connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 has a direct current of 3.3 V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3 V”) as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the staging display control unit 1512 from + 12 V supplied through a + 12 V fuse (not shown). It is equipped with a control power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates). The + 3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the staging display control unit 1512 via the control power supply fuse (not shown). The + 3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) becomes the + 3.3V power supply line in the peripheral control board 1510 via the fuse for the control power supply (not shown). The control power supply creation circuit (not shown) is via a + 5V power supply line and / or a + 24V fuse (not shown) supplied through a + 5V fuse (not shown) except for a + 12V power supply line supplied through a + 12V fuse (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows through the + 24V power supply line and is blown, it is a local power supply that becomes the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 from + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. Since it is possible to create .3V, the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 do not stop and continue to operate, and when the + 24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the + 24V system electrical drive source Although it becomes difficult to drive the (drive solenoid), the progress of the production can be continued.

In addition to + 3.3V, the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) includes a plurality of control power supplies (for example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter, “DC 1.5V”) corresponding to each device such as a control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as a local power supply. It may be described as "+ 1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter, described as "+ 1.25V"), etc.). In this case, the control power supply fuse (not shown) is provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, + 3.3V fuse for + 3.3V and +1 for + 1.5V). A fuse for 5V and a fuse for + 1.5V are provided for + 1.25V, respectively, and become a + 3.3V power supply line via a + 3.3V fuse and a + 1.5V power supply line via a + 1.5V fuse. It becomes a + 1.25V power supply line through a + 1.25V fuse).

The capacity of the control power supply fuse (not shown) is preset by taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +3.3 V power supply line and the current used by the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around the +3.3V power supply line. In the control power supply fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the +3.3V power supply line flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse (not shown) is blown and the control power supply fuse (not shown) is blown. The + 3.3V power line to the subsequent supply supplied via is cut off. When a control power supply fuse (not shown) is provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, a + 3.3V fuse for + 3.3V and a + 1.5V fuse for + 1.5V). When a + 1.25V fuse is provided for + 1.25V), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and this current when used in the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510 are added. The capacity is preset, and the current can flow up to the permissible current upper limit (disconnection current) of each power supply line peripheral control board of multiple control power supplies, and the permissible power supply line peripheral control board of each power supply of multiple control power supplies. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the current upper limit flows, the element portion of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies is blown, and the blown control power supply fuse (not shown) is used. Shut off the power line of the control power supply to the subsequent supply.

The fuse for the control power supply (not shown) is the main fuse of the + 3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc., and the current that flows is large and may generate heat. It is preferable to dispose of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 away from the specific electronic component so as not to cause a failure due to a thermal shutdown built in the specific electronic component due to the influence of this heat generation. It is preferably placed in the vicinity of the power supply creation circuit (particularly, in the vicinity of the terminal that creates +3.3V and supplies it as a +3.3 power supply line).

In the present embodiment, the + 5V fuse, the + 12V fuse, the + 24V fuse, and the control power supply fuse, which are not shown in the peripheral control board 1510, are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses and are predetermined. When a current exceeding the allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows, it blows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, even if the current drops, the power line is supplied to the following. It is an electronic component that cannot be used.

The peripheral control board 1510 may be a lead type fuse instead of the SMD type chip fuse as the + 5V fuse, the + 12V fuse, the + 24V fuse, and the control power supply fuse (not shown). Further, as the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown), a + 5V fuse, a + 12V fuse, a + 24V fuse, and a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used as the control power supply fuse. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current will be performed again. On the other hand, a power supply line can be supplied.

Of the three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, + 5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit (not shown) via a + 5V fuse (not shown), and + 24V is + 24V (not shown). + 12V is supplied to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 via a fuse, and + 12V is supplied to the + 12V system electricity of the game board 5 via a + 12V system fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls a target drive source (drive motor), and may be described as a plurality of decorative boards provided in the game board 5 (hereinafter, "each decorative board of the game board 5"). .) Are supplied respectively.

The + 5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity in consideration of the current used by the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 in the + 5V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, and its capacity is preset. A current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current). In the + 5V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 5V power supply line succeeding board flows, the element portion of the + 5V fuse (not shown) is blown and supplied via the + 5V fuse (not shown). Cut off the + 5V power supply line to the following.

The + 12V fuse (not shown) includes the current used by the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 excluding each decorative board of the game board 5 in the + 12V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, and each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity is preset in consideration of the current used in the above, and the current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the trailing moving board of the + 12V power supply line. In the + 12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line succeeding board flows, the element portion of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the + 12V power supply line to the following.

The + 24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity in consideration of the current used by the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 in the + 24V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, and its capacity is preset. A current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current). In the + 24V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power supply line succeeding board flows, the element portion of the + 24V fuse (not shown) is blown and supplied via the + 24V fuse (not shown). Cut off the + 24V power line to the following.

The + 5V fuse, + 12V fuse, and + 24V fuse, which are not shown, are fuses that supply a + 5V power supply line, a +12 power supply line, and a + 24V power supply line. Compared to fuses and + 24V fuses, the current that flows is small, but the current is large and heat may be generated. It is preferable to place it away from electronic components such as a + 12V driver circuit (not shown) so that a failure due to shutdown does not occur, and it is in the vicinity of the connector to which + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (especially the periphery). It is preferably arranged near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the control board 1510 is connected.

In the input buffer circuit (not shown), a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 is input, and noise is removed from the input control signal. It is output to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) and a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is for + 5V (not shown) for a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. One end of the resistor to which + 5V supplied via the fuse is applied and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are configured as a circuit that is electrically connected to multiple wirings (harnesses). The noise resistance can be improved by removing the invading noise.

The + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) includes a driver IC that drives the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and a fuse that cuts off the overcurrent to the driver IC (hereinafter, "+ 24V system driver circuit (not shown)". It may be described as "a fuse provided in"), and it is mainly composed of. The + 24V supplied via the + 24V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) is the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) in the + 24V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the above, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side (disconnection current). The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) is shown by melting the element part of the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows. Does not cut off the subsequent + 24V power supply line supplied through the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit.

The + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) is a driver IC that drives the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off the overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter, "to the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown)). It may be described as "a fuse provided"), and it is mainly composed of. The + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) is the current used in the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) in the + 12V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the above, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side (disconnection current). The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) is shown by melting the element part of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows. Does not cut off the subsequent + 12V power supply line supplied through the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit.

In the present embodiment, the fuse for + 5V, the fuse for + 12V, the fuse for + 24V, the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit, and the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit, which are not shown on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, are surface-mounted. It is a type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and it blows when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows. Even if the current drops, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the following. An SMD type chip fuse is used as a + 5V fuse, a + 12V fuse, a + 24V fuse, a fuse provided in a + 24V system driver circuit, and a fuse provided in a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) of a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Instead of, a lead type fuse may be used. Further, as a fuse provided in a + 5V fuse, a + 12V fuse, a + 24V fuse, a + 24V driver circuit, and a + 12V driver circuit (not shown) of a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, an SMD type or a lead type fuse is used. A resettable fuse such as the thermista of the above may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current will be performed again. On the other hand, a power supply line can be supplied.

The + 12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and monochromatic LEDs provided in the game board 5 via a + 12V fuse (not shown) (hereinafter, "various LEDs of the game board 5"). ) Is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit capable of passing a constant current through various LEDs of the game board 5 and a maximum current of the current flowing through the various LEDs of the game board 5. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. If the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with the input buffer circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit.

The + 12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5 in consideration of the current used in each decorative board of the game board 5, and is decorated on the game board side. A current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the board (disconnection current). The + 12V fuse (not shown) is supplied via a + 12V fuse (not shown) when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side flows, the element portion of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown. Cut off the + 12V power line to the following.

The + 12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies a +12 power supply line, and although the current that flows is smaller than that of the original + 12V fuse on the peripheral control board 1510, the current is large and heat may be generated. It is preferable to place the various LEDs away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit so that the various LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are not damaged by the influence of this heat generation, and the vicinity of the connector to which + 12V is supplied (particularly). It is preferably arranged near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which + 12V is supplied is connected.

In the present embodiment, the + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and has a predetermined allowable current upper limit (predetermined breaking current). When a current exceeding the current flows, the fuse is blown, and unlike a resettable fuse, once the fuse is blown, even if the current drops, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power supply line to the following. As the + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as a + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current will be performed again. On the other hand, a power supply line can be supplied.

The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the door frame clothing relay board 105 are described as door frame side drive boards (hereinafter, "each drive board of the door frame 3") provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter, not shown). (In some cases) and a plurality of decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") are supplied with the power required by themselves, and the power supply is supplied. The corresponding fuses (not shown) are provided on the substrate.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 has, for example, a + 24V electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) in addition to a fuse (for example, a + 5V fuse, a + 24V fuse, and a + 12V fuse) corresponding to the power supply. A fuse provided in a + 24V system driver circuit for drive control, a fuse provided in a + 12V system driver circuit for driving and controlling a + 12V system electric drive source (for example, a drive motor), and the like are also provided. The fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply has a preset capacity in consideration of the current used in each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Side power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (for example, door frame side + 5V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current), door frame side + 24V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current), door frame side + 12V power supply line Current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive board (disconnection current). The fuses not shown corresponding to the power supply are the upper limit of the allowable current of each power supply line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side + 5V power supply line drive board, the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side + 24V power supply line drive board, and the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the + 12V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (abnormal current) flows, the element part of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is blown, and the blown power supply is supplied via a fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power supply. The power line to the following is cut off.

The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit takes into account the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the + 24V system driver circuit in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is preset, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side (disconnection current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side flows in the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown and becomes a + 24V system driver circuit. The + 24V power supply line to the subsequent supply supplied through the provided fuse is cut off. The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is added with the current used in the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the + 12V system driver circuit in the + 12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the drive motor on the door frame side. As for the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side flows, the element part of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown and becomes a + 12V system driver circuit. The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply supplied through the provided fuse is cut off.

The fuse of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is preset in capacity in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3 in consideration of the current used in each decorative board of the door frame 3. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutting current) of the decorative substrate on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through a fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the element portion of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply is cut off through a fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3.

For example, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards of each drive board of the door frame 3 requires + 12V, the door frame 3 is provided with a + 12V fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive motor that is an electrical drive source. The + 12V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. The + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit is set in advance by adding the current used in the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the + 12V system driver circuit in the + 12V power supply line of the drive board. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutting current) of the drive motor on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side flows through the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit is blown through the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit. The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply is cut off.

Of each drive board of the door frame 3, a + 5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the + 12V driver circuit is provided (mounted or mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is input, and this is input. The noise is removed from the control signal and output to the + 12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is for + 5V for each of the plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3 to each other. One end of the resistor to which + 5V supplied via the fuse is applied and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are configured as a circuit that is electrically connected to multiple wirings (harnesses). The noise resistance can be improved by removing the invading noise. The same effect (that is, improvement in noise proof stress) can be achieved by using + 12V supplied through a + 12V fuse instead of + 5V supplied to this resistance.

Further, for example, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require + 24 V, the door frame 3 is passed through a + 24 V fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided in the above. The + 24V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. ing. The + 24V supplied via the + 24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit has the capacity in advance by adding the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the + 24V system driver circuit in the + 24V power supply line of the drive board. It is set, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the drive solenoid on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side flows through the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit is blown through the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit. The + 24V power supply line to the subsequent supply is cut off.

Of each drive board of the door frame 3, a + 5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the + 24V driver circuit is provided (mounted or mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is input, and this is input. The noise is removed from the control signal and output to the + 24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is + 5V for each of the plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the boards of each drive board of the door frame 3. One end of the resistor to which + 5V supplied via the fuse for use is applied and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are configured as a circuit that is electrically connected, and multiple wirings (harnesses) are provided. The noise resistance can be improved by removing the noise that has entered the circuit board. If + 24V or + 12V supplied through the + 24V fuse is also supplied instead of the + 5V supplied to this resistance, the same effect (that is, noise resistance) can be obtained even if the + 12V is supplied via the + 12V fuse. Improvement) can be achieved.

Further, for example, when one decorative board, a plurality of decorative boards, or all the decorative boards among the decorative boards of the door frame 3 require + 12V, the door frame 3 is passed through a + 12V fuse (not shown). Controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting of a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and monochromatic LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3"). It is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to various LEDs of the door frame 3 and a maximum current of the current to be passed to various LEDs and the like of the door frame 3. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. The + 12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity in consideration of the current used in each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the + 12V power supply line of the decorative board, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side (the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side). The current can flow up to the breaking current). In the + 12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative substrate on the door frame side flows, the element portion of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the + 12V power supply line to the following.

It should be noted that, among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, one decorative board is provided by the LED constant current drive circuit provided on the other decorative boards of the door frame 3 without the LED constant current drive circuit. When the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the self is controlled, a + 12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative substrate. Further, when the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with the input buffer circuit provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3, the input buffer circuit is placed in front of the LED constant current drive circuit. May be provided.

In the present embodiment, each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) is exceeded. It is an electronic component that blows when it flows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, it cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. As each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current will be performed again. On the other hand, a power supply line can be supplied.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to the payout control MPU633aa and the like. The payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 630, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control unit 633a, the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the like. The + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 558z. The +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied via the payout control board 633, and + 5V which is the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is created from this + 12V. In this embodiment, + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and + 5V created by the main control board side created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically provided. Since the circuit is configured so as not to be connected to, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310. The + 5V created on the main control board side created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V (+ 5V created on the main control board side) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control input circuit 1310b. The + 12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case of monitoring the voltage to be applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, respectively. Of the three types of power supplies, + 12V and + 24V, the two types of power supplies, + 12V and + 24V, are the succeeding boards of the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. It is supplied to various substrates such as. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, the power supply of + 12V has the same potential on various substrates, and the power supply of + 24V has the same potential on various substrates. Further, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. However, they have the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 has a + 12V fuse (not shown) and a + 24V fuse (not shown). A fuse is provided (mounted and mounted), and a + 12V fuse and a + 24V fuse (not shown) are provided (mounted and mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Has been).

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, as described above, the power supply of + 12V and the power supply of + 24V are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, + 12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the illustration provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510. The + 12V fuse and the + 12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same potential, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 has the same potential. + 24V, which is the power supply monitored in the above, a + 24V fuse (mounted or mounted) provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse for + 24V (not shown) provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounted or mounted). The + 24V fuse (not shown) has the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require + 12V, the above-mentioned As described above, it is supplied to a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive motor which is an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 via a + 12V fuse (not shown), and is supplied to each drive board of the door frame 3. When one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards require + 24 V, as described above, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 via a + 24 V fuse (not shown) (as described above). For example, it is supplied to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive solenoid (drive motor). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, + 12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 are provided ( A + 12V fuse (not shown) that is mounted and mounted, a + 12V fuse that is not shown (mounted and mounted) provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a door frame 3 drive. A + 12V fuse (not shown) provided on the board has the same potential, and is a power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. A + 24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 and a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 (mounted or mounted). The + 24V fuse (not shown) and the + 24V fuse (mounted or mounted) provided on the drive board of the door frame 3 have the same potential.

[9. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 180 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function, FIG. 181 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 182 is a circuit diagram. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the circuit of the payout control board 633 will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. The wiring to the power supply and the input signal board in the circuits of various boards will also be described as appropriate.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with + 12V from the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. In the supplied + 12V to + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 5V is created as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control board 1310. This local power supply, + 5V, has the same potential as the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As a local power source serving as a control power source for the main control board 1310 in the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 5V is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h as shown in FIG. 179. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V from the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and the 3rd terminal is used. + 5V with the noise component removed is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first rippled (folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). The AC component) has been removed and smoothed.

+ 5V output from the 3rd terminal is a capacitor MC1 and an electrolytic capacitor MC2 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. In the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. .. The + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. Further, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor MR0. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0, whereas the main control MPU 1310a is supplied. The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the above, via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, and the first start. The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a, etc. are the main control input circuit 1310b without the error detection function and the main control input circuit 1310b2 with the error detection function. Has been entered in.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 may be described as the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function (hereinafter, simply referred to as “main control input circuit 1310b”). It is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via.), And the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. It is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, and the like have an error detection function. It is input to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is also input to the payout control board 633 and the effect via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the display device 1600 or the like. The input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. Further, the detection signals from other sensors are input to the predetermined input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the main control input circuit 1310b or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function, respectively, and the input terminals become empty terminals. Is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) as an empty terminal process.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of the predetermined output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power failure clear signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The detection signals from other sensors may be input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC in addition to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, and are input terminals that are empty terminals in the port PC. Is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) as an empty terminal process. Like the input ports PA and PB, the port PC is composed of 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a are used. The input main control input circuit 1310b and the input main control input circuit 1310b will be described.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
As shown in FIG. 179, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input is created by a + 12V power supply line (+ 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) as shown in FIG. 179. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) which is supplied and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the resistance MR3. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is created on the main control board side + 5V power supply line. (A + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a + 5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 electrically connected to the main control MPU1310a, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

At the other end of the resistor MR2, one end is further aligned with the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and electricity in order to match the waveform of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633. It may be electrically connected to the other end of the connected capacitor.

Further, with respect to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side (+ 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) inside the main control MPU 1310a. An internal pull that is a created + 5V power supply line and is electrically connected by a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When electrically connected to the up resistor, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a without mounting the resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310. It may be electrically connected to.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, an A terminal, and a B terminal, and the B terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the COM1 terminal, The COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically connected. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are in a conductive state. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit, and the internal circuit of the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal is connected. It becomes conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is such that the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in an internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It will be the one that was done.

As shown in FIG. 179, one end of the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input is created by the main control board side created + 5V power supply line (+ 5V created circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310). Other than the resistor MR10 that is a + 5V power supply line and is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. In addition to being electrically connected to the end, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC10 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the resistor MR11 is provided. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR10 via. In addition to the resistance MR11, the base terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR12 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is a + 5V power supply line created by the main control board side (+ 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR13 electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) created and supplied in the above, and is mainly controlled via the logic inverting circuit 1310iv. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is a circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The logic inverting circuit 1310iv is composed of resistors MR14, MR15, MR16, and a transistor MTR11. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b is a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the power supply is created. + 5V power supply creation of circuit 630f Different from the power supply line created and supplied by circuit 630fa (that is, + 5V power supply line)) and electrically connected resistor MR13 is electrically connected to the other end and has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 via MR14. In addition to the resistance MR14, the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR15 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR 11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is a + 5V power supply line created by the main control board side (+ 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR16 which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) created and supplied in the above, and is input to the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a setting key signal via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. To.

For the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side (+ 5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310) inside the main control MPU 1310a. It is a + 5V power supply line created in, and is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, different from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line)). When electrically connected to the pull-up resistor, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a without mounting the resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. It may be electrically connected to the terminal). Further, for the other input terminals PA1 to PA4 and PA6 to PA7 of the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA, the main control board is inside the main control MPU1310a. Side-created + 5V power supply line (a + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is,). Even when it is electrically connected to the internal pull-up resistor electrically connected by (+ 5V power supply line)), one end of the resistor electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Without being electrically connected to the other end, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310, the collector terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 and PA6 to PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. You may try to connect

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit. Therefore, the voltage of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is the same. The resistance MR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b pulls it up to the + 5V side created on the main control board side, and the logic becomes HI, and the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. Along with this, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310, the transistor MTR11 of the logic inverting circuit 1310iv is turned off, and the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is turned off. The voltage is raised to the main control board side creation + 5V side by the resistance MR16 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and the setting key signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Will be entered in. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic that conveys the setting impossible state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in an internal circuit to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is LOW in its logic, and the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned off. Along with this, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side by the resistance MR13 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is turned on, and the collector of this transistor MTR11 is turned on. The voltage of the terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal whose logic is LOW is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Will be entered in. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the settable state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in.

When the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as described later. Therefore, it is pulled up to the power supply (+ 5V) side created and supplied by the + 5V power supply making circuit 630fa of the power supply making circuit 630f by the resistance PR50 of the payout control input circuit 633ab provided in the payout control board 633 described later, and will be described later. The transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided in the payout control board 633 is turned on, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the payout control board 633 from the RWM switch 633d. The logic of the main RWM signal becomes LOW and is input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d whose logic is LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned off and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is the main. The RWM signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It will be. That is, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic for transmitting the pressing non-operation state) and the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is input to PA0 (RWM signal input terminal).

On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as described later. The transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided in the payout control board 633 is turned off, and the voltage of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is the resistance MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided in the main control board 1310. The main control board side is created + 5V side, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. Along with this, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the logic becomes LOW. The RWM signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. That is, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the pressing operation state) and the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is input to (RWM signal input terminal).

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the logic of the setting key signal to that effect becomes HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is operated, The logic of the RAWM signal to that effect is HI. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the logic of the setting key signal to that effect becomes LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and if the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, that effect. The logic of the RAWM signal that conveys is LOW. That is, the logic that tells that the setting key switch 1311a is ON is operated and the logic that tells that the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is being operated are the same logic (HI), and the setting is made. The logic that tells that the key switch 1311a is turned off (not turned on) and the logic that tells that the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not operated are the same logic (LOW). There is.

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b with an error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here.

As shown in FIG. 180, the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input mainly comprises the processing circuit 1310b2a. The processing circuit 1310b2a is a + 5V power supply line created by the main control board side created + 5V power supply line (a + 5V creating circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) supplied via the VCS terminal, and is a + 5V of the power supply creating circuit 630f. The power supply line (that is, different from the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the power supply creation circuit 630fa) is supplied to various internal circuits as an internal power supply, and the ground (GND) of the various internal circuits is supplied via the GND terminal. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Further, the processing circuit 1310b2a is a power supply that monitors the power supply of the + 12V power supply line (that is, the power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) supplied via the VS terminal (that is, the + 12V power supply line). Based on the terminal circuit, the disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of disconnection based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal. A short-circuit monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a short circuit, and a comparison circuit that compares and determines the presence or absence of passage of a game ball with a predetermined threshold value based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal. , Power supply monitoring circuit, disconnection monitoring circuit, short circuit monitoring circuit, etc. Based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined and the processing at the time of abnormality is performed, and the inspection from each monitoring circuit It is equipped with an error output circuit that notifies that effect when an abnormality occurs based on the result, and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result by the comparison circuit.

When the error processing circuit determines that an error has occurred based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (at the time of error detection), the error output circuit indicates that effect (that is, the error has occurred) and the ER terminal. The logic to be output to the outside is set and controlled via the output circuit, and the stop of the comparison result by the comparison circuit output from the output circuit is set and controlled to the outside via the output terminal.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the + 12V power supply line), and the resistor MR50. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC50 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (ground of the substrate) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR50 in addition to being electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in order to adjust the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. It may be electrically connected to the other end of the.

The VCS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC51 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

One end of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a + 5V power supply line created by the main control board side (+ 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by 630fa, and is also electrically connected to the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a gate signal via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with an error detection function.

One end of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side (+ 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and is a + 5V power supply creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by 630fa, and is also electrically connected to the input port PB of the main control MPU1310a. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of. Further, the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the ER terminal of another main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function. That is, each signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with a plurality of error detection functions is OR-connected. The signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function is input to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a sensor error signal.

Here, when it is determined in the abnormal processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the disconnection monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (error). The state of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a at the time of detection) will be described. At the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a When the processing circuit determines that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is regarded as a power supply abnormality. The logic of is indefinite. At the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a When the processing circuit determines that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is determined to be at the time of disconnection. The logic is HI. At the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a When the processing circuit determines that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring result from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is regarded as a short circuit. The logic is LOW.

Further, when the processing circuit 1310b2a is determined to be in an abnormal state based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the disconnection monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (error detection). The state of the output terminal and the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a in (time)) will be described. When the processing circuit 1310b2a is determined to be in an abnormal state based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is regarded as a power supply abnormality. In order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a output from, the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the processing circuit at the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW. At the same time, the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to convey that it is an abnormal time.

At the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a When the processing circuit determines that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the disconnection occurs from the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a. In order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the output processing circuit 1310b2a, the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the processing circuit at the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW. At the same time, the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to convey that it is an abnormal time.

At the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a When the processing circuit determines that it is an abnormal time based on the monitoring result from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), it is regarded as a short circuit from the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a. In order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the output processing circuit 1310b2a, the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the processing circuit at the time of abnormality of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW. At the same time, the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a is set and controlled so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI in order to convey that it is an abnormal time.

[9-1-3. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 has two types: + 12V from the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 to + 12V and + 24V from the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 to + 24V. The voltage of is supplied via the payout control board 633, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU633aa of 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, and the like. When the power failure warning signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later and stops the progress of the game. Then, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power cutoff process in the payout control unit power on time process described later, stops the payout progress (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball), and surrounds the area. The control board 1510 backs up the effect information, and the effect display device 1600 can reliably complete the main control side power supply cutoff process by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power cutoff process by the payout control 633aa. , Create a power supply for the backlight to cut power consumption Turn off the inverter (not shown) and stop the progress of the production.

Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are created by a + 5V power supply line (+ 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) at one end. Other than the resistor MR20, which is a + 5V power supply line and is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the end and + 5V created on the main control board side is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component folded by voltage) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is a power supply line (that is, a + 24V power supply) created and supplied by a + 24V power supply line (+ 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f). It is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V monitoring voltage V1") of the line) with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used for the + 12V power supply line (power supply). + 12V power supply of the creation circuit 630f The monitoring voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V monitoring voltage V2”) of the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the creation circuit 630fb and the reference voltage Vref are used. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC21A, which is used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is a positive terminal, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. This D-type flip flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC 21 is , One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21. The + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground).

[9-1-3b. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 181, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, is created at one end by the + 24V power supply line (+ 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 that is electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, the + 24V power supply line), and the other end of the resistor MR22 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) at one end. The other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) are electrically connected to each other. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V fails or momentarily stops. When it becomes, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. At the same time, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. It is connected. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is mainly due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that is pulled up to the control board side creation + 5V side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the (board ground) side and whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 181, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, is created at one end by the + 12V power supply line (+ 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line), and the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). Are electrically connected, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V fails or momentarily stops. When it becomes, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. Electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that is pulled up to the control board side creation + 5V side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the (board ground) side and whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and transfers the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is the same. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), respectively, and thus the clock. There is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no such thing. As described above, the D-type flip flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 for monitoring a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, and a signal from the 7th terminal are input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is a power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The + 5V created on the main control board side applied to a certain Vcc terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). The negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310c. The power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic LOW via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the terminal is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is the main control output circuit. It is output from 1310c to the payout control board 633 as a payout power failure warning signal, and is also output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 181, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 via the resistance MR27. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to ground (ground) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is a resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU1310a.

For the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply created by the main control board side created + 5V power supply line (+ 5V created circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) inside the main control MPU 1310a. It is a line and is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected by a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When connected, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

Further, for the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board side created + 5V power supply line (created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) inside the main control MPU 1310a. An internal pull-up resistor that is a + 5V power supply line and is electrically connected by a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. Even when it is electrically connected to the main control board, one end is not electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side, that is, this resistor is used as the main control board. The collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without being mounted on the 1310.

In addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU1310a, the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side inside the main control MPU1310a for the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU1310a (main control). It is a + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the board 1310, and is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the + 5V power supply line). When electrically connected to the internal pull-up resistor electrically connected in, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. The collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor on the main control board 1310.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the transistor. The MTR 20 will be turned off, and the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side and the transistor. The MTR 20 will be turned on, and the switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side by the resistance MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC 22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU1310a. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the payout control board 633 as the payout failure warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistance MR30 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR31 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). There is. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and one end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistance MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR34 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). There is. The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and one end of the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), one end of the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. Is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the + 12V power supply line)). It is connected and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side. The front-stage transistor MTR21 is turned off, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is caused by the resistor MR32. By creating the main control board side and pulling it up to the 5V side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side created on the main control board side and the transistor. The MTR 21 is turned on, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is ground (GND) (board ground). By pulling it down to the) side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the + 5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on. .. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes LOW. The warning signal is input to the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC 22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) (board ground) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Further, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (ground) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), one end of the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 is a + 12V power supply line (power supply creation). + 12V power supply creation of circuit 630f Electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by circuit 630fb, and the peripheral control unit. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of 1511.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the transistor. The MTR23 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side and the transistor. The MTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 is input. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC 22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is obtained. Is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripheral control board 1510 input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is delivered to the payout control board 633. The main control output circuit 1310c has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is input to the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the input of the main control MPU 1310a. While it is electrically connected to the input terminal of the port PB, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is wired. In the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510, one end is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line via (harness). This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards 1310 between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Because it is mounted on the main control board 1310a, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using the main control board side creation + 5V which is the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a. Between the boards of the payout control board 633 and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main The power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using the control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU633aa, and + 12V, which is a DC power supply higher than, for example, + 5V, which is the control power supply of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310. In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, the control power supply creation circuit of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown), and the + 12V system driver (not shown) of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board. It is supplied to a circuit, an LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, a liquid crystal panel (backlight), a drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, and the like. There is. That is, the + 12V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the like, in addition to the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, for example, due to an electrical trouble to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, due to an electrical trouble. The potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing through the control power supply creation circuit (not shown), the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (backlight, drive circuit) (not shown) of the effect display device 1600. Due to an electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent flows to any of the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (backlight), the drive circuit, etc. (not shown) of the effect display device 1600. When the potential of the + 12V power supply line drops or the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is driven by the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or the game board 5). (While waiting for the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor)), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the figure. No. The potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing to the + 12V system driver circuit, or the decorative board of the game board 5 is caused by an electrical trouble for some reason to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5. The potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing through the LED constant current drive circuit. Further, wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, the decorative boards of the game board 5, etc., and the wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the boards. Even if a leakage current is generated or a short circuit occurs due to some kind of electrical trouble, the potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent. Then, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

Further, as described above, the power supply line (that is, the + 24V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 and the main control board. In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, the payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a + 12V power supply line via the payout control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. It is supplied to the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown). That is, since the + 24V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 constituting the main board, Even if the payout control board 633 is operating normally, when the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Or (while waiting for the drive of the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the + 24V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 The potential of the + 24V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing through the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) or the solenoid). In addition, there is some electrical trouble with the wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the + 24V power supply line, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. As a result, the potential of the + 24V power supply line drops even when a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs. Then, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection to + 12V power line and + 24V power line]
[9-1--4a. + 12V power supply line overcurrent protection]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the + 12V power supply line, as a countermeasure against overcurrent in the + 12V power supply line, a current can be passed through the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the peripheral control board of the + 12V power supply line. No + 12V fuse is provided, and the effect display device 1600 is provided with a + 12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the original allowable current as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is for + 12V. As the first branching system fuse that branches from the fuse to two systems, a + 12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the allowable current upper limit of the first branching system is provided, and the effect display device 1600 is provided with two systems from the + 12V fuse that is not shown. A + 12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the maximum allowable current of the second branch system is provided as a fuse of the second branch system that branches to the peripheral control board 1510, and a + 12V power supply line effect drive board maximum allowable current limit is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. A + 12V fuse (not shown) that allows current to flow up to is provided, and a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a fuse that allows current to flow up to the maximum allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side. Of each decorative board of the board 5, the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted is provided with a + 12V fuse (not shown) capable of allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side (note that the LED constant). A + 12V fuse (not shown) that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side may be provided to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the current drive circuit. ). For + 12V supplied through a + 12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse of the first branch system, a liquid crystal panel power supply is created by a liquid crystal panel power supply creating circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power supply is not shown in the effect display device 1600. Since it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit, it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 via a + 12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse of the first branch system. A liquid crystal panel power supply created from + 12V and + 12V supplied via a + 12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse of the second branch system are supplied.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, a control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line peripheral control board flows to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the + 12V fuse of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. It has become. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a + 12V fuse (not shown) so that the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line peripheral control board. Therefore, the main control board 1310 , The decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa is the payout control unit power on time processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the process of turning off the power of the payout control unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, a liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600 is used in the + 12 V power supply line of the effect display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch 1st system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) due to an electrical trouble to the power supply creation circuit, the fuse of the branch 1st system of the effect display device 1600 is used. A + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the fuse is supplied as a fuse of the branch second system via a + 12V fuse (not shown). When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch 1st system flows from + 12V to a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown), it is a fuse of the branch 1st system of the effect display device 1600 for + 12V (not shown). The fuse is blown, and due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 (not shown) for some reason, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, not shown of the effect display device 1600, When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch second system flows to any of the drive circuits and the like, the + 12 V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the branch second system of the effect display device 1600, is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of a + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a branch first system fuse, and a branch second system fuse. Among certain + 12V fuses (not shown), those having a larger capacity than any of the fuses and smaller than the combined capacity of both fuses are selected in advance. Therefore, the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, includes a + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a branch first system fuse, and a + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a branch second system fuse, in the + 12V power supply line. Of these, even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses is blown, if the overcurrent still flows in the blown fuse system and exceeds the upper limit of the original allowable current, the fuse may be blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, is the capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the first branch system fuse, and the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the second branch system fuse. When the capacity of the fuse is the same as that of the added one, the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, is the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the first branch system fuse in the + 12V power supply line. , Of the + 12V fuses (not shown) that are the fuses of the second branch system, if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, the overcurrent still flows in the blown fuse system and the upper limit of the allowable current is the main source. When the amount exceeds the above value, the fuse may be blown, and an overcurrent flows through the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the + 12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system. If it is blown, it will be blown. As described above, the effect display device 1600 has a + 12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, a + 12V fuse (not shown) which is a branch first system fuse, and a + 12V (not shown) which is a branch second system fuse. A + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a main fuse, a + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a branch first system fuse, and a + 12V fuse (not shown), which is a branch second system fuse, are blown due to an overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is sent to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It is not necessary to output to the control MPU633aa, the main control MPU1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off time processing in the main control side power on time processing described later, and the payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of the game. , It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on time process described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board is in the + 12V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. When the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is driven by the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown), the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waited for. (When), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side is exceeded to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown). When an overcurrent flows, a fuse provided in a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) is blown. The + 12V supplied through the + 12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 in addition to the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown). The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side of the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) and the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side for each decorative board of the game board 5. ing.

Since the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to drive, the effect of the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 are produced. Of the various LED light emitting effects by the game board 5, the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect by the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. It has become. Therefore, the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown first so that the fuse for + 12V (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 is blown first. The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are pre-selected, and the + 12V of the game board 5 is selected. For + 12V (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 so that the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued over the effect by the system electric drive source (drive motor). The capacity of the fuse is preset.

As a case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect of the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is larger than the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to be used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, and is not shown as the selected capacity. If a fuse smaller than the one obtained by adding the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is selected in advance, the + 12V fuse (not shown) is such that each decorative board of the game board 5 is a decorative board on the game board side. In the state of being used up to the upper limit of the allowable current, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown), which is not shown. Even if the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown, if an overcurrent still flows and the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line effect drive board is exceeded, the fuse may be blown. Further, for example, as the capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to be used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side is shown. If the same as the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is selected in advance, the + 12V fuse (not shown) is decorated on the game board side by each decorative board of the game board 5. In the state of using up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the board, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown). No. Even if the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown, if an overcurrent still flows and the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line effect drive board is exceeded, the fuse may be blown.

Of the effect of the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5, the + 12V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 is used. Contrary to the case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized over the effect by the motor), the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is higher than the light emission effect of the various LEDs. When the effect of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of 5 is prioritized and continued, the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown rather than blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are blown so that the + 12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board (5) is blown first. The capacity of the fuse provided in the game board 5 is selected in advance, and the effect of the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is prioritized over the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity of the + 12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is preset so that it can be continued.

Further, due to an overload or electrical trouble on the 12V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 for some reason, an overcurrent flows in the 12V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, and the + 12V system of the game board 5 When both the effect of the electric drive source (drive motor) and the effect of light emission of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are stopped, the + 12V system (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is stopped. Of the capacity of the fuse provided in the driver circuit and the capacity of the + 12V fuse of each decorative board of the game board 5 (not shown), whichever is smaller than the capacity of the fuse, the + 12V of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown. The capacity of the fuse will be set in advance.

In this way, by providing a + 12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 and providing a fuse in the + 12V system driver circuit (not shown), a + 12V fuse (not shown) and a + 12V system driver circuit fuse (not shown) due to overcurrent are provided. Is configured to be blown, so that the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is mainly sent by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It is not necessary to output to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on time process described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is performed in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5. Due to the + 12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, the overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the game board side is applied to each LED of the game board 5 and the decorative board of the game board 5. When the current flows, the + 12V fuse (not shown) on the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. A + 12V fuse (not shown) capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side is provided for all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. When provided, an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decorative boards of the game board 5 by a + 12V fuse (not shown) of all the decorative boards of the game board 5. And, the + 12V fuses (not shown) of all the decorative boards of the game board 5 are blown. As described above, among the decorative boards of the game board 5, a + 12 V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, and the + 12 V is not shown due to an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the game board side. Because the fuse is blown (in addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the + 12V power supply line is supplied to all the decorative boards up to the maximum allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. When a + 12V fuse (not shown) that allows current to flow is provided, a + 12V fuse (not shown) is provided on all the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the + 12V fuse (not shown) is provided due to an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the game board side. (Because the fuse is blown), the drop in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 suppresses the power failure warning signal. Is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. However, the payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on time process described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, and the game In the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the board 5, due to an electrical trouble to the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. for some reason. When a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs, and an overcurrent flows through the peripheral control board 1510, the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, and the like. The + 12V fuses (not shown) provided on each board are blown, thereby suppressing a decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the board 1310 does not require the power failure warning signal to be output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The progress of the game can be continued without the payout control MPU633aa, and the payout control MPU633aa pays out the payout without performing the payout control unit power cut-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later (payment of the game ball as a prize ball). The operation to be issued) can be continued. If a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to an electrical trouble to the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510 for some reason, an overcurrent flows through the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, an overcurrent also flows in the peripheral control board 1510, which is an upper board of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the + 12V fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is blown.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the + 12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the + 12V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3). (When), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor is applied to the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) and + 12V system driver circuit of the door frame 3. When it flows, the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side of the + 12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The + 12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 has an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side to the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) and the + 12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the fuse flows and the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, by providing a + 12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing a fuse on the + 12V system driver circuit, the + 12V system fuse and the + 12V system driver circuit fuse are blown by the overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be used for the payout control MPU 633aa, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is performed in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3. When the + 12V fuse of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted causes an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the door frame side to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and the decorative board of the door frame 3. , The + 12V fuse of the decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is blown. When a + 12V fuse that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side is provided for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 by the + 12V fuse of the all decorative board of the door frame 3, the door frame The + 12V fuses of all the decorative boards of No. 3 are blown. In this way, the + 12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the + 12V fuse is blown by the overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. (Note that regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the current is passed to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied. When a + 12V fuse is provided, the + 12V fuse is provided on all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 so that the + 12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the door frame side. ), The decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be used for the payout control MPU 633aa, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, a + 12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the like. In the line, due to an electrical trouble to each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc. for some reason, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and the door frame occurs. When an overcurrent flows through each drive board of 3 and each decorative board of the door frame 3, the + 12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are reached. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the supplied + 12V power supply line, the power failure warning signal does not have to be output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, and the payout control MPU633aa is a payout control unit power off in the payout control unit power on time processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the time processing.

[9-1-4b. + 24V power supply line overcurrent protection]
Further, in the present embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the + 24V power supply line, as a countermeasure against overcurrent in the + 24V power supply line, a current can be passed through the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the peripheral control board of the + 24V power supply line. No + 24V fuse is provided, and a + 12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the main allowable current upper limit is provided in the effect display device 1600 as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, and + 24V is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Power supply line effect Drive board A fuse for + 24V (not shown) that can flow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current is provided, and a current is passed to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side in the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. There is a fuse that can be used.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and / or the periphery in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power supply line peripheral control board flows due to an electrical trouble to the subsequent substrate of the control board 1510 for some reason, the + 24V fuse of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. It has become. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a + 24V fuse (not shown) so that the + 24V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power supply line peripheral control board. Therefore, the main control board 1310 , The decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa is the payout control unit power on time processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the process of turning off the power of the payout control unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 is succeeded in the + 24V power supply line of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. When the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) on the board (or waits for the drive of the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5). (While doing so), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side is set to the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown). When an overcurrent exceeding the current flows, a fuse provided in a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) is blown. The + 24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow when the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit (not shown) is blown, but an overcurrent still flows and the + 24V power supply line effect drive board allowable current upper limit is exceeded. In this way, by providing a + 24V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 and providing a fuse in the + 24V system driver circuit (not shown), a + 24V fuse (not shown) and a + 24V system driver circuit fuse (not shown) due to overcurrent are provided. Is configured to be blown, so that the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is mainly sent by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It is not necessary to output to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on time process described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, in the + 24V power supply line such as the peripheral control board 1510 and the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510 When an overcurrent flows through the succeeding board of 1510 or the like, a + 24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board is blown, so that the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 By suppressing the decrease in potential, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not require the power failure warning signal to be output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the power-off processing on the main control side in the above, and the payout control MPU633aa is paid out without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. (The action of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) can be continued.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is driven by the + 24V system driver circuit of the board (or waits for the drive of the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3). (When), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid is applied to the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the + 24V system driver circuit. When it flows, the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the + 24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side of the + 24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The + 24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 has an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side to the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) and the + 24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the fuse flows and the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, by providing a + 24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing a fuse on the + 24V system driver circuit, the + 24V system fuse and the + 24V system driver circuit fuse are blown by an overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be used for the payout control MPU 633aa, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each of the door frames 3 is used in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When an overcurrent flows through each drive board or the like of the door frame 3 due to a leakage current or a short circuit due to an electrical trouble to the drive board or the like for some reason, each board has a short circuit. Since the + 24V fuse provided is blown, the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is suppressed. Therefore, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU1310a and the payout control MPU633aa, and the main control MPU1310a continues the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power cutoff process in the payout control unit power on time process described later. Can be done.

[9-2. Circuit of payout control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU633aa, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with + 5V from the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the payout control MPU633aa The backup power supply supplied to the payout control built-in RAM is supplied as a payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

+ 5V of the power supply making circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 + 5V from the power supply making circuit 630fa is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h as shown in FIG. 182. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, + 5V from the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is ground (GND) (board ground) and electricity. + 5V with the noise component removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first rippled (folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). The AC component) has been removed and smoothed.

+ 5V output from the 3rd terminal is a capacitor PC1 and an electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). By being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa. When a momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). Since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 is large. (Capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is larger than the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). Has been selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 become the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. .. The + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. Further, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, via the resistor PR0, whereas the payout control MPU633aa is supplied. The diode PD0 prevents the pay VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the above, via the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutoff detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are all payout control. It is input to each of the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU633aa via the input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits.

The payout power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. Further, the detection signals from other sensors are input to the predetermined input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively, and the input terminals that become empty terminals are grounded (GND) as an empty terminal process. It is electrically connected to (board ground).

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are used. The payout control input circuit 633ab, in which the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal, is input, will be described.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is used in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. A function as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various stored (stored) information (game information), and a set value is selected in a predetermined period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It has both a function as a setting switching button that can be switched and a function as an error canceling button that can cancel the error when an error is notified after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 has terminals 1 to 4, and the terminals 1 and 2 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. At the same time, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are electrically connected. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the terminals 1 and 2 and the terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit, whereas the RWM switch 633d has a pressing operation. When the pressing operation unit is being pressed, the 1st and 2nd terminals, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit, and the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal and the 3rd terminal are connected to each other. The internal circuit with the 4th terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633.

As for the signal from the RWM switch 633d, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the terminals 1 and 2 and the terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected to each other in the internal circuit. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuits of the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals are electrically connected to each other to conduct the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633. ) (Board ground) and electrically connected.

As shown in FIG. 182, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d is input is a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply) whose one end is created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is electrically connected to the line), the other capacitor PC50 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 at one end. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 via the resistor PR51. In addition to the resistance PR51, the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance PR52, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU633aa. The signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa as the RWM signal 2 via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (the side opposite to the other end of the resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). Is electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac is composed of resistors PR60, PR61, and a transistor PTR60. The other end of the resistance PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistance PR51 (the side opposite to the other end of the resistance PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR60. In addition to the resistance PR60, the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance PR61 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and the main control input circuit 1310b (one end is a + 12V power supply line (power supply creation circuit 630f + 12V power supply creation) shown in FIG. 179. It is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the other end of the resistor MR2) electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the circuit 630fb. The payout control output circuit 633ac of the payout control board 633. The signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 in the above is input to the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) as the main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Disbursement power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 182, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, has a + 12V power supply line at one end (+ 12V of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40, which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the power supply creation circuit 630fb, and also via the resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to the resistor PR41, one end of the resistor PR42 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. Electrically connected to the end. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 creates a power supply. + 5V power supply creation of circuit 630f The power supply line created and supplied by the circuit 630fa (that is, the + 5V power supply line) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, and the output of the payout control MPU633aa. The payout power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the port PB. It is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU633aa. The other end of the resistor PR40 has a waveform of the payout power failure warning signal which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Further, in order to arrange, one end may be electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 183. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. FIG. 183 is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing a state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and the cover body and the base body are shown. It is a perspective view (b) of the main control board box which sealed with a sealing mechanism.

In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who tries to acquire an illegal game ball by making an illegal modification to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 composed of the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are caulked portions having a sealing mechanism. It is crimped by, for example, a one-way screw of 1303.

The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of the caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Needs to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state (illegal modification is performed) on the mounting surface (front surface) side and the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310. Whether or not it is installed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the next step is In order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Briefly explaining the method of assembling the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 faces (faces) the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. Arranged so that various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and a part of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 are exposed from the openings formed in the corresponding cover bodies 1301. Subsequently, fixing screws are inserted through the through holes formed at the four corners of the main control board 1310 from the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, respectively, toward the mounting boss holes formed at the inner four corners of the cover body 1301. The main control board 1310 can be fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301 by screwing it in. Subsequently, the base body 1302 is arranged at a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is moved in a specific direction (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. The outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301 by sliding toward (moving distance dimension sd), and the opening side of the cover body 1301 is completely closed to form the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by the above. Subsequently, by screwing the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 and caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed as shown in FIG. The control board box 1320 is sealed (ie, the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

The inner wall of the cover body 1301 has a rib portion 1301rb on the cover body side that can come into contact with the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. A plurality of pieces are formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance. Further, the base body 1302 is formed with a plurality of base body side rib portions 1302rb that can come into contact with the outer periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 at a predetermined distance. In a state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the cover body side rib portion 1301 rb in which a plurality of main control boards 1310 are formed in the cover body 1301 and the base body side rib portion 1302 rb formed in a plurality of base body 1302. It is in a state of being arranged (sandwiched) in the space formed by the above.

Further, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. ing. When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the protruding portion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the inserted force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending and bending further, and to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 from being broken or the solder from being peeled off.

[11. Setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a perspective view (a) seen from the front right diagonal of the setting key switch, a perspective view (b) seen from the front left diagonal of the setting key switch, and a top view (c) of the setting key switch. .. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a resin setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key is housed inside a resin outer cylinder (hereinafter, "resin type"). It may be described as "setting key switch 1311a") and a type in which a metal setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key into a metal tubular outer cylinder is housed. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The structure of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a are the same, but the materials are partially different.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a is set with respect to the non-conductive resin tubular outer cylinder 1311aa and the inside of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab to which a key is inserted and rotated is connected to an outer cylinder 1311aa, and a circuit for turning on or off a contact by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab is formed. A non-conductive resin rectangular base body 1311ac and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa are formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa and bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada projecting rearward of the base body 1311ac are composed of a metal frame plate 1311ad formed on both side surfaces (front side surface and rear side surface in the figure).

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially in the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. On the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, an insertion port 1311ab for inserting a metal setting key is provided. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the metal setting key is used when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a). Insert into the insertion port 1311aba at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the cylinder 1311ab (at a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port 1311aba having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). At the same time, it can be pulled out from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has two lead terminals made of copper separated from the side surface rotated by 90 degrees with the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad by a predetermined distance dimension on both side surfaces (in the figure, in the figure). It is formed on the right side surface and the left side surface).

In the figure, the COM1 terminal which is the upper lead terminal on the left side surface and the COM2 terminal which is the lower lead terminal on the left side surface are common terminals, and either one terminal or both ends can be used. The A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side surface, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side surface, are bases when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa. By the circuit formed in the body 1311ac, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically connected to conduct electricity, and the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the B terminal are electrically disconnected to be disconnected (this). (The signal of setting key OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted.) On the other hand, when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees from the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa, By the circuit formed in the base body 1311ac, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically disconnected to be cut off, and the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the B terminal are electrically connected to be conductive (the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal and the B terminal are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted). The distance dimension between the terminals of the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the distance dimension between the terminals of the A terminal and the B terminal have the same distance dimension.

The pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada projecting from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are mainly set key switches 1311a by being soldered on the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. It can be fixed to the control board 1310. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered on the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. On the back surface side of the base body 1311ac, when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the setting key is set so that the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in the figure. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the arrangement direction of the switch 1311a is formed so as to project. Due to this columnar protrusion, when the manufacturer operator mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, for example, the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down (wrongly) and soldered. It can be prevented from being attached.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key, a resin type setting key switch is used. As described above, since the outer cylinder 1311aa, the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the base body 1311ac are each made of non-conductive resin, the 1311a is connected to the A terminal, the B terminal, the COM1 terminal, and the COM2 terminal. There is no influence of.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a is a metal setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key into the metal tubular outer cylinder 1311aa and the inside of the outer cylinder 1311aa. The 1311ab has the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a in that the material in the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above is different. Further, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected to each other. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad is formed with a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, electromagnetic wave noise may invade the metal frame plate 1311ad.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As described above, an insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in FIG. 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a so as to be exposed. For example, a tubular rib portion 1301za (tube-shaped rib portion 1301za) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of the through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). Has the same thickness as the thickness of the cover body 1301). The inner circumference of the through hole 1301z and the inner circumference of the tubular rib portion 1301za communicate with each other so as to have the same inner peripheral surface without a step. As a result, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (that is, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a). It will be flush).

Since the through hole 1301z is also a portion where the finger or fist of a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a hits, the rib portion 1301za can increase the strength around the through hole 1301z. As a result, the circumference of the through hole 1301z is pushed by human force to bend the circumference of the through hole 1301z to increase the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or the circumference of the through hole 1301z is damaged and penetrated. Since it is possible to prevent the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab from being increased by increasing the outer diameter of the hole 1301z, for example, a person who illegally accesses the setting key switch 1311a can finger intentionally. Even if a fist is pushed around the through hole 1301z, it can contribute to preventing an elongated illegal tool such as a wire from being inserted in the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

The diameter of the through hole 1301z is set to fit inside the rectangular shape which is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the rectangular parallelepiped of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance dimension d1 (about 2 mm in this embodiment), and the metal frame plate of the setting key switch 1311a is separated. The 1311ad is configured so that it cannot be directly touched by a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, the “gap between the through hole 1301z of the cover body 1301 and the rib portion 1310za and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab”. Since it is formed, the gap is 1 mm.) ”Even if an elongated fraudulent tool such as a wire is inserted, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the rectangular body of the setting key switch 1311a. Since it is formed so as to fit inside the rectangular shape, the tip of the elongated fraudulent tool hits the surface of the base body 1311ac and bends so that it cannot invade toward the main control board 1310. That is, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being modified.

Further, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each molded of non-conductive resin, so that a person who is tentatively charged with static electricity sets the setting. Even if a finger is brought close to or touches the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is generated via the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the invasion of 1310. Further, the distance dimension d1 is between the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. Since the distance is only (about 2 mm in this embodiment), a person who is charged with static electricity may bring his or her finger close to or touch the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and its surroundings. However, since it becomes difficult for electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za, the main control board is passed through the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the invasion of 1310.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It is in the state of being done. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad is formed with a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. That is, if a person with static electricity brings his or her finger close to or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and its surroundings, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge will be generated as the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key. Since the cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, electromagnetic wave noise may invade the metal frame plate 1311ad. Therefore, if a person with static electricity brings his or her finger close to or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and its surroundings, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge will be generated by the metal frame plate 1311ad. There is a risk of invading the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (surface). Therefore, when the operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and its surroundings are used. For temporary placement, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged if the temporarily placed game board 5 is accidentally placed and the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and is overturned. can. Further, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (surface). Therefore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in or around the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the operator's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 and falls over during the work.

The front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (surface). Therefore, a protective cover (the protective cover is made of polycarbonate resin and is transparent) that protects the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). (Molded) may be provided on the cover body 1301.

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. 186 is a diagram (a) showing a mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, and is a main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. 1 is a diagram (1) (b) showing the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, and is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the solder surface (back surface) of the corresponding main control board. (Part 2) (c). FIG. 187 is a continuation of FIG. 186, and is a diagram (3) (d) showing a mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and a solder surface (back surface) of the corresponding main control board. It is a figure (4) (e) which shows the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which a setting key switch is mounted, and the solder surface (back surface) of the corresponding main control board.

In a state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, a plurality of main control boards 1310 are formed on the cover body side rib portion 1301 rb and the base body 1302. It is in a state of being arranged (sandwiched) in the space formed by the rib portion 1302rb on the body side. Further, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. The portion 1302p is formed. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the protruding portion 1302p is mainly controlled when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the inserted force. By abutting on the solder surface (back surface) of the substrate 1310, the main control board 1310 can be prevented from bending and bending any more, and the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 can be broken or the solder can be peeled off. It can be prevented.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the metal setting key is not inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or the setting key cylinder). When the 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned ON, and the pressing by the setting key is released by releasing the hand from the setting key))), as shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 The solder surface (back surface) of the above and the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p are separated by a distance dimension d2 (about 1 mm in this embodiment) as a clearance, and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed. The solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p do not come into contact with each other.

The protruding portion 1302p has a cylindrical shape and a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in the present embodiment, the same dimension as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is defined as a constant width dimension. There are those with.). Here, first, the routing of the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a will be described, and then the protrusion 1302p having a cylindrical shape and the protrusion 1302p having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 will be described.

[11-4-1. Wiring to the setting key switch 1311a]
As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the setting key switch 1311a is located near the lower side of the main control board 1310 and is a side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the insertion / removal reference position formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa). The side surface opposite to the lower side surface of 1311aaa) is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so as to be parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the insertion / removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the upper side of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, a long slot along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310 through which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1 and SLH2") having a pair of opposed lands having a shape are formed in the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. , Through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 (hereinafter, simply " It may be described as "through hole SLTH1, SLTH2"), and the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, which are two lead terminals formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, respectively. Through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 having a pair of lands (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4") and a pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 have a rotation angle of 90 degrees. It is formed on each of the main control boards 1310.

Further, a through hole SSTD capable of inserting a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the arrangement direction of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the back surface side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the main control board 1310. When the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the surface (surface) 1310x, it is on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting key switch 1311a and is surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2. It is formed in the area.

As shown in FIG. 186 (b), for example, through-hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a. A vertical linear wiring pattern SPTN1 that electrically connects the through-hole SLTH 3 through which the COM1 terminal is inserted and soldered is formed by being linearly routed along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. That is, since the vertical linear wiring pattern SPTN1 is linearly routed from the through hole SLTH 4 toward the through hole SLTH 4, its length is the minimum length.

Further, through-hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered and the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The left-right direction linear wiring pattern SPTN2 that electrically connects the through-hole SLTH 1 is formed linearly along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. That is, since the horizontal linear wiring pattern SPTN2 is linearly routed from the through hole SLTH3 to the through hole SLTH1 in parallel with the lower side of the main control board 1310, its length becomes the minimum length. There is.

Further, a through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the main control input circuit 1310b (one end thereof is mainly used) shown in FIG. 179. The other end of the resistor MR10 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the control board side, or the other end of the capacitor MC10 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground)) is electrically connected. A plurality of bending wiring patterns SPTN3 connected to the main control board 1310 are bent and routed in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there are no wiring patterns electrically connected to the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the main control board 1310 does not have various wiring patterns. It is electrically connected to the betagland (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 and the betagland (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. There is.

It should be noted that a predetermined input terminal (input terminal of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a is inserted from the through hole SLTH 1 to which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Various wiring patterns forming the setting signal transmission path up to PA5) are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. That is, the set signal transmission path is not interposed for a through hole for electrically connecting various wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and the main control board 1310 is mounted. Even if the surface (surface) 1310x can be visually recognized, it is not possible to know how each wiring pattern electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a is routed.

Further, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is arranged at a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid and moved in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd). The opening side of the cover body 1301 is completely closed. Therefore, when the base body 1302 slides and moves in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides and moves in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. It will be. During this slide movement, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p may come into contact with and rub against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to damage the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, various wiring patterns are not routed around the region where the protrusion 1302p slides and moves around the region. That is, when the protrusion 1302p slides and moves, the various wiring patterns are routed so that the protrusion 1302p does not straddle the various wiring patterns. Thereby, when the work of assembling the main control board box 1320 is performed, it is possible to prevent various wiring patterns from being damaged by the slidingly moving protrusion 1302p.

Through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and through hole through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. Various wiring patterns (for example, vertical linear wiring pattern SPTN1, left and right) in which the copper foil around the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the SLTH3 and the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is pulled out to form a setting signal transmission path. Copper foil around the directional straight wiring pattern SPTN2, bent wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.) is removed, and copper around the through hole SSTD through which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the placement orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The foil has been removed.

On the other hand, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, copper foils substantially around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are pulled out, and the longitudinal direction of each long hole is obtained. Thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed in the regions provided at both ends of the solder. Due to the thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern), the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are the main control board 1310 mounting surface (front surface) 1310x betta land (board ground) and solder surface (back surface) 1310y betta land (board ground) and electricity. It will be in a connected state. Further, the copper foil around the through hole SLTH2 to which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is removed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. At the same time, thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed. Through-hole SLTH2 is electrically connected to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x betta land (board ground) and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y betta land (board ground) of the main control board 1310 by a thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern). It will be in the state of being done.

As shown in FIGS. 186 (a) and 186 (b), various through holes (for example, lead terminals of electronic components) are inserted into the entire surfaces of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Those that are soldered and soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, those that electrically connect the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and the beta land (front surface) 1310x. A specific through hole (for example, a mounting surface (for example, a mounting surface (for example)) among those that electrically connect the GND) (board ground) and the betaland (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y and that fix electronic components). Insulated so as to cover the copper thin layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through holes are formed, except for the through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. A resist solution of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) having a property is applied to form an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side and an insulating coating film 1310yr on the solder surface side, respectively. On the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged has insulating properties for silk printing and is different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid (the present embodiment). Then, it is printed with a solid line by the paint (white). The color of the resist liquid may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black instead of green, and the color of the silk printing paint may be green, red, if the color is different from the color of the resist liquid. Any color may be yellow, orange, blue, white, or black.

The size of the region SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the region SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310). In this state, the line of the region SSLKSW1 (solid line of the square) is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the line (square solid line) of the region SSLKSW1 is not overlapped by the setting key switch 1311a.

[11-4-2. Projection having a cylindrical shape]
When the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p has a circular shape. As described above, the distance dimension between the terminals of the setting key switch 1311a between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the distance dimension between the terminals of the setting key switch 1311a A terminal and the B terminal have the same distance dimension. ing. The outer diameter of the protruding portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is smaller than half of the distance between the terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main control board box 1320 is being assembled. Even if the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p that slides moves comes into contact with (contacts) the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p that slides moves is the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The dimensions are such that they do not contact the land of the through-hole SLTH 1 through which the is inserted and soldered, and the land of the through-hole SLTH 2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the inserted force, the protrusion 1302p having a circular shape is formed. The front surface of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a circular shape and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other, a predetermined color having an insulating property on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (in the present embodiment). , Green) The solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr formed by applying the resist solution is rubbed by the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p, the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped off, and the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 is scraped. ) There is a risk of damaging the betagland (board ground) in 1310y.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), as shown in FIG. The region SINSy is formed. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the protruding portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protruding portion 1302p. .. The foil removal region SINSy, which has a circular shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction (movement distance dimension sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 as described above. be. At this time, the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides and moves in a specific direction (moving distance dimension sd) together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), a foil removing region SINSy having an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil has been removed may be formed in and around the region where the protrusion 1302p slides and moves. As a result, when assembling the main control board box 1320, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the protruding portion 1302p that slides (moving distance dimension sd), the main control is performed by the protruding portion 1302p. It is possible to prevent damage to the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310. The foil removal region SINSy, which has an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

[11-4-3. A protrusion having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
The protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in the present embodiment, the same dimension as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is defined as a constant width dimension. ), The front surface of the protruding portion 1302p has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. It should be noted that R portions are provided on both ends of the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, and have a circular shape. As described above, the distance dimension between the terminals of the setting key switch 1311a between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the distance dimension between the terminals of the setting key switch 1311a A terminal and the B terminal have the same distance dimension. ing. The outer diameter of the protruding portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape is smaller than half of the distance between the terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main control board box 1320 is being assembled. Even if the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p that slides moves comes into contact with (contacts) the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p that slides moves is the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The dimensions are such that they do not contact the land of the through-hole SLTH 1 through which the is inserted and soldered, and the land of the through-hole SLTH 2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the inserted force, it bends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. The front surface of the projecting portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the line and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other, insulation on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr formed by applying a resist solution of a predetermined color (green in the present embodiment) having a property is rubbed by the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p, and the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped. , There is a risk of damaging the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), a copper foil is removed from the region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts and the periphery thereof, and the length of the base body 1302 is long. A soldering region SINSy having a long rectangular shape along the direction is formed. R portions are provided on both ends of the foil removing region SINSy, and have a circular shape. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the protruding portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protruding portion 1302p. .. The foil removal region SINSy, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 as described above. At this time, the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides and moves in a specific direction together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), a foil removing region SINSy having an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil has been removed may be formed in and around the region where the protrusion 1302p slides and moves. As a result, when assembling the main control board box 1320, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the protruding portion 1302p that slides (moving distance dimension sd), the main control is performed by the protruding portion 1302p. It is possible to prevent damage to the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310. The foil removal region SINSy, which has an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

[11-5. Notification of the location of the RWM switch used to change settings]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in the main control board box 1320, and the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d is mounted is housed in the payout control board box 632, and the payout control board box 632 is on the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is attached to. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d can be separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and making the objects to which the boards are mounted different. .. When the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are collectively arranged on one board, only one board may be illegally modified, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate boards, and the board is mounted on a different target. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch are used. The security against 633d is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (following the control of the game preparation, the game is controlled). The control of the game preparation is the first step (main control described later) in which the set value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310. Following the determination in step S14 and the process in step S16A in the side power-on processing, and the first step, the RWM switch 633d of the payout control board 633 (here, a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value). It is composed of a second step (determination of step S216 in setting change processing described later, processing of step S218) in which a set value can be selected and switched based on the signal from). Following the control of the game preparation, the game control is composed of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

Although such security can be enhanced, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate boards, and the board is mounted on a different target. Since the 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not necessary to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located, whereas the RWM switch 633d which also functions as a setting switching button is arranged where. It may be difficult for the store manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. to understand whether or not the game hall is in charge because it may be unfamiliar.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, red translucent characters (height: 7 mm) are printed, "The RWM switch (setting change button) is on the payout control board." There is. As a result, the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switching button) can be notified to the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc., so that the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. can tell the RWM. When operating the switch 633d, the RWM switch 633d can be easily found, so that the eyes are not turned around. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Even if this sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310. Further, instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the main control When molding the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body 1301 and the characters may be integrally molded. good). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the main control The characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the board 1310 as silk printing, or the payout control board 633 may be mounted. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting changeover button)" may be printed in white on the surface (front surface) as silk printing. The silk printing color may be the same color or different colors. Further, instead of the silk-printed characters, symbols such as arrows may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the main control The character part may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the board 1310 and formed by resist as a blank character (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting changeover button) is on the payout control board", or payout control. The character portion may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the substrate 633 and formed by resist as a character (height: 7 mm) “RWM switch (setting changeover button)”. The color of the resist may be the same, but it is preferable to use different colors because the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of the blank character, a blank symbol masked with a symbol such as an arrow may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the main control A similar seal on the mounting surface (surface) of the substrate 1310 (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, a red translucent character (height: 7 mm) is used as a "RWM switch (setting switching)". The button) is on the payout control board. ”) May be affixed, or the“ RWM switch ”is printed in red translucent text (height: 7 mm) on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. You may attach a transparent rectangular sheet called "(setting switching button)". Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the RWM switch is used. The announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the 633d is arranged, or the announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the pachinko machine 1 turned on, a staff member such as a game hall store manager or a game hall store clerk operates the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Display various setting screens and select an item for the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switching button). As a result, an announcement voice saying "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting changeover button" is played from various speakers, and the RWM switch 633d tells where the RWM switch 633d is located. An announcement image (which may be taken as a photograph) showing the location of the display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After grasping the location of the RWM switch 633d from such announcement voices and announcement images, the store manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. shuts off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly changes the set value. Can be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as the setting switching button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine a set value, a predetermined command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to perform peripherals. The control board 1510 controls where the RWM switch 633d is located. "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting switch button. Operate the RWM switch to change the set value. The announcement voice "Please" is played repeatedly from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice and proceeds with various processes based on the received command by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510. (Proceeding the production and the production in the state of waiting for customers (demo production), etc.). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known. In addition, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, the image "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but in addition to this, the set value. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as the setting switching button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine a set value, a predetermined command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to perform peripherals. The control board 1510 controls where the RWM switch 633d is located. "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting switch button. Operate the RWM switch to change the set value. The announcement voice "Please" is played repeatedly from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcing voice is repeatedly played from various speakers, it is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement voice starts to be played, assuming that the content of the announcement voice may be overlooked. By visually observing the seal, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be known. In the announcement voice, in addition to "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as the setting changeover button. Operate the RWM switch to change the set value." And the location of the RWM switch. You may also guide the content that tells you where the sticker is affixed. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice. Even if a person who changes the setting of the set value becomes accustomed to changing the setting of the set value due to the work and is jarring, if he / she operates the RWM switch immediately after starting the work, this will be an opportunity. The announcement voice can be stopped promptly, and if it is unavoidable to perform the work after the game hall is open, the player will not be inconvenienced immediately after starting the work. When the RWM switch is operated, the announcement voice can be stopped promptly. In addition, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, the image "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

[11-6. Procedure for changing the setting of the setting value, procedure for confirming and displaying the setting value]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, and the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310. ), The base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the setting value will be briefly described, and then the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise 60. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the rotation operation and the ON operation, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is operated. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. Work to open the main body frame 4, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) connected in a row, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. Is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED display arranged on the rightmost side of the 6-segment LED displays arranged in a row (that is, 6 digits). It may be set to (one digit displaying the ones digit) (in this case, the dot may be turned on or off. In addition, the dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp). In this case, it is turned on when the setting change is being made and turned off when the setting change is completed.) One of the six 7-segment LED displays in a row is the 7-segment LED display. The set value is displayed on the device, a plurality of 7-segment LED displays, or all 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dots may be turned on or off. Also, the dots may be changed. If it also functions as a lamp, it may be turned on when the setting change is being made and turned off when the setting change is completed.)

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is mainly transmitted from the payout control board 633. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU1310a increases by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When the maximum value of the set value of 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of the set value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is controlled to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value sets the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Set to turn off Turn the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns to the rotation position of the key cylinder. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sets the set value for the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display. After switching from the display state to the non-display state, and then or immediately after that, it is collected from the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. Control is performed to display the number (total number) of the game balls on the base monitor 1310h.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the set value. Complete the work of changing the settings of.

When confirming the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then outside. Work to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2, and then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then checks the outer frame 2. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it on. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the setting display is displayed. The content displayed on 1310g is also unchanged.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) connected in a row, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. Is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED display arranged on the rightmost side of the 6-segment LED displays arranged in a row (that is, 6 digits). It may be set to (one digit displaying the ones digit) (in this case, the dot may be turned on or off. In addition, the dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp). In that case, it lights up when the currently set value is being confirmed, and turns off when the currently set value is confirmed.), 6 in a row. Of the 7-segment LED displays, one 7-segment LED display, a plurality of 7-segment LED displays, or all 7-segment LED displays display the set value (in this case, the dots may be lit. , May be turned off. If the dot is to be used as a setting change permission lamp, it is turned on when the currently set value is being confirmed and is currently set. It may be turned off when the confirmation of the set value is completed.)

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The OFF operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value on the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display, and then or immediately after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. From the specific area of the above, the base monitor 1310h is controlled to display the number (total number) of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value is the work of extracting the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. To complete the confirmation display of the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is operated, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko as described above. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON, so that the setting key is turned ON and the RWM switch 633d is pressed. It is necessary that the part is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is directed clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (power failure). The requirement is that the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is operated when the power is restored when the power is restored after a momentary power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The condition is that "the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs)". It differs in that.

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on the main control board]
Next, from the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. The wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal of FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 189 is an outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

On the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, DIP type electronic components such as connectors MCN1 to MCN8, a crystal oscillator, and various ICs, a setting key switch 1311a, a resistor, a collective resistance, a diode, a capacitor, an electrolytic capacitor, and a transistor are used. Lead type electronic components such as are mounted. Each lead terminal of the DIP type electronic component is inserted into a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is soldered and fixed on the soldered surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of the lead type electronic component is inserted into a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is soldered and fixed on the soldered surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function via the connectors MCN1 to MCN5, and the main control input having no error detection function. Some are input to the circuit 1310b. The connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged near the upper side of the main control board 1310 in order from the center of the upper side toward the left side, and the connectors MCN5 are arranged near the upper side of the main control board 1310 and near the left side. ..

Various detection signals input via the connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function, and various detection signals input via the connector MCN5 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function. There are those input to the main control input circuit 1310b (the circuit composed of a resistor and a transistor described above) which does not have an error detection function. The connector MCN4 is for outputting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

A DIP type main control input circuit 1310b2 with a plurality of error detections (in this embodiment, eight main control input circuits with error detection functions 1310b2) are integrated on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A plurality of ICs (two in this embodiment) are mounted. It should be noted that a plurality of single main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection may be mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 without converting the plurality of main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection into ICs.

The connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are located near the lower side of the main control board 1310, and are arranged in the order of the connector MCN6, the connector MCN7, the setting key switch 1311a, and the connector MCN8 from the left side to the center of the lower side, and the connector MCN8 is the main control board. It is located near the lower side of 1310 and closer to the left side than the center of the lower side. The connector MCN6 outputs a signal for driving an electric drive source (ethanol) provided in the game board 5, and the connector MCN7 inputs and outputs a signal related to command exchange with the payout control board 633, and also inputs and outputs a signal. A detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633”) is input. Is to be done. The connector MCN8 is for exchanging various signals when performing inspection and collation.

The main control MPU 1310a is parallel to the lower side (upper side) of the main control board 1310 from the center of the main control board 1310 to the right side from the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310. (That is, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent so that the length of the bottom surface of the main body of the main control MPU 1310a is long. It is formed by arranging it in two rows along the direction. Here, for convenience of explanation, the lead terminals arranged in the two rows will be described as the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

A plurality of lead type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc. are arranged above the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310, and two lead type collective resistors are arranged in a row on the left and right above these. The detection signal (that is, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633) is arranged so as to be parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 and above the left collective resistance of this lead type (that is, in the direction away from the main control MPU 1310a). The resistors MR2 and MR5 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal is input via the connector MCN7 are arranged, and below the left collective resistance of this lead type (that is, the left collective resistance of the lead type). The resistors MR3, MR4, and the transistor constituting the main control input circuit 1310b in which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7. MTR0 is arranged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1310b in which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7 is configured with the lead type left collective resistance as a boundary (protection wall). Below the left collective resistance of the lead type, the resistors MR3, MR4 and the transistor MTR0 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b are arranged, and above the left collective resistance of the lead type, the main control input circuit. The resistors MR2 and MR5 constituting 1310b are arranged. As a result, by using the lead type left collective resistance as a protective wall, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR2 and MR5 placed above the lead type left collective resistance, which contributes to improved security. can do. Furthermore, since the transistor MTR0 has built-in resistors MR3 and MR4 as bias resistors, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR3 and MR4 in this respect as well, which contributes to improved security. can do.

A resistor constituting the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input is above the connector MCN8 arranged on the right side of the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310. MR10 to MR13, a capacitor MC10, and a transistor MTR10 are arranged. The transistor MTR10 has built-in resistors MR11 and MR12 as bias resistors. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistances MR11 and MR12, which can contribute to the improvement of security.

To the right of the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, a logic inversion that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The resistors MR14 to MR16 and the transistor MTR11 constituting the circuit 1310iv are arranged. The transistor MTR11 has built-in resistors MR14 and MR15 as bias resistors. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistances MR14 and MR15, which can contribute to the improvement of security.

Connectors MCN1 to 5 arranged in a row near the upper side of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the upper side, connectors MCN6 to MC8 arranged in a row near the lower side of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the lower side, When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, a part of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as described above, and the cover body. Even if an unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire) is inserted through a gap formed by the 1301 and the connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and the setting key switch 13111a to illegally modify the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the connector MCN1 Electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, collective resistors, various ICs, and transistors are arranged around the MCN8 and the setting key switch 13111a, and resistors and diodes are arranged around the main control MPU 1310a. , Connectors, crystal oscillators (located near the bottom of the main control MPU1310a), collective resistors, various ICs, and other electronic components are arranged, so these electronic components act as obstacles or protective barriers. It is necessary to bend a plurality of fraudulent tools (for example, thin wires), and the fraudulent tools (for example, thin wires) cannot reach the main control MPU1310a in reality.

The main control board 1310 is formed with a plurality of through holes through which each REIT terminal of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a is inserted. Each lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is inserted through these through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the solder surface of the main control board 1310. (Back surface) Soldered and fixed at 1310y.

As shown in FIG. 189, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the lead terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a is mainly controlled. It is electrically connected to the betagland (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310. Further, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side (+ 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310). A + 5V power supply wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the power supply line of the main VBB supplied from the power supply line) and the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is formed. Further, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, an output signal wiring pattern for outputting various signals from the lead terminal, and an input signal wiring for inputting various signals to the lead terminals. A pattern is formed.

In the input signal wiring pattern, from the connector MCN7 to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various wiring patterns") forming the RWM signal transmission path over the above, and the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a from the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. A setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various wiring patterns") forming a setting signal transmission path extending to (setting key signal input terminal) and a detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e (power failure). A power failure warning signal wiring pattern that forms a power failure warning signal transmission path from the 1Q terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 (MIC22A) constituting the monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "various types"). It may be described as "wiring pattern"), and is included.

Of the through holes through which the reit terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, the through holes on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground). Around the through hole excluding, around the + 5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and the specific through hole (for example, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface)). A foil removal region from which the copper foil has been removed is formed around the through hole (through hole) that electrically connects the output signal wiring pattern to the 1310y.

The region on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where various wiring patterns are formed, the region where various through holes are formed, and the region where foil removal is formed are excluded from the main control board 1310. It is formed as a beta land (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) of 1310y, and has an insulating property so as to cover the base material of the main control board 1310 and the copper thin layer (copper plane, copper foil surface). A color (green in this embodiment) resist liquid is applied to form an insulating coating film 1310yr on the solder surface side in the entire region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Further, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) among the through holes through which the respective reit terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. Around the through hole excluding those, around the + 5V power supply wiring pattern, around the output signal wiring pattern, and the output signal wiring between the specific through hole (for example, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Although a foil removal area is formed around the through hole that electrically connects the pattern), the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lower side in the ZIP type main control MPU1310a are formed. Between the lead terminals arranged in the row and the terminals, along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The foil removal region is not formed on the upper side (lower side or parallel to the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310) of the main control board 1310, and a beta land (GND) (board ground) is formed. ..

The region on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the region where various through holes are formed, and the region where the foil removal is formed are excluded from the main control board. It is formed as a beta land (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (surface) of 1310, and has an insulating property so as to cover the base material of the main control board 1310 and the copper thin layer (copper plane, copper foil surface). A resist solution of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) is applied to form an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side in the entire region of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

The copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has various wiring patterns and main controls by various wiring patterns routed to the reit terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. A small copper foil region may be formed surrounded by a large number of lead terminals of the MPU 1310a. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground of the small copper foil region, the betagland (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. A through hole for betaland is formed to electrically connect the betaland (GND) (board ground) of the above.

There are a plurality of land sizes in the through-holes for beta lands, and the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected. The size of the land of the through-hole for the wiring pattern to be connected to, the size of the land of the through-hole for the lead terminal to which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. Those having the same size as, those larger than the size of the land of the through hole for the wiring pattern and smaller than the size of the land of the through hole for the lead terminal, and those having the same size as the land of the through hole for the lead terminal. There are large ones and the like, and a plurality of through holes for beta run are studded on substantially the entire surface of the main control board 1310. As a result, the betagland (GND) (ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the betagland (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are separated. It is stabilized so that it becomes the same ground (GND) (board ground).

Further, for the wiring pattern in which various signals are input to the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is provided. While the through hole for the wiring pattern to be electrically connected is not formed at all, for the wiring pattern that outputs various signals, in order to prevent the interference of the wiring pattern by routing the wiring pattern, the main control board 1310 A plurality of wiring pattern through holes for electrically connecting the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be formed.

For the wiring pattern in which various signals are input to the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is used. It is preferable that no through hole for the wiring pattern to be electrically connected is formed, but wiring in which various signals are unavoidably input in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the wiring of the wiring pattern. A wiring pattern through hole may be formed for the pattern to electrically connect the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

However, a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter, referred to as “input signal wiring pattern through hole”) formed for a wiring pattern into which various signals are input is, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground). If the main control board is created and electrically switched to the + 5V power supply line, the main control MPU1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game. May be done.

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures for the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1. Security measures for through holes for input signal wiring patterns]
As a security measure for the input signal wiring pattern through hole, the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole is covered with an insulating film (hereinafter, "the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments". A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land ”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. FIG. 190 is a schematic view (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Yes, it is a schematic view (b) of a cross section of XX rays in (a), and is a schematic view (c) of a modification of (b). FIG. 191 is a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern which concerns on 2nd Embodiment which is formed | FIG. (B) is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of FIG. 192, and FIG. 192 is an input signal wiring pattern according to a third embodiment formed on a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole with an insulating film, is the schematic diagram (b) of the cross section of XX line in (a), and is the modification of (b). FIG. 193 is a schematic view (c), and FIG. 193 shows a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. It is a schematic diagram (a) to be described, is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section of XX rays in (a), and is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). In addition, in FIGS. 190 to 193, the same reference numerals are given to those having the same function.

The various through holes have copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through hole to have conductivity. The main control board 1310 is also provided with non-through holes in addition to the through holes. In the non-through holes, the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is not copper-plated, and the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided. In addition, copper plating is applied to the inner peripheral wall of the through hole at the point that the solder surface (back surface) 1310y does not have a land, and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is very different from a through hole that has a land on it. The non-through hole is formed to attach the substrate to the member, or is formed to fix an electronic component (such as a connector to which wiring is attached / detached) to which an external force is applied to the substrate. It should be noted that the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film may be adopted for the through hole for mounting the electronic component (that is, inserting each lead terminal of the electronic component). Further, the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film may be described as a through hole for a wiring pattern formed for a wiring pattern to which various signals are output (hereinafter, referred to as a “through hole for an output signal wiring pattern”). There is no problem in adopting it for the land of.). Further, the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film is such that the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are solid. There is no problem in adopting it for the land of the through-hole for beta land that electrically connects the ground (GND) (board ground).

[12-1-1. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b), the plate thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 ( A small through hole is formed with respect to the front surface vertical (back surface vertical) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310, and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310. The copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil. A mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. Through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the other mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of the electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

One end of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Is electrically connected to the other end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern, and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 or electronic component formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Is electrically connected to the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of is soldered.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are The mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which is electrically connected via the through hole KTH1, and the main control board 1310. The solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the through hole KTH1, and the through hole KTH1. It is in a state of being electrically connected via the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Although a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side, an insulating coating on the mounting surface side is formed. A mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. Has been done.

Further, although a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the solder surface side insulation is formed. In the region of the coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. It is formed.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back surface) side are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. ..

As described above, in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1. The outer peripheral portion of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side toward the center of the mounting surface is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with a green resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side can be kept small. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification such as electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the mounting surface (front surface) side of the main control board 1310 is to the mounting surface (front surface) side. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 to perform electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310, and soldering from the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310. That is, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is the solder surface (back surface) of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. The outer peripheral portion of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back surface) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. However, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), in the region corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 5 in the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, so that the main control board 1310 is illegal in such a state. This is because when the modification is performed, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Further, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which of the various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern. By comparing the sizes of the land of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the land of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, it is possible to contribute to determining whether or not the hole is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-2. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b). A small through hole is formed in the direction (the front surface vertical (back surface vertical) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed. At the same time, a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. Through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the land KRDy1 on the solder surface (back surface) side.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the other mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of the electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

One end of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Is electrically connected to the other end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern, and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 or electronic component formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Is electrically connected to the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of is soldered.

Although a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side, an insulating coating on the mounting surface side is formed. The region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and is through for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment described above. A mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 in the configuration in which the land of the hole is covered with the insulating film is formed. Has been done. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 includes a resist liquid intrusion prevention region concentrically extending outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface in the hole of the through hole KTH1. (Surface) The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge (resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and 0.5 mm is adopted in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film). It has become. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the double of the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is 1.0 mm larger.

On the other hand, although a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the solder is formed. Solder surface (back surface) side resist opening having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the region of the surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. Part KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. ..

As described above, in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. The outer diameter is smaller than the outer diameter of KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, and the outer diameter is smaller than the outer diameter of the through hole KTH1. Since the mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 larger than the inner diameter of the hole is formed, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has an outer diameter KTHD1 outer diameter to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. Only the resist liquid intrusion prevention region (that is, the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm) from the inner peripheral edge of the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1) in the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side toward the center of Except for the region extending to a distant position), the outer peripheral portion is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. As a result, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310). Since the green resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the region of the (surface) side land KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the portion where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid. The area of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed by serving as an intrusion prevention region is covered with an insulating film on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment. It can be kept extremely small compared to that in the configuration. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification such as electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

Further, since the resist liquid intrusion prevention region is provided in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green color as an insulating film is provided on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist liquid is applied, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). ) Is placed and finally cut out to be manufactured, so it is actually fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface of one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward. Even if the green resist liquid is applied to the substrate, the green resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and is dried without closing the holes.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the mounting surface (front surface) side of the main control board 1310 is to the mounting surface (front surface) side. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 to perform electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310, and soldering from the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310. That is, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the solder surface (rear surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is the solder surface of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. The outer peripheral portion of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back surface) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. However, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is located in the region corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 5 in the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, so that the main control board 1310 is illegal in such a state. This is because when the modification is performed, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Further, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which of the various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern. By comparing the sizes of the land of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the land of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, it is possible to contribute to determining whether or not the hole is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1--3. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b). A small through hole is formed in the direction (the front surface vertical (back surface vertical) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed. At the same time, a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. Through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the land KRDy1 on the solder surface (back surface) side.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the other mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of the electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

Since a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the mounting surface side insulating coating is formed. A green resist liquid is also applied as an insulating film to the region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side to form the insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. .. Therefore, when the green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. It is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the front surface of the copper-clad laminate (base material) of the scale faces vertically upward), and a green resist liquid is applied from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. Will invade and block this hole. The green resist liquid that has entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is dried by its own weight in a state of being recessed from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole. Will be done.

On the other hand, although a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the solder is formed. Solder surface (back surface) side resist opening having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the region of the surface side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. Part KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

As described above, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 of the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is also covered with the green resist as an insulating film. At the same time, the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be covered with a green resist as an insulating film. The copper foil does not expose the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side, and the conductive plated portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the hole of the through hole KTH1 is the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310. It can be prevented from being exposed from 1310x. Further, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification such as electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

Further, although the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and the hole is closed, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed. The solder surface (back surface) side of the hole is open. That is, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed on the mounting surface (front surface) side by the green resist liquid, while the solder surface (back surface) side is open. This is a state in which the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the solder surface (back surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed, liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through-hole KTH1, and the influence of this liquid may cause the through-hole KTH1 to remain. Contact failure occurs due to corrosion of the internally conductive plating, and the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 is instantaneously vaporized and expanded (so-called "steam explosion" in the solder (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 may be damaged and the through-hole KTH1 may be electrically cut off.

Further, although there are holes in the land KRDx1 and the through-hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) side, their existence can be hidden by the green resist, so that the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be hidden. The land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side can be made inconspicuous, and the holes in the through holes KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the green resist coated on the solid surface. As a result, for fraudulent persons who attempt to electrically switch the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is possible to make it difficult to find through holes for input signal wiring patterns (holes of land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side and through holes KTH1).

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the tip of the contact probe is from the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the portions. That is, the land KRDy1 on the solder surface (back surface) side can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is the solder surface (back surface) of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. The outer peripheral portion of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back surface) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. However, as shown in FIG. 192 (c), in the region corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 5 in the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in the pachinko machine 1, so that the main control board 1310 is illegal in such a state. This is because when the modification is performed, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Further, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310 determines which of the various through holes formed in the main control board 1310 is the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern. By comparing the sizes of the land of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the land of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, it is possible to contribute to determining whether or not the hole is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1--4. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b). A small through hole is formed in the direction (the front surface vertical (back surface vertical) direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed. At the same time, a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. Through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and the other mounting surface (surface) side formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or the land (pad) to which the specific terminal of the electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

Although a green resist solution is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side, an insulating coating on the mounting surface side is formed. A mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. Has been done. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr. Of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr, the region corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also coated with a green resist liquid as an insulating film to form the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. .. Therefore, when the green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (Since the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out, one fixed board is used. A green resist liquid is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the rear surface of the copper-clad laminate (base material) of the scale faces vertically upward) from the inner peripheral edge on the solder surface (back surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. Will invade and block this hole. The green resist liquid that has entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is dried by its own weight in a state of being recessed from the inner peripheral edge on the solder surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole. Will be done.

As described above, in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1. The outer peripheral portion of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side toward the center of the mounting surface is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. Further, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the region corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is also covered with a green resist as an insulating film. At the same time, the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the solder surface (back surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with a green resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side can be kept small, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification such as electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security for the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, the tip of the contact probe is from the mounting surface (front surface) side of the main control board 1310 to the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side. Can be contacted to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the main control board 1310. That is, the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

Further, although the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the solder surface (back surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and the hole is closed, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed. The mounting surface (surface) side of the hole is open. That is, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed on the solder surface (back surface) side by the green resist liquid, while the mounting surface (front surface) side is open. This is a state in which the green resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the solder surface (back surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, and air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the mounting surface (surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed, a liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through-hole KTH1, and the influence of this liquid may cause the through-hole KTH1 to remain. Contact failure occurs due to corrosion of the internally conductive plating, and the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 is instantaneously vaporized and expanded (so-called "steam explosion" in the solder (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 may be damaged and the through-hole KTH1 may be electrically cut off.

Further, although there are holes in the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 hides its existence by the green resist on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Since the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be hidden by the green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 can be hidden. The land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side can be made inconspicuous with respect to the white resist coated on 1310x, and the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. As a result, for fraudulent persons who attempt to electrically switch the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern to, for example, a beta land (GND) (board ground) or a + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is possible to make it difficult to find through holes for input signal wiring patterns (holes of land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side and through holes KTH1).

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the mounting surface (the mounting surface) of the insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side. In the region corresponding to the surface) side land KRDx1, the mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. The outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. However, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), in the region corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 A mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed which is smaller and has an opening diameter KBxrD2 which is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. .. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 includes a resist liquid intrusion prevention region concentrically extending outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface in the hole of the through hole KTH1. The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge on the (surface) side (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and 0.5 mm is adopted in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film). It has become. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the double of the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is 1.0 mm larger.

As a result, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310). Since the green resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the region of the (surface) side land KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the portion where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid. By providing the intrusion prevention region, the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed can be suppressed to an extremely small size.

Further, since the resist liquid intrusion prevention region is provided in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green color as an insulating film is provided on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist liquid is applied, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward (the main control board 1310 is actually one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). ) Is placed and finally cut out to be manufactured, so it is actually fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface of one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward. Even if the green resist liquid is applied to the substrate, the green resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and is dried without closing the holes.

Further, from almost inside the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (that is). The portion where the copper foil is exposed is the resist liquid intrusion prevention region by covering the surface) side land KRDx1 with the green resist as the insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region). Although it has become smaller, the tip of the contact probe is brought into contact with the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310 to perform an electrical inspection (operation check) of the main control board 1310. And abnormal potential can be confirmed), so that the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) side can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

The detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) for transmitting this detection signal. It is input as a power failure warning signal to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB arranged third from the left in the figure. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting this detection signal. It is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA arranged at the eighth position from the left in the figure among the lead terminals. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 is a lead terminal arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting this detection signal. It is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA arranged at the 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure).

Various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 and the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 are transmitted. Various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) and various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and parallel to each other. It is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to run (run in parallel).

Further, various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 and the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 are provided. The various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) to be transmitted and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) to transmit the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 are on the mounting surface (surface). The wiring pattern between the 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y is routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 without passing through a through hole for electrically connecting the wiring patterns.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a that can set and change the probability of giving benefits to the player are the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. By being formed in, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize how various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and various wirings. It can contribute to making it difficult to illegally modify the pattern (setting key signal wiring pattern). Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of security. Further, various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) for transmitting the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 used for setting change are on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. By being formed, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize how various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and various wiring patterns (various wiring patterns). It can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the RWM signal wiring pattern). Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of security. Further, various wiring patterns (wiring patterns for warning signal of power failure) for transmitting the detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for main control. It is possible to make it difficult to see how various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the board 1310, and various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns) can be used. It can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of security.

When changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d as described above. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals that can change the setting of the probability of generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and are important signals in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It is necessary to make it difficult for the person in charge of the hall to change the setting illegally with an unintended probability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting of the probability of giving the player a benefit, and the RWM switch 633d Various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit the detection signals of the above are routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they do not run in parallel (do not run in parallel) without being placed close to each other. ing. As a result, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are mutually exchanged. Separately, they are input to predetermined input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. Various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d can be prevented from being tampered with at the same time. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

Further, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a setting key signal via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as an RWM signal via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). Has been done. The input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is arranged at the eighth position from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU1310a, whereas the input of the input port PA The terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is arranged 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a in which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as the setting key signal, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used as the setting key signal so that the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a input as the RWM signal is not arranged adjacent to each other. A predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to be input and a predetermined input of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a in which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal. The 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU1310a between the terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and other lead terminals (specifically, the main control MPU1310a). (Lead terminals arranged in a total of 11 lower rows) are arranged so as to intervene.

As described above, in the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the through holes through which the respective reit terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, the beta land (GND) (board ground) and the electrical Peripheral through-holes excluding those connected to, perimeter of + 5V power supply wiring pattern, perimeter of signal output wiring pattern, perimeter of input signal wiring pattern, and specific through-holes (eg, mounting surface (surface) 1310x). A foil removal region from which copper foil has been removed is formed around a through hole (through hole that electrically connects the output signal wiring pattern to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the settable state) and the input terminal PA5 (setting) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is being operated, the logic of the RWM signal is LOW (logic for transmitting the pressing operation state) as described above. Therefore, it is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, by removing the foil around the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and ground are removed. It is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification by electrically switching between (GND) and (board ground), and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security.

It should be noted that the setting of the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU1310a electrically connected to the key signal input terminal and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminal, the peripheral terminal of the setting key signal input terminal (another adjacent terminal) and the peripheral terminal of the RWM signal input terminal (adjacent terminal) are pressed by the RWM switch 633d. The logic of the RWM signal that the unit is not operated is HI (the logic that conveys the pressing non-operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that makes the setting key switch 1311a OFF is HI (the non-setting state). It may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern in which another signal is input or a wiring pattern in which another signal is output so as to be a transmission logic). By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security.

Further, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a setting key signal via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as an RWM signal via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d were input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal may be input from the lead terminal arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminal arranged in the upper row. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input when it is input to a predetermined input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a setting key signal via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The input terminal PB7 of the port PB is arranged 22nd from the left in the figure (11th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminal arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminal arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is mainly used. Even if a configuration is adopted in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals of the upper and lower rows by inputting to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the control MPU 1310a, it contributes to the improvement of security of setting change. Can be done.

The logical state of the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a is treated as memory information on the address space by the memory-mapped I / O method. For example, the main control MPU 1310a simultaneously has the same address for the input port PA. The logical state of each input terminal can be acquired. Similarly, for the input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously acquire the logical state of each input terminal at the same address (an address different from the input port PA). The input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are input ports having 8 bits, and the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminals) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of the input ports PA and PB are the 0th to 7th bits. It is pre-allocated to any of the bits.

[Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, but the lead terminal (COM1) of the setting key switch 1311a. Terminals, COM2 terminals, A terminals, B terminals), lead terminals (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitors MC10, transistor MTR10) of electronic components constituting the main control input circuit 1310b, and lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a (input port PA). The wiring patterns for electrically connecting the input terminals PA5) are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, which is the surface opposite to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

A2. The wiring pattern of the main control board 1310 is set in the signal transmission path between the lead terminal (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is formed by routing it around the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, as described above, a through hole that electrically interconnects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is provided. , A through hole for this wiring pattern is not formed on the main control board 1310.

A3. The wiring pattern is set on the main control board 1310 in the signal transmission path between the lead terminal (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is difficult to route only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 must also be used. When forming a through hole that electrically interconnects the wiring patterns of the above, as shown in FIGS. 190 to 193, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and / or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The outer periphery and the entire land of the through hole are covered with a green resist which is an insulating film.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in the main control board box 1320 which can be opened and closed by the sliding method in the longitudinal direction composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back surface side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits in the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 together. The main control board 1310 is housed in the formed space. After that, by screwing a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 which is a sealing portion, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. To. If the setting key switch 1311a is pressed and the main control board 1310 bends and bends when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 may be disconnected. There is. Therefore, in order to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, the setting key switch 1311a which is the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In the corresponding region, the protruding portion 1302p shown in FIG. 185 is formed to protrude from the base body 1302.

In the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and the rotation operation is performed. When the pressing by the setting key is released, the setting key is not inserted in the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), as described above, the front surface and the main of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302. A distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the control board 1310, and when the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p is the main control board. It is in contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the 1310 to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. As described above, a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and is rotated to set. When the pressing by the key is released, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other at the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a). There is nothing to do. Further, when assembling the main control board box 1320, when the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid and moved, or when the main control board 1310 is taken out, the sealed state of the main control board box is released and the cover body 1301 is released. When the base body 1302 and the base body 1302 are slid and moved, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to damage the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. ing.

Since the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p may come into contact with the solder of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. 186 (b), the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed from the surface (back surface) 1310y region and the region corresponding to the periphery thereof, and the copper foil portion copper foil layer, The entire area from which the copper plane was removed is covered with a green resist that is an insulating film, and when the setting key switch 1311a is repeatedly pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p causes the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Even if the green resist, which is the insulating film formed on the surface, is rubbed and peeled off, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p and the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) do not come into contact with each other. As a result, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p does not come into contact with the wiring pattern or the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p damages or breaks the wiring pattern. It is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being damaged and to prevent the betaland (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 from being damaged.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in the main control board boxes 1320 which can be opened and closed by a sliding method in the longitudinal direction composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back surface side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits in the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 together. The main control board 1310 is housed in the formed space. When the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is also moved in the longitudinal direction. The wiring pattern is formed so as not to be routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. This is because the base body 1302 is covered with the cover body 1301 although the distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 rubs against the green resist which is an insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board when moving in the longitudinal direction according to a predetermined position. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken.

In addition to the wiring pattern, the betagland (GND) (board ground) is placed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves. May not be formed. This is because the base body 1302 is covered with the cover body 1301 although the distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When moving in the longitudinal direction according to a predetermined position, the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p may rub against the green resist which is an insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This is because it is necessary to prevent damage to (GND) (board ground).

A8. The protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. By doing so, the area where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves can be the area where the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder which is the projecting portion 1302p moves. As the portion 1302p slides in parallel along the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the left-right direction becomes the length of the protrusion 1302p in which the protrusion 1302p slides up and down. Since the distance dimension in the direction is the diameter of the cylinder, the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be reduced. This can contribute to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when routing the wiring pattern while avoiding the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

Further, the protrusion 1302p slides in parallel along the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), so that the distance dimension in the vertical direction in the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. Becomes the diameter of the cylinder and becomes constant, and when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder of the main control board 1310. Interference with the lead terminals of electronic components soldered to the front surface (back surface) 1310y (lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)) can be prevented (suppressed). ..

A9. The projecting portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape having the same dimension as the outer diameter of the projecting portion 1302p having a cylindrical shape as a constant width dimension). It may be formed in. In this way, the region where the front surface of the projecting portion 1302p moves is the region where the projecting portion 1302p slides in parallel along the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310) in the left-right direction. The distance dimension of the above is the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction can be a constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the region where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern is mainly formed along the shape of the protrusion 1302p in the longitudinal direction. By routing the control board 1310 on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, the wiring pattern and the shape of the protrusion 1302p in the longitudinal direction can be in a parallel positional relationship, so that the front surface of the protrusion 1302p is the main control board 1310. It is possible to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken by rubbing the green resist which is an insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

Further, the protrusion 1302p slides in parallel along the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), so that the distance dimension in the vertical direction in the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. Is a constant width of the protruding portion 1302p and becomes constant, and when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction according to a predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the main control board. Prevents (suppresses) interference with the lead terminals of electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of 1310 (lead terminals of setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)). be able to.

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction and is not formed. If the projecting portion 1302p is formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the projecting portion 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with a predetermined position of the cover body 1301. The side surface of 1302p interferes with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic component soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the protruding portion 1302p is not formed to have a long shape along the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. By doing so, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction in accordance with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is possible to prevent (suppress) interference with the lead terminals of electronic components soldered to (lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)).

A11. As shown in FIG. 184, the setting key switch 1311a is connected to the setting key cylinder 1311ab to which the setting key is inserted and is rotated, and the outer cylinder 1311aa, and is connected to the contact by the rotation operation of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac in which a circuit to be turned ON or OFF is formed, and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa is formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa and bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. It is composed of a frame plate 1311ad in which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada projecting rearward of the base body 1311ac are formed on both side surfaces. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from a non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from a conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and are non-conducting, and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted through the through hole from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. It protrudes from 1310y and is soldered, and is electrically connected by an internal circuit of the setting key switch 1311a to a wiring pattern forming a signal transmission path to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada are formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a, and the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada are mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. By being inserted through the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 from 1310 and being soldered so as to project from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other.

The pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 to form the solder surface of the main control board 1310. (Back side) Although it protrudes from 1310y and is soldered, it is not electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically floating. It may be.

A13. The locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is made of a conductive metal. Unlike the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is grounded to the island equipment of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown).

A14. Since the operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a must first release the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, a key is inserted into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131 in the locking unit 650 (this key is). , It is a metal key having conductivity. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "metal key".) It is necessary to insert and rotate the key. Even if the operator is charged with an electric potential, the electric potential charged by the operator can be applied to the locking unit by inserting the metal key into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 in the locking unit 650. Since the 650 and the island equipment of the game hall can be grounded and escaped via a ground wire (not shown), the electric potential charged on the operator can be removed.

Even if the operator inserts the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the electric potential charged to the operator is already in the island facility of the game hall. Since it has been grounded and removed, it is possible to prevent damage to the setting key switch 1311a due to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge of the potential charged to the operator, and if the operator is charged, press the setting key. Even if it is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the frame plate 1311ad are electrically insulated as described above, so that the electric potential charged to the operator is applied. The main control board 1310 is prevented from being damaged by not invading the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the ground of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab. be able to. (As a matter of course, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) which are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Further, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a remains charged. It never becomes.

When the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is the main control board together with the frame plate 1311ad. It means that it is not electrically connected to the 1310 Betagland (GND) (board ground). Even if the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab while the operator is charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is the main control board 1310 together with the frame plate 1311ad. Since it is not electrically connected (insulated) to the Betagland (GND) (board ground), the potential charged to the operator is applied to the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent damage to the main control board 1310 without invading the beta land (ground) (board ground). However, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a does not have an electrical connection with the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, when the setting key switch 1311a is charged, it cannot be discharged.

The long through holes SLH1'and SLH2' to which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It is not electrically floating. The through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, the through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. Is electrically connected, the through hole SLTH1 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern SPTN3, and the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is the beta land (GND) (board) of the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the ground).

As described above, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 exist around the long through holes SLH1'and SLH2', the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are between the long through holes SLH1'and SLH2'. The beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed, and the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. ) Is formed so that the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the beta land (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is charged. Even if it becomes impossible, the long through holes SLH1'and SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are adjacent to each other without the intervention of the betaland (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 so as not to be affected by this. You need to avoid it. Further, it is necessary that the long through holes SLH1'and SLH2'and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are not adjacent to each other without the beta gland (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 intervening.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), And the RWM signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is the input terminal PA5 (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a). It is another lead terminal different from the setting key signal input terminal) and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

The logical state of the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a memory-mapped I / O. It is treated as memory information on the address space according to the method, and the main control MPU 1310a can be simultaneously acquired at the same address. That is, as described above, the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a have 8 bits. Each of the predetermined ports is pre-allocated to any of the 0th bit to the 7th bit.

As described above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent so as to be 2 along the longitudinal direction. It was formed by arranging them in a row. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not formed so as to be adjacent to one of the two rows.

For example, when the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are arranged in one of the two columns, the input port PA Input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA so that the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not arranged next to each other. It is arranged so that another lead terminal is interposed between the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), And the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is the input terminal PA5 (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a). Since it is another lead terminal different from the setting key signal input terminal and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, the input port PA is in one of the two rows. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA were arranged, but the setting key mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. There are two rows of a setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the switch 1311a and an RWM signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. They may be electrically connected so that they are arranged in separate rows.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), And the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 is the input terminal PA5 (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a). It was another lead terminal different from the setting key signal input terminal) and was electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, but on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The setting key signal input terminal to which the setting key signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the mounted setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected, and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. The logical state of the RWM signal input terminal to which the RWM signal wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the above is electrically connected may be acquired at different addresses. That is, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be allocated in advance so that they can be acquired separately by different input ports. When the input terminals (lead terminals) are collectively arranged for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by different addresses. ..

B4. It is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, includes a logic (HI) for telling a non-settable state and a logic (LOW) for telling a settable state. The logic (HI) for notifying the non-configurable state was created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g in which the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is provided in the main control board 1310. While it is pulled up to the + 5V power supply line side, the logic (LOW) that conveys the configurable state is the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 with another input terminal adjacent to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) (or other input terminal around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)). The circuit is configured to be electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created in. As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, it is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern to be set is pulled up to the + 5V power supply line side created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, so that the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and electricity As a logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern, the setting becomes a logic (HI) that conveys the unsettable state as a result, and the setting can be changed. Can be eliminated.

RWM switch mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from 633d, includes a logic (HI) for transmitting the pressed non-operated state and a logic (LOW) for transmitting the pressed operation state. The logic (HI) for transmitting the pressing non-operation state is + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 with the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The logic (LOW) that conveys the pressing operation state is mainly the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). It is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the control board 1310.

Therefore, regarding the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), as with the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), another input terminal (or input terminal PA0) adjacent to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is also used. The circuit is configured so as to be electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 with other input terminals) around the RWM signal input terminal). As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and another input terminal adjacent to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is electrically connected. The voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern is pulled up to the + 5V power supply line side created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, so that it is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern, is the logic (HI) that conveys the pressed non-operation state, and the setting cannot be changed. ..

It should be noted that the setting of the main control MPU 1310a electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU1310a electrically connected to the key signal input terminal and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminal, the peripheral terminal of the setting key signal input terminal (another adjacent terminal) and the peripheral terminal of the RWM signal input terminal (adjacent terminal) are pressed by the RWM switch 633d. The logic of the RWM signal that the unit is not operated is HI (the logic that conveys the pressing non-operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that makes the setting key switch 1311a OFF is HI (the non-setting state). It may be electrically connected to a wiring pattern in which another signal is input or a wiring pattern in which another signal is output so as to be a transmission logic). By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the settable state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is input to the input terminal), the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). To prevent the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being illegally short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the ground (GND) ( The substrate ground) is not formed and is a foil removal area. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is located around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The ground (GND) (board ground) in which the logic of the setting key signal to be in the ON operation is LOW (the logic for transmitting the settable state) is not formed (is not arranged). This makes it possible to prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. ..

Further, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the pressing operation state) and the input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is input to the PA input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), it is electrically connected to the periphery of the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). Around the RWM signal wiring pattern, the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 are prevented from being illegally short-circuited. The GND) (board ground) is not formed and it is a foil removal region. That is, the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d is located around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The ground (GND) (board ground) in which the logic of the RWM signal in the operated state becomes LOW (logic for transmitting the pressing operation state) is not formed (arranged). As a result, it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. It is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 which is transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is the logic that conveys the non-configurable state (HI) and the logic that conveys the configurable state (LOW), and the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of. The logic state of the operation signal is the logic that conveys the pressing non-operation state (HI) and the logic that conveys the pressing operation state (LOW), and the logic that conveys the non-settable state (HI) and the logic that conveys the pressing non-operation state (HI). HI) has the same logic (HI), and the logic that conveys the configurable state (LOW) and the logic that conveys the pressing operation state (LOW) have the same logic (LOW). Instead, the logic that conveys the non-settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed operation state are the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the pressed non-operation state. The logic state of may be the same logic (LOW or HI). It is better to compare the logic that conveys the configurable state and the logic that conveys the pressed operation state with the same logic, and make the logic that conveys the configurable state and the logic that conveys the pressed non-operated state the same logic. Those who tamper with the terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and RWM signal wiring pattern must understand the logic of this combination. As a result, one is short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) and the other is short-circuited to the power supply, which can contribute to time-consuming and time-consuming, and the RWM signal input terminal. , The setting key signal wiring pattern, the setting key signal input terminal, and the RWM signal wiring pattern can be made difficult to be tampered with, and can contribute to the improvement of security.

Further, in a state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, a plurality of main control boards 1310 are formed on the cover body side rib portion 1301 rb and the base body 1302 formed on the cover body 1301. It is in a state of being arranged (sandwiched) in the space formed by the rib portion 1302rb on the base body side. Further, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion capable of contacting the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. The portion 1302p is formed. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the protruding portion 1302p is mainly controlled when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the inserted force. By abutting on the solder surface (back surface) of the substrate 1310, the main control board 1310 can be prevented from bending and bending any more, and the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 can be broken or the solder can be peeled off. It can be prevented. As shown in FIG. 186 (b), copper foil was removed from the region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 abuts and the periphery thereof. A foil removing region SINSy having a circular shape is formed. As a result, even if the solder surface side insulating coating film 1310yr is scraped by the protruding portion 1302p, it is possible to prevent damage to the beta land (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protruding portion 1302p. .. The foil removal region SINSy, which has a circular shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

B7. The setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch are mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. 633d and 633d are mounted on separate control boards. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the RWM switch mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4. The setting key switch will be placed apart from the 633d, and even if it is attempted to be illegal, both the setting key switch 1311a side and the RWM switch 633d side must be illegally modified, and the work will take an extremely long time. When the fraudster who sees the arrangement of the 1311a and the RWM switch 633d loses the willingness to make a fraudulent modification, it can be made difficult to be fraudulent.

When actually changing the setting, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and then the power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RWM switch 633d. Since the power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM switch 633d, and the power supply switch 630a required for setting change are Each is mounted on a separate board.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. 179. As shown, the main control input circuit 1310b (mainly composed of resistors and transistors) mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 without an error detection function, and has a common circuit configuration. It was input to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the circuit), but via the dedicated ICs provided with the input circuit (that is, from the setting key switch 1311a). Even if the detection signal is input to the predetermined input terminal (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU1310a via the setting key input dedicated IC and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via the RWM input dedicated IC). good. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the logical state of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which can contribute to the improvement of countermeasures against fraud.

Further, the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and has a common circuit configuration. Therefore, the transistors of the plurality of main control input circuits 1310b may be configured as a DIP type transistor array in which the transistors are integrated into one IC.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. 179. As shown, the main control input circuit 1310b (mainly composed of resistors and transistors) mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 without an error detection function, and has a common circuit configuration. It was input to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the circuit), but via the dedicated ICs provided with the input circuit (that is, from the setting key switch 1311a). Even if the detection signal is input to the predetermined input terminal (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU1310a via the setting key input dedicated IC and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via the RWM input dedicated IC). good. In this case, the resistors and transistors constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without other error detection functions are arranged so as to be interposed between the separate dedicated ICs. By doing so, it becomes difficult for any circuit to discriminate the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which can contribute to the improvement of fraud countermeasures.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. 179. As shown, it is input to a predetermined input terminal (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function. When using a DIP type transistor array in which the transistors of a plurality of main control input circuits 1310b are combined into one IC, the input terminal of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input and the input terminal of the DIP type transistor array are used. The input terminals of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other, or among a plurality of input terminals protruding from one side surface of the DIP type transistor array. Arranged so as to form a wiring pattern so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the input terminals, and RWM to one of the plurality of input terminals protruding from the other side surface. Arrange so as to form a wiring pattern so that the detection signal from the switch 633d is input. In this way, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of anti-fraud measures.

B11. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. 179. As shown, the respective voltages are pulled up to the power supply line side by the resistors MR16 and MR5, respectively. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are arranged away from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, the resistance MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 at one end, and the other end is the main control. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a, and is arranged on the right side of the connector MCN8 arranged on the right side of the setting key switch 1311a. One end of the resistor MR2 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead type collective resistance arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. There is. Since the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged away from the RWM switch 633d. If the resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be tampered with. Therefore, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), the resistors MR16 and MR5 are mixed with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The existence of important resistors MR16 and MR5 can be hidden.

Further, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), an elongated illegal tool such as a wire can be tentatively removed from the gap created between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Even if the insertion is illegally accessed, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the resistors MR16 and MR5, which can contribute to the improvement of security.

B12. The resistance MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 at one end, and the other end is the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the above, and is arranged on the right side of the connector MCN8 arranged on the right side of the setting key switch 1311a. One end of the resistor MR2 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead type collective resistance arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. There is. In this way, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged apart from each other. As a result, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are mixed with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the logical state of the operation signal which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM. It is possible to make it difficult to notice from the switch 633d that it is an important electronic component related to the logical state of the operation signal which is the detection signal.

Further, by separating the resistances MR16 and MR5 from each other, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the resistances MR16 and MR5 at the same time, which can contribute to the improvement of security.

B13. Error that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. As other circuits between the main control input circuit 1310b without the detection function and the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 187, various DIP type ICs, lead type resistors, lead type diodes, and lead types The capacitor, the read type electrolytic capacitor, and the DIP type crystal oscillator are arranged so as to intervene. By doing so, even if an elongated unauthorized tool such as a wire is intruded into the main control board box 1320 to short-circuit the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the intrusion of the unauthorized tool can be prevented by another circuit. It is possible to induce a short circuit to another circuit to prevent the operation of the main control board 1310 so that the game cannot be performed. A detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. Even when the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function is replaced with a dedicated IC provided with an input circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b is arranged so as to intervene with the dedicated IC. Even with this configuration, even if an elongated unauthorized tool such as a wire is intruded into the main control board box 1320 to short-circuit the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the intrusion of the unauthorized tool can be prevented by another circuit. At the same time, it is possible to induce a short circuit to another circuit to prevent the operation of the main control board 1310 so that the game cannot be performed.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the drawer connector on the game board side and the drawer connector on the main body frame side. In this case, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the opposite surface on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted (or the game board side). Even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the drawer connector is mounted, it is difficult to see (covered by the drawer connector), and wiring that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the drawer connector on the main body frame side is mounted. Since the pattern is formed on the surface opposite to the surface on which the drawer connector on the main body frame side is mounted (or even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the drawer connector on the main body frame side is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector), it becomes difficult to see. There is.

Here, the drawer connector will be described. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically make an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. The game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is guided. Each terminal of the connector (convex type) and each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 will be described. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is formed of a non-conductive resin, and the front side is opened in a rectangular shape and left and right. It has a box-shaped body that is long in the direction, and a plate-shaped base body that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped body to form an alphabetic T-shape as a whole.

Around the opening of the box-shaped main body, a drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 is attached to the box-shaped main body from the front surface of the opening toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body for a predetermined distance. Inclined portions for guiding toward the bottom surface are formed respectively. The game board side drawer connector (convex) of the game board 5 is connected to the central part (1 place) of the inner upper surface of the opening of the box-shaped body and the left and right parts (1 place on the left part and 1 place on the right part) of the inner upper surface. The type) is prevented from being inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) by turning it upside down in a direction different from the normal direction, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is in the normal direction. When inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), the position of the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is prevented from shifting in the left-right direction. Grooves that enhance the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 are formed from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening of the box-shaped main body toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body. It is formed.

On the bottom of the box-shaped body, there are pin-type terminals arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in the direction perpendicular to the bottom (six pin-type terminals are lined up in one row in the left-right direction). It penetrates the box-shaped body and the base body.

Mounting through holes are formed on the left side and the right side of the base body, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side relay board, rivets are first inserted from the front of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) into the mounting through hole to relay the main body frame side. On the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate, the end portion is crimped and plastically deformed. As a result, the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side is fixed to the relay board on the main body frame side.

Further, on the back surface of the base body, when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is mounted on the main body frame side relay board, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is oriented in the normal direction on the main body frame side relay board. A columnar protrusion is formed so that it can be mounted.

In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), the main body frame side relay board is equipped with a DIP (Dual Inline Package) type small connector that is electrically connected to this main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). , Is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is guided. ) And each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side of the main body are electrically connected, so that the main control provided for the game board 5 is provided via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals by the board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 is formed.

The drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and also plays various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply to various boards provided on the board 5, and is another main body apart from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on a main body frame-side relay board separate from the main body frame-side relay board. The other main body frame side relay board is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) that is electrically connected to the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) in addition to the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). A small type connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative board and various sensors provided in the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, another game board side drawer different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The connector (convex type) is guided to the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). ) By being electrically connected to each terminal, a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 via a DIP type small connector and wiring (harness). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by various sensors, various speakers, and the like is formed. The structure of the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is the same as that of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the other main body frame of the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The method of fixing to the side relay board'is the same as the method of fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

Further, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the game board side relay board guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and other main bodies of the main body frame 4. Another game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the frame side drawer connector (concave type) Another game board side relay board (The other game board side relay board is the main body frame 4. The fixing method of the game board 5 guided to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side to the relay board on the game board side on which the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side is mounted is different from that on the main body frame. It is the same as the fixing method (fixing method using rivets) of the side drawer connector (concave type) to the relay board on the main body frame side.

When fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board, rivets are used because by using the drawer connector, the game board 5 is automatically attached to the main body frame 4. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected to each other, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side. Since a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body of the drawer connector (concave type), each pin type terminal in the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side is attached to the back surface of the relay board on the main body frame side (concave type). This is to prevent the soldered surface from peeling off on the solder surface). When fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board or when fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board side relay board using bolts and nuts, There is a drawback that the nut may loosen when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main body frame 4.

In the present embodiment, pin type terminals are used as each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, but when a bellows type using a terminal and a contact is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 is powered by the power supply. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the machine turned on, the contacts between the terminal and the contacts (specifically, a large current (inrush current) flows through the contacts for various power supply lines) are welded. Become. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state and an attempt is made to attach it, the contact of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be removed from the main body frame 4. When removing, the contact may come off from the drawer connector on the main body frame side (concave type) and be damaged, making it impossible to use the drawer connector on the main body frame side (concave type).

In addition, if the terminal and contacts are welded together, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. The problem that it needs to be provided.

In the present embodiment, by using pin type terminals as the terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, the above-mentioned problems do not occur at all. That is, even if the worker accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal and the main body of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5. Each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side of the main body of the frame 4 is not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a passle signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of an ON signal or an OFF signal.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. The main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 is provided with a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x on which the lead terminal of the electronic component is mounted and a solder surface (back surface) 1310y to which the lead terminal of the electronic component into which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted is soldered. ing.

The ZIP type main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 188 is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and is electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a. The setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 188 is mounted as an operation unit which is an electronic component capable of setting and changing the probability of giving a benefit to the player.

The lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the lead terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is soldered. The wiring pattern for electrically connecting the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the lead terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, a wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operation unit capable of setting and changing the probability of giving a benefit to the player, is formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it difficult to illegally modify the wiring pattern. can. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of security.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. The setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as the first operation unit capable of changing the setting, and the ZIP type main control of FIG. 188 as the storage unit capable of storing and holding the game information. A RAM with a built-in main control of the MPU 1310a is provided, and a main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 and a built-in main control as a control board on which the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. As a second operation unit capable of clearing (erasing) the game information stored (retained) in the RAM, the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board of FIG. 182 is provided.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player based on the operation signal which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the operation signal which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. be.

The setting key signal wiring pattern and the operation signal which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are input to the main control MPU 1310a as the first transmission path where the operation signal which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the main control MPU 1310a. As the second transmission line, the RWM signal wiring pattern is formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to run in parallel.

In this way, in the first transmission line in which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is the first operation unit that can set and change the probability of giving the player a benefit, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. An operation signal that is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is a second operation unit that can clear (erase) a certain setting key signal wiring pattern and game information held in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a. Is formed on the main control board 1310 so that the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission line input to the main control MPU 1310a, does not run in parallel. As a result, the setting key signal wiring pattern which is the first transmission line and the RWM signal wiring pattern which is the second transmission line are separated from each other and input to the main control MPU1310a, and the setting key which is the first transmission line is input. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the signal wiring pattern and the RWM signal wiring pattern which is the second transmission line at the same time. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of security.

[13. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and it can be driven strongly enough to rotate in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while abutting against the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "time reduction (time reduction)" is performed.

The game ball B discharged from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of obstacle nails discharged above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003. After contacting N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

In the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 opened at a distance to the left. It is composed of the second guide passage 2522 and the second guide passage. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). If the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit 2400 The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate 2003 has a high probability of hitting the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2022, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the large winning opening 2005.

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second starting opening of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted in 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, and it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out to the player It is possible to urge the driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2022. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the probability of receiving the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2022 is lower in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutment portion 1006, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the character wins. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received by the prize winning mouth 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the bonus winning slot 2006 when the bonus winning slot 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is used from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B (pieces) is paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B received by the character winning opening 2006 and detected by the character winning opening sensor 2601 circulates in the distribution passage 3158, and the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided by the V winning opening door 3006 that advances and retreats back and forth. It is distributed to any of. When the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2007, the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the loss opening 2008, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player does not occur.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 has the first shelf portion 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf portion 2422, and the upper side is on the left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf portion 2423, the grand prize opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf portion 2424 are rolled to the left and released into the game area 5a. ..

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2411, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door 2411. When the game ball B is retracted, the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "time reduction (time reduction)" is performed.

Further, when the game ball B is rolling on the large winning opening door 2413, a special lottery result (first special) is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the special fluctuation time elapses. Will be ready for acceptance. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by accepting the game ball B in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of the game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. The special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the game ball B is at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results that are drawn by being accepted include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time)". There are "short hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "per prize", the prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), and the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", the big winning opening 2005 makes it possible to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special time) is set as an advantageous game state. ) Is generated. This ST is to maintain a probable change and a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The staging image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the staging display device 1600 is a staging image in which three picture rows consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern row is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back front effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the rear upper effect unit 3200, the back rear lower effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type staging in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[14. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the gaming board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196 and the like. FIG. 194 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same part as (a). It is a front view which shows. FIG. 195 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit is light-emitting decorated in (a). It is explanatory drawing shown by. FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is light-emittingly decorated in FIG. 195 (a).

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a milky white synthetic resin having translucency. It has the same configuration as the above, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, as shown in FIG. 194 (a). The back unit 3000 provided behind the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front (player side).

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, since the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed of the milky white synthetic resin, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the front component 1000 and the panel plate 1110A The portion of the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the game panel 1100 except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side).

The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be a milky white synthetic resin plate machined or may be molded by injection molding using a milky white synthetic resin.

In the game board 5A of the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A and the like of the game panel 1100 are milky white, a part of the back unit 3000 provided behind through the panel plate 1110A and the like (from the opening 1112 in the front view). The outer part) can be made invisible. Since the panel plate 1110A and the like have translucency, when the decorative body and the like provided at the rear are light-emitting and decorated, the light from the decorative body at the rear passes through the panel plate 1110A and the decorative body is used. The luminous decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front staging unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110A and the like, the panel plate 1110A is viewed from the front. The back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like, which are located outside the opening 1112, are invisible from the front. Then, when the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like were light-emitting decorated, they had translucency as shown in FIG. 195 (b). The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3122, which are provided in the rear through the panel plate 1110A and are light-transmitted and decorated by light transmission. The part 3123 and the like can be visually recognized.

Since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white, the emission colors of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, which are decorated with light emission, can be transmitted as they are, and the color can be changed. It is possible to show the player a rich light emission effect.

As the opacity having translucency in the panel plate 1110A, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it becomes difficult to illuminate and decorate with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it becomes difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear may be easily recognized, and the effect of concealment may not be sufficiently obtained.

Further, although the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white (Mansell value (10YR 9.2 / 0.5)), "white Mansell value (N 9.5)" and "polished powder color Mansell value (2.5Y 9.2)" are used. /0.5) ”,“ Uhana Color Mansell Value (10Y 9/1) ”,“ Generated Color Mansell Value (10YR 9/1) ”,“ Lead White Mansell Value (N 9) ”,“ Oyster White Mansell Value (5GY 8.5 / 0.3) ”,“ Gray-white Mansell value (10YR 9 / 0.5) ”,“ White indigo Mansell value (9.7BG 8.2 / 1.3) ”,“ Secret color Mansell Value (2B 8.5 / 2) ”,“ Ivory color mansell value (2.5Y 8.5 / 1.5) ”,“ Cream yellow mansell value (5Y 8.5 / 3.5) ”,“ Sakura color mansell A white color such as "value (10RP 9 / 2.5)" may be used.

By the way, since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white having translucency, if a colored decorative body such as black, red, or blue is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body emits light. Even in the undecorated state, it may be visible through the panel plate 1110A depending on the color of the decorative body. Then, when the decorative body is seen through the panel board 1110A, the player notices the existence of the decorative body behind the panel board 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decorative body is luminescently decorated is given. There is a possibility that it will be lowered and the desired effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back front left decorative unit 3120 provided behind the panel plate 1110A constitutes the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like. Since the left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127 are formed of colorless and transparent members, they are transparent. Through the milky white panel plate 1110A, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123 cannot be seen. Therefore, in a state where the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, etc. are not light-emittingly decorated, they cannot be seen by the player, so that it is difficult for the player to notice their existence. .. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc. are light-emittingly decorated, they can be seen through the milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency, which surprises the player. In addition to being able to enjoy the light emission effect, the light of the light emission decoration can be seen through the panel plate 1110A, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be made to look bright and beautiful, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. ..

Further, the game board 5A of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a that irradiate the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A with light are mounted on the outside of the milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency. Has been done. The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 are made to emit light, the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light and be decorated as shown by shading in FIG. 196. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) through which the game ball B circulates is in a state of self-lighting, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened and the game area 5a is circulated. The game ball B can be made easy to see, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the game panel 1100 self-illuminates, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen in silhouette, so that the game ball B can be easily visually recognized, and the firing intensity is finely adjusted. It can be easy. Further, if the panel decorative board 1130 is provided on both the left side and the right side of the panel board 1110A, it can be intuitively understood when giving "right-handed" or "left-handed" advice to the player. become. More specifically, depending on the situation of the game, the LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 on either the left side or the right side is made to emit light, and the left part or the right part of the panel plate 1110A is made to emit light to decorate the player. It is possible to intuitively understand that "left-handed" or "right-handed" advice is given, and it is possible to entertain the player in the operation of driving the game ball B. It is possible to entertain the player with a new sense of light emission.

More specifically, in a conventional pachinko machine, in a game board using an opaque veneer plywood as a game panel, a decorative film having a predetermined pattern printed on the front surface of the plywood is attached to the inside of the game area. I try to decorate it. However, when plywood is used for the gaming panel, the decoration with the decorative film does not look like other gaming machines, and it is difficult to enhance the appeal to the player. On the other hand, when the panel plate 1110 through which the game ball B circulates is made transparent as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided in the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. While the pachinko machine 1 can be easily seen and has a feeling of openness, the game ball B circulating in front of the transparent panel plate 1110 seems to be floating in the air, and depending on the player, the game ball. The movement of B may be difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the gaming board 5A of the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A having translucency can be light-emitting and decorated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the light-emitting color and the light-emitting pattern of the LED 1130a and the like can be made. By appropriately combining the above, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed in various ways, and the self-luminous game board 5A, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can be shown to the player, and the player is interested in it. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be strongly attracted and has a high appeal to the player. Further, since the panel plate 1110A self-illuminates due to the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the game ball B circulating in front of the panel plate 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

According to the game board 5A of the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned effects and effects, the panel plate 1110A or the like is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use a resin having a lower grade than the transparent resin, so that it is transparent. Compared with the case where the resin is used, the cost required for the panel plate 1110A can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided on the outside of the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A. You can do it. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, as compared with the case where the panel plate is made transparent, the point-like light from the LED 1130a or the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the opalescent milky white panel plate 1110A, so that the panel plate 1110A can be diffused. Can be softly luminescent and decorated, and the glare can be suppressed to make the game board 5A easy on the eyes.

Further, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) having a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wear of the panel plate 1110A due to the distribution of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the game area 5a when the rear decorative body is not luminescently decorated by the cell pattern. Can be improved. Further, the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110A can be used to illuminate and decorate the cell pattern together with the panel plate 1110A, so that the decoration of the panel plate 1110A can be made to look more beautiful.

Further, as described above, when the cell is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, by using the pattern applied to the cell as the outline, the light emitting decoration by the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110A ( Illuminations) can be made clear, and the decoration effect of light emitting decoration can be further enhanced.

Further, a cell may be provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. As a result, the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light from the LED or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A (cell), so that the LED emits light. Therefore, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. The shadow reflected on the panel board 1110A may be, for example, characters such as "right-handed", "left-handed", "chance", etc., and entertains the player by suggesting a change in the game situation. Can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (back front left decorative unit 3120) having a fixed position is provided behind the milky white panel plate 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A so as to be movable between the retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and the appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A in front view.

Further, in the above embodiment, the whole including the inside of the panel plate 1110A or the like is shown to be milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A or the like is partially milky white or the inside is transparent and at least one surface. May be milky white. Specifically, for example, a panel plate molded in two colors of a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel plate in which a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate are bonded together, and a transparent resin plate on at least one surface. Panel boards with a milky white film (cell) attached, panel boards with a transparent resin board that has been subjected to chijimi processing with ultraviolet curable ink, and panel boards that have been sandblasted on the back surface of a transparent resin board. Be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A or the like is shown to be milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate may be a panel plate having an appropriate color such as red, blue, yellow, or the like. good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown to be milky white having translucency, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front is transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment. It may be a constituent member 1000, or it may be a front constituent member having a color different from that of the panel plate 1110A.

[15. Third embodiment of the game board]
Next, the gaming board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate and the cell in the game board of the third embodiment disassembled and viewed from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same structure except that the cell 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110 in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and the parts having the same structure will be described in detail. Is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-shaped cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is detachably provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100. .. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and is printed with a predetermined pattern. The material of the cell 1140 is "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin". , "Polystyrene resin", "impact resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The cell 1140 is formed in a size that covers only a part (here, a portion extending from the left side to the lower side of the center accessory 2500) with respect to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110. Further, although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 using screws in a state of having a predetermined amount of rattling. As a result, compared to the case where the panel plate 1110 is attached to the entire surface, the labor required for mounting the cell 1140 can be facilitated, and the amount of the cell 1140 used can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided in a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be taken from the resin sheet can be increased as compared with the conventional cell attached to the panel plate, and the pachinko machine can be used. The cost of 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state of rattling, even if the cell 1140 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the rattling. can. As a result, even if the cell 1140 contracts with respect to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to prevent wrinkles and cracks from forming in the cell 1140, and it is possible to maintain the decorative effect of the pattern of the cell 1140. ..

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with a cell 1140 having a different pattern, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed and the model can be changed. It is possible to easily respond to changes, design changes, etc., suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and replace it with a cell 1140 with a more decorative effect. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a person.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is longer than in the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the front side of the panel plate 1110, and the game is played. It is possible to reduce the feeling of oppression on the person.

Further, it is desirable that the cell 1140 has a translucent property, and the pattern of the cell 1140 can be luminescently decorated by the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110 (cell 1140). The appearance in the region 5a can be improved, and the light emitting decoration of the cell 1140 can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using a screw, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the cell 1140 is described as a panel plate 1110 and a panel holder 1120. It may be installed by sandwiching it between.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 provided with the center accessory 2500 of the panel plate 1110 is provided at a position offset (eccentric to the upper right) in the upper right direction with respect to the panel plate 1110. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be offset upward (eccentric upward) or offset laterally (eccentric left-right). It is possible to obtain the same effect as described above by providing the cell 1140 behind the portion where the opening 1112 becomes wider due to being offset (eccentric).

Further, the opening 1112 provided with the center accessory 2500 may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, when the centers of the panel plate 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide with each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 offset from the center of the panel plate 1110 coincides with the center of the game area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel plate 1110.

[16. Another embodiment of the function display unit]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 or the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 198 to 203 and the like. 198 (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a), and (c) is in front of the function display unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the rear, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the function display unit of (a) from the back. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the functional display unit of FIG. 198 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 200 is an exploded perspective view of the functional display unit of FIG. 198 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198 and the player. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. FIG. 203 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

Similar to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment is variablely displayed by blinking a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Later, by turning on or off each of them so as to have a predetermined combination, the game state (game status), the normal lottery result, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, the second special lottery result), and the normal lottery result. The number of holdings, the number of holdings of special lottery results, the number of rounds at the time of "big hit", etc. are displayed.

More specifically, in the game board 5 and the like of the first embodiment, for example, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 and the like, the main control board 1310 has a special lottery result as an internal process. Is drawn. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the lottery special lottery result to the function display unit 1400, and displays the lottery special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401 in the function display unit 1400. I am doing it.

Further, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect suggesting the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 focuses on entertaining the player, it is difficult to understand the details of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310, although it can be roughly recognized. It has become. On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400, the lottery special lottery result is accurately displayed, but since it is displayed by the light emission of a plurality of small LEDs 1401, the displayed contents can be understood at a glance. It is difficult.

Therefore, by taking a picture of the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera (digital camera), a camera attached to the mobile phone, etc., the light emission state of the LED in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the contents displayed on the function display unit 1400. It is conceivable to try to know as soon as possible.

However, when the special lottery result of the lottery can be easily determined by the light emission of the LED in the function display unit 1400, the effect display indicates that the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is "missing". Even if the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the device 1600, knowing the result makes it impossible to enjoy the effect by the effect image and hopes that the effect image will end sooner. However, some players may become frustrated and reduce their interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen by the eyes of the player, but when the image is taken with a digital camera or the like, the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1401 is clearly visible. It became unclear so that the displayed content could not be determined.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A is provided on the front side of the function display board 1402 in which a plurality of LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front surface and the function display board 1402, and independently transmits the light from the LEDs 1401 to the front. Light from the translucent sheet 1404 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1403, the translucent sheet 1404 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1403, and the LED 1401 provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1404 and transmitted through the reflector rear 1403. It is equipped with a reflector front 1405 that radiates in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 199, a plurality of LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the function display board 1402. After the reflector 1403, a plurality of through holes 1403a are provided so as to correspond to each LED 1401 of the function display board 1402. The plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1402 (see FIG. 198 (b) and the like).

The front reflector 1405 has a plurality of display holes 1405a that correspond to the through holes 1403a of the reflector rear 1403 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are located immediately before the through holes 1403a of the reflector rear 1403 corresponding to each rear end side, and the front end side passes through the center of the rear end side from the front vertical line of the function display board 1402. It is located at a distance from each other. That is, the axial direction of the plurality of display holes 1405a is directed to each direction with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display board 1402.

Further, the reflector front 1405 has a distinguishing recess 1405b which is recessed from the front surface to the rear so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The distinction recess 1405b divides the plurality of display holes 1405a into two, a display hole 1405a (LED1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 201, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are the LEDs 1401 when viewed from a player sitting at a position 50 cm to 70 cm away from the function display unit 1400A in front of the pachinko machine 1. The light from is directed in three directions: one that can be seen only by the left eye, one that can be seen only by the right eye, and one that can be seen by either the left eye or the right eye. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three, one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the light from all the LEDs 1401 can be seen by the player with both eyes, so that when the special lottery result or the like is displayed, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 is clarified. It can be visually recognized, and can exhibit the same functions as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, either one for the left eye and one for both eyes, or one for the right eye and one for both eyes is photographed. Therefore, it is difficult to photograph the light emitting state (light emitting state) of all the LEDs 1401. That is, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be made unclear, and it is difficult to determine the display content of the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, the display content on the function display unit 1400A is clarified based on the photograph taken, and the special lottery result of the lottery is "missing", mere "big hit", "probability change hit", "time saving hit", By knowing "second big hit (ST hit)" etc., you can no longer enjoy the effect to suggest the lottery special lottery result, or you can not enjoy the advantageous game state (for example, "big hit" game) that is occurring. It is possible to prevent the player from doing something like that, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is different, and the display content is matched to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Is made to look good, so that the display content of the function display unit 1400A can be clearly shown from behind the seated player. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being looked into by other players, and the game can be played without worrying about other players. Can be entertained.

Further, as described above, since the display content is made to look good according to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the function by the digital camera or the like is performed from the position behind the player. It is possible to make it more difficult to photograph the displayed contents on the display unit 1400A, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is added in the left-right direction and also in the vertical direction so as to be different in the vertical direction, and the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 are seated. When viewed from the height, the displayed contents look good. As a result, when an attempt is made to take a picture with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height direction as well, which makes it more difficult to take a picture of the display content on the function display unit 1400A.

Further, since the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, the right eye, etc., it is possible to suppress the increase in the distance between the plurality of LEDs 1401 in the left-right direction on the function display board 1402, which is a function. The width of the display unit 1400A in the left-right direction can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are directed in the direction of each section in order to be used for the left eye, the right eye, etc., but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the function display unit 1400B having the configuration shown in FIG. 202 may be used.

The function display unit 1400B includes a function display board 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b separated by a predetermined distance (distance between the left and right pupils of the player) in the left-right direction are mounted on the front surface, and a function display. A translucent translucent 1412 provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and independently transmitting light from the left LED 1411a and a right LED 1411b to the front, and a translucent translucent 1412 provided on the front side of the reflector 1412. It includes a sheet 1413, a left LED 1411a provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1413 and transmitted through the reflector 1412, and a reflector front 1414 that radiates light from the right LED 1411b forward.

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the left-right direction. The reflector 1412 is provided with a plurality of through holes 1412a so as to correspond to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411. The plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411. The reflector front 1414 is provided with a plurality of display holes 1414a so as to correspond to the plurality of through holes 1412a of the reflector rear 1412. The plurality of display holes 1414a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411.

This function display unit 1400B is configured so that when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a can be seen only by the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b can be seen only by the right eye. ing. Therefore, since the light from all of the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen by the player with both eyes, the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated in the left-right direction, only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like, and the second embodiment. It is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the function display unit 1400A of.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414 are directed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, from a position other than the front surface of the function display unit 1400B. Since the displayed contents cannot be clearly seen, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the displayed contents with a digital camera or the like.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414 are directed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and all face the same direction, so that the reflector front 1414 is easy. It is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B having a configuration that is difficult to shoot with a monocular digital camera or the like are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display having the configuration as shown in FIG. 203 is not limited thereto. It may be unit 1400C.

The function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, etc.) that can be photographed by a digital camera or the like, making it difficult to discriminate the display contents. Specifically, a functional display board 1421 on which a plurality of LEDs 1421a are mounted on the front surface, a reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the functional display board 1421, and a flat plate-shaped plate provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1422. It includes a light guide plate 1423, an auxiliary substrate 1424 on which an invisible light LED 1424a that irradiates the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 with invisible light, and a reflector front 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423.

The reflector rear 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display board 1421 respectively. When the light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 is incident from the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, at least the portion of the display hole 1425a in front of the reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 emits either infrared rays or ultraviolet rays as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light in a state where the special lottery result or the like is displayed by the plurality of LEDs 1421a, and the invisible light is radiated from the light guide plate 1423. The pre-reflector 1425 has a plurality of display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the post-reflector 1422. The plurality of through holes 1422a after the reflector and the plurality of display holes 1425a in the front 1425 of the reflector are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light by the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light. Therefore, the LED 1421a provided behind the light guide plate 1423. You can see the light of, and you can see the displayed contents in good condition.

On the other hand, when this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if invisible light can be photographed, the light guide plate emitting light by the invisible light makes it appear that all the display holes 1425a are emitting light. , The displayed content can be made unclear, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the one provided with the reflector 1403 (1412 after the reflector) and the translucent sheet 1404 (translucent sheet 1413) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display board 1402 (function) is provided. A configuration in which the reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) is directly provided on the front surface of the display board 1411) may be provided.

Further, as a configuration that makes it difficult to shoot the display contents in the function display unit by a digital camera or the like, for example, the LEDs may be distributed and displayed in a wider range than the shooting range of the digital camera or the like, and the LED is lit by the player. You may make the LED blink at a speed that makes it look like it is off when you take a picture with a digital camera, etc., or you can turn off the LED that is not related to the display to the player. You may use multiple dummy LEDs that appear to be on or off when you take a picture with a digital camera, etc., or you can place a high-brightness LED near the function display unit. When shooting with a digital camera or the like, halation may be caused so that the displayed contents are not captured.

[17. Second embodiment of mounting a magnetic sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the game board 5 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 204. 204 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor of (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is (b). It is an exploded perspective view which shows by disassembling the attachment of the magnetic sensor of), and (d) is the exploded perspective view of the attachment of the magnetic sensor which shows by the holding member different from (c).

The second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050 is to lock the holding member 1071 which is mounted at a predetermined position of the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a consisting of through holes, and the holding member 1071. It has an elastic claw 1072a that is locked to the portion 1071a and includes a holding container 1072 that houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are formed of a non-magnetic material.

Further, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the surface opposite to the elastic claw 1072a. Through the hole in the holding container 1072, the electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, the holding member 1071 and the like draw magnetic force lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the game area 5a. It is possible to prevent the magnetic force lines from being brought together, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic force lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act using the magnet at an early stage, and the fraudulent act is notified by notifying the detection of the suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts.

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1071, and thus it is made of a magnetic material like a conventional pachinko machine. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using a metal screw, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of magnetism.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by providing the locking portion 1071a penetrating the holding member 1071 and locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to the locking portion 1071a, the magnetic sensor 1050 is used. The configuration of the holding member 1071 to be attached can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

Further, since the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 204 (d), a plurality of sets of locking portions are previously attached to the holding member 1071. By providing 1071a and locking the elastic claw 1072a to an arbitrary locking portion 1071a, the position where the magnetic sensor 1050 is mounted can be arbitrarily set. Alternatively, the holding member 1071 may be provided with another locking portion 1071a at a position different from the locking portion 1071a in which the elastic claw 1072a is locked. As a result, when it is desired to change the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 or when it is desired to add a magnetic sensor 1050, the holding member 1071 can be dealt with without replacing it with a new one, and the cost can be reduced and the holding member 1071 can be held. The versatility of the member 1071 can be increased.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. , The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 are locked to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions. Can be provided at any position or the position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, the pachinko machine 1 capable of easily responding to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

Further, an urging portion such as a protrusion for pressing the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided inside the holding container 1072. As a result, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 is disconnected or a contact failure occurs due to the vibration, and the magnetometer is magnetic. The sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

In the above embodiment, the hole that penetrates is shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any shape may be used as long as the elastic claw 1072a can be locked. , Slit, etc.

Further, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 is shown to accommodate the magnetic sensor 1050 in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding container for accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the horizontal direction may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a accommodates the magnetic sensor 1050 and is attached to the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sensor case of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited to this. An elastic claw may be formed on the 1053 to be locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Further, although the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050 has been described above, this mounting structure may be used for mounting the vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be attached by accommodating the vibration sensor in a holding container having elastic claws and locking the elastic claws to the locking portion of the holding member. The vibration sensor is not affected by the surrounding magnetic material, but if the same mounting structure as this magnetic sensor 1050 is used, it is effective for changing / moving the mounting location and reducing the cost related to mounting.

[18. Another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a seal]
Subsequently, another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a seal different from the above embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208 and the like. In this chapter, the member with the predetermined decoration is the decorative body, the member to which the decorative body is attached to one surface is the first member, and the member to which the decorative body is attached to the other surface side is the member. The second member will be referred to as the second member. The decorative body, the first member, and the second member may be arranged side by side, vertically, or horizontally.

FIG. 205 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the positioning hole for the second member in a cross section, and FIG. 205 (b) is for removing the decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in which the closed space is formed by the 2nd member behind the separation hole of the 1st member in the cross section, and (c) is the state which the decorative body of different thickness is attached in (b). Is an explanatory view showing a cross section, and (d) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the mounting hole of the decorative body. FIG. 206 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front in a state where the decorative body is attached to the first member, (b) is a sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decorative body different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st member which attached the above from the front.

FIG. 207 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, and FIG. 207 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member (c). ) Is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member symmetrically provided, and (d) is an explanation showing the relationship with the decorative body and the first member symmetrically provided in a shape different from (c). It is a figure. FIG. 208 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, FIG. 208 (b) is a sectional view taken along the starter line in (a), and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a decorative body and a 1st member in (a) and (c), and (d) is a front view of the relationship between a decorative body of a form different from (a), and a movable first member. It is an explanatory view shown from the above, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cheer line in (d).

First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205 (a), a decorative body 1801 on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped seal, and a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached to one side. , A second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 is on the opposite side of the flat plate portion 1821a, the mounting recess 1821b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and the mounting recess 1821b of the flat plate portion 1821a. The boss portion 1821c protruding from the portion of the other surface, the separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and the separation hole 1821d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. It is equipped with a rib 1821e. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 separates the first member 1821 from the base portion 1841a in which the boss portion 1821c of the first member 1821 and the tips of the ribs 1821e are in contact with one surface and the base portion 1841a protruding from one surface. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b, and the other side is closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841. The interior is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1821b. The separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 on the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1821. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by using the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1821d.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is formed by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since it is closed from the other side and does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine like a conventional pachinko machine, it has a linear shape like a piano wire from the other side of the second member 1841 through the hole. It is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted into the game board 5, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

Further, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1821d, the second member is second. Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, the intrusion of an unauthorized tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d is prevented. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being carried out, and since the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body 1801 and leaves a trace on the decorative body 1801, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against the above.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 is replaced with the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second The attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1841 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205 (b), a decorative body 1801 on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped seal, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached to one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

The first member 1822 penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a, the mounting recess 1822b which is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It is provided with a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by the decorative body 1801 having one side attached to the mounting recess 1822b when assembled, and the other side is one side of the plurality of ribs 1822d and the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by the surface, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by using the separation hole 1822c, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily removed. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted inside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and the illegal act is performed. Since the improper tool penetrates the decorative body 1801 and leaves a trace on the decorative body 1801, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act and provide a pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against the fraudulent act. can do.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is used as the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205 (c), a decorative body 1802 having a predetermined decoration and having a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm) and a decorative body 1802 on one side thereof is provided. It includes a first member 1822 to be attached and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

The first member 1822 penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a, the mounting recess 1822b which is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It is provided with a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by the decorative body 1802 having one side attached to the mounting recess 1822b when assembled, and the other side is one side of the plurality of ribs 1822d and the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by the surface, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1802 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1802 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1802 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1802 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1802 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated from each other, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1802 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1802 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted inside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1802 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and the illegal act is performed. Since the improper tool penetrates the decorative body 1802 and leaves a trace on the decorative body 1802, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act and provide the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against the fraudulent act. can do.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is used as the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like. Examples of the decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum forming, compressed air molding, high frequency molding, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 205 (d), a decorative body 1803 having a predetermined decoration and being thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and having rigidity, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached to one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a projecting to the other side. By press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later, the decorative body 1803 can be mounted on the first member 1822.

The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and is in contact with the decorative body 1803, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It includes a separation hole 1822c into which 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d projecting from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by a mounting dowel 1803a having one side protruding from the decorative body 1803 when assembled, and the other side has a plurality of ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1803 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1803 cannot be correctly mounted on the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1822c and pressing the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the other side surface of the decorative body 1803 is separated from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b and the decorative body 1803. Can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1803 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. By doing so, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, so that the replacement work of the decorative body 1803 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 by using the separation hole 1822c, so that the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the constituent parts of the above, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, by pressing the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and mounting the decorative body 1803 on the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, so that the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822, as in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the hole that passes through the entire machine is not penetrated, it is necessary to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1842 through the hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, an unauthorized tool is pierced through the decorative body 1803 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c. However, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a can prevent penetration. For example, even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the separation hole 1822c can be prevented from being further inserted (invaded) into the other side by the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through which the illegal tool is passed, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1803 to prevent the decorative body 1803. Since the trace remains on the surface, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is used as the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

In addition, examples of the decorative body 1803 include those that are decorated in a relief shape and are formed by injection molding. Further, the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert-molded, or may be separately assembled. good.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b), a decorative body 1804 on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a decorative body 1804 are attached to one side. It includes a first member 1823. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may include any of the above configurations.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface thereof, and has translucency. The decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and chamfered portions 1804a having a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Since the overall shape of the decorative body 1804 is an overall shape in which it is difficult to specify the orientation, the orientation can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. .. Although the chamfered portion 1804a is shown here as an R chamfer, it may be a C chamfer.

Further, the decorative body 1804 is provided on the back surface with a substantially constant width (width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer peripheral edge, and the glue surface 1804b (the portion shown by shading in FIG. 206 (a)). have. The width of the glue surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width according to the size of the decorative body 1804. Limiting the glue surface 1804b to only the outer peripheral edge in this way is particularly a transparent seal (decorative body 1804), and is often used when it is desired to show an illumination or a design surface such as an LED at the rear.

The first member 1823 is one size larger than the decorative body 1804 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1823a and the flat plate portion 1823a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1823b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the portion of the mounting recess 1823b. The first member 1823 is transparently formed.

The separation hole 1823c is provided at a position close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and not covered by the glue surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached (position inside the glue surface 1804b). As a result, the adhesive surface 1804b is applied to the separation hole 1823c, so that the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is prevented from being lowered.

The separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The separation hole 1823c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) for separation inserted into the separation hole 1823c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the decorative body 1804. This is because if the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1823c in the decoration body 1804, and the appearance of the decoration body 1804 may be deteriorated.

Further, the first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, and is provided with a chamfered portion 1823d having a larger (radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining one corner is used as the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two ends constituting the corner portion of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as a reference surface for attaching the decorative body 1804. As a result, at least two clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1804 are secured, which makes it easy to perform the pasting work.

Further, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f indicating a portion of the contact surface in the mounting recess 1823b. The identification portion 1823f is recessed from the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By the operator looking at the identification unit 1823f, the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804 can be immediately recognized, it is possible to prevent an error in the position of the contact surface, and the attachment work can be performed. It is easy to do.

In the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1823b is 0.5 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1823b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner portion of the decorative body 1804 not provided with the chamfered portion 1804a is erroneously attached to the contact surface of the mounting recess 1823b indicated by the identification portion 1823f. It is brought into contact with the prevention portion 1823e), and the glue surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from the relevant portion and attached. When the corner portion of the decorative body 1804 provided with the chamfered portion 1804a is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e), the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e with respect to the chamfered portion 1804a. Because of the difference, it is possible to notice that the decorative body 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the normal direction.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, whereby the end edge of the decorative body 1804 is pressed. It can be removed so that the vicinity can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823) by pulling the rolled up portion. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the composition.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position where the decorative body 1804 is not applied to the glue surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole 1823c is decorated by the glue surface 1804b. It is possible to prevent the sticking strength of the body 1804 from being lowered, and it is possible to make it difficult for the decorative body 1804 to come off.

Further, since the misattachment prevention portion 1823e is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, if the decorative body 1804 is attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1804 is attached. By making the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a different from the shape of the misattachment prevention portion 1823e, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 is attached to the first member 1823 in the normal orientation. In addition to being able to be attached, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the identification portion 1823f indicating the contact surface is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface as the attachment reference of the decorative body 1804. It is possible to prevent mistakes in the position of the contact surface, and it is easy to perform the pasting work.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is replaced with the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1804 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment of FIGS. 206 (c), in the embodiments of FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b), the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is added to the portion along the outer peripheral edge on one diagonal line. It is also provided in the part of. Other configurations are the same as those of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 206 (a) and 206 (b), and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the present embodiment, in addition to exhibiting the same effects as described above, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the sticking strength is increased and the decorative body 1804 is more difficult to come off. Even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is attached by the diagonal glue surface 1804b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from swelling or wavy, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being deteriorated in appearance.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the glue surface can be reduced as compared with the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface of the decorative body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can. Further, since the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower than that in the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface, the work of removing the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be facilitated.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 207 (a), a horizontally long rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a decorative body on one side. It includes a first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1824 is omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1805 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided with a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a notched diagonally at one corner (lower left corner in the drawing). Since the decorative body 1805 has a shape in which it is difficult to specify the vertical orientation, the orientation can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. The glue surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 206 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1824 is one size larger than the decorative body 1805 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1824a and the flat plate portion 1824a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1824b, which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

Further, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c protruding into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner portion (lower left corner portion in the drawing) of the mounting recess 1824b. As a result, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In the first member 1824, the portion of the diagonally extending end side of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c and the portion of the short side connected to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c are the reference for attaching the decorative body 1805. It is set on the contact surface that becomes. As a result, the clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1805 are secured in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the hypotenuse side of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c. It is easy to perform pasting work.

In the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1824b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first, the hypotenuse of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are placed on the contact surface of the mounting recess 1824b (wrong). The hypotenuse portion of the sticking prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c) are brought into contact with each other, and the glue surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b from the portion to be pasted. wear.

When the corner portion of the decorative body 1805 not provided with the chamfered portion 1805a is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c), the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c with respect to the chamfered portion 1805a. Because of the difference, it is possible to notice that the decorative body 1805 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1805 can be attached in the normal direction. Further, when the decorative body 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decorative body 1805 protrudes from the mounting recess 1824b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c. It is possible to notice the erroneous pasting of the decorative body 1805.

According to the present embodiment, since the misattachment prevention portion 1824c is provided in the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached, the decorative body 1805 is attached in a direction different from the normal one. Then, the shape of the corner where the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 is not provided is different from the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c, so that the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1805 can be noticed, and the decorative body can be noticed. The 1805 can be attached to the first member 1824 in the normal orientation, and the decorative body 1805 can be prevented from being shipped in the state of being attached in the wrong orientation.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 207 (b), a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped seal, and a decorative body 1806 on one side. The first member 1825 to which the is attached is provided. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a notch portion 1806a cut out in an arc shape from the outside (lower part in the figure). Since the decorative body 1806 has a shape in which it is difficult to specify the orientation, the orientation can be specified by providing the cutout portion 1806a. The glue surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 206 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1825 is one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1825a and the flat plate portion 1825a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1825b, which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

Further, the first member 1825 has an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius corresponding to the notch portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end portion in the peripheral edge in the drawing). is doing. As a result, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In the first member 1825, the arcuate end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c is set as a contact surface as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1806. As a result, the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body 1806 is at least two directions, that is, the direction along the arc of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c and the direction away from the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c (vertical direction in the figure). It is secured and makes it easy to perform pasting work.

In the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1825b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the cutout portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, and the glue surface on the back side is brought into contact with the contact surface. Gradually bring it into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attach it.

When the decorative body 1806 was applied to the peripheral surface other than the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1825c) in the mounting recess 1825b, the decorative body 1806 protruded from the mounting recess 1825b at the portion of the misattachment prevention portion 1825c. In this state, the worker can be made aware of the erroneous attachment of the decorative body 1806.

According to the present embodiment, since the misattachment prevention portion 1825c is provided in the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is attached, the decorative body 1806 is attached in a direction different from the normal one. Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes at the portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c, and the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1806 can be noticed, and the decorative body 1806 can be stuck to the first member 1825 in the normal orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1806 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 207 (c) and 207 (d), a pair of decorative bodies left 1807L and a decorative body right 1807L, which are symmetrically provided and have predetermined decorations, characters, etc. printed on them and are composed of a sheet-shaped sticker. It includes 1807R (shaded portion) and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R to which a decorative body left 1807L and a decorative body right 1807R are attached to one side. The other side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is omitted.

The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are stickers on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like are printed on the surface. The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are symmetrical to each other. In the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, the end edges that are close to each other extend vertically in a straight line, and the upper end and the lower end of the end edge extend in a direction away from each other by an arcuate end edge. It is formed in a substantially semicircular shape that is long vertically, as if connected.

The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 207 (c) have different radiuses of R chamfers provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, the upper end and the lower end of the semicircle. On the other hand, in the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 207 (d), the upper end side (one end side in the longitudinal direction) of the semicircle is chamfered, and the lower end side (the other end side in the longitudinal direction) is linear. Notched. Both the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to specify the left and right sides when the top and bottom are turned upside down. I am trying to identify it.

The glue surfaces of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 206 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are formed symmetrically with each other. The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a and the flat plate portion 1826a, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. There is a mounting recess 1826b that is recessed deeper than the thickness (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) and to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached, and an erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the mounting recess 1826b. is doing.

The misattachment prevention portion 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. 207 (c) has an R chamfering radius having a radius larger than the radius of the lower end side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. It is provided in. On the other hand, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. 207 (d) is provided in a horizontally extending linear notch shape. In any of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c is set as a reference surface for sticking the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. Has been done.

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 207 (c), the clearance direction for pasting the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is an arc direction that rolls the arc of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1826c, and erroneous pasting. At least two directions are secured, one is the direction away from the prevention portion 1826c (the vertical direction in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 207 (d), the clearance directions for pasting the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are the directions along the straight line of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c (left-right direction in the figure). At least two directions are secured, one is a direction away from the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c (the vertical direction in the figure). As described above, in any of the embodiments, at least two clearance directions are secured, which makes it easy to perform the pasting work.

In the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1826b is likely to be chipped.

When the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, in the longitudinal direction of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, Of both ends, the one with the larger radius of R chamfer or the one that is notched linearly is in a state of facing downward, and abuts on the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the end side of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c). Then, the glue surface on the back side is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b from the relevant portion and attached.

If the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are turned upside down and then left and right are to be pasted upside down, the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion) is applied to the shape of the lower end portion. Since the shapes of 1826c) are different, it is possible to notice that the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are pasted in the wrong direction, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are pasted in the normal orientation. Can be attached.

According to the present embodiment, since the misattachment prevention portion 1826c is provided in each of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached. When the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached in a direction different from the normal orientation, the shape of the end portion of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in the longitudinal direction and the shape of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c are obtained. By differentiating, it is possible to notice the mistaken orientation of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are oriented in the normal orientation of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R. It is possible to prevent the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R from being shipped in the state of being attached in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R may be members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R include PET seals, flex metal seals (trade name), metallic seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (c), a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-shaped sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1808 are attached to one side. It includes a movable first member 1827. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface in the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the upper two corners are R-chamfered and the lower two corners are C-chamfered. The orientation of the decorative body 1808 can be specified by the difference in the chamfer shape between the upper side and the lower side. The glue surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 206 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1827 has a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate-shaped flat plate portion 1827a and a size one size larger than the decorative body 1808 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1827a and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808 (0. 4 mm to 1.0 mm) A mounting recess 1827b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1827a at the site of the mounting recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b. It is provided with an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d provided in the portion.

Further, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e that project in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the shaft portion 1827e is located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. In the first member 1827, a pair of shaft portions 1827e are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1827 is movable so as to be rotatable (rotated) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, may be insert-molded, or may be separately assembled. good.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at the position far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced, so that the weight of the first member can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when the 1827 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved lightly. can. Further, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made uniform, and the first member 1827 is balanced. As a result, uneven wear and the like can be reduced.

The separation hole 1827c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) for separation inserted into the separation hole 1827c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the decorative body 1808. This is because if the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1827c in the decoration body 1808, and the appearance of the decoration body 1808 may be deteriorated.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape corresponding to the C chamfer at the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the diagonal end side of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d and the lower end side of the mounting recess 1827b are set as a reference surface for sticking the decorative body 1808.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases. However, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position close to the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at each of the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced and the uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. At the same time, the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1827b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is in contact with the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b. Then, the glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from the relevant portion and attached. When the decorative body 1808 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1827d is different from the shape of the R chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1808, so that the decorative body 1808 is suitable for pasting. You can make yourself aware that you made a mistake, and you can have the decorative body 1808 attached in the correct orientation. Further, when the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner portion of the decorative body 1808 protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b at the portion of the misattachment prevention portion 1827d, and the decorative body is used for the operator. You can be aware of the erroneous pasting of 1808.

Further, the first member 1827 is recessed in a portion of the mounting recess 1827b near the edge and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 208 (b)). In the state where the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the separation groove 1827f straddles the decorative body 1808 and forms a space between the separated groove 1827f and the decorative body 1808. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the portion of the separated groove 1827f in the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the outside, a part of the decorative body 1808 is depressed into the separated groove 1827f. At the same time, the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is in a state of being lifted from the mounting recess 1827b, and the decorative body 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b by pulling the raised portion.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827, and the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, whereby the edge of the decorative body 1808 is used. The vicinity can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1808 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827) by pulling the rolled up portion. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the composition.

Further, since the misattachment prevention portion 1827d is provided in the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, if the decorative body 1808 is attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1808 is attached. By making the shape of the corner portion different from the shape of the misattachment prevention portion 1827d, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1808, and the decorative body 1808 is attached to the first member 1827 in the normal orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misattachment prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since the rotation moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be lightly moved (rotated).

Further, since the first member 1827 is provided with two separation holes 1827c and two misattachment prevention portions 1827d, it is possible to balance the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1827e, and the shaft portion 1827e can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may be a movable member for directing.

Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc., the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808, so that the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1808 are used. It is desirable that one member 1827 has the following relationship.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, from the upper end side of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827. When the distance to the upper end of the decorative body 1808 is c and the radius of the game ball B is r, the distance d is within the range of [0 <d <r] and then the distance. It is desirable that c is within the range of [0 ≦ c <(2rd ^ 2-d ^ 2) ^ 0.5]. The expression is shown in the key brackets.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, so that it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects. Can be made to.

The distance d is preferably in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. This is because if the distance d is smaller than this, the decorative body 1808 may protrude forward from the flat plate portion 1827a depending on the tolerance of the decorative body 1808, and the game ball B may come into contact with the upper end side. However, if it is larger than this, the shadow due to the upper end edge of the mounting recess 1827b is likely to be cast on the decorative body 1808, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1808 may be deteriorated.

Further, the contact surface in the mounting recess 1827b may be set to the upper end side. As a result, the upper end side of the decorative body 1808 is in contact with the upper end side of the mounting recess 1827b, so that the game ball B does not abut on the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, which is the same as described above. It can play an action effect.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208 (d) and 208 (e), a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-shaped sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1809 are attached to one side. It includes a movable first member 1828. The configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface in the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the upper two corners are R-chamfered, and the lower two corners are provided with quadrangular cutouts 1809a. .. The cutout portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d described later of the first member 1828. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners makes it possible to specify the orientation of the decorative body 1809. The glue surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 206 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1828 has a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate-shaped flat plate portion 1828a and a size one size larger than the decorative body 1809 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1828a and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1809 (0. 4 mm to 1.0 mm) A mounting recess 1828b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1828a at the site of the mounting recess 1828b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b. It is provided with an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d provided in the portion.

Further, the first member 1828 has a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e that bulges to one side in the left-right direction toward the shaft core at the lower left and right corners of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion. It includes a shaft hole 1828f provided on each end surface of the 1828e on the outer side in the left-right direction, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. In the first member 1828, a pair of shaft portions 1828 g are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is movable so as to be rotatable (rotated) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828 g. The shaft portion 1828 g of the first member 1828 may be one inserted at the time of molding of the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be separately assembled.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the portion of the mounting recess 1828b, and a part of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d. The shaft support portion 1828e (misattachment prevention portion 1828d) forms the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b into a shape as if it were cut out in a square shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828 g, the weight of the first member 1828 at the position far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828 g can be reduced, so that the weight of the first member can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when the 1828 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved lightly. can. Further, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made uniform, and the first member 1828 is balanced. As a result, uneven wear and the like can be reduced.

The separation hole 1828c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) for separation inserted into the separation hole 1828c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the decorative body 1809. This is because if the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1828c in the decoration body 1809, and the appearance of the decoration body 1809 may be deteriorated.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d has a shape protruding in a quadrangular shape at the lower corner portion of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support portion 1828e, and has a shape corresponding to the notch portion 1809a at the lower corner portion of the decorative body 1809. It has become. In this embodiment, the upper end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is set as a contact surface as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1809.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases. However, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position close to the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828g. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at each of the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced and the uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. At the same time, the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1828b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the cutout portion 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and the portion concerned. The glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b and attached. If the decorative body 1809 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d is different from the shape of the R chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1809, so that the decorative body 1809 is suitable for pasting. It is possible to notice that the mistake is made, and the decorative body 1809 can be pasted in the proper orientation. Further, when the decorative body 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner portion of the decorative body 1809 protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1828d, and the decorative body is used for the operator. It is possible to notice the erroneous pasting of 1809.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the decorative body 1809 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, whereby the end edge of the decorative body 1809 is pressed. The vicinity can be removed so that it can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1809 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828) by pulling the rolled up portion. It is possible to achieve the same action and effect as the configuration.

Further, since the misattachment prevention portion 1828d is provided in the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, if the decorative body 1809 is to be attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1809 is attached. By making the shape of the corner portion different from the shape of the misattachment prevention portion 1828d, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1809, and the decorative body 1809 is attached to the first member 1828 in the normal orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1809 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misattachment prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the rotation moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotation drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be lightly moved (rotated).

Further, since the first member 1828 is provided with two separation holes 1828c and two misattachment prevention portions 1828d, the force acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be balanced, and the shaft portion 1828g can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may be a movable member for directing.

Examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1805, the decorative body 1806, the decorative body 1807L and the decorative body 1807R, the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1809, and the gate seal 2811 are used in the decorative body of the present invention, and the glue surface 1804b in the present embodiment is used. On the glue surface of the present invention, the first member 1823, the first member 1824, the first member 1825, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the first member 1827, the first member 1828, and the gate in the present embodiment. The main body 2810 is a pedestal member of the present invention, and the flat plate portion 1823a, the flat plate portion 1824a, the flat plate portion 1825a, the flat plate portion 1826a, the flat plate portion 1827a, the flat plate portion 1828a, and the front plate portion 2810a of the present embodiment are attached to the flat plate portion of the present invention. Each is equivalent.

Further, the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1824b, the mounting recess 1825b, the mounting recess 1826b, the mounting recess 1827b, the mounting recess 1828b, and the sticking recess 2810b in the present embodiment are provided in the mounting recess of the present invention with the separation hole 1823c and the separation in the present embodiment. The holes 1827c, the separation hole 1828c, and the separation hole 2810d are the separation holes of the present invention, which are the erroneous sticking prevention part 1823e, the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c, the erroneous sticking prevention part 1825c, the erroneous sticking prevention part 1826c, and the erroneous sticking prevention part in the present embodiment. 1827d, erroneous sticking prevention unit 1828d, and erroneous sticking prevention unit 2810c correspond to the erroneous sticking prevention unit of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surface of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827 in the present embodiment. The contact surface of the first member 1828 and the contact surface of the gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Next, the characteristic action and effect of this embodiment will be described. From here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate portion is the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, and the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c. A configuration (member) corresponding to the present invention, each of which is described as a representative, such as an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e and a positioning portion as a contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e). Since the same effects are obtained, the description thereof is omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is used as a contact surface (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823 on the first member 1823. Therefore, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 are pressed against the peripheral wall portion of the mounting recess 1823b. The decorative body 1804 can be positioned with respect to the first member 1823 by bringing it into contact with the portion designated as the surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e) and pasting it in position, and the positioning work of the decorative body 1804. Can be facilitated, and the decorative body 1804 can be accurately attached in the proper position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the decorative body 1804 is attached to the first member 1823 in a state of being tilted or displaced by the contact surface (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, the decorative body 1804 can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the first member 1823, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be surely exhibited, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the interest of the player is lowered. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 can be accurately attached to the proper position by the contact surface (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be easily attached to the correct position, and the decoration can be made. It is possible to reduce the failure of pasting the body 1804 and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is possible to make it difficult to make a mistake in the orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct direction. The decorative effect of 1804 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823 is provided, if the decorative body 1804 is pasted in the wrong direction, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e is decorated. Since the body 1804 is in a rolled-up state, it is possible to recognize that the decorative body 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 is reattached in the correct direction to ensure the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804. Can be demonstrated.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c penetrating the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 of the first member 1823 is attached, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. Then, when the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 By pulling the portion, it can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a in the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 is used. The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decorative body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Further, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess in the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 is formed. Since the peripheral portion of 1823b surrounds the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be complemented by being bordered by the portion, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exerted. Then, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a is composed of a band-shaped portion on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a strip-shaped portion diagonally crossing the strip-shaped portion. Since it is provided only in a specific part and not on the entire back surface, the sticking strength is weaker than in the past. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, the first member resists the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b even with a relatively weak force. The decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of 1823, and even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, the decorative body 1804 can be removed without being torn in the middle. Can be improved.

Further, from the above, when the decorative body 1804 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the back side of the first member 1823. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip thereof, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, so that the decorative body 1804 can be easily reattached. .. Further, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the above, the replacement work of the decorative body 1804 due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by using the separation hole 1823c, it is easy to perform the sorting work for each material for the components of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position where it does not come into contact with the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the glue surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the glue surface 1804b only on a part (specific portion) of the decorative body 1804, the sticking strength is lowered as compared with the conventional case, but the entire glue surface 1804b is stuck on the flat plate portion 1823a. It is possible to prevent the sticking strength from being lowered more than necessary due to the separation hole 1823c being applied to the glue surface 1804b, and the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is sufficiently maintained and the sticking is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in a good condition. Can be attached.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the peripheral strip-shaped portion and the diagonally crossing strip-shaped portion (diagonal portion), the decorative body is formed by the strip-shaped portion of the glue surface 1804b. Since the peripheral edge of 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from rising from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to peel off from the peripheral edge. Further, since the portion near the center of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a by the band-shaped portion that diagonally crosses the glue surface 1804b, the first member is affected by changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if the shrinkage difference between the 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large, it is possible to reduce the swelling and wrinkling of the decorative body 1804, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body 1804 from deteriorating. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be surely exhibited, and the larger decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having high appeal.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b is provided on the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made translucent, and the back side of the first member 1823 is moved to the decorative body 1804 side. When a light source such as an LED that irradiates light is provided, the strip-shaped glue surface 1804b is located at a portion that does not interfere with the light from the light source, and is decorated by the diffusion or attenuation of the light by the glue surface 1804b. Since it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the body 1804 such as the light emitting decoration, the decorative body 1804 is made to emit light in a good state, or the light source is visually recognized in a good state through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high effect of effect and display effect.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be obscured or hidden from the front side by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, and it is difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 to press the back surface of the decorative body 1804. Then, since the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, the peripheral side of the decorative body 1804 is easily lifted from the portion with which the rod-shaped member is in contact, and the decorative body is attached. The 1804 can be made easier to remove.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, when the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the rod-shaped member from the back side of the first member 1823 via the separation hole 1823c, as described above. In addition, since the veranda side is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a from the portion where the rod-shaped member of the decorative body 1804 is in contact, by grasping and pulling the raised portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a. It can be easily removed by turning it around.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a size that allows a circle having a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to be in contact with the separation hole 1823c, an upper limit of the size of the separation hole 1823c is provided in addition to the same action and effect as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the size of the glue surface in the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to maintain the desired sticking strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Further, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decorative body 1804 is attached using the boundary portion between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily attached to the correct position, the failure of attaching the decorative body 1804 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, it is like a minus driver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b in order to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side. Even if an attempt is made to insert a new tool, the insertion of the tool is hindered by the peripheral wall portion of the recessed mounting recess 1823b, but the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is formed in the portion covered by the decorative body 1804. Since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration body 1804 is attached, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side as described above, and the decoration body 1804 is provided. By pressing to the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the conventional technique (pachinko machine), the hole for peeling the seal penetrates to the rear side of the pachinko machine (game board), so that a linear tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole. It is possible to reach the passage, signal line, etc. of the game ball B, and there is a problem that fraudulent acts are likely to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) capable of closing the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. As a result, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member, so that the hole passes to the opposite side of the game board like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

Further, when the second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) for closing the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, the fraudulent tool is installed from the front side. Even if the tool is inserted into the separation hole 1823c through the decorative body 1804, the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the second member, and the insertion (intrusion) of the second member into the outside (inside the game board 5) is blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the illegal tool is the decorative body 1804. Since a trace is left on the decorative body 1804 by penetrating the above, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is played in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided in the substrate unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4. When the game ball B released from the board 5 is clogged, the security cover 714 that closes the cancellation port 711b of the front base 711 is opened, and the cutout portion 713q above the cancellation port 711b among the plurality of notch portions 713q is minus. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as a screwdriver and poking the jammed game ball B, the game ball B can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. After that, by closing the elimination port 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. Can be blocked by the security cover 714. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the tool is inserted into the first ball path 701. And, in order to extend from the entrance of the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the illegal tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. Even if the tool is moved while being moved, if it comes into contact with any of the plurality of obstructive ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the obstruction rib 713o obstructs the movement of the illegal tool. can do. In this way, the crime prevention cover 714 and the plurality of obstructive ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and have high deterrence against fraudulent acts. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the base unit 710 is transparently formed, when the game ball B is clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the place where the ball clogging occurs just by looking from the outside. Can be easily recognized, the elimination work can be facilitated, and the maintenance burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, in the base unit 710, since the discharge passage for discharging the game ball B is composed of the independent first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short time. Since it is possible to distribute and discharge those game balls B to the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, many of them are sent to one first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. It is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B, prevent the ball from being easily clogged due to the concentration of the game balls B, and many game balls released from the game board 5. B can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) of the game hall.

Further, since the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be detected by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 and the second ball. Since the number of game balls B discharged from the path 702 can be counted, the number of the game board 5 and the first ball path 701 and the first ball can be compared with the number of the game balls B counted in the upstream game board 5. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity against the two-ball route 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against fraudulent activity.

Further, since the discharge passage is composed of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 that are independent in the front-rear direction, the game ball B (safe) received in the winning opening to which the privilege is given in the game board 5. By releasing the ball) and the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted into the winning opening to a position different in the front-rear direction, the game ball B received in the winning opening and the winning opening can be used. The unaccepted game ball B can be discharged by circulating the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, which are different from each other. Since it is equipped with a first ball sensor 703 and a second ball sensor 704 that can detect each of the game balls B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, respectively, the game board. Outside of 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted in the winning opening and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted in the winning opening can be counted, so that the game board can be counted. By comparing with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an illegal act against the winning opening of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided in the base unit 710 (ball path member 713), the game can be played. It is not necessary to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, or the like for counting the number of game balls B discharged (discharged) to the outside on the board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is attached to the front base 711 so that the release port 711b can be rotated by the hinge, the security cover 714 is provided by the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation even when the release opening 711b is opened by the security cover 714. It is in a state of being attached to the front base 711. Therefore, even if the security cover 714 is opened in order to clear the clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 is still attached to the front base 711. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the security cover 714 from being lost.

Further, after the security cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the hinge shaft of the security cover 714 is left and right on the front end side of the security cover 714. Since it is provided so as to extend to the right (horizontal direction), the outer frame attached to the island facility of the game hall is used to clear the clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. After opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to 2, the security cover 714 is opened and a predetermined tool is inserted into the clearing port 711b to clear the ball jam. After that, after closing the security cover 714, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the security cover 714 is open, the tip of the security cover 714 is the outer frame 2 (contact fear). Since the main body frame 4 cannot be closed in contact with the object), it is possible to notice that the security cover 714 has been forgotten to be closed, and the security cover 714 can be closed to securely close the elimination port 711b. Further, even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is opened. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so that the main body frame 4 does not open, the main body frame 4 can be opened satisfactorily, and the security cover 714 and the like are damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is provided with a plurality of notched portions 713q, dust and dirt that has entered the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 , Dust adhering to the game ball B can be discharged below the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B due to dust, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since a part of the plurality of notches 713q is also used as a tool insertion slot for inserting a tool for eliminating ball clogging, it is not necessary to separately provide a tool insertion slot, and the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration. Can be simplified, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the base unit 710, dust that has fallen through the notch 713q is prevented from being applied to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, so that the dust adheres to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball. It is possible to prevent the sensor 704 from causing a malfunction, and it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the gate 2003, etc.) forming the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game ball B is distributed in the game board 5 is formed. Front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second The attachment / contact portion (spec seal affixed) of the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.) with the member 1842, etc. A decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) having a predetermined decoration on the portion 1021, the sticking recess 2531a, the sticking recess 2810b, the mounting recess 1821b, the mounting recess 1822b, etc. Since the decorative body 1801, the decorative body 1802, the decorative body 1803, etc.) are in contact with each other, the appearance of the first member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the contacting portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion, when the decorative body is attached to the contacting portion, the contacting portion in the flat plate portion of the first member is formed. Since the surrounding part of the slingshot surrounds the perimeter of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine can be bordered by the relevant part to make the pachinko machine stand out, making it easier to exert the decorative effect of the pachinko machine. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, a contacting portion (spec sticker affixing portion 1021, spec seal sticking portion 1021, etc.) to which a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached. The sticking recess 2531a, the sticking recess 2810b, the mounting recess 1821b, the mounting recess 1822b, etc.) are formed into a flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Since it is dented from the bottom, it is possible to easily attach the decorative body to the correct position by using the boundary between the flat plate portion and the contacting portion as a guide to attach the decorative body to the decorative body. It is possible to reduce the failure of the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front constituent member 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, etc.) in the first member (front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) Decorate the attachment part (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) recessed from the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate part 2810a, etc.) Since the body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached, the decorative body is removed from one side. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flat-blade driver between the decorative body and the contact portion, the insertion of the tool is hindered by the wall portion on the periphery of the recessed contact portion. On the other hand, a separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) of the first member is provided at a portion where one side is closed by the decorative body. Therefore, a separation hole is provided in the attachment / contact portion to which the decorative body is attached. Therefore, by inserting the rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative body to one side, the attachment / contact is performed. The contact with the portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the recessed contact portion. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion of the first member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is formed by the tip thereof. By pressing from the other side, the contact with the flat plate portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first member, and the decorative body can be reattached. .. Further, with the first member and the second member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof, whereby the flat plate of the first member is pressed. Since the contact with the portion can be easily released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion by using the separation hole, so that the components of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily removed. The sorting work for each material can be easily performed, and the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front constituent member 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member (front constituent member 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.). Since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.), the flat plate portion is decorated. (Spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) to obscure or hide the separation hole from one side. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole, make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts through the separation hole. ..

Then, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the first member (pre-constituent member 1000, first member) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached is attached. Separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) from the other side of the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of one member 1821, first member 1822, etc. , Etc.), and the extending portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) is extended to the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). , Because the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole forms a closed space blocked from the outside by the extending portion and the one side surface of the second member. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension part or from the other side of the second member, and at the same time, it is possible to penetrate a hole that passes to the opposite side like a conventional pachinko machine. Instead, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) is made a closed space by the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). Even if the illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) from one side, the tip of the illegal tool is blocked from the outside. It will be inserted into the closed space, and the extension portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) of the first member (front component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the first member Since the two members can block the insertion (intrusion) into the passage portion (game area 5a, etc.) side or the pachinko machine 1, the illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole. It is possible to prevent intrusion, prevent fraudulent activities from being carried out through separation holes and passages, and because fraudulent tools penetrate the decorative body, leaving traces on the decorative body. It is possible to hesitate to execute the pachinko machine 1 and provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent activities.

Further, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned with each other, so that the assembly can be performed. This time and effort can be facilitated, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, when the positioning protrusion 1841b is inserted into the separation hole 1821d and the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b. The 1821d itself can be the above-mentioned closed space, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same effect as described above can be provided.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member having a passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole of gate sensor 2801, etc.) through which the game ball B circulates (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) Front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) provided on the front side of the game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) Decorative bodies (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal) with predetermined decorations on the front decorated part (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) Since 2811, etc.) are attached, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed behind the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the decorated portion in the front member is subjected to. Since the surrounding part protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion protruding forward of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making it easier to exert.

Further, the decorated portion (spec seal sticking portion 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached is rearward. Since it is recessed, the decorative body is guided by the protruding periphery of the decorated portion in the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.). By contacting the decorative body, the decorative body can be easily attached to the correct position, the failure of the decorative body to be attached can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorated portion (spec sticker sticking portion 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess) of the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) Since 2810b, etc.) is recessed rearward, the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is in contact with the decorated portion and is covered with the decorative body. Since the contact surface with the decorative portion is in a recessed position, even if the decorative body attached to the decorated portion is to be removed, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the separated hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) is provided in the decorated portion, the decorative body is pressed forward from the rear of the front member through the separation hole through the rod-shaped member. As a result, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member at the time of manufacturing, the rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. By doing so, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the decorative body can be reattached.

Further, the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) are used. In the separated state, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532) is provided by the tip thereof. , Gate seal 2811, etc.) from the rear, the attachment to the decorated part (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) can be easily released. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorative portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion by using the separation hole, so that the material for the components of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily removed. It is possible to facilitate each sorting operation and reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separated holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated portion (spec seal sticking portion 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.), the decorated portion is provided. By attaching a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be obscured or hidden from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole.

Then, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front member (front component 1000, center role) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached is attached. Separation holes (separation) are provided by passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) assembled to the rear side of the front member 2531 of the object 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.). The hole 1023, the separation hole 2531b, the separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, and unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the hole that passes to the rear side is not penetrated. It is possible to prevent such a linear fraudulent tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), an illegal tool is used. Is inserted into the separation hole through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from the front, but is further inserted (invaded) to the rear by the passage member. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole of gate sensor 2801 (gate 2003), etc.). It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being carried out, and since the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body and leaves a trace on the decorative body, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power to the above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5, an LED 3176 for displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is mounted. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, and the back front lower left outside in the back front lower effect unit 3160. Decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc. The left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided. By providing the LED 3176 (the left decorative substrate 3174 under the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 under the light guide plate), the LED 3176 can be hidden (hidden) from the player by the decorative body 3161 or the like in the front, front, bottom, and middle of the back. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110. In such a state, the LED 3176 emits light from the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 or the like emits light to illuminate the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like. Then, the light from the LED 3176 is the light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LED such as the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 is the light directly radiated forward. It is possible to make the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc., which is light-emittingly decorated, shine brighter than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. Can be made to. Then, since the second pattern 3112 that is light-emittingly displayed on the light guide plate 3110 extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly above position) that is close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like that are light-emittingly decorated. Since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be strongly misunderstood by the player as if the light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like which is light-emittingly decorated is emitted and displayed as a light source. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3110, which has never been seen in the previous pachinko machines, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate are provided. Since the light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 can illuminate the light guide plate 3110 and prevent the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player, the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be prevented. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of the light emission display of 3112 or the like and reliably exhibiting the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 having translucency is provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate are provided. When the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 is made to emit light, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like can be made to emit light and be decorated. It is also possible to show the player the effect of the light emitting decoration such as the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making the player less bored by the various effects.

Further, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is made to emit light and the LEDs mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are made to emit light, as described above, the light guide plate lower left. The LED mounted on the decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate illuminates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like to illuminate the player's interest. The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from the upper predetermined position close to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 attracts the player's attention to the back front lower middle decoration body. The second pattern 3112 can be directed to the upper end extending from the light guide plate 3110 via the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 or the like. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 that moves up and down in the back / rear / upper effect unit 3200, and the like are provided at the upper end of the second pattern 3112. , It is possible to excite and excite the player depending on whether or not a further effect (effect by the effect image, movable effect, etc.) is executed at the point where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is extended. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 in which five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position are set, and each line 3113 emits light independently. Since it is possible to display and LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided so as to correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to the fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 are made to emit light in order. The displayed line 3113 can be changed to show a pseudo animation. Since the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided at the lower positions close to the lower end positions (predetermined positions) of the plurality of lines 3113, the back surface where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is light-emitting decorated. Since the light from the front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. can be made to appear as moving as a light source, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and make him think that something good is happening. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery result (special lottery result) of the special lottery is drawn by the establishment of the start condition by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b on the function display board 1411 are lit and blinked to display the special symbol in a variable manner. A special symbol suggesting a special lottery result is displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 1401, a left LED 1411a, and a right LED 1411b by turning on / off. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b is partially radiated forward by the plurality of display holes 1405a of the reflector front 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414. Is radiated only to one eye of the player, and at least a part of the rest is radiated only to the other eye of the player. As a result, the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that it is possible to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b in good condition. The special symbol of the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be clearly visually recognized, and the display function of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be exhibited as well.

Then, when a plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed by a camera of a digital camera or a mobile phone, as described above, all of them are viewed by both eyes of the player. Since the light from the LED 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, only one of both eyes can be photographed with a monocular camera, and the light emission status of all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be checked. It can be difficult to shoot accurately. Therefore, since it is not possible to accurately capture the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b, a special symbol in which an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming) occurs that is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether or not it is present, and it is possible to entertain the production suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery to the end and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, a part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is tilted in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the rest is tilted in the other eye of the player. The one that is tilted with respect to the front-back direction toward the position and the one that is directed straight toward the front-back direction. As a result, in addition to the same effects as described above, the tilt of the display hole 1405a allows the player other than the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the light from all the LEDs 1401 in good condition. Since it can be made difficult, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of being looked into by other players, and it is possible for other players to understand the game situation. You can enjoy the game without hesitation.

Further, in the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of left LEDs 1411a mounted on the function display board 1411 and the plurality of right LEDs 1411b are separated from each other by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left-right direction, and then in front of them. Since the reflector front 1414 having a plurality of display holes 1414a is provided in the above, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained, and since each display hole 1414a is directed straight in the front-rear direction, a plurality of displays are displayed. Die-cutting when molding the hole 1414a becomes easy, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the function display unit 1400C, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, so that the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in a good state. Can be shown to others. At this time, when the invisible light is radiated from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side surface is radiated from the light guide plate 1423 to the player side in front of the light guide plate 1423. Since the radiated invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be exhibited as well. Then, if an image is taken from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is being emitted, the invisible light radiated forward from the light guide plate 1423 may be captured depending on the model of the digital camera or the like. By shining brightly, it becomes difficult to capture the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided behind, and it is possible to make it difficult to determine the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1421a. It can be embodied.

Further, in the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may make the plurality of LEDs blink at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the plurality of LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, the player seems to be lit, so that the display of the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs is clarified. It can be shown, and the display function of a plurality of LEDs can be fully exhibited. Then, when the LED blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 is photographed with a digital camera or the like, the LED appears to be on but off depending on the shutter speed, so that the same situation ( Even if multiple LEDs that appear to be in the state) are photographed, the LEDs may be on or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs. , The pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied. The predetermined speed at which the LED is blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably in the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz, and if the blinking speed is slower than this, the LED does not appear to be lit and the special symbol fluctuates. This is because if the blinking speed is faster than this, the image will be in the lit state when the image is taken.

Further, a high-intensity LED capable of irradiating forward with light having a higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400 or the like may be provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like. As a result, when a high-brightness LED provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like is made to emit light, the dynamic range in which the player (human) feels the brightness of the player (human), although the high-brightness LED from the LED feels dazzling. Because the light is dazzling, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400 etc. can be seen, so that the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 etc. can be recognized, and the function display unit 1400 etc. The display function can be exhibited as well. Then, when the function display unit 1400 or the like is photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the dynamic range for the brightness of the digital camera or the like is narrower than that of a human being, so that the light from the high-brightness LED causes halation. Is generated, and the vicinity of the LED is blown out, so that a part of the function display unit 1400 or the like cannot be captured. Therefore, it is possible to unclear the light emitting state of a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 or the like, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 having the same effect as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, back front left decorative unit 3120) of the back front left decorative unit 3100 of the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, back front left decorative body base 3127) each decorative part (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front upper left logo decorative part 3122 and back front The left sub-decorative portion 3123) is provided in front of the back front left decorative unit 3120 in a normal state where the light emitting means (LED mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the like) is not used for light emitting decoration. The translucent opaque and white panel plate 1110A makes it difficult for the player to recognize the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120. The presence of the logo decoration portion 3122 and the like can be made difficult to notice, and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be made to look bright by the white color, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out.

Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the like are appropriately luminescent and decorated by the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration unit 3120 according to the progress of the game, the light of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the like illuminated by light emission is generated. However, the light is emitted forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A, and the light emitting decoration such as the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 is reflected on the white panel plate 1110A. It is possible to show the player the light emitting decoration of the front upper left logo decoration part 3122 or the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with the light emitting decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 or the like and suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by making the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 light-emitting decoration, it is possible to make the player aware of the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like that could not be predicted. Because it can be done, it can surprise the player greatly, make the player strongly think that the chance has arrived, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a highly effective light emission effect, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the color of the translucent opaque panel plate 1110A is white, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front) of the back front left decorative unit 3120 provided at the rear are provided. Left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127, respectively (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first (1) Upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd back left logo decoration part 3125d, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd back left logo decoration part 3126d, No. (3) The emission color that is emitted and decorated in the upper left logo decoration section 3126e, the third left sub decoration section 3126f, and the base upper left logo decoration section 3127d) can be shown to the player via the panel plate 1110A as it is. In addition to being able to show the player a light emitting effect with various colors, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light emitting effects, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, decorative parts having shapes related to each other (“first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d”, “No. 1 Upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd A plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body) provided with the left sub-decorative portion 3126f ”). The base 3127) is stacked in the front-rear direction, and each decorative part is independently illuminated by light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130). Since the position of each decoration part in the front-rear direction is different because it is possible to do so, if each decoration part is luminescent and decorated, it is possible to show the player a luminescent effect with a sense of depth. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, decorations related to each other of a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). ("First front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first (2) Upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f ") Since it is provided, the decorative parts are light-emitting and decorated in an appropriate order by the light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130) to emit light with movement. The production can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. It can be raised to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, each of the plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) is provided. Decoration part ("First front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f ") Is made to emit light by means of light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130). By appropriately combining the decorative parts, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, since each decorative portion can be independently lit up and decorated, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous by combining the decorative portions that illuminate and decorate according to the progress of the game. ) Can be made to suggest to the player.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In, between the decorative portions (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and back front left sub decoration portion 3123) provided at different positions, a light-shielding portion (separation decoration portion 3124a, Since the partition decoration portion 3125c and the partition decoration portion 3126c) are provided, the light for illuminating one decoration portion is blocked from being irradiated to the other decoration portion by the light-shielding portion, and the other decoration portion emits light. It is possible to prevent decoration, and it is possible to make only one (desired) decoration portion luminescent. Therefore, since the plurality of decorative parts provided in one decorative body can be independently luminescently decorated, various luminescent effects can be produced by luminescently decorating the appropriate decorative parts according to the progress of the game. Can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In the above, a plurality of decorative portions (back front left logo decorative portion 3121, back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122 and back front left sub decorative portion 3123) are provided at different positions from each other, and a light-shielding portion (separated decorative portion 3124a) is provided between them. , Separation decoration section 3125c, Separation decoration section 3126c) are provided so that each can be independently luminescently decorated. It is possible to show the player a different form of luminescent decoration according to the situation, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and at the same time, the luminescent effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Can be made to.

Further, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In, between a plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and back front left sub decoration part 3123), a hole-shaped light-shielding part (separation decoration part 3124a, division decoration part 3125c). , Separation decoration part 3126c) is provided, so that the light for luminescent decoration of one of the decoration parts is radiated to the outside from a part of the light-shielding part. Can be made to. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding portion into a predetermined shape, it is possible to show the player the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding portion in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion, and it is possible to perform a wider variety of light-emitting effects.

Further, since the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a penetrating decorative portion 3124b penetrating back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decorative portion is arranged according to the progress of the game. When (first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f) is light-emitting decorated, the peripheral surface of the penetrating decoration part 3124b emits light. Since the decoration is to be performed, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the decorative part, the light emitting decoration of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5B, due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is the panel board 1110. Since the cell 1140 is provided in a state where it can be expanded and contracted with respect to the panel plate 1110 even if it expands and contracts more than the above, the cell 1140 can expand and contract freely, and even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. No wrinkles or cracks are generated in the cell 1140, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind the portion of the panel plate 1110 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached is offset, that is, behind the wide portion of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be easily seen by the player, the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be sufficiently exhibited. The pattern can improve the appearance in the game area 5a, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state where it can be expanded and contracted and is not attached to the game panel (panel plate) as in the conventional case, it is easy to take time and effort to decorate the transparent panel plate 1110. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, in the panel plate 1110 to be cut, the cell 1140 can be provided after the cutting, so that the cell 1140 is not damaged during the cutting of the panel plate 1110. Further, the machined surface is not roughened due to the difference in material between the panel plate 1110 and the cell 1140, and the finishing process after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel (panel plate) formed to have an opening by cutting or injection molding, since the cell 1140 is not attached, the labor required for the attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cell 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 more easily than in the conventional technique, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the usage amount of the cell 1140 is compared with the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the entire surface of the panel plate 1110. Can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the cell 1140 can be attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B) can be attached to or replaced with a cell 1140 having a different pattern from the panel plate 1110. ) Can be easily responded to changes in specifications and models, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of various LEDs provided in the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cell 1140 seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 emits light. By being decorated, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened. The game ball B circulating in the region 5a can be easily seen.

Further, since the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be light-emitting and decorated by various LEDs provided in the back front staging unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the cell 1140 can be decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration makes it possible to illuminate the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from behind to make it look like a silhouette, and by making the game ball B easier to see, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Since it is possible to suppress the decrease and to make it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by showing it in silhouette, the driving strength of the game ball B is finely adjusted. It can be made easy, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that devises the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, it becomes easier for the player to focus on the pattern of the cell 1140 when looking inside the game area 5a. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is visually recognized. It can be facilitated, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110, the back front effect of the back unit 3000 provided behind by the pattern of the cell 1140. The decorative body of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, in a state where the decorative body provided behind the cell 1140 is not light-emittingly decorated, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the existence of the decorative body. Then, when the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated according to the progress of the game, the cell 1140 is light-emitting and decorated by the light from the decorative body, so that the presence of the decorative body could not be predicted by the player. It is possible to make the player notice, and it is possible to greatly surprise the player, make the player strongly think that an opportunity has arrived, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the back-rear left movable decoration unit 3301 of the back-rear lower-lower effect unit 3300 as the movable decoration body provided behind by the cell 1140 can be hidden so as not to be seen from the player side. The back rear left movable decoration body 3301 is moved according to the progress of the game from the state invisible by the cell 1140 to the state in which the game panel 1100 can be seen through the opening 1112 penetrating the front and back of the panel plate 1110. Then, it is possible to show a movable effect in which the rear left movable decorative body 3301 appears according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the appearance of the back-rear left movable decorative body 3301 or the like can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "for example," It is possible to strongly think that a "big hit" gaming state) may occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed is set as an opaque milky white having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear bright, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LED, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Light from the game panel 1100, light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, etc. Is diffused in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the panel plate 1110A can be made to appear to be dimly lit by itself. Further, when a plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 capable of irradiating the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A are made to emit light, the light is diffused by the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly decorated with light emission like a fluorescent lamp like indirect lighting, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened and the glare of the LED 1130a can be reduced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suppressed and is easy on the player's eyes. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as game panels (panel boards), it has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent lamp that has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a), which makes the player feel that something good is happening to the game. In addition to raising expectations, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A, making the game ball B easier to see. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel plate 1110A can improve the color development of the pattern applied to the decorative film. It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a by decorating the pattern, and to illuminate the pattern of the decorative film through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 by emitting light from the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, the appearance in the game area 5a can be further improved, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the LED 1130a or the like tends to be unclear due to the opaque panel plate 1110A having translucency. By devising a pattern and devising the pattern (or devising the arrangement of LED1130a etc.) so that the part where the light emitting decoration is obscured is hidden by a part of the pattern of the decorative film, it emits light. The decoration can be shown clearly, and the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

Further, when the decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material having excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the panel plate is used for the distribution of the game ball B by the decorative film. The front surface of the 1110A can be protected. As a result, it is not necessary to use a panel plate 1110A having a high wear resistance, and a low-grade and inexpensive material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the pattern of the decorative film is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light emitted from the rear to the front of the decorative film. Since the pattern can be shown to the player and the light emitting effect of projecting the pattern or characters of the lightly injured film onto the panel board 1110A from the rear can be shown to the player, the effect is executed to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Alternatively, as the light emitting effect, the game ball B is projected from the rear on the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 by projecting a pattern or characters that encourage "right-handed", operation of the effect operation unit 301, etc. by the decorative film. It is possible to entertain the driving operation, the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type production, and the like, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on both the front surface and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, when the side surface of the panel plate 1110A is irradiated with light by the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the panel is as described above. When the plate 1110A self-illuminates, the decorative film on the front side is luminescently decorated, and the player can enjoy the pattern of the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is irradiated from the rear to the front of the game panel 1100 by an LED or the like, the shadow of the decorative film on the rear side is reflected on the panel plate 1110A, and the shadow overlaps with the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. The pattern on the decorative film on the side will look different. As a result, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in the interest.

Further, the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided behind the translucent opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A. When the light is emitted and decorated according to the progress of the game, the light is transmitted to the front (player side) through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 to some extent. The presence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, which can be partially luminescent and decorated in the same manner as the decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142. It can be noticed by the player. Therefore, there may be something good for the player by seeing the light emitting decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. It can be reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel plate 1110A is milky white. Because it is white, the color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be assimilated with the color of the panel board 1110A and can be made invisible from the front, and the back front to the player. It is possible to prevent the presence of the upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 from being noticed. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 are light-emitting decorated, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 are light-emitting decoration through the panel plate 1110A as described above. By noticing the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, which could not be foreseen, the player could be greatly surprised and the player had a chance. It is possible to make the player feel strongly, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect with a higher effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 of the back-rear lower-down effect unit 3300 are located behind the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A under normal conditions, so that they cannot be seen from the front. By moving to the part behind the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A according to the progress of the game, it becomes visible through the opening 1112. It is possible to show a movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) may occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, by enabling the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 to be light-emitting decorated, the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are invisible when the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are invisible. A panel with translucency by lighting and blinking the light emitting decorations of the rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back front right movable decoration body 3302 (or the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142). Through the plate 1110A, the player can be made aware of the existence of the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302, and the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 can be visually recognized. Depending on whether or not the player moves to the state (whether or not the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 appear), the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be more entertained. It is possible to perform a movable effect that is possible.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is made opaque with translucency, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the panel plate 1110A is on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. Since it becomes easy to focus, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused only by looking at the panel plate 1110A. At this time, as described above, the panel plate 1110A is in a state of self-lighting due to the light from the outside or the light emitted from the LED 1130a or the like, so that the panel plate 1110A is distributed in the game area 5a. Since the existing game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily recognized. Pachinko machine 1 that devises the driving operation of the game ball B by making it possible to entertain and suppress the deterioration of the interest and to make it easy to finely adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. You can enjoy the game of the main body.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and milky white (synthetic resin) having translucency, a lower grade synthetic resin is used as compared with the case where the panel plate is transparent. It can be used and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A has an opaque milky white color having translucency, the color of the decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 is relatively conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the decorative body is strongly exerted. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the LED 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130 and the decoration provided behind the game panel 1100. When the body or the like is light-emittingly decorated, the light-emitting color can be transmitted forward, and the player can enjoy the colorful light-emitting effect.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque and milky white having translucency, a decorative body (for example, the back front left decorative unit 3120) provided behind the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front (player side). It can be made invisible. Then, when the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly decorated, the light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) having translucency, so that the game panel 1100 is used. It can be partially luminescent and decorated, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the decorative body provided at the rear. Further, when the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is moved to a portion behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the decorative body is hidden or appears. In this way, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects and movable effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since the light from the LED 1130a and the like of the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be diffused by the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency, the gaming panel 1100 can be softly luminescent and decorated with a fluffy feeling. It is possible to brighten the inside of the game area 5a with a feeling like indirect lighting, and it is possible to suppress the glare caused by the LED 1130a, so that the pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the player's eyes can be provided.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be light-emitting decorated by the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decorative board 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left side and the right side of the panel plate 1110A, and each can be independently emitted. Then, when the right side is made to emit light according to the situation (progress) of the game, the right part in the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A, so that the player's interest is in the right part of the game area 5a. It is possible to urge the game ball B to be driven (“right-handed”) into the right portion of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the left side is made to emit light, the left part in the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A, so that the player's attention can be directed to the left part of the game area 5a, and the left part of the game area 5a can be directed. It is possible to urge the player to hit the game ball B ("hit left"). In this way, by making the LED 1130a at an appropriate position emit light, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) advises "left-handed" or "right-handed". It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B, and also to entertain the player with a new sense of light emission effect not found in the conventional pachinko machine 1.

Further, the game panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a panel holder 1120 having a frame shape thicker than the panel plate 1110A and holding the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, when the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is the same as that of the game panel of the conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) provided with the game area 5a in front is made larger than that of the conventional game panel. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced by reducing the amount of materials used for the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A).

Further, since the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be attached and detached, and the panel holder 1120 can be a common general-purpose part. Will be. As a result, by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced, and by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A corresponding to each model, a new model or a model change can be made. It is possible to reduce the cost of such things.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the elastic claw 1062 is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050 in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060. Further, in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a, the elastic claw 1072a is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 through the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5. At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 or the like attracts the magnetic force lines from the magnet 1055. It is possible to prevent the magnetic force from being lost, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic force lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts using the magnet 1055 at an early stage, and it is possible to notify fraudulent behavior by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to discourage an act and provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent acts.

Further, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 made of a non-magnetic material prevent the magnetic field lines from being attracted from the magnet 1055 to prevent the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in the conventional pachinko machine, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced as compared with the conventional one. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1062 of the accommodating portion 1061 and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to or removed from the holding member 1060 or the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1062 or the elastic claw 1072a without using a metal screw made of a magnetic material, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. This time and effort can be facilitated, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 are locked to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, thereby causing the magnetic sensor 1050. Can be provided at any position or the position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, the pachinko machine 1 capable of easily responding to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the accommodating portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 in the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 is disconnected or poor contact occurs, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visually held by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor board 1052 is passed through the transparent sensor case 1053. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, it is possible to make the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and it is illegal for a person who tries to perform a fraudulent act using the magnet 1055 by seeing the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to hesitate to execute the action, enhance the deterrence against fraudulent acts, and reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, even if the sensor main body 1051 can be seen through the transparent sensor case 1053, an ordinary player does not pay much attention to the existence of the magnetic sensor 1050, so that he / she does not care. On the other hand, since a person who intends to commit a fraudulent act gazes at the inside of the game area 5a, the contrast between the white sensor substrate 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 more visible, which is often the case. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the existence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to hesitate to execute fraudulent acts using magnets, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence.

Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor board 1052 is a decorative board on which the LED is mounted. Can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it is not a concern for a normal player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming region 5a from becoming unattractive.

Further, since the sensor main body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to confirm whether or not the sensor main body 1051 is damaged from the outside, which facilitates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, etc., the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are provided on the game board 5. When mounting using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 to be mounted on the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the game area 5a. It can be installed at a position outside the magnetic detection range. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and the magnet 1055 can be used for fraudulent activities. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power.

[21. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 215. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 210, and FIG. 212 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change processing, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the setting change processing, the setting value confirmation display processing, and the error. The display process will be described.

[21-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number used to determine whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400 when a big hit game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used for determining the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed by the symbol display, and a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit to be used for determining whether or not to open / close the second starting port door 2411 capable of inducing the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and this normal random number. To use for determining the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the symbol hit, and for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

[21-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is used. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various stored information as numerical values is the check sum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the sum value does not match, the main control MPU1310a incorporates the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. An ID code is extracted from the non-volatile RAM, and an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code. The mechanism is such that the derived fixed value is set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure by the execution.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate 2003 at each predetermined interval, the second start opening door 2411 is opened and closed to the second start opening 2004. Cannot generate an inducible state.

[21-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, the information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased. Acts as a function of the RAM clear switch for. In this determination, the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who does this turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

In the determination in step S14, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU1310a, and is stored in the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value of 1 when deleting various information and a value of 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU 1310a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning it ON. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a is the person who operates the setting key switch 1311a. After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the signal of the setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) can be received at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. Since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , It is determined that various information will be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination of step S26, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum when it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of not 0 (step S29). .. This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S29, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as the backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 in the main control MPU1310a. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This routine is performed again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 after turning it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The processing when the main control side power is turned on is started. The main control MPU1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the above-mentioned determination in step S25. Moreover, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the step described later is followed by the setting change process in step S37 described later. In the process of S38, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (hereinafter, "first RAM error"). How to cancel ").

As a method different from this first RAM error clearing method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key 1311a is not turned on and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-mentioned determination in step S26. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information will be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. (Hereinafter, it will be described as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that the content stored in is abnormal (or unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error clearing method by the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process has been normally completed, the main control MPU1310a has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself and then return to the main control board 1310 is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK-is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area will be cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU1310a is assumed that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and a predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the value is present, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on the signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, a setting changeover button for selecting and switching a set value. Works as a function of. Every time the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is operated from ON to OFF, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. When it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the specified area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is an area dedicated to the set value in which the set value is stored, and an out port 1008, a first sub-out port 2021, and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2022 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the first sub out port 2021 counted in the ball number counting process described later. (2) The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the sub-out port 2022 is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a sum when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased. When the values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the taken out ID code is taken out. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on is performed, and this fixed value is used as the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random value. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment to be used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "" It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is started until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the startup of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is created as the transmission information by creating the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU1310a as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the non-winning random number update process is performed (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a bonus winning port solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid 3007, a special monitor, and the like. The driving signal is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power supply cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not executed because the main control side power off processing is not executed, so the previous time. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power cutoff process on the main control side when the power is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). When it is determined that various information is to be erased, that is, in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When the setting can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of (such as), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key that can confirm the set value, possession is permitted only to a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall clears the RAM when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent process is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the island equipment of the game hall is equipped. It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the main control side. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment). 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side timer described later is set. Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the game hall clerk staff member such as RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game can be obtained by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control board performs the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power off / off processing composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the check sum calculation result of step S28 and the check sum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the check sum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, until now. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power recovery, and the main control is performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, the determination in step S24 is performed. By repeating the game, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt enable is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information (including information indicating the value of the counter) from being updated. When the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power cutoff process. By configuring it in two parts, a part covered by software so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all). , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built-in as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, the problem. , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of turning on the power of the main control return destination command at the time of turning on the power is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. It will shift from the closed state to the open state by the member.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2402, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is used as the main control board. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. Peripheral control of the large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the present state to the closed state (that is, the closing start between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. A command to display the 5th round of the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning opening 2005). .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, the second starting port door 2411 is open) telling the second starting port 2004 that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to press the second start port door 2411 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the screen to inform the player to the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the game ball B is in a state where it can be guided to the second starting port 2004 by opening the operation, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control in step S34. In the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the starting port solenoid 2412 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The drive is started to close the second starting port door 2411, and the state shifts to the state where the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys to the player the message "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") A player who is displayed in the display area and sits on the front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen telling that the game ball B can be guided to the second start port 2004 by starting the drive of the start port solenoid 2412 and opening the second start port door 2411 (for example,). The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that conveys the message "The second start door 2411 is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second start door.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of 1600 to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the check sum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the checksum values are always cleared in step S38 except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information instructing that when clearing, and the above-mentioned low when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which of the probabilistic time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine are shown. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the worker of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is copyrighted. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[21-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 210 and 211.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, and a detection from the second start opening sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the out sensor 664, detection signal from the first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, from the RAM clear switch. Operation signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting switching button, transmission by prize ball control processing described later The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is stored from the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including the one to which the empty terminal process is performed). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Because it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, the big prize. Detection signal from mouth sensor 2402, out sensor 664, detection signal from first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), A detection signal from the door frame opening switch, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button, and a prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process described later are paid out control boards. It is possible to increase the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the 633 has been normally received.

Following step S104, the main control MPU1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU1310a, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. The main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a when it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is performed is not LOW. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the winning random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU1310a performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this ball number counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input based on this input information, is discharged from the game board 5, and is distributed through the out ball passage 663. The game ball to be played (is driven into the game area 5a and is accepted into the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. The game ball discharged from the board 5 and after being driven into the game area 5a, is accepted by any of the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 without being accepted by any winning opening. When the out sensor 664 detects the game ball ejected from the game board 5, the value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the total recovery ball counter, and the detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that is received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 and flows through the first ball path 701, the out port 1008, The operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the out ball counter that counts the count of the number of game balls, so-called out balls, collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is performed, and the second operation is performed. A detection signal from the ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the game area 5a to form a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, an accessory winning opening 2006, etc. When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is accepted by the winning opening and flows through the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 The value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the safe ball counter that counts the count of the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, received in the winning openings such as the winning opening 2006. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out sensor 664 is a game ball accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. And the game ball accepted in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022. The second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball collected by the game and accepts it in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. Detects the game ball that has been played.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the total collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, to the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The total number of game balls accepted in the main control built-in RAM and the game balls accepted in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is stored in the total collected ball counting area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The value of the out ball counter is stored as the total number of out balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the second sub out port 2022 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the safe ball counter. The value of the main control built-in RAM is specified as the total number of safe balls accepted in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. Stored in the safe ball counting area in the area. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls driven in is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the base calculation area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, Every time the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings, the out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command for notifying that fact is created and used as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area. In the main control MPU 1310a, each of the value of the recovery ball counter, the value of the out ball counter, and the value of the safe ball counter, which are the calculation results, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment), and further, the recovery ball. When the value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the counter, the out ball counter, or the safe ball counter, the values of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become the value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball. Issuing a command When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has been normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. , Second start opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the information is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command,). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, the fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto””. It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a large winning opening abnormality winning is generated (when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified into a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Or, the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting area is the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2402, and the accessory winning opening. The total number of game balls detected by the sensor 2601, that is, the games actually accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. When it is different from the total number of spheres, a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the fraud detection, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of an abnormal prize in the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch detects that the main body frame 4b is open, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input and the main body frame opening switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Is set in the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

Following step S113, the main control MPU1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. Judgment (determines the hit type) whether or not it matches any of the hit type judgment values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special drawing 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2401. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Function display unit 1400 that sets the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp is lit, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. Set the output of the lighting signal to the status display of, and store it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with a 0th to 3rd section (4 sections), and a normal winning opening is provided in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning slot The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information in the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, respectively. It is shifted and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information storage is the first. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage will be empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is used as a reserved ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to light the hold display, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery), it is determined whether or not to open / close the second starting door 2411. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door 2411 is in the opened operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. Become a state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the second start port door 2411, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is stored according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the display, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning the normal lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, for example. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and the second starting opening door 2411 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display. Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal can be output to the payout control board 633, and launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic). The launch permission signal set to is output to the payout control board 633, or the display signal is output to the special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of payout prize balls) to the total number of game balls that have been driven in. Alternatively, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2402 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general computer tuning production related, various commands classified as ordinary computer production related, various commands classified as notification display, various classified as status display Various commands classified into commands, test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball entered into the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Winning of various commands classified into specific history (for example, general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) Every time the number of game balls collected at the mouth or out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command that informs that fact, the setting value has been changed. A setting change command to convey, an error display command to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a setting value to be described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The ON operation command of the setting key that tells to confirm the setting value stored in the area) is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. You can do it. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter are used. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, then to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is supported. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

It should be noted that the winning openings and out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. When a ball recovery command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected in is 10 balls, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives each ball recovery command. In addition, the winning openings and out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. The number of game balls collected in is counted, and the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (counted values (that is, the counted values (that is, general winning opening 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting)). The total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022) Information associated with and) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening) is used. The total number of game balls collected at the winning openings and out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 such as 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. ) And the updated date and time are stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held as the ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 210 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. A command for returning to the main control at power-on and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 210 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 211, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on is performed. , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It sends, then sends to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then outputs the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. Judgment counter Sends to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[21-5. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 210.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is a checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210. It is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is stored in the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 211. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is set, the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power supply cutoff process is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be performed, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. Judge that it is not.

In the determination of step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value to the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set in the counterclockwise direction from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the signal for turning on the decision key from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the determination key has not been operated, it returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated, the processes of step S218 and step S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is not operated. When the determination is made, the determination returns to the determination in step S216 again, and when the setting switching button is operated until the enter key is operated, the setting value is added and updated by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting display 1310g is updated. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the decision key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the updated setting value is updated with respect to the setting value set in, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the area dedicated to the setting value in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that the switch 1311a is returned to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the determination returns to the determination of step S226 again, and the determination of step S226 is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden for the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting value after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. In the determination of step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the range is normal, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 212. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, the main control MPU1310a performs an error display process (step S240) when it is determined that the range is not normal, and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[21-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 214 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU1310a opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of setting key ON, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installed value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 213. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is used. It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is within the normal range from the set value 1 to the set value 6, and when it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is confirmed. Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing this, control is performed to switch to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information from the images displayed so far and to display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, whether the main control MPU1310a has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is confirmed and displayed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Set the OFF operation command of the setting key (step S368), and end this routine. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, the interrupt non-permission setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU1310a enters an infinite loop that performs error display processing (step S372) and subsequently clears the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[21-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 (FIG. 213). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 214, and is a process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 215 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. While it is possible to tell that the launch is permitted, if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 210. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the emission permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that reverses the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 210. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU1310a recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the present routine. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, it has already been shown in FIG. 214 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is terminated, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 212. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed to the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210, and is performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 (FIG. 213). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 214) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214 are started and ended, respectively, and the process enters an infinite loop as described above. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data for the peripheral control board. It is being sent to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of message images in white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Is given by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 and adjusting the volume. Various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker of main body frame 4, etc.) are forcibly set to the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjusted by pressing the button 227. ) To control the flow. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[22. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on processing, FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing, and FIG. 218 is a payout control unit following FIG. 217. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 219 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[22-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 216 to 218 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination of step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the power cutoff process of the control unit is normally completed, and to 0 when the power cutoff process of the payout control unit is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information that is stored in the CR communication information storage area and in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for timing 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually uses the prize ball number information output determination counter. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is shown). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball gummy determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball gummy state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591. Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that do not match due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gadget judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery, etc. The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the mismatch counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the signal logic state is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball, the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the time counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls this time. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and the display data is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on this ball-out information, the corresponding ball-out information is dealt with. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other variable processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, the writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process shown in FIGS. 216 to 218.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 219 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[23. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 224. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 222 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510”) includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[23-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 220. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 220 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Rotation (rotation direction) of the contact operation unit 302 and Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the contact operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the staging operation unit monitoring processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. It is possible to update the tone information.

Here, the luminance specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value constituting the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the luminance designation value, one luminance designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (off) to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st luminance which is the maximum luminance from the 1st luminance designated value. It is possible to set one brightness specified value up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) presses the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228, the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (extinguished) 0th (zero). When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the luminance specified value, a predetermined formula (for example, a straight line) is set from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to increase along the typical tone curve or spline curve tone curve), while the light amount adjustment button 228. When the "-" side of is pressed and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined formula (for example,) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. , A linear tone curve, or a spline curved tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be low. In the present embodiment, a case where the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by pressing the light amount adjusting button 228. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated with light. be. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance designated value in the other palette values. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the normal pallet value with respect to various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are directly irradiated with light, the palette value is set for a specific decorative board (LED that is dazzling to the player) that is not shown. (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. The state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light can be visually recognized as the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. With respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (turning off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually determines the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other decorations. By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) with respect to the substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one luminance specified value is set up to the luminance specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance specified value is set for the specific decorative substrate, whereas it is set. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative boards, the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark). Brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship).

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (one frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 by the sound data output processing described later will occur. From various speakers such as 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various setting of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively, are set. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of pending numbers (0 to 4), and a variable pattern for instructing the start of variable effects such as variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols. It analyzes whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a big prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and which game is currently Recognize whether it is in a state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric function effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on a received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is one screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is selected. Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the volume control button 227 is pressed based on the volume control operation signal from the volume control button 227. The rotation position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume control button 227, and is set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control button 227, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Sound effects are playing. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume control button 227. It has become.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control button 227 described above is set as a sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume control button 227 is used for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as a sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit stops) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). Except for 0.5 seconds after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the display command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received), the staging operation unit 300 It can be adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). Except for 0.5 seconds after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the stop display command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received), the effect is produced. By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control button 227 in the sound data creation process is divided into seven stages of board volumes 0 to 6. It is converted into a value, and a predetermined value is added or added to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control button 227 according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By subtracting, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4, and this amplified production sound is serialized and audio data. It is designed to be output as.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. The volume flowing from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume control button 227 set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this synthesized production sound is actually the top on the door frame 3 side. The central speaker, top side speaker, and the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the main frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, are amplified, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data for the notification sound. Is for volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume control button 227 set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is not dependent at all, is combined, and the volume of this combined notification sound is actually obtained from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. It amplifies to the master volume value that becomes the flowing volume, and serializes this amplified notification sound and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegality is made to the pachinko machine 1. To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and this composition is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, but the effect sound is generated as described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a lapse of a predetermined period, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control button 227. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The sound flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 is dealt with. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent activity, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is for the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker, this muted production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period, and the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and so on. When the bass frame speaker of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the schedule data for sound generation until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from the place where it progressed according to.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow independently of the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the pressing operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume is set around by the program. The CPU of the control IC can control and adjust the sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played, and the player presses the volume control button 227. Even when the volume is turned down by operation, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or the player cheats. When it is on, the notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the staging sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[23-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 221 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this is as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing is completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 220. By setting the value 1 to the constant processing flag SP-FLG in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 220. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is the routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process. Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 220. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[23-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 220 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 222 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5) or the like. ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided in the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various staging units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. By setting or acquiring the movable position, the movable position can be grasped.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the contact operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, or the door frame can be adjusted. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM are set in different areas and are set to SDRAM. The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the DRAM and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 220, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[23-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sends the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. Is assigned the calculated sum value.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC inputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the information is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the CPU is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control board 1510 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. It can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202. And, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[23-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 224, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided in the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing it, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 225, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R A process of opening / closing the big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. Further, when the mode suggesting "5R jackpot" is executed, the process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode suggesting "2R jackpot" is obtained. 2R A process of controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit game state is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is an aspect suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on the mode suggesting "5R jackpot" when ending the state, and when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. .. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 236 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the reserved storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S231, the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 226. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the staging pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 0)) for instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the staging pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the staging pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation. Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the type of game effect to be played (such as the type of game effect to be played), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit. Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize, such as whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. You will be able to grasp the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. Is stored and is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received. The determination information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the hold for starting the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information.

At the time when the fluctuation display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the fluctuation display control is maintained even though the fluctuation display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S233, it is determined that the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 228. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to the following steps S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 0)) while updating to correspond to the number. 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball is set to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "1". The second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved storage number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second starting port 2004 Even if a game ball enters the ball, it is suppressed from being in a disadvantageous state to the player, such as not being able to obtain a chance of a big hit lottery.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since only the tables and tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. 2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 230, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process is terminated.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 232 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number. (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 232 (A), the game state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and a time saving state (time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). It is equipped with a low-probability jackpot determination table used in the case of low-probability time-saving state)) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used in the case of high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving state). .. Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 2. In the case of 1/299, when the set value is 4, 1/289, when the set value is 5, 1/279, and when the set value is 6, the first special random number is won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that it has been done, matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are lost in the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Further, in this example, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process processing, when the set value is 1, 1/319 and the set value 2 are used. 1/309 in some cases, 1/299 in the case of set value 3, 1/289 in the case of set value 4, 1/279 in the case of set value 5, and 1/269 in the case of set value 6. It matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the big hit with the big hit probability of 144/319, and one with the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with the small hit probability of 144/319. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred for for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. Is becoming more advantageous to the player. Further, the hit determination table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the hit determination table at the time of low probability.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), the big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is terminated.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), the small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table is used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table in the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a reach loss as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 233, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232 (B). The type of jackpot is determined in accordance with the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2402. (15 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and after the big hit game state is over, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened from the usual time, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. The opening / closing pattern is closed 5 times (for example, after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the above big winning opening sensor 2402). By repeating (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes after the big hit game state ends. Until the display is executed 77 times, the 5R time saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. 3. The opening / closing pattern is closed twice (for example, after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005. (2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state, the big hit game state ends. After that, if the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, it is controlled to the time saving state where it ends if it does not become a big hit, and it is not before the start of the 2R big hit game state. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to the time saving state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

If the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second symbol random number read in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232 (B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the second special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the second special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.
In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are won in the large winning opening 2005 by the above large winning opening sensor 2402. (15 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and after the big hit game state is over, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened from the usual time, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. The opening / closing pattern is closed 5 times (for example, after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the above big winning opening sensor 2402). By repeating (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes after the big hit game state ends. Until the display is executed 77 times, the 5R time saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. 3. The opening / closing pattern is closed twice (for example, after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005. (2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state, the big hit game state ends. After that, if the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, it is controlled to the time saving state where it ends if it does not become a big hit, and it is not before the start of the 2R big hit game state. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to the time saving state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot. In the case of, 92 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 46% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed when a big hit occurs. That is, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R probability variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 15R probability variation jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in an advantageous state for the player.

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is decided to be a 2R jackpot, it is decided to be a 2R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, if it is decided to be a 5R jackpot, it is decided to be a 5R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and if it is decided to be a 15R jackpot, it is a jackpot. The 15R jackpot symbol is decided as the symbol.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. (Step S325) is determined.

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the prize winning opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the winning opening 200 can be entered (easily). When the game ball received in the prize opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time. The game ball wins a big prize by repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times after (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned big prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won a prize in the big winning opening 2005. It is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the mouth 2005, and the change is performed until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state. The first small hit that controls the display execution period to a high-probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual while shortening the display execution period. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the prize winning opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the winning opening 200 can be entered (easily). When the game ball received in the prize opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or the large winning opening 2005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times when the above-mentioned large winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won a prize, the game ball can enter the large winning opening 2005 (easy) 15R big hit. If it is controlled to the game state and controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 15R big hit game state, the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big hit game state. If it does not become a big hit before the big hit, it is controlled to the end time saving state, and if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the 15R big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit gaming state ends. One of the two types of small hits is decided.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed in the case of the first small hit. That is, if a lottery result that is a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 100% probability that the first small hit will be obtained and the second small hit will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of becoming the first small hit and a 90% probability of becoming the second small hit.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. ..

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an outlier symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is one of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, missed) as the process of step S328. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is decided as a small hit symbol (“final decisive battle”), and if a 5R time-saving big hit is specified, the 5R time-saving big hit symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols “0” to “9”). If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol and the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same odd symbol among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. If it is decided to be a design) and an outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left / right decorative symbol is a different symbol among the left / middle / right decorative symbols) and changes. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) up to 77 times after the big hit game state, but the time reduction state is possible. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time reduction state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even when the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 234. If so (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big hit according to the type of the big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is selected. If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit according to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determination variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol change process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of off, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short for the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the time reduction state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time reduction state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 235, first steps S371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 236, first steps S381. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is terminated and the non-time reduction control is performed. (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game is started. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot to the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the game shifts to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time-saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time-saving jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is terminated, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S403). Opening / closing control of the large winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or 10 game balls have won in the large winning opening 2005 is the above-mentioned large winning opening sensor 2402. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected is repeated 2, 5, or 15 times (opening / closing control) (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 is used. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit start command, second) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit). Two small hit start command) is set.

Further, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A), which will be specifically described later, when the small hit game is terminated. ) Ends the open / close control of the prize winning opening 200 according to the type of small hit (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the bonus opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is repeated twice). It will be reset. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time until the next special symbol fluctuation display is started (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. At (step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Large winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round is started.
2. 2. The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state based on the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is the big hit symbol, or the big winning opening 2005 is opened based on the start of the next round. The big winning opening that is controlled and closed after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005. Processing during opening (step S402)
3. 3. After opening the big winning opening, the player waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state ends when all the rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the big winning opening 2005 to be in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big winning opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round to control the state, set the jackpot round end command according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Rainbow color production]
Next, the rainbow-colored effect to be executed when the probability of a big hit is high (for example, when a big hit is achieved (big hit confirmation effect) or when the decorative design is reach (reach notice), etc.) will be described. What is the rainbow color effect of this example? After displaying a predetermined form (pattern, character, character, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 using a plurality of colors, the display color in an arbitrary display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed for a short time. In conjunction with the transition of the display color in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are changed to a plurality of emission colors (at least two or more emission colors). ), And the emission color is changed in a short time. In the following, the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are all interlocked to perform a rainbow-colored effect, and the display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display color and the emission color of the LED of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are changed in a short time, and various types provided on the effect display device 1600 and the door frame 3 are shown. The display color or the emission color may be changed in a short time in any one of the LED of the decorative substrate and the LED of various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5, or in any combination. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 238 (A), in this example, when the rainbow-colored effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas of the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and each area is divided into five areas. A rainbow-colored effect display mode with different colors is displayed. Then, as the fluctuation time elapses, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the sizes of the first display areas a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, and Change the shape in a short time.

As an aspect of the rainbow-colored effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, a form having no information such as characters or characters in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a plurality of stripes as shown in FIG. 238 (A). The display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of areas (five display areas of the first display area a to the fifth display area e in the example shown in FIG. 238 (A)) by the line of FIG. 238 (B). ), The display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of areas (five display areas a to the sixth display area f in the example shown in FIG. 238 (B)) by a plurality of radial lines. The first display area a to the fifth display area may be divided and colored with different colors for each area, and a part or all of the colors of these plurality of areas may be changed in a short time, or a plurality of areas may be changed. Characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) and characters, etc., in different colors for each character and / or for each character (for each mass (construction) that has one meaning, such as characters, characters, one word, etc.) Coloring (for example, the first letter "CANCE" is "white", "H" is "yellow", "A" is "green", "N" is "blue", the second "C" is displayed in purple and "E" is displayed in red.) One character or character is divided into multiple areas and colored in different colors for each area (for example, each petal is displayed in a different color). The characters "CHANCE" are displayed in the first area a by seven virtual lines of lines 1 to 7, as shown in FIG. 238 (C), in which the skin of a person is displayed in a striped pattern in a plurality of colors. It is divided into 6 areas from (the area surrounded by the lines 1 and 2 of the characters of "CHANGE") to the 6th area f (the area surrounded by the lines 6 and 7 of the characters of "CHANGE"). By displaying the area of "CHANGE" in different colors, each character of "CHANGE" is displayed in a striped pattern in a plurality of colors (for example, the first area a (the area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 of the characters of "CHANGE"). Is "white", the second area b (the area surrounded by the lines 2 and 3 of the letters "CHANGE") is "yellow", and the third area c (the area of the letters "CHANGE" surrounded by the lines 3 and 4). The enclosed area) is "green", the fourth area d (the area surrounded by the lines 4 and 5 of the characters "CHANGE") is "blue", and the fifth area e (the area 5 of the characters "CHANGE") is line 5. The area surrounded by the line 6 and the line 6) is displayed in purple, the sixth area f (the area surrounded by the line 6 and the line 7 in the characters of "CHANGE" is displayed in red), etc.), these shapes. The color or shape of the state, or both the color and shape of the form may be changed in a short time, or the size and shape of each of a plurality of areas displayed in a predetermined color may be changed. The display position may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display area of the staging display device 1600 (the area where the background other than the characters of "CHANGE" is displayed is "CHANGE". It may not be displayed in the same way as characters (such as changing the display in a short time).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are divided into a plurality of groups, and it is possible to control the light emission for each group. When the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined emission color for each group. Then, the emission color of each group is changed in a short time with the passage of the fluctuation time.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 239, the plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are back front upper left decorative boards for emitting and decorating the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the 3129 are the back front left decorative substrate for making the first board light emitting group, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 light emitting decoration. Multiple LEDs mounted on 3128 are the 2nd board light emitting group, and multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for light emitting decoration of the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 are the 3rd board light emitting group, back Back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for light emitting decoration of front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for light emitting decoration of back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, and back front lower left outer Back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for light emitting decoration of decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for light emitting decoration of back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body The back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for luminescent decoration of 3166, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the 4th board light emitting group, the back front lower right decorative board for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141 The plurality of LEDs mounted on the 3152 are divided into the 5th board light emitting group, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for emitting and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are divided into the 6th board light emitting group. When the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, the LEDs of the same group are controlled to emit the same color, and the emission color is controlled so as to be different from the emission color of the LEDs of different groups. It has become like.

It should be noted that, among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 as a rainbow-colored effect, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the same board are not limited to those divided into the same group and light emission control is performed for each group, but the same board. Even if the LED is mounted, it may be divided into different groups and light emission control may be performed for each group. For example, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for emitting and decorating the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 to which the characters "Queen" are applied are divided into different groups for each character. The light emission may be controlled for each group, or each character may be divided into a plurality of areas by a predetermined virtual line and grouped to control the light emission for each group (for example, each character of "Queen"). Is divided into three areas, upper, middle, and lower, and the LEDs belonging to the upper area among the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are collectively controlled to emit light as the upper group, and the back front lower The LEDs belonging to the middle area of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 3173 are collectively controlled to emit light as a middle group, and the lower area of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 is controlled. The LEDs to which they belong are collectively controlled to emit light as a lower group, and the characters "Queen" are controlled to emit light in a striped pattern, etc.).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 240, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top left decorative board 456. And, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457 and the frame light emitting group A, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 are frame light emitting groups. B, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame of the door frame left side unit 420 and the decorative board 273 on the left side of the dish provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272 are frame light emitting group C, directing operation. The plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit of the unit 300, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 are the frame light emitting group D and the door. Multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 of the frame right side unit 430 and the right decorative board 278 of the dish right provided behind the dish right decorative lens 277 are frame light emitting group E and the door frame right side unit. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of 430 are divided into frame light emitting groups F, and when the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group to control the LEDs of the same group. The light emission is controlled to be the same color, and the light emission is controlled so as to be different from the light emission color of the LEDs of different groups.

FIG. 241 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the effect display device 1600 changes the variation display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. The effect is started, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern for executing the rainbow-colored effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing t1. Among the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit 300, and the annular button outer decorative board. A plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the 355, an LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and a first decorative portion 3211 on the back rear upper in which five 7-segment display units of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back rear upper are arranged side by side are illuminated. The LED is turned off except for the LED, and the effect display device 1600 performs a button operation promotion effect that prompts the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "press the button!"), And also performs the effect operation. The light emission control is performed on the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit of the unit 300, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative substrate 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative substrate 364.

Then, at the timing t2, the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed by the player or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. Then (timing t2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and the first display area a to the fifth display area e are displayed in different display colors. The display mode is displayed, and the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-mentioned frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F, and are included in each group of frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F. The LEDs are emitted with different emission colors for each group, and the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-mentioned 1st board light emitting group to 6th board light emitting group, and each group. The LEDs included in the above are made to emit light with different emission colors for each group.

Further, according to the passage of the fluctuation time, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of each group of the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F, and the first. The emission color of each group from the panel emission group to the sixth panel emission group is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (timing t2 to t100).

In this example, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at the timing t2, the button operation promotion effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (in this example, "press the button!"). The effect) is finished, the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, and "white" and the second display are displayed in the first display area a of the effect display device 1600. "Yellow" is displayed in the area b, "green" is displayed in the third display area c, "blue" is displayed in the fourth display area d, and "purple" is displayed in the fifth display area e, respectively, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The display area displaying "white" is changed to "yellow", the display area displaying "yellow" is changed to "green", and the display area displaying "green" is displayed. Change the area to "blue", change the display area displaying "blue" to "purple", change the display area displaying "purple" to "red", and change it to "red". Change the display area where is displayed to "white".

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is "white", the second board light emitting group is "yellow", and the second board light emitting group is "yellow". The 3rd board light emitting group is made to emit light to "green", the 4th board light emitting group is made to emit light to "blue", the 5th board light emitting group is made to emit light to "purple", and the 6th board light emitting group is made to emit light to "red", for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1). Every second), the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting "white" is changed to "yellow", and the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting "yellow" is changed to "green". Change the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "green" to "blue", and change the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "blue" to "purple". Change the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "purple" to "red", and change the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "red" to "white". Change to.

Similarly, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the frame light emitting group A provided in the door frame 3 is "white", the frame light emitting group B is "yellow", and the frame light emitting. Group C is made to emit light to "green", frame light emitting group D is made to "blue", frame light emitting group E is made to "purple", and frame light emitting group F is made to "red". Change the emission color of the LED that belongs to the group that emits light in "white" to "yellow", change the emission color of the LED that belongs to the group that emits light in "yellow" to "green", and change it to "green". Change the emission color of the LED that belongs to the group that emits light in "green" to "blue", change the emission color of the LED that belongs to the group that emits light in "blue" to "purple", and change it to "purple". The emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "purple" is changed to "red", and the emission color of the LED belonging to the group emitting light in "red" is changed to "white".

In this way, by controlling the emission colors of the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to be sequentially switched to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, the rainbow color is visually observed. It becomes possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the door, and it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with an impact. Further, the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are linked and controlled to control the effect display device 1600. The LED of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in a plurality of colors for a shorter time. By switching the display color and light emission color with, you can perform a more impactful effect than usual.

In this example, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 are emitted. The colors and the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided in the game board 5 are regularly arranged in a predetermined order for each display area or each group. Although the ones to be changed are shown, they belong to the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3. Any combination of any one or more of the emission color of the LED and the emission color of the LED belonging to the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group provided in the game board 5 (all). The display color and the emission color may be changed irregularly, and the rest may be changed regularly.

Further, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F, and the first panel emission group to the sixth. The emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the panel emission group are not limited to those that are changed in the same order, and the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame emission groups A to Any combination of any one or more of the emission color of the LED belonging to the frame emission group F and the emission color of the LED belonging to the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group (all). For different order (for example, the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F may be "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow → → ..." Change the order of, and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → → ..." It may be changed by (such as changing with).

Further, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F, and the first panel emission group to the sixth. For any combination (or all) of any one or more of the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the panel emission group, at least some of the colors are different combinations (for example, frame emission). LED belonging to group A to frame emission group F is controlled to emit light by any of "white", "yellow", "green", "blue", "purple", and "red", and the first panel Light emission control of LEDs belonging to the light emission group to the 6th board light emission group with one of the emission colors of "white", "orange", "yellowish green", "blue", "pink", "red", etc.) May be.

Further, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F provided in the door frame 3, and the emission colors of the LEDs. It is not limited to those that change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 at the same timing (match the timing of changing the color). , The timing of changing the display color of the effect display device 1600, the timing of changing the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F provided in the door frame 3, and the timing provided in the game board 5. The same with respect to the timing of changing the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st panel emission group to the 6th panel emission group, and any combination (or all) of any one or two or more. It may be changed at a timing (for example, after 1 second), and the rest may be changed at a different timing (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

Further, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F provided in the door frame 3, and the emission colors of the LEDs. The period (predetermined period) from changing the light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 to changing again is always constant. Not limited to those, some or all periods may be different. For example, at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) among timings t2 to t100, the display color and emission color are changed every second, and even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10) are changed. , T98, t100), the display color and the emission color may be changed every 2 seconds.

In this example, the LED that emits light and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side is controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow-colored effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 and starts the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600. During the period from timing t0 to timing t1 from the time when the button promotion effect is executed, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up side by side is turned off. When the button promotion effect is executed at the timing t1, the back rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up side by side corresponds to the rainbow color effect. The light emission is controlled according to the light emission mode. In this example, when the button operation promotion effect is started (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 is controlled to emit red light. Light emission is controlled so that the characters "hot!" Flow repeatedly from the right to the left of the five 7-segment display units of the decoration unit 3211.

Further, the button valid period (for example,) without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed by the player or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the execution of the button operation promotion effect (for example). When 5 seconds) elapses and the button operation promotion effect ends, and then the rainbow color effect starts (timing t2), the emission color of the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 is changed. Until the rainbow-colored effect is completed (timing t2 to timing t100) while maintaining the red emission color, "Rainbow" is displayed from right to left of the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back. Light emission is controlled so that the characters "Chance!" Flow repeatedly. As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light. Further, in the rainbow-colored effect, either the LED belonging to the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F or the LED belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group is the first on the back. Light emission is controlled in red, which is the same as the five 7-segment display units of the decorative unit 3211. Therefore, although the emission color of the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 is not changed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the emission control related to the rainbow color effect is performed. ..

Further, the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group provided on the door frame 3 around the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. The LED belonging to F (decorative board on which the LED is mounted), the LED belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 (decorative board on which the LED is mounted), and Is provided, and when the button operation promotion effect is completed, it is possible to give the impression that the light emitting decoration spreads around the five 7-segment display parts of the back rear upper first decoration part 3211 which is decorated with light emitting in red. The effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in this example, even after the end of the rainbow color effect (timing t100 to timing t101), the emission control is continued without changing the emission color of the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211. It has become. Specifically, after the rainbow-colored effect is completed (timing t100), for example, depending on the occurrence of the reach of the decorative pattern, "reach! The light emission is controlled so that the characters "" flow repeatedly, and the reach of the decorative pattern occurs, and during the execution of the reach effect, "Gekiatsu! The light emission is controlled so that the characters "" flow repeatedly. Further, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to be turned off based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative design is stopped. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect has ended. It should be noted that the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper first decorative unit 3211 may be controlled to be turned off when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the decorative design is stopped. In this case, it may be controlled. When the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the movement display of characters in the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back may be stopped. In this case as well, the player can recognize that the variation effect has ended due to the stop of the movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211.

In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow color effect, and the five 7s of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled even after the rainbow color effect is completed. In order to continuously control the light emission of the segment display unit, it is possible to raise expectations for the start of the rainbow-colored effect by controlling the light emission of the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper first decoration unit 3211, which is executed in advance. Even after the end of the rainbow-colored effect, the expectation for a big hit can be raised by controlling the light emission of the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back.

It should be noted that the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 is started at least prior to the rainbow color effect and is continuously executed even after the end of the rainbow color effect. Any timing between the timing t0 at which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing t2 at which the rainbow-colored effect is started may be started (including the one that starts the light emission control at the timing t0). Then, the rainbow-colored effect may be terminated at any timing between the timing t100 for ending the rainbow-colored effect and the timing t101 for stopping the variation display of the decorative symbol (including the timing t101 for stopping the light emission control). In addition, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, if the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again before the predetermined period elapses, the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and rear are turned off. It may not be controlled to the state, and in this case, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back is stopped (timing t101). ), The characters displayed on the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 are updated when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211 are updated. The movement display of the character may be restarted from the right to the left of (timing t0). Even in this case, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of the variable display of the decorative pattern depending on the presence / absence of the movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decoration unit 3211.

Further, the mode displayed on the back-back upper first decorative unit 3211 during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, the effect display device becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow-colored effect. As a display that supplements the variation effect of the decorative pattern executed in 1600, after the execution of the rainbow color effect by displaying the mode of displaying the variation of the symbol or controlling the blinking of a plurality of LEDs with a predetermined lighting pattern. (For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), the mode corresponding to the special lottery result may be derived, or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated by the player during the execution of the variation effect. The number of LEDs that light up when a predetermined increase condition or decrease condition such as the above is satisfied may be changed. As a result, it is worried that the variable display of the decorative pattern may be difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, and that the variable display of the decorative pattern may not be executed, or that the special lottery result may not be derived. It is possible not to give. Further, the display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, and even in this case, the above-mentioned anxiety can be prevented.

Further, in the above example, the end of the button operation promotion effect (the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player during the execution of the button operation promotion effect, or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. It is shown that the rainbow-colored effect is started when the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without being pressed, but the predetermined execution condition is not accompanied by the execution of the button operation promotion effect. When it is established, the execution of the rainbow-colored effect may be started. For example, when the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect or the non-variable effect period in which the variable effect is not executed after the end of the variable effect reaches a predetermined predetermined period, the execution of the rainbow-colored effect is started. May be good.

Further, in this example, the decorative pattern is displayed in the reach state at a high rate (the one that does not reach the reach state (including the so-called ghost)) when the rainbow-colored effect is finished (timing t100). When the rainbow-colored effect is completed, the rainbow-colored effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is erased to execute the reach effect, and the player belongs to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided in the game board 5. The light emission control of the rainbow color effect between the LED and the LED belonging to the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 is terminated, and the reach effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is achieved. Light emission is controlled according to the light emission mode.

As described above, in this example, the rainbow-colored effect is performed as a reach notice executed during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the reach state. If the decorative design does not reach the reach (the decorative design may be a big hit without reaching the reach, or the decorative design may be a big hit without reaching the reach) or the decorative design may be a big hit without reaching the reach. Even if this is not the case, the rainbow-colored effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio, or the rainbow-colored effect may be executed only when a big hit is always obtained (as a big hit confirmed effect). Further, the timing of execution is not limited to the reach notice, and a rainbow-colored effect may be performed as a reach effect executed during the period from the display of the reach state of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be executed as an effect such as a look-ahead notice before the start of the change of the symbol, or it may be executed regardless of the change display of the decorative symbol (for example, waiting for a customer to be executed when the change display of the decorative symbol is not started over a predetermined period). You may want to perform a rainbow-colored effect (as a demo effect).

Further, as described above, the rainbow-colored effect is executed when the probability of a big hit is high, and is an important effect for improving the expectations of the player. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is characterized so that the color development of the LED whose light emission is controlled in the rainbow-colored effect becomes vivid. Specifically, a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 for mounting LEDs whose light emission is controlled by a rainbow-colored effect, that is, a back front upper left decorative board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122. The back front left decorative board 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 are luminescently decorated with the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front lower logo decoration 3167. The back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for making the back front lower middle decorative board 3173, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for making the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 emit light, and the back front for making the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 emit light. The lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for emitting and decorating the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, and the back front lower right inner decorative board 3165 for emitting light decoration. The inner decorative substrate 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141. A white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for light-emitting decoration of the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142, and electrons such as LEDs to be mounted are coated. Letters and symbols to avoid confusion with parts and other decorative boards are screen-printed using inks of bright and saturated colors (eg, yellow). In other words, the surface of a plurality of decorative boards on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and whose light emission is controlled by rainbow-colored effects is mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. At the same time, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards are applied by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). ing.

Further, a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 for mounting LEDs whose light emission is controlled by rainbow-colored effects, that is, a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right. Decorative substrate 457, decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, decorative substrate 273 on the left side of the plate, decorative substrate 320 on the outer periphery of the production operation unit, decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and inside the button. The surface of the decorative substrate 364, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 278 on the right side of the dish, the decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, etc. is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). At the same time, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as mounted LEDs and other decorative boards are printed by screen printing using ink of a highly bright and saturated color (for example, yellow). ing. In other words, the surface of the plurality of decorative substrates on which the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and whose emission is controlled by the rainbow color effect is mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. At the same time, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates are applied by screen printing using ink of a highly bright and saturated color (for example, yellow). ing.

Further, the back-rear upper first decorative board (illustrated) on which the LED for light-emitting decoration of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side is mounted. The surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are bright and colored. It is applied by screen printing with a high degree color (eg, yellow) ink. However, while full-color LEDs are mounted on a plurality of decorative boards on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light by rainbow-colored effects, the first decoration on the back and back is used. A monochromatic light emitting (red in this example) LED is mounted on the substrate. Therefore, even if the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are light-emitting and decorated to produce a rainbow color effect, the light-emitting color is not changed on the five 7-segment displays of the back-back upper movable decoration body 3210. Only the effect of displaying characters, numbers, patterns, etc. on the five 7-segment display units with the same (red in this example) light emitting color is performed. In other words, in the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper movable decoration body 3210 that displays characters, numbers, patterns, etc., the characters and numbers that are displayed by not changing the emission color even if the rainbow color effect is executed. Information such as a picture is displayed in a state that is easy for the player to see, and it is suppressed that erroneous information is transmitted to the player.

As described above, in this example, since the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to improve the reflection efficiency, it is possible to emit light in a plurality of full colors. Even when various LEDs are emitted in a wide variety of colors, all the light can be reflected uniformly to develop vivid colors, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left provided on the game board 5 Logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, back front left sub decoration part 3123, back front lower logo decoration 3167, back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163 , Back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front right logo decoration part 3141, back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, The door frame top unit 450, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative lens 272, and the door are provided in the door frame 3 and can be decorated with light emission. Each of the frame right side unit 430, the dish right decorative lens 277, and the door frame right side unit 430 can be brightly and vividly (clearly) luminescently decorated, and the effect of effect is enhanced. In addition, the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper first decoration unit 3211 that emits light only in a single color (red in this example) can also be brightly and vividly luminescently decorated, and the effect of effect is enhanced.

In addition, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative boards are printed by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). As a result, it is possible to bring the reflection efficiency between the white solder resist (protective material) and the characters and symbols printed on the screen close to each other so that the reflection efficiency on the substrate surface is close to uniform. Even when the possible LEDs are made to emit light in a wide variety of colors, all the light can be uniformly reflected, the occurrence of light emission unevenness in the light emission decoration is suppressed, and the effect of effect is enhanced. In addition, since the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the characters and symbols printed on the screen can be reduced, when viewed through a lens that covers the decorative substrate regardless of whether the LED is emitting light or not. When the characters and symbols printed on the screen of the decorative board become inconspicuous and the player looks directly at the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards, information unrelated to the game is visually recognized and the game is enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, in the conventional decorative substrate where characters and symbols are screen-printed using ink of low lightness or saturation such as black (dark color), the characters and symbols are clearly visible when viewed through the lens covering the decorative substrate. Even if you can't see it, the lens itself may look dark and look bad, but you can make the lens look brighter by screen-printing characters and symbols using ink with high brightness and saturation. It also has the effect of not degrading the appearance. As a color with high lightness and saturation, it is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white, but other than yellow-green, light blue, and other colors with low lightness and saturation (dark, black, brown, etc.). If there is, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect.

In the above example, all of the plurality of decorative substrates on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the rainbow color effect is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, but the present invention is limited to this. Rather, some decorative substrates out of a plurality of decorative substrates that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled by rainbow-colored effects are coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black) on the surface. It may be one, and for all or part of the decorative boards on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the rainbow color effect is mounted, a white solder resist (white solder resist only on the surface on which the LED is mounted) ( It may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black) on the back surface on which the LED is not mounted.

In addition, the characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards are also printed on the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). Not limited to those applied to, some of the decorative boards that mount LEDs that are controlled to emit light by rainbow-colored effects are inks of low-brightness or low-saturation colors (for example, black). May be applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing, or the LED mounted on all or part of the plurality of decorative boards on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the rainbow color effect is mounted. Characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as and other decorative boards are made with foil-free characters (that is, characters are made with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) and around it. The surface of this foil-free character may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Some of the decorative boards on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the color effect is mounted are formed as white resist-free characters using the white resist coated twice (the entire LED mounting surface is white). After coating with the solder resist of (1st layer), the entire area excluding these is white by masking the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates. By coating again with solder resist (second layer), the masked area, that is, characters and symbols may be formed as characters without white resist), or an LED whose light emission is controlled by rainbow-colored effect is mounted. For all or some of the decorative boards to be used, characters and symbols are screen-printed on the surface on which the LED is mounted using ink of a highly bright or saturated color (for example, yellow). For example, on the back surface on which an LED is not mounted, a predetermined color (not only a color with high lightness or saturation but also a color with low lightness or saturation) is used for screen printing, or a foil-free character is printed. Avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs mounted on the decorative board and other decorative boards by forming with or by forming as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice. You may. In these cases as well, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted, and further make the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface substantially uniform to realize uniform light emission, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. ..

The LED mounted on the decorative board is an electronic component whose package color is white or has a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color), and the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards has. Only packaged LEDs are mounted and no other electronic components are mounted. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to suppress the decrease in reflection efficiency and realize uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface even by the LED package. In addition to the connector for connecting the electrical wiring to the decorative board, the non-LED mounting surface has one electronic component such as a resistor, a capacitor, and a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit). It may be implemented one or more. Further, the connector is an electronic component whose housing color is white or has a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color), and the constant current drive circuit is black as an integrated circuit. It is an electronic component that is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver IC that is housed in a possible IC package, and the resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component that has black, blue, white, or the like. , The capacitor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component having black, brown, gray, white or the like. In the above-mentioned decorative substrate, electronic components having at least a color having low brightness or saturation such as black, brown, and gray may be mounted on the LED non-mounting surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface, and is white. Or, for electronic components having a color with high brightness and saturation such as a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color), the electronic component may be mounted on either the LED mounting surface or the LED non-mounting surface. .. As a result, the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative substrate become inconspicuous when viewed through the lens covering the decorative substrate, and the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be suppressed to make the reflection efficiency substantially uniform. Therefore, it is possible to realize highly efficient and uniform light emission and enhance the effect of production.

In this example, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted even when the rainbow color effect is executed as the variable effect, and various decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 at the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. The amount of light from the LED on the board can be changed (adjusted). Specifically, when the button with the letter "+" is pressed out of the two buttons of the light intensity adjustment button 228, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are immediately brightened. (Increase the amount of light) When you press the button with the letter "-", the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will immediately dim (decrease the amount of light). It has become.

As shown in FIG. 241. When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variation effect for executing the rainbow color effect, the first panel light emission group to the sixth panel light emission regardless of whether the LED is in the off state or not. Immediately change the amount of light of the multiple LEDs of the group and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F and the LED that performs the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, and the light amount after the change is the first board light emitting group ~ The light emission control is performed on the plurality of LEDs of the sixth panel light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F. In this example, a plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group, a plurality of frame light emitting groups A to the frame light emitting group C, and a plurality of frame light emitting groups E to the frame light emitting group F during the execution of the button operation promotion effect. Although the LED of the above is controlled to be turned off, a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group D (a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit 300, and an annular button outer decorative board 355). The plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the above and the LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are turned on, and when the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit 300 is used. Since the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light by the changed light amount, the effect operation unit 300 The first board while observing the change in the amount of light of the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364. It is possible to adjust the amount of light of all the LEDs of the light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F.

On the other hand, among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units are arranged side by side. For LEDs mounted on the first decorative board and not performing the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect, the light amount is not changed (adjusted) even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect. (The amount of light is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable effect for executing the rainbow-colored effect, the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 is provided with the back-back-up first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units are arranged side by side. Since it is impossible to change (adjust) the light amount (brightness) of the LED mounted on the first decorative board and the light amount (brightness) is constant regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the first panel It can be used as a reference when changing the light intensity of the plurality of LEDs of the light emitting group to the sixth panel light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F, and the brightness and back of these LEDs. The difference from the brightness of the LED mounted on the back rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. The LED mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board provided in the back-rear upper first decorative unit 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side has a rainbow-colored effect. Regardless of whether or not the variation effect is being executed, the light amount may not always be changed (adjusted) even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated.

Further, in this example, it is impossible to adjust the amount of light (luminance), and the back-rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 provided with the back-rear-upper first decorative substrate on which the LED that does not perform the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect is mounted. LEDs (LEDs) belonging to the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 are mounted around the back rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the seven 7-segment display units are arranged side by side. It is possible to adjust the amount of light (luminance) between the decorative board) and the LEDs (decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted) belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided in the game board 5. LED is provided. In this way, since the LED that is the reference for adjusting the light amount (luminance) and the LED that changes the light amount (luminance) are arranged close to each other, it is easy to compare the light amount (luminance), and the player's favorite light amount (brightness) ( Brightness) can be easily adjusted.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example executes the rainbow-colored effect when the probability of becoming a big hit is high, but there are situations in which the rainbow-colored effect cannot be properly performed depending on the state of the gaming machine. In such a case, not only the rainbow-colored effect cannot be expected to improve the interest of the game, but also the interest of the game may be reduced.

For example, an abnormality in which it is difficult to display the rainbow-colored effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 (an abnormality in which the LED (either part or all) of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 does not emit light, or an abnormality in which the display is disturbed due to noise or the like. Etc.), or an abnormality (in the door frame 3 or the game board 5) in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the LED rainbow color effect of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. In the case of an abnormality in which the LEDs (either part or all) of the various decorative substrates provided are not emitted, or an abnormality in which the light emission mode is disturbed due to noise, etc.), the display and door by the effect display device 1600 are generated. It was not possible to achieve the rainbow-colored effect in the perfect form as designed using the light emission from the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, and the display by the effect display device 1600 and the door frame 3 and the game. An incomplete rainbow-colored effect is executed in which a part of the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the board 5 is missing.

By executing such an incomplete rainbow-colored effect, not only the effect of improving the interest of the original rainbow-colored effect cannot be expected, but also the player recognizes that the effect different from the rainbow-colored effect is executed. This can be misleading. In this example, such a misunderstanding is not given to the player as much as possible. This will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at the timing t6 during the rainbow color effect, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are LED. One of the abnormalities that make it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow color effect and the abnormality that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the LED of the LED of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 has occurred. When an abnormal state occurs, a plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided in the game board 5, and a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3. After finishing the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect, the light emission control is performed so that the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group are turned off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F are turned off. Light emission control is performed in an abnormality notification light emission mode for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality (in this example, a mode in which the light flashes in red at the maximum brightness (light amount)).

As shown in FIG. 242, it is difficult to display the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at any timing from timing t0 to timing t2 before the start of the rainbow-colored effect in the variable effect for executing the rainbow-colored effect. Anomalies and abnormalities that make it difficult to control the emission of the rainbow-colored effects of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the rainbow-colored effects of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. In the event of an abnormal state in which one of the abnormalities that makes it difficult to control light emission occurs, the first one provided on the game board 5 even at the timing t2 when the rainbow-colored effect is normally started. Without starting the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration by the plurality of LEDs of the panel light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3, the first Anomaly notification light emission mode for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to a plurality of LEDs in the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F by controlling the light emission of a plurality of LEDs in the 1st panel light emission group to the 6th panel light emission group in a light-off state. In the example, the light emission is controlled by blinking red light at the maximum brightness (light amount)).

Further, when the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at the timing t6 during the execution of the variation effect for executing the rainbow-colored effect, the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased to indicate that the abnormality has occurred. Display to notify. Similarly, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at any timing from timing t0 to timing t2 before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect display on the effect display device 1600. A display is performed to notify that the abnormality has occurred without starting the display of the mode. It should be noted that it may not be executed for a part of the rainbow-colored effect display mode, and even in this case, it is possible to recognize that the abnormality has occurred by the display notifying that the abnormality has occurred.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rainbow is completely as designed by using the display by the staging display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Since it is controlled not to interrupt or start the rainbow color effect when the color effect cannot be realized, it is possible to prevent the rainbow color effect from being executed in an incomplete form, which may give a misunderstanding to the player. It can be deterred.

It should be noted that the LED mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board provided in the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side has a rainbow-colored effect. Even if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the variation effect that executes the good. In this case, a plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided in the game board 5 due to the occurrence of an abnormal state, and a plurality of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided in the door frame 3. Even if the light emission decoration of the rainbow-colored effect by the LED of the above is not finished or started, or even if the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are controlled to emit light in the abnormality notification light emitting mode, the variable effect continues. It is possible to make the player recognize that the LED is being used, and the player is not misunderstood that the variable effect has been completed.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to turn off the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 may be different, and the influence on the execution of games and rainbow-colored effects is small, for example. Error (Minor error: When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3). Case), when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (when it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 (When the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 are blurred and difficult to see) due to the vibration of the full tank detection sensor. When the detection signal from 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball), when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is input (in the guidance passage 570a). (Errors that are unlikely to be performed, such as when it is detected that the game ball does not exist), are mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board provided in the back rear upper first decorative section 3211. While controlling the light emission without turning off the LED, an error that has a significant effect on the execution of games and rainbow-colored effects (serious error: when a radio wave irradiation goto is detected (door frame 3 or game board 5 due to electromagnetic waves or the like) (When there is noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided in the above or there is noise in the display of the effect display device 1600), the second starting port 2004 is not open when the magnet goto is detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input, or when the detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2402 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, a goto action is performed. (Errors that are likely to occur) may be controlled so as to turn off the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 so that the variable effect can be interrupted or terminated even while the variable effect is being executed. As a result, the control state of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be changed according to the degree of error, and it becomes possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to eliminate the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be different, for example, the above-mentioned game or rainbow-colored effect. For an error that has a small effect on the execution of the above, a warning display (for example, "door is open" etc. ), On the other hand, for errors that have a significant effect on the execution of the above-mentioned games and rainbow-colored effects, the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased and a warning display (for example, "illegal winning!" Etc. ) May be performed, so that the display of the rainbow color effect (the rainbow color effect display mode) may be interrupted or terminated even while the rainbow color effect is being executed. As a result, the display mode of the staging display device 1600 can be changed according to the degree of error, and it becomes possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality. It should be noted that, regarding the error that has a significant influence on the execution of the above-mentioned game and the rainbow-colored effect, the back-back upper first decorative unit 3211 is controlled to be turned off, and the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased. In such a case, the staging display such as the rainbow-colored staging display mode in the staging display device 1600 may be terminated at a timing delayed by a predetermined period from the timing of turning off the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. .. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display content from being suddenly switched in the effect display device 1600, and to switch the display content while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the rainbow-colored effect display mode.

In addition, when an abnormal state occurs, a display notifying that the abnormal state has occurred on the staging display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 according to the type of the abnormal state (degree of urgency). Any combination of any one or two or more (including all) of the notification by controlling the light emission in the mode at the time of error and the notification that an abnormal state has occurred by voice output. You may want to do it. For example, when a minor error that has little effect on the game occurs, a display notifying that the effect display device 1600 is in an abnormal state and an LED provided on the door frame 3 emit light in the mode at the time of the error. Execution of any one or any combination of two, a notification by control and a notification that an abnormal state has occurred by voice output, causes a serious error that has a significant impact on the game. If this is the case, a display notifying that an abnormal state has occurred in the effect display device 1600, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and an abnormality due to audio output. You may want to do all of the notification that the condition is occurring.

Further, in this example, in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect, an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow color effect (arbitrary timing from timing t0 to timing t2). When the abnormality is resolved and the abnormal state is restored to the normal state during the execution of the rainbow color effect (before the end of the rainbow color effect), the abnormality notification is performed by the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F. Although the light emitting mode is terminated, the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided in the game board 5 and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 Does not execute the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration by, (does not restart the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration (does not return to the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration)).

That is, the LED of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 has an abnormality in which the light emitting mode is disturbed due to noise or the like, so that the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is terminated or the light emission of the rainbow color effect is emitted. If the decoration is not started, noise may occur again even if it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration is controlled to be restarted according to the resolution of the abnormality, the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration may be repeatedly executed and terminated, which confuses the player. There is a risk of causing it. Therefore, in this example, if the rainbow-colored effect is ended or the rainbow-colored effect is not started based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the rainbow-colored color is resolved even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow-colored effect. The luminescent decoration of the effect is not executed or restarted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 242, in the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect, a plurality of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 due to noise or the like at the timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow color effect. When an abnormality occurs in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow color effect by any of the LEDs (timing t6), the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are combined with each other. , The multiple LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect are completed, and the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group are turned off. The light emission is controlled according to the state, and the light emission is controlled in an abnormal notification light emission mode in which a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to the frame light emission group F blink red at the maximum brightness (light amount).

At this time, although the effect display device 1600 erases the display of the rainbow color effect display mode and displays a warning (“abnormality occurrence”, etc.), the control data of the rainbow color effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler. It has become. In addition, the LED mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board provided in the back-rear upper first decorative unit 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side has a rainbow-colored effect. Although the light emission decoration is not executed, the light emission control corresponding to the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect is continued, and the variable effect continues even if the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 disappears. It is possible to make the player aware of what he is doing. Further, a warning sound is output in the above-mentioned abnormal state, and the player or the game clerk can recognize that the abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

In addition, noise and the like are eliminated at the timing t10 after the abnormal state occurs, and it is possible to control the emission of the rainbow-colored effects of the plurality of LEDs of the first panel light emitting group to the sixth panel light emitting group provided on the game board 5. (Timing t10), the effect display device 1600 ends the warning display and resumes the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode. As described above, the control data of the rainbow-colored effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler even during the occurrence of an abnormal state, and the effect display device 1600 is configured according to the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect. The rainbow-colored effect display mode is displayed in the above, and the rainbow-colored effect is produced by any one of the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 due to noise or the like. Instead of the rainbow-colored effect display mode displayed at the timing t6 when an abnormality for which light emission control is difficult occurs, the rainbow-colored effect display mode corresponding to the timing t10 in which noise or the like is eliminated and the abnormal state is restored is displayed.

Further, in this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at the timing t10, the abnormality notification light emission that causes the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F to blink red at the maximum brightness (light amount) for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds). The embodiment is to be continued (timing t10 to timing t11). That is, if an abnormality occurs again after the abnormality is resolved (timing t10) and before the lapse of a certain period, the abnormality notification light emission mode is not terminated at the timing when the certain period elapses, and the abnormality notification is made even after the lapse of a certain period. The light emitting mode is to be continued. As a result, when the occurrence and resolution of the abnormality occur frequently, the light emission control in the abnormal notification light emission mode is continuously controlled without repeating the end and restart of the light emission control in the abnormal notification light emission mode, so that the game clerk, etc. Becomes easier to notice.

Further, even if the abnormality is resolved at the timing t10 after the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are turned off (timing t6) when an abnormality occurs at the timing t6. The plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 continue to be turned off and do not return to the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6, after controlling the emission of a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 in the abnormality notification light emitting mode (timing t6), the abnormality occurs at timing t10. When a certain period of time has passed without the abnormality occurring again, the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 are controlled to be turned off to produce a rainbow color effect. It does not return to the light emitting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, when the rainbow-colored effect ends and the reach effect is started at the timing t100, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the frame provided on the door frame 3. The light emission control of the plurality of LEDs of the light emission group A to the frame light emission group F is executed to emit light in a mode corresponding to the reach effect. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is not restored. Therefore, whether or not the abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow color effect is determined. It can be discriminated. If an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow-colored effect and the abnormality is resolved before the start of the rainbow-colored effect, the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect should be started at the timing t2 when the rainbow-colored effect is started. You may do it.

Further, it is provided on the game board 5 not at the timing t10 at which the abnormality is resolved but at the timing t100 at which the rainbow-colored effect ends (the timing at which the effect executed after the rainbow-colored effect (reach effect in this example) is started). It is not limited to the one that starts the light emission control between the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 (at timing t100). (Not limited to the one that starts the light emission control), when the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect is finished, or when the variable effect for executing the rainbow color effect is finished and the next variable effect is started, the rainbow color effect is started. This may be the case when the demo effect is started without starting the next variation effect after the variation effect for executing the above is completed. Even in this case, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect or the variable effect.

Further, when the abnormality is resolved after the variation effect for executing the rainbow-colored effect is completed, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 at the timing when the abnormality is resolved are used. Of the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3, at least a plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided in the game board 5 are started to emit light. In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the fluctuation effect different from the variation effect in which the abnormality occurred, and the rainbow-colored effect is executed at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, the rainbow-colored effect is performed at the relevant timing. It may be controlled to the light emitting mode of the rainbow-colored effect.

Further, when the abnormality is resolved, some LEDs may be restored to the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, the plurality of LEDs of the 4th board light emitting group among the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are returned to the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. Then, when a certain period of time has passed after the abnormality is resolved, the frame light emitting group A among the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3 is returned to the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. You may do it. In this case, although the light emission is not controlled during the occurrence of the abnormal state, the schedule data of the light emission control pattern is advanced, and the light emission mode is restarted from the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, not the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality occurs. Become so. In this way, when the abnormality is resolved, some LEDs are restored to the rainbow-colored effect emission decoration, and when the other LEDs are turned off, only some of the LEDs are rainbow-colored. Since the light emitting decoration is not performed, it becomes possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect.

Further, in this example, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted even in an abnormal state, and the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are arranged. The set value of the amount of light (brightness) can be changed.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality has occurred, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are set at the timing when the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted. The light intensity (brightness) of the plurality of LEDs is immediately changed, and the changed light intensity (brightness) is used for the plurality of LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F. While the light emission is controlled with multiple LEDs, when an abnormality occurs, the multiple LEDs of the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the frame at the timing when the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted. Although the set value of the light intensity (brightness) of the plurality of LEDs of the light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F is changed, the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group are used at the timing when the operation is accepted. , The plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F are not emitted to the light amount (brightness) after the change, and after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting. The plurality of LEDs in the group are controlled to emit light with the changed light amount (brightness) after the timing t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved, and the plurality of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting group F. The light emission of the LED is controlled so that it can emit light with the changed light amount (brightness) after the timing t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has elapsed.

In this way, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated in a state where an abnormality has occurred, a plurality of LEDs in the first panel light emitting group to the sixth panel light emitting group and a plurality of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting group F. Since the amount of light (luminance) of the LED is not changed, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification light emission mode from becoming difficult to be noticed. In addition, even if an abnormality has occurred, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted to change the set value of the light amount (brightness), and after the abnormality is resolved, it is reflected in the actual LED light emission state. It does not deprive the player of the opportunity to adjust the amount of light (brightness) even in the state where the light intensity (brightness) is generated.

In this example, a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as dimming LED group) that belong to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided in the game board 5 and can adjust the amount of light are mounted. It is configured to provide a first decorative board on the back and back on which a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as non-dimming LED group) whose light amount cannot be adjusted to emit and decorate the above 7-segment display unit are mounted separately from the decorative board. However, not limited to this, the 7-segment display unit emits light on a part of one of the plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group are mounted. An LED for decoration may be mounted. That is, a plurality of LEDs (dimming LED group) whose light amount can be adjusted and a plurality of LEDs (non-dimming LED group) whose light amount cannot be adjusted may be mounted on one decorative substrate.

For example, the dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light amount can be adjusted and the non-dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light amount cannot be adjusted may be arranged at a predetermined interval. In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimming LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimming LED group are calculated from the distance between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. May be arranged so that they are close to each other. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of the LED whose light amount can be adjusted and the LED whose light amount cannot be adjusted.

Further, the LED made of resin having the same or very similar color (white in this example) to the LED whose light amount can be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED) and the LED whose light amount cannot be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimming LED). A package may be adopted, or in addition to this, the same type of package may be adopted, whereby the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED can emit light under the same conditions. By comparing the brightness with the non-dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, a plurality of through holes may be formed between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. In the region where the through hole is formed on the surface of the decorative substrate, the light emitted from the LED is not reflected and leaks to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) side of the decorative substrate, so that the light is not matched with the dimming LED group. By forming a through hole between the light LED group and the light LED group, the interference between the light from the dimming LED and the light from the non-dimming LED is suppressed, and the light from each LED can be visually recognized individually. As a result, the brightness can be adjusted based on the light from only the dimming LED group, and the light from only the non-dimming LED group can be used as an index for adjusting the brightness. Increases, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Further, a through hole is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED (ratio (area) ≤ one adjustment that one through hole occupies on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate. By occupying the ratio (area) of the light LED or one non-dimming LED, the light of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is leaked from the through hole to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the decorative substrate more than necessary. You may try to deter that. In this case, the number of through holes formed between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is larger than the number of dimming LEDs and the number of non-dimming LEDs mounted on the side of the through hole. By increasing the number, the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is not lowered more than necessary while suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. You may try to.

Further, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the decorative substrate, a three-dimensional object (electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness, etc.) that separates a part or all of the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. May be provided to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. For example, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the decorative board, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an electronic component mounted on a circuit board such as an LED driver, etc. are mounted between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. You may try to do it. Dimming is performed by providing an electronic component having a predetermined thickness and mounted so as to project from the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the decorative substrate between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. A part or all of the LED and the non-dimming LED may be separated to suppress the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED.

In addition, the electronic components provided between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED have the appearance of a dark color (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) with low reflection efficiency (some are different from the dark color). It may have a portion (for example, a metallic color such as silver, a transparent portion, etc.). This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED.

Further, in the above example, the five 7-segment display units of the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 provided with the back-back-top first decorative substrate on which the non-dimming LED is mounted are arranged side by side. The player forms the portion 3211 in a size extending over the left-right end of the effect display device 1600, and the player creates characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display portion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Although the ones that are easy to notice are shown, the first decorative portion 3211 on the back rear upper is formed by, for example, one 7-segment display unit, or a decorative substrate smaller than other decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted is provided. For example, the player may perform an effect that is difficult to notice. In this case, the player who notices the existence of the 7-segment display unit can be further enjoyed by the effect performed by the effect display unit 1600 or the like in addition to the effect performed by the effect display device 1600 or the like. Further, the surface of one decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with an area in which a plurality of LEDs for light emitting and decorating the decorative body covering the decorative substrate are mounted, and 7 segments provided in a part of the decorative body. When the display unit is configured to be divided into an area where a plurality of LEDs for light emission decoration are mounted and an area where a plurality of LEDs for light emission decoration are mounted on the decorative substrate, the decoration is more decorative than the area where the decorative body covering the decorative substrate is mounted. The area where a plurality of LEDs that emit light and decorate the 7-segment display unit provided on a part of the body may be mounted may be narrowed.

In this way, since the non-dimming LED that is the standard for adjusting the brightness and the dimming LED that changes the brightness are mounted on one decorative substrate and arranged close to each other, the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED are used. The dimming LED and the non-dimming LED can be arranged closer to each other as compared with the case of mounting on different substrates, and it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED.

Further, in the above example, the LED that performs the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, specifically, the LED included in the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group and the LED included in the frame light emitting group A to the frame light emitting group F. LED that can adjust the brightness and does not emit light emission decoration of rainbow color effect, specifically, the back rear upper first decoration part where the five 7 segment display parts of the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are lined up side by side Regarding the LED that emits and decorates 3211, the LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted is shown. One or more non-rainbow color light emitting LEDs without decoration may be provided. This non-rainbow color light emitting LED is controlled to be turned off when the rainbow color effect is executed, or is controlled to perform a light emission decoration different from the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect, and is rainbow color. Although the light emitting decoration of the effect is not performed, the brightness can be adjusted unlike the LED that emits and decorates the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and back. Since the result of the brightness adjustment during the execution of the rainbow color effect can be reflected even for the non-rainbow color light emitting LED that does not perform the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect in this way, the non-rainbow color light emitting LED is also used after the rainbow color effect. With the light emitting decoration performed, it is possible to emit light with the player's favorite brightness (light amount).

Further, when the above-mentioned dimming LED is performing the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect, the light emission color is switched (flickers) in a short time, so that the accurate light amount (luminance) is based on the light of these dimming LEDs. Is difficult to determine. Therefore, there is a problem that even if the light amount (luminance) is adjusted to the player's favorite light amount (luminance), the light amount (luminance) is actually set different from the player's favorite light amount (luminance). As described above, when a non-rainbow-colored light emitting LED that does not execute the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect is provided and the light-emitting decoration different from the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect is executed even during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the door frame 3 And when adjusting the light intensity (luminance) of the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5, the light intensity (luminance) can be accurately determined based on the light from the non-rainbow color emitting LED. Therefore, the amount of light (luminance) desired by the player can be easily adjusted.

As the light emitting decoration of the non-rainbow color emitting LED during the execution of the iridescent effect, at least the LED that performs the light emitting decoration of the iridescent color effect, specifically, the LED included in the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group. The LEDs included in the frame emission group A to the frame emission group F may be those that switch the emission color with a longer unit emission time, or those that perform emission decoration with the same emission color without switching the emission color.

In addition, the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 provided with the back-rear upper first decorative substrate on which a non-dimming LED that does not perform rainbow-colored light emission decoration because the above-mentioned light amount (brightness) cannot be adjusted is provided. Non-rainbow color emission LED with emission color different from the emission color of the five 7-segment display units of (Full-color LED is movable on the back and back. It may be the one that emits light in a monochromatic emission that is different from the emission color of the five 7-segment display units of the movable decoration body 3210 on the back and back). The light emission may be controlled. In this case, it becomes easy to distinguish between the non-rainbow color light emitting LED and the non-dimming LED, and it becomes easy to compare the light amount (brightness) when adjusting the light amount (brightness). , The amount of light (brightness) desired by the player can be easily adjusted.

In the above example, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, that is, the light emitting decoration that changes the light emitting color in a short time, is not performed. A white solder resist (protective material) with the highest reflection efficiency is also applied to the surface of the upper first decorative substrate behind the back where a single-color light emitting LED (non-dimming LED) that emits and decorates the upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted. Characters and symbols that are coated and to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are colors with high lightness and saturation (for example, white with high reflection efficiency such as yellow). ) Is applied by screen printing to increase the reflection efficiency of the surface on which the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted, but in addition to this, or in place of this, the LED is mounted. Even if the interference of light on the surface of the first decorative substrate is suppressed to clarify the light emission of each LED so that the characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display can be displayed more clearly. good.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (A), an LED is mounted on the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. The back-back-upper first decorative substrate and the back-back-upper second decorative part provided on the back side of the back-back-upper first decorative part 3211 and in which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row. The back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 including the back rear upper second decorative board on which the LED that emits and decorates the 3212 is mounted, and the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the five 7-segment display part of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back rear upper It is formed to have a predetermined thickness (about 10 mm in this example) by an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like having no translucency except for a predetermined character of the second decorative portion 3212.

Further, as shown in FIG. 243 (B), a tubular penetrating portion corresponding to each segment is formed in the 7-segment display portion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211, and one or a plurality of tubular penetrating portions are formed in the penetrating portion. The surface on which the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate is mounted is partitioned so that the LEDs are arranged. Further, a tubular penetrating portion corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") is formed in the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212, and one or a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the penetrating portion. As such, the surface on which the plurality of LEDs of the second decorative substrate is mounted is partitioned.

Further, the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed so as to be divided into two front and rear decorative bodies, and the inside of one decorative body is brought into close contact with the surface on which a plurality of LEDs of the back-back upper first decorative substrate are mounted. With the inside of the other decorative body in close contact with the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the second decorative board are mounted, the decorative body divided into two front and rear parts is assembled (fixed) to the back and back. The upper movable decorative body 3210 is configured.

As a result, the light emitted from the LED arranged in the penetrating portion corresponding to each segment in the 7-segment display portion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is suppressed from leaking into the penetrating portion corresponding to the other segment. , Since it is possible to suppress the interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of segments of the 7-segment display unit, the information (characters, numbers, patterns) indicated by each of the plurality of segments of the 7-segment display unit of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back. , Etc.) can be easily identified individually. Further, since the light from the LED arranged in the penetrating portion can be radiated from each segment in the 7-segment display portion of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 without leaking to the outside of the penetrating portion, the amount of light in the penetrating portion. It is possible to suppress a decrease in (brightness).

Similarly, the light emitted from the LED arranged in the penetrating portion corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") of the second decorative portion 3212 on the back and back leaks into the penetrating portion corresponding to the other characters. It is possible to suppress the interference of the light emitted from each of the predetermined characters, so that it is possible to easily identify each of the predetermined characters of the second decorative portion 3212 on the back and back. Further, since the light from the LED arranged in the penetrating portion can be radiated from each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 without leaking to the outside of the penetrating portion. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) in the penetrating portion.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned structure of the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210, or separately from the above-mentioned structure of the back-back-up movable decoration body 3210 (without adopting the structure of the back-back-up upper movable decoration body 3210), the back The back-upper first decoration board on which the LED that emits and decorates the back-upper first decoration part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear-up movable decoration 3210 are lined up side by side and the predetermined characters (here) Then, on the surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the back-rear upper second decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 in which "JACKPOT") is arranged is mounted, and the surface on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is white. Instead of the solder resist (protective material) of the above, a dark color (black, purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) solder resist (protective material) having low reflection efficiency may be coated. In this case, the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. Although the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface of the back-back-upper second decorative substrate is reduced, the light from each through portion can emit light independently without interfering with each other. Characters, numbers, patterns, etc. indicated by the five 7-segment display units of the decoration unit 3211 and predetermined characters of the second decoration unit 3212 on the back and back can be clearly displayed, and these information can be displayed to the player. I can tell you exactly.

It should be noted that the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the back on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted. Even when the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board is coated with a dark solder resist (protective material), the back rear upper first decorative board on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is not mounted. The LED non-mounting surface of the back rear upper second decorative substrate and the LED non-mounting surface of the back rear upper second decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted are other than dark colors (for example, white or green). A solder resist (protective material) may be coated. Further, the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED for light emitting and decorating the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the back on which the LED for emitting and decorating the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted. A white solder resist (protective material) is coated only on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate and the inner region of the penetrating portion, or a white coating film is formed by silk printing or the like, and the outer region of the penetrating portion is formed. A dark-colored solder resist (protective material) may be coated on the substrate, or a dark-colored coating film may be formed by silk printing or the like. While suppressing interference, the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the penetrating part is reflected at a high rate to each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the back-back-up movable decoration 3210 and the back-back-up second decoration. Each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the part 3212 can be brightly luminescently decorated.

In addition, the back-back-up movable decoration corresponding to each segment of the five 7-segment display units of the back-back-up movable decoration body 3210 and the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the back-back-up second decoration part 3212. On the surface of the body 3210 (the part where the penetrating portion is formed), a translucent (white turbid frosted glass-like) film having translucency or a translucent translucent (red, etc. in this example). A cover body made of the above resin or the like may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that emits light and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 from being directly viewed, so that the player does not feel dazzling. can do. Further, by making the film or the cover body emit light from the surface, the light source is less noticeable when the LED that emits light and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the LED that emits light and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212. can do.

Further, the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED for emitting and decorating the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the back on which the LED for emitting and decorating the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted. The letters and symbols to avoid confusion between the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on the rear and the electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the second decorative board and other decorative boards are colors with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using the ink of. It should be noted that the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the back on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted. One or both of the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative substrate may be screen-printed on the LED mounting surface using an ink of a color having low brightness or saturation (for example, green). , Characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards are foil-free characters (that is, with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The surface of this foil-free character is coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Alternatively, the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) may be screen-printed with an ink of a predetermined color (including not only a color having high brightness and saturation but also a color having low brightness and saturation). Also in this case, the LED mounting surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the LED that emits and decorates the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. It is possible to suppress the interference of light with the LED mounting surface of the second decorative substrate on the back and back.

Further, the back rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED for emitting and decorating the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the back rear upper second on which the LED for emitting and decorating the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is mounted. The decorative substrate is firmly attached to the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 (at least a part of the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210, the back-back-upper first decorative board, or the back-back-upper second decorative board due to welding, etc.). It may be mounted in an irreversible mounting state that cannot be removed unless it is destroyed), whereby the LED mounting surfaces of the back-rear upper first decorative board and the back-rear upper second decorative board can be mounted on the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board and the back-rear upper second decorative board from being defective due to mischief or the like.

It should be noted that, among the plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group are mounted, an LED for emitting and decorating the 7-segment display unit on a part of any of the decorative boards. That is, when mounting a plurality of LEDs (dimming LED group) whose light amount can be adjusted and a plurality of LEDs (non-dimming LED group) whose light amount cannot be adjusted on one decorative substrate. May provide a decorative body on which the penetration portion is formed on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimming LED group. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is further enhanced.

As described above, information such as characters, numbers, and patterns is displayed on the back rear upper first decorative section 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative section 3212, and important information is displayed in the game production. It can play an important role such as. It should be noted that the control may be performed directly by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and in this case, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first on the back side based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Compared to the case of controlling the decorative unit 3211 and the second decorative unit 3212 on the back and back, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects (contents different from the originally displayed contents are displayed, etc.), and it does not give a disadvantage to the player or the like. Can be done.

Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit steady processing every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. The display contents of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative section 3212 can be updated, and if a problem occurs, the back rear upper first decorative section 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative section 3212 may be displayed. Even if the content different from the originally displayed content is displayed, the displayed content can be immediately updated (after 4 ms) to change to the original displayed content, which does not give a disadvantage to the player or the like. That is, the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 that display important information (highly important) are more than the light emitting decorations that do not display important information (less important). Since the control signal is output in a short cycle to update the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (LED), there is a problem with the display contents of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 that display important information. Even if a problem occurs, the display content can be changed to the normal display content immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by displaying the content different from the original content. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. A communication error may occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and problems may occur in the information shown by the back rear upper first decorative section 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative section 3212. In the example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the back-rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back-rear upper second decorative unit 3212, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has the back-rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the like. Compared to the case of controlling the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212, the information shown by the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 is less likely to cause a problem, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed from giving.

[Transformation example 1 of rainbow color production]
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned rainbow-colored effect will be described. In this example, the player can determine the jackpot expectation by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect. In the first modification, only the parts different from the above-described embodiment will be described, and no duplicate explanation will be given.

Specifically, when the rainbow-colored effect is executed as shown in FIG. 244, if the variable display with a high expectation of a big hit is being executed, such as the decorative pattern becoming reach after the rainbow-colored effect, the present invention is concerned. Even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at the timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect is continuously executed until the timing t100 without ending the rainbow color effect.

On the other hand, when the rainbow color effect is executed as shown in FIG. 245, the rainbow color effect is not being executed unless the variable display with high expectation of big hit is being executed, such as the decorative pattern does not reach after the rainbow color effect. When the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at the timing t6 during execution, the rainbow-colored effect being executed ends at the timing t6 when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. The effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined effect mode (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern), and various decorations provided on the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED on the substrate is controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (a part or all of the LED may be turned off).

As a result, it is possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when the rainbow color effect is executed, and the player presses the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow color effect is executed. The operation unit 303 can be directed to be positively pressed. Further, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow-colored effect is executed and determines that the jackpot expectation is high, the game interest is improved. Can be made to. It should be noted that the possibility of a big hit is not limited to the one that can determine the possibility of a big hit when the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300 is pressed, but the possibility of a big hit is determined by operating a predetermined operation means. It may be. For example, the one that makes it possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, the one that makes it possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when the volume control button 227 is pressed, and the light amount adjustment button 228. It may be something that makes it possible to determine the possibility of a big hit when the player is pressed.

It should be noted that after the running rainbow color effect is completed based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the effect display device 1600 has nothing to do with the rainbow color effect. The staging display may be executed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the rainbow-colored effect has ended, and can surely recognize that the jackpot expectation is low. Further, when the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect can be terminated according to the operation of the effect operation unit 300. Alternatively, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period during the execution of the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect is terminated. You may do it. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied after finishing the effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period). In this case, or when the non-variable effect period in which the variable effect is not executed becomes a predetermined predetermined period, the rainbow-colored effect may be restarted. As a result, the light emitting mode and the display mode of the rainbow-colored effect are imprinted on the player's mind, and when the rainbow-colored effect is executed in the variable effect to be executed thereafter, the variable effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It is possible to operate the staging operation unit 300 with the expectation that.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect in FIG. 245, it is provided on the LEDs and the door frame 3 of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. After finishing the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect on the LEDs of the various decorative substrates, the effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect is finished. Ends the effect display such as. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being suddenly switched on the effect display device 1600, and to switch the display content while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the rainbow-colored effect display mode.

Further, a predetermined sound may be output when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow color effect. In this case, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 may be output. After outputting a predetermined sound based on the pressing operation, the predetermined timing is higher than the timing at which the predetermined sound is output (the timing may be the same as or different from the timing at which the rainbow-colored light emission decoration is finished). Period (when a predetermined sound is output at the same timing as the timing when the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration is finished, the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration is for the same period as the predetermined period from the timing when the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration is finished. When a predetermined sound is output at a timing different from the timing at which the rainbow color effect is output, a period different from the predetermined period from the timing at which the rainbow-colored effect emission decoration is completed) You may end the effect display of. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the display content from being suddenly switched in the effect display device 1600, and to switch the display content while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the rainbow-colored effect display mode.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the various types provided on the door frame 3 are provided. After finishing the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect on the LED of the decorative board of the above, the rainbow color of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 again. You may want to start the light emitting decoration of the production. In this case, after the LED of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LED of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are finished with the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect, the effect display device 1600 is completed. Before ending the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode in the game board 5 (with the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600 continued), the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 again. You may start the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect in the LED and the LED of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is discouraged by judging that the expectation of a big hit is low due to the end of the rainbow-colored effect, and to pay attention to the rainbow-colored effect again.

Further, in addition to the above example, the jackpot expectation may be determined by changing the sound output mode during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect. For example, if the above-mentioned rainbow-colored effect is being executed and a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit is being executed, such as the decorative pattern becoming reach after the rainbow-colored effect, the mode corresponding to the rainbow-colored effect is executed. While the sound output is executed, if the rainbow color effect is executed and the variable display with high expectation of big hit is not being executed, such as the decorative pattern does not reach after the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect is applied. It is possible to execute the sound output of another aspect or not to execute the sound output without executing the sound output of one aspect. In this case as well, the jackpot expectation can be determined by the execution of the rainbow-colored effect and the mode of sound output, and when it is determined that the jackpot expectation is high, the game entertainment can be improved.

[Transformation example 2 of rainbow color production]
In the above-mentioned rainbow-colored effect, the one that does not involve the movement of the movable body is shown. The operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect may be performed. Hereinafter, it is shown as a modification 2. In the second modification, only the parts different from the above-described embodiment will be described, and no duplicate explanation will be given.

As shown in FIG. 246, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at the timing t2, or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not pressed, and the button valid period (for example, 5). When the rainbow color effect is started according to the elapse of (seconds) (timing t2), a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 belonging to the 4th board light emitting group have a predetermined light emitting color (in this example). After emitting light in blue), it is controlled to change the emission color every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow". "→" Green "→" Blue "→" Purple "→ ...).

Further, the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed by the player at the timing t2 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. When the rainbow-colored effect is started in response to the above, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 provided with the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 rises from the normal standby position as shown in FIG. Then, it rises in front of the staging display device 1600 (in this example, a part of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rises so as to overlap the front of the staging display device 1600. In this example, it rises near the center of the staging display device 1600, etc. The entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may be raised so as to overlap the front of the staging display device 1600)) and rotate about an axis in the front-rear direction.

As a result, during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the light emitting decoration by the LED and the operation by the movable body (back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168) are executed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is executed. Since a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for light emission decoration change the light emission color at predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), it is possible to perform a high-profile effect. Further, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is exposed in front of the staging display device 1600, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rotates in a state where the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 partially overlaps with the staging display device 1600. It can make you think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, when the rainbow-colored effect is finished (timing t99), the rotation of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 around the axis in the front-rear direction is stopped and the effect display device 1600 descends from the front to the normal standby position. Stop. In this example, the reach of the decorative pattern is generated in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position. In this way, by rotating the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 that appears in front of the staging display device 1600 while emitting light decoration, a part of the staging display device 1600 is covered and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is used. In order to attract attention, the player can be surprised when the decorative pattern reaches the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position, and the expectation for the big hit can be raised. ..

In addition, when an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the variation effect for executing the rainbow color effect as described above, a plurality of mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for emitting and decorating the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. Finish the rainbow-colored lighting decoration by the LED. As a result, the rainbow-colored effect is not performed in an incomplete form.

On the other hand, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 does not stop the operation even if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, and performs the same operation as in the state where the abnormal state has not occurred. .. In addition, even if an abnormal state occurs before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the operation is performed at the timing when the original rainbow color effect is started in the same manner as in the state where the abnormal state does not occur. It has become. That is, if the light emission control of the rainbow color effect cannot be realized in the perfect form as designed, the light emission decoration by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is stopped or executed, but the rainbow color is used. The operation that does not affect the light emitting decoration of the production is executed as planned (as designed) without stopping. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable effect has ended due to the cancellation of the rainbow-colored effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247, when an abnormality occurs at the timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 that emits and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. The light emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect by the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 including the plurality of LEDs is terminated and controlled to the extinguished state. Then, even if the door frame 3 is closed during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect and the abnormality is resolved, the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect is not restored (the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect is not restarted). There is.

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at the timing t6 in which the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect (timing t6), the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 Is not stopped, and the operation linked to the predetermined rainbow-colored effect is continuously executed (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the back-front lower-middle decorative body 3161 is continued to operate while ending the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow-colored effect. It is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is continuing by continuing the movement of, and it is possible to prevent anxiety.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow color effect and the abnormal state is restored to the normal state, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is light-emittingly decorated. The rainbow-colored lighting decoration by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is not resumed. That is, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect in the variable effect for executing the rainbow-colored effect, and the abnormality is resolved and the abnormal state is restored to the normal state before the rainbow-colored effect is completed, the back side is displayed. The front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect in a light-off state in which the light emitting decoration is not performed. As a result, when the rainbow-colored effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an abnormal state occurs in the variable effect that executes the rainbow-colored effect depending on whether or not the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is light-emitting decorated. It is possible to determine what has been done, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts and the like.

It should be noted that, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may be different, for example, as described above. For errors that have a small effect on the game, continue the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the back front, lower, middle, and middle decorations 3161, or execute the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect as scheduled (operate at the timing set in the scheduler). On the other hand, for errors that have a significant effect on the game, the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is stopped (after the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect is stopped, it is returned to the normal standby position. By controlling so that the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect scheduled in advance (set in the scheduler) is not performed, the variable effect can be stopped even during the execution of the variable effect. The variation effect may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, the operating state of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 can be changed according to the degree of error, and it becomes possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to eliminate the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be different, and the influence on the above-mentioned game is small, for example. Regarding the error, the warning display (for example, "door is open" etc.) is displayed so that a part of the rainbow color effect display mode is overlapped with the rainbow color effect display mode without losing the display of the rainbow color effect display mode in the effect display device 1600. For errors that have a significant effect on Even if there is, the display of the rainbow-colored effect (rainbow-colored effect display mode) may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, the display mode of the staging display device 1600 can be changed according to the degree of error, and it becomes possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, as shown in the first modification of the rainbow-colored effect, when a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit is executed, such as a decorative pattern reaching after the rainbow-colored effect, be sure or at a predetermined ratio. Back front lower middle The decorative body 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, and if the variable display with high expectation of big hits such as the decorative pattern does not reach after the rainbow color effect is not executed, the back front The lower middle decorative body 3161 may not be operated in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect. As a result, if the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, the expectation for a big hit can be improved, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect. Even if it is not done, there is a possibility that the variable display with high expectation of big hit is executed, so that the expectation for big hit can be not lost.

Further, although the above-described embodiments (all embodiments including the first and second modifications) show those related to the rainbow-colored effect, the present technical idea can be applied to the effects other than the rainbow-colored effect. For example, in the second modification, it is applicable not only to the case where the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect, but also to the case where the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operated in conjunction with another effect.

[Golden production]
Next, the golden effect will be described. The golden effect of this example is a gold color that displays a part or all of the characters, characters, patterns, etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600 in gold color or a color close to gold color (color similar to gold color (yellow in this example)). In addition to displaying, part or all of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are displayed in gold or a color close to gold (in gold) in conjunction with the gold display of the effect display device 1600. It emits gold in a similar color (yellow in this example)), and there is a high probability that it will be a big hit when the golden effect is executed (for example, when it becomes a big hit (big hit confirmed effect) or a big hit. It suggests that when the probability of becoming a big hit is high (big hit notice), when the decorative symbol becomes reach (reach notice), it is executed as a reach effect after the reach occurs and it is suggested that the probability of becoming a big hit is high). be.

It should be noted that the jackpot may be set to be a big hit (the expectation of the jackpot is 100%) when the golden effect is executed, or the jackpot is executed in both the case where the jackpot is achieved and the case where the jackpot is not achieved. Expectations may be the second highest (for example, a big hit than a golden effect such as a rainbow-colored effect or an effect that displays a background / character with an unusual giraffe pattern, zebra pattern, ladybug pattern, etc.) One production with a high expectation (for example, a jackpot expectation of 80 to 100%) may be included (the jackpot expectation of a golden effect may be, for example, 60%)). That is, as a plurality of effects according to the jackpot expectation, a staging with a lower jackpot expectation than the golden staging may be included, and a staging with a higher jackpot expectation than the golden staging may be included, or a golden staging. It may not include a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the production. As described above, the golden effect is an effect according to a high expectation of a big hit, and when the golden effect is executed, the player can expect to be a big hit.

In the following, as the golden effect, the golden display in the effect display device 1600, the golden light emission by the LED of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the golden color by the LED of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. The light emission and all of them are linked, but the golden display in the effect display device 1600, the golden light emission by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the various types provided on the game board 5. It may execute any one or any combination of the golden light emission by the LED of the decorative substrate of the above.

For example, as shown in FIG. 248, when a variation pattern command for instructing the start of a variation effect (in this example, a variation effect for executing a golden effect) such as a variation display of a decorative symbol is received from the main control board 1310 (FIG. 248). (A)), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is started to display the decorative symbol semi-transparently, and the treasure box is displayed as a character on the staging display device 1600 at a predetermined advance notice timing, and characters (this example). Then, "Treasure chest found!") Is displayed (Fig. 248 (B)). At this time, the decorative design is displayed in the upper layer (upper layer) of these characters and characters, but the characters and characters are displayed opaquely, whereas the decorative design is displayed semi-transparently and fluctuates at high speed. It does not interfere with the visibility of characters and characters.

Then, the mode of opening the treasure box based on the elapse of a predetermined period after displaying the treasure box on the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 248 (C)). At this time, the effect display device 1600 displays a mode in which golden light (light of a color similar to gold) is emitted from the treasure box (gold display), and various types provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are displayed. Among the LEDs on the decorative substrate, the LEDs arranged in the area corresponding to the light emitted from the treasure box displayed on the effect display device 1600 are made to emit light in a color similar to gold (gold emission). In this example, the upper lid of the treasure box displayed on the effect display device 1600 is gradually rotated to display a mode in which the amount of light leaking from the treasure box is changed according to the degree of opening of the treasure box, and the door frame 3 and the game are displayed. Among the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the board 5, the LEDs arranged in the area corresponding to the light leaking from the treasure box are made to emit light in a color similar to gold (gold emission). In FIG. 248 (C), the LEDs arranged above the upper plate 201 in synchronization with the rotation of the upper lid of the treasure box (not only all the LEDs arranged above the upper plate 201 but also the upper plate 201). For some LEDs (for example, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decoration 3210 are lined up side by side) among the plurality of LEDs arranged above emit light. Of the LEDs (LEDs mounted on the first decorative substrate on the back and back), which do not emit golden light), the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 gradually resemble gold from below. After that, depending on the degree of rotation of the top lid of the treasure box, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the door frame top unit 450 are similar to gold in this order. Make it emit light in the color you want.

In FIG. 248 (C), the golden display and the golden emission are executed in conjunction with the operation of opening the treasure box, and the light leaking from the treasure box (light emitted) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is outside the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to give the impression that it gradually spreads, the relationship between the golden display of the effect display device 1600 and the golden light emission by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Even if the color displayed on the effect display device 1600 by the golden display and the emission color of the LED by the golden emission are similar but not the same color, the golden display and the golden emission can be easily recognized. It can be recognized as representing the same color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (D), the gold nugget is taken out from the treasure box displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light is reflected on the surface of the gold nugget, and the gold light (light of a color similar to gold) is emitted from the gold nugget. ) Is released (golden display). In addition, LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 arranged around the effect display device 1600 in response to the golden light emitted from the gold ingot that displays the gold ingot on the effect display device 1600. Is emitted in a color similar to gold (gold emission). In FIG. 248 (D), in addition to the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142, and the door frame top unit 450. The LEDs provided on the peripheral edge and the outer peripheral surface of the upper surface of the button body 351 arranged below the upper plate 201, the unit upper cover 312, the plate left decorative body 271, the plate right decorative body 276, and the front lens of the handle 185 ( Not limited to all the LEDs arranged below the upper plate 201, some of the multiple LEDs arranged below the upper plate 201 (for example, the handle decorative substrate 184 for causing the front lens 185 of the handle to emit light). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the above) may be those that do not emit gold light), and emit light in a color similar to gold.

The light guide plate 3110 may be further emitted in gold as the above-mentioned golden emission. For example, in FIG. 248 (C), the golden display and the golden emission are executed in conjunction with the operation of opening the treasure box, and FIG. 248 (D) is shown. When displaying to take out the gold ingot from the treasure box, for example, the LED 3128g for a plurality of light guide plates of the back front left decorative board 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right first decorative board in the back front right decoration unit 3140. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs of 3148, the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are made to emit light to make the first pattern 3111 gold or a color close to gold (similar to gold). It may be made to emit light by color (yellow in this example). As a result, in addition to the lateral spread of the golden display of the staging display device 1600 and the golden light emission of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the staging display device 1600 is arranged in front of the staging display device 1600. It becomes possible to display the spread in the front-rear direction by the light guide plate 3110, and it is possible to improve the effect of the golden effect.

When the golden effect is executed in this way, the golden display in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 emit gold light ( Only one of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may emit gold light). The relationship between the golden display in the effect display device 1600 and the golden light emission by the LED can be immediately recognized, and a unified effect can be executed in the entire pachinko machine 1. Further, as described above, since the golden effect is highly likely to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big hit by executing the golden effect on the entire pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

After displaying the treasure box in FIG. 248 (B), the treasure box is displayed based on the player's operation (when the contact operation unit 302 of the staging operation unit 301 is rotated or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed). The opened mode may be displayed, and in this case, the mode in which the treasure box is opened may not be displayed unless the player operates it, or the operation valid period has elapsed even if the player does not operate it. Occasionally, the mode in which the treasure box is opened may be displayed. That is, after displaying the treasure box, the golden effect may be started according to the operation of the player, the golden effect may not be executed unless the player operates it, or the player does not operate it. Even in this case, the golden effect may be started when the operation valid period has elapsed.

Further, in this example, the player can determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit by operating an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the golden effect is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), when a golden effect is executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as a decorative pattern reaching, the golden effect is being executed. Even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at the timing t3 of, the golden effect is continuously executed until the timing t4 without ending the golden effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), when the golden effect is not executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as the decorative pattern reaching, the effect operation is performed at the timing t3 during the execution of the golden effect. When the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 300 is pressed, the golden effect is terminated at the timing t3 when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, and the effect display device 1600 has a predetermined effect mode (for example). A variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.) is displayed, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are emitted in a predetermined light emitting mode (white in this example). It is designed to emit light, but it may be partially or wholly turned off) to control the light emission.

As a result, it is possible to determine the possibility of a big hit by operating the effect operation unit 300 when the golden effect is executed, and the player can determine the possibility of a big hit during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the golden effect is executed. Can be directed to positively press the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Further, when the player operates an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the golden effect is executed and determines that the jackpot expectation is high, the game entertainment can be improved. can. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the one that can determine the possibility of a big hit depending on whether the golden effect is terminated or continued when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. When a specific operation unit (for example, contact operation unit 302, volume control button 227, light amount adjustment button 228, handle 195, etc.) is operated among a plurality of operation units, the above golden effect is completed or continued. It may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of becoming. For example, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether the golden effect ends or continues, or when the volume control button 227 is pressed. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether the golden effect is terminated or continued, and whether the golden effect is terminated or continued when the light amount adjustment button 228 is pressed. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit according to the above, and it is possible to make a big hit depending on whether the above golden effect ends or continues when the handle 195 is rotated and the game ball is hit. It may be something that can determine the presence or absence of sex.

Further, the detection is not limited to the one that can determine the possibility of a big hit depending on whether the above-mentioned golden effect ends or continues when the above-mentioned specific operation unit is operated, and a plurality of detections provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. When the detection is performed by the specific detection means (for example, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.), the big hit depends on whether the golden effect is terminated or continued. It may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of becoming. For example, when a game ball entering the starting port (first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004) is detected by the starting port sensor (first starting port sensor 3002 and second starting port sensor 2401), the above-mentioned golden effect is produced. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether it ends or continues, and when the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the palm, fingers, etc. are touching, the above golden effect ends. Or it may be something that makes it possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether it continues. Also in this case, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so that the detection by the specific detection means is performed during the period from the timing t2 to the timing t4 in which the golden effect is executed. Further, when the detection by the specific detection means is performed during the period from the timing t2 to the timing t4 in which the golden effect is executed and it is determined that the big hit expectation is high, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, after the golden effect is terminated based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the golden effect, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect information unrelated to the golden effect. You may. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the golden effect has been completed and to understand that the expectation of a big hit is low and that there is no possibility of a big hit. Further, when the effect information unrelated to the golden effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the golden effect is terminated based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, the effect is irrelevant to the golden effect. The display of the effect information of the above may be terminated according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, or during a predetermined period during the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect. When the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated, the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect may be terminated. Further, after the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is finished, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, an operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or the like over a predetermined period). When the unit is not operated, or when the non-variable effect period in which the variable effect is not executed becomes a predetermined predetermined period, etc.), the golden effect may be restarted. As a result, it is expected that the light emitting mode and the display mode of the golden effect are imprinted in the player's mind, and when the golden effect is executed in the variable effect to be executed thereafter, the variable effect with a high expectation of big hit is executed. It is possible to operate an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 by holding the button. Further, the golden color is provided on condition that the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated for a predetermined period during the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When it is configured to end the display of the effect information unrelated to the effect, the predetermined period is reset based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 before the predetermined period elapses ( You may reset the predetermined period and measure from 0 again). In this case, by repeatedly setting a predetermined period in which the display of the effect information unrelated to the golden effect can be executed and operating the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 within the predetermined period, the process is repeated. It is possible to delay the resumption time of the golden effect or prevent the golden effect from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the golden effect from being performed for the player who does not want to perform the golden effect, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in FIG. 249 (B), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 is pressed while the golden effect is being executed, the LEDs and door frames 3 of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are pressed. After finishing the light emitting decoration of the golden effect on the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided in the above, the golden effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 and the like at a timing delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when the light emitting decoration of the golden effect is finished. Ends the effect display of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being suddenly switched on the effect display device 1600, and to switch the display content while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the golden effect display mode.

Further, a predetermined sound may be output when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the golden effect. In this case, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 presses. After outputting the predetermined sound based on the operation, the predetermined period (the timing may be the same as or different from the timing when the light emission decoration of the golden effect is finished) is longer than the timing when the predetermined sound is output. When the predetermined sound is output at the same timing as the timing when the light emitting decoration is finished, the predetermined period is the same as the predetermined period from the timing when the light emitting decoration of the golden effect is finished, and the timing is different from the timing when the light emitting decoration of the golden effect is finished. When the sound is output, the effect display such as the golden effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be ended at a timing delayed (a period different from the predetermined period from the timing when the light emitting decoration of the golden effect is finished). In this case as well, it is necessary to prevent the display contents of the effect display device 1600 from being suddenly switched when a predetermined sound is output, and to switch the display contents while leaving the afterglow of the effect display such as the golden effect display mode. Can be done.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the golden effect, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the various types provided on the door frame 3 are provided. After finishing the light emission of the golden effect on the LED of the decorative board, the LED of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LED of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light of the golden effect again. You may want to start decorating. In this case, after finishing the light emitting decoration of the golden effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600 is used. Before the effect display such as the golden effect display mode is finished (with the effect display such as the golden effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 continued), the LEDs and doors of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 again. The light emitting decoration of the golden effect in the LED of various decorative substrates provided in the frame 3 may be started. As a result, the player who is disappointed to understand that the expectation of a big hit is low and there is no possibility of a big hit due to the end of the luminous decoration of the golden effect is improved, and attention is paid to the golden effect again. Can be made to.

Further, in addition to the above example, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit by changing the sound output mode during the execution of the golden effect. For example, if the golden effect is executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such that the decorative pattern becomes reach, the sound output in the mode corresponding to the golden effect is executed, while the decorative pattern becomes reach, etc. If the golden effect is not executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit, the sound output of another aspect is not executed or the sound output is not executed without executing the sound output of the aspect corresponding to the golden effect. You may do it. In this case as well, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the execution of the golden effect and the mode of sound output, and if it is determined that the big hit expectation is high, the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, prior to the golden effect, the LED that emits light and decorates the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side is controlled to emit light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 249A and 249, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 at timing t0 and decorates the effect display device 1600. During the period of timing t1 after starting the variation effect such as the variation display of the pattern, the back rear upper first decoration section 3211 in which the five 7-segment display sections of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up side by side is turned off. When the timing t1 before the control and the start of the golden effect is reached, the five 7-segment display units of the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side prior to the golden effect. The 3211 is controlled to emit red light, and when the timing t2 is reached, the golden effect is started. As the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, which is performed prior to the golden effect, for example, the start timing of the golden effect is counted down or blinked to display a predetermined light emission mode (a big hit). It may be stopped at a numerical value indicating the probability, etc.). Further, a dot matrix display unit may be provided as the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back, and in this case, a predetermined character (hot! Etc.) may be displayed as a display performed prior to the golden effect. A predetermined character may be moved and displayed so as to repeatedly flow from the right to the left of the dot matrix display unit.

Further, the light emission control of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 in red is continuously performed even after the end of the golden effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit in the reach effect or the like that is executed after the golden effect is completed. In this way, the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is light-emitting controlled prior to the golden effect, and the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is continuously light-emitting controlled even after the golden effect is completed. It is possible to raise expectations for the start of the golden effect by controlling the light emission of the first decorative part 3211 on the back and upper side, and to raise expectations for the big hit by controlling the light emission of the first decorative part 3211 on the back and upper side even after the golden effect is completed. be able to.

It should be noted that the light emission control of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back may be started at least prior to the golden effect and may be continuously performed even after the golden effect is completed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It may be started at any timing between the timing t0 to start the golden effect (including the one that starts the light emission control at the timing t0), or the decorative symbol may be started from the timing t4 to end the golden effect. The variation display of the above may be terminated at any timing between the timing t5 (including the one that stops the light emission control at the timing t5). Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the light emitting state of the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and back. Further, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (timing t5), if the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again before the predetermined period elapses, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is controlled to be turned off. It may be possible to continuously control the light emitting state without doing so. In this case, it can be determined from the light emitting state of the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and back that the variable display of the decorative design is continuously performed. Further, when the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is blinked or moved, after the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is blinked or moved at the timing t1 preceding the golden effect, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is blinked or moved. When the blinking display or movement display is stopped at any timing of the timing t5 (including the timing t5) at which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped from the timing t2 after the start of the golden effect, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again. The display content of the first decorative unit 3211 on the back and back may be updated to restart the blinking display and the moving display (timing t0). Even in this case, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of the variable display of the decorative symbol depending on the presence / absence of the blinking display or the moving display in the back-back upper first decorative unit 3211.

As described above, in this example, a high-expected golden effect having a high probability of becoming a big hit or a possibility of becoming a big hit and a low-expected golden effect having a low probability of becoming a big hit or a possibility of becoming a big hit are executed. It has become like. As described above, the golden effect is not limited to the one in which both the golden display and the golden emission are executed in conjunction with each other, and may be one in which only one of the golden display and the golden emission is executed. When one of the golden display and the golden emission is executed as the high-expected golden effect, even if the operation of the operation unit by the player is detected during the execution of the high-expected golden effect, the high-expected golden effect is executed. When the production is continuously executed (the gold display and the gold emission, which were executed before the player operates, etc., are continued even after the operation), while the low expectation gold production is executed. Terminates the operation of the operation unit by the player during the execution of the low expectation gold effect, and ends the low expectation gold effect (the gold display and the golden emission are executed before the player operates. You may end it). With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation unit and the like, and to actively participate in the game, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

Further, during the execution of the high-expected golden effect and the low-expected golden effect, the effect sound of the mode corresponding to the golden effect is output. Then, when the operation unit or the like is operated during the execution of the low-expected gold effect, the low-expected gold effect is terminated and the output of the effect sound is terminated. On the other hand, even if the operation unit or the like is operated during the execution of the high-expected golden effect, the high-expected golden effect is not ended. Therefore, the output of the effect sound should be continued until the high-expected golden effect is completed. It has become. It should be noted that at least a part of the mode of the staging sound output during the execution of the high expectation golden effect and the mode of the staging sound output during the execution of the low expectation golden staging are made different. Often (for example, in the high expectation golden production, the production sound of the specific golden sound mode is output, and in the low expectation golden production, the non-specific golden sound mode different from the specific golden sound mode (only a part of the specific golden sound mode is different). It may be similar as a whole, or it may be completely different from the specific golden sound mode). In the production, the production sound may not be output. In this case, it is possible to determine whether the high-expected golden effect is executed or the low-expected golden effect is executed depending on the mode of the effect sound. Although there is a property, it is surely determined whether the high-expected golden effect is executed or the low-expected golden effect is executed depending on whether the golden effect is terminated or continued when the operation unit or the like is operated. You will be able to do it.

It should be noted that, based on the detection of the player's operation, it is determined whether either the high-expected golden effect or the low-expected golden effect is executed depending on whether or not the specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It may be possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 250, when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of the low expectation golden effect (FIG. 250 (B)), it is specified for a certain period (for example, 5 seconds). While the image information 1600a is displayed (FIG. 250 (D)), the specific image information 1600a may not be displayed when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of the high-expected golden effect. .. With this configuration, it becomes possible to determine whether the low-expected golden effect is executed or the high-expected golden effect is executed depending on whether or not the specific image information 1600a is displayed. , It is possible to encourage the player's operation and actively participate in the game to prevent the deterioration of the game's interest.

Further, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again while the specific image information 1600a is being displayed, the specific image information 1600a may be reset for a certain period of time (specific image information 16000a). You may reset the display period and measure from 0 again). For example, when the specific image information 1600a is displayed for 5 seconds based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, the specific image information 1600a is displayed within the display period of the specific image information 1600a (the specific image information 1600a is displayed). If the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again within 5 seconds after the operation, the specific image information 1600a is displayed for 5 seconds from the timing when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again. By doing so, the display period of the specific image information 1600a may be extended. This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing the specific image information 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, even when the display period of the specific image information 1600a does not reach the above-mentioned fixed period (for example, 5 seconds), when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, either the starting port (first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004)). ) When the game ball enters or when the above-mentioned abnormal state occurs), the display of the specific image information 1600a may be terminated. In this case, the display of the specific image information 1600a is constant as described above. It becomes possible to grasp that the predetermined condition has been satisfied because the process was completed before the period was reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250 (D), the specific image information 1600a can be displayed until the above-mentioned fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses even after the end of the low-expected golden effect. As a result, the specific image information 1600a can be displayed even when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated just before the end of the low-expected golden effect, so that the specific image information 1600a is displayed. In other words, it will be possible to make the player surely recognize that the low-expected golden effect was executed.

Further, in the above example, the specific image information 1600a is displayed when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of the low expectation gold color effect. The specific image information 1600a may be changed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. For example, the character is displayed as the specific image information 1600a on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the low expectation gold effect (FIG. 250 (B)). After that, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is further operated, the character as the specific image information 1600a is changed to a mode in which the character expands (becomes thicker) (FIG. 250 (C)), and the pressing operation unit 303 and the like are changed. The character's body shape as the specific image information 1600a is gradually changed in stages (for example, the minimum is body shape 1 and the maximum is 6 stages of body shape 6) according to the operation of the operation unit of FIG. D)) may be done. In this way, not only whether or not the specific image information 1600a is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, but also the specific image information 1600a is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. It may be changed step by step. As a result, in addition to being able to reliably notice that the specific image information 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the low expectation gold effect, it is recognized that the low expectation gold effect is being executed. Even in such a case, the discouragement can be alleviated by the change of the character as the specific image information 1600a.

Further, when any one of the plurality of operation units is operated, the character as the specific image information 1600a may be displayed. In this case, the first operation unit among the plurality of operation units is operated. Based on this, the character as the specific image information 1600a is changed to a swelling mode (fat) (FIG. 250 (C)), and the specific image is based on the operation of the second operation unit among the plurality of operation units. The character as information 1600a may be changed to a mode of shrinking (thinning) (FIG. 250 (C)). As a result, in addition to being able to reliably notice that the specific image information 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the low expectation gold effect, it is recognized that the low expectation gold effect is being executed. Even in such a case, the discouragement can be alleviated by the change of the character as the specific image information 1600a. Further, by operating one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit among the plurality of operation units, the body shape of the character as the specific image information 1600a changes to the maximum value (body type 6) or the minimum value (body type 1). Even so, by operating the other of the first operation unit and the second operation unit among the plurality of operation units, the body shape of the character as the specific image information 1600a can be changed from the maximum value (body type 6) to the minimum value (body type 1). It can be further changed toward, or can be further changed from the minimum value (body type 1) to the maximum value (body type 6).

Further, when the variable display for executing the high-expected golden effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the specific image information is based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 even before the execution of the high-expected golden effect. 1600a may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player for the big hit and pay attention to the high-expected golden effect even before the execution of the high-expected golden effect, and the game entertainment is improved.

Further, when the low-expected golden effect is executed, a specific sound (for example, a "pip" output when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, etc. Electronic sound and sound according to the operation of the specific image information 1600a (for example, a sound such as "beep" according to a change in the specific image information 1600a becoming fat or thin in FIGS. 250 (B) to 250 (D))) May be output. As a result, when the low-expected golden effect is executed, it is possible to output a specific sound in relation to the display of the specific image information 1600a and make the player notice the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a. Can alleviate discouragement. Further, even when the high-expected golden effect is executed, the above-mentioned specific sound may be output according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. In this case, the pressing operation unit 303 or the like may be output. Although the specific image information 1600a is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the operation unit of the operation unit is operated, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or the like is performed by outputting a specific sound according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation of the unit is surely accepted, and it is possible to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that the high-expected golden effect is being executed.

Further, for the operation of a specific sound (for example, an electronic sound such as a "pip" output when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or the specific image information 1600a is operated in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. When the corresponding sound (for example, the sound such as "beep" depending on the change in which the specific image information 1600a becomes fat or thin in FIGS. 250 (B) to 250 (D)) is output, the specific image information 1600a is output. The specific sound may be output prior to the change in the display of the above, and then the display of the specific image information 1600a displayed in the effect display measure 1600 may be changed. With this configuration, the display of the specific image information 1600a can be changed by notifying the player that the display of the specific image information 1600a is changed by a specific sound and making the player recognize it in advance, and the display of the specific image information 1600a can be changed. It is possible not to overlook the change in the display of the information 1600a.

Further, when the low-expected golden effect is executed, the above-mentioned golden light emission can be executed among the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 according to the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. The light emission mode of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate may be changed (for example, change of light emission color, change of light emission pattern (blinking interval, etc.), change of brightness, etc.). Also in this case, when the low-expected golden effect is executed, the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the specific decorative substrate is changed in relation to the display of the specific image information 1600a, so that the specific image information 1600a is displayed. It is possible to notice the change in the player and alleviate the discouragement of the player. Also in this case, the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the specific decorative substrate is changed prior to the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a (for example, the light emission color is changed, the light emission pattern (blinking interval, etc.) is changed, and the brightness is changed. You may change it). With this configuration, the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a is notified by changing the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the specific decorative substrate, and the player is made to recognize the specific image information 1600a in advance. It is possible to change the display of the specific image information 1600a so as not to overlook the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a.

Further, when the specific image information 1600a is displayed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the low expectation gold effect, the execution is performed based on the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. The specific image information 1600a may be displayed after the low expected golden effect of the medium is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the low-expected gold effect was executed not only by displaying the specific image information 1600a but also by the end of the low-expected gold effect, and the expectation of a big hit is low. It is possible to prevent the expected golden effect from being executed endlessly and deteriorating the game interest.

Further, in the above example, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of the high expectation golden effect, the specific image information 1600a is not displayed, but the variable display for performing the high expectation golden effect is performed. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 even during the execution of (when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 by opening the door frame 3). When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LED), when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (acts such as hitting the pachinko machine 1) are performed. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 vibrates, the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 are blurred and difficult to visually recognize. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball), the ball out detection sensor 574 is used. When a minor error occurs, such as when a detection signal is input (an error that is unlikely that a goto action is being performed, such as when it is detected that a game ball does not exist in the guidance passage 570a). When a radio wave irradiation goto is detected (when noise is contained in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 due to electromagnetic waves or the like, or when the display of the effect display device 1600 contains noise). , When the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is input when the second starting port 2004 is not open, the big winning opening is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When a serious error such as (an error with a high possibility that a goto action is being performed) such as when a detection signal from the sensor 2402 is input occurs, or when a specific condition such as) is satisfied, a specific image is displayed. The information 1600a may be displayed, or after the specific image information 1600a is displayed, the display mode of the specific image information 1600a may be changed based on the operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. You may. With this configuration, even in a situation where it is difficult to hear the specific sound, the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is reliably accepted due to the display of the specific image information 1600a or the change in the display mode of the specific image information 1600a. It becomes possible to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that the high-expected golden effect is being executed.

Here, the metallic luster such as gold cannot be displayed in gold by the display element alone (only one display element) in the display device such as the staging display device 1600. Therefore, in this example, the gold color is expressed by displaying the effect-processed image of yellow, which is a color close to gold color, on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), in this example, when the effect display device 1600 performs a golden display indicating a metallic luster such as gold by graphic processing, yellow characters, characters, patterns, etc. are displayed. The brightness and darkness are displayed in different steps (gradation), and the glitter such as star-shaped, diamond-shaped, and radial (the part that expresses luster and is lighter in color than the surroundings (white part)) is displayed, and the shadow is displayed. By displaying (blackish shadow) or the like, the luster of the metal can be expressed, and it can be recognized that the gold color is displayed only by the gold color display of the effect display device 1600. There is.

Similarly, even in a light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, gold cannot be reproduced by a single light emitting element (only one light emitting element). It is designed to be expressed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), although a plurality of LEDs emit a common yellow color, each predetermined number of LEDs emits yellow light in a stepwise difference in brightness (gradation), or all of the plurality of LEDs. Some LEDs emit white light to express brilliance without emitting light in a common color (yellow), and LEDs placed on the extension of the radial brilliance displayed on the effect display device 1600 are close to gold. You can make it emit light with a light emitting color such as yellow and turn off the others, or increase the light emission color of the LED placed on the extension of the radial glow displayed on the effect display device 1600 (bright such as light yellow). (Yellow) It emits light, but the LED that is not placed on the extension of the radial glow is made to emit light by lowering the brightness (dark yellow such as blackish yellow) to express the luster of metal or to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to recognize that the golden light is emitted in connection with the golden display. Further, in addition to these, or in place of these, the surface mounting surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted is lens-cut (those having a multi-faceted shape) (a lens member or the like, an outer member and an inner member). A double lens member or the like composed of two members may be used, or in this case, the degree of lens cut (number of surfaces, size, etc.) of the outer member and the inner member may be different. By using a lens member or a double lens with a different degree of lens cut, the refraction of light becomes irregular and the feeling of glitter can be improved.) By covering with a different degree of refraction of light. Diffusing the light from the LED or creating a glittering feeling by creating a high-brightness area where the light is collected and a low-brightness area where the light is avoided to express the luster of gold or metal. It is also possible to recognize that golden light is emitted by arranging such a lens-cut member, and the lens-cut member deteriorates the visibility behind the member. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting surface of the board, the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface, the surface side notation, etc., and the information unrelated to these games is visually recognized, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. Can be deterred. Further, the boundary portion between one surface and the other surface of the lens-cut member may be arranged so as to overlap the surface side notation portion, whereby the image visually recognized through the lens-cut member may be arranged. Can be distorted, and the notation on the front side becomes difficult to see. Further, in this example, in conjunction with the golden display in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit gold light, thereby producing the golden display and the golden light emission. By creating a synergistic effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the gold display or light emission is performed at a high rate.

Further, as described above, in this example, among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, the specific decorative board capable of executing golden light emission, that is, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 is light-emitting decoration. The back front upper left decorative board 3129, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 for emitting and decorating the back front left decorative board 3128, and the back. The back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for luminescent decoration of the front lower logo decoration body 3167, the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, and the back front lower left inner decoration body. The back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for light-emitting decoration of 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for light-emitting decoration of the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, and the back front lower right inner decorative board 3165. The back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for luminescent decoration, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the back front right logo decoration part 3141 are luminescently decorated. The five 7-segment display units of the back front upper right decorative board 3152 for the back front upper right decorative board 3152, the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for making the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 light-emitting decoration, and the back back upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged side by side. The back rear upper first decorative substrate (not shown) on which the LED for light-emitting decoration of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is mounted, and the front surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are mounted on the back rear upper first decorative substrate (not shown). , White solder resist (protective material) is coated.

Further, among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, the specific decorative board capable of executing the above-mentioned golden light emission, that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450 and the door. The frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side lower decorative board 423. , The dish left decorative board 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the dish right decoration provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277. The surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the substrate 278, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430, and the like. To.

In the specific decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, the white solder resist (protective material) coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted has electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the white solder resist (protective material). Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as characters and symbols (component numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with components and other decorative boards, and areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed (further, the shape of surface-side electronic components). , The size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included.) , Yellow, yellowish green, etc.) ink is used for screen printing. In other words, among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, the LED mounting surface of the specific decorative board has a white solder resist (protection), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. Materials) are coated, and characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards, areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are placed, etc. The attributes of the surface-side electronic component (further, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included). The surface-side notation portion shown is screen-printed using ink of a color having high lightness and saturation (for example, a light color such as yellow or yellowish green).

As described above, in the golden effect, the LED mounted on these specific decorative substrates is subjected to the same yellow effect processing as the surface side notation portion to emit golden light. A white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface of the specific decorative substrate, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate are made to emit light in the same color as the surface side notation formed on the LED mounting surface. Therefore, not only the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be improved, but also the light emitted from these a plurality of LEDs can be suppressed from being attenuated by the surface side notation portion, so that the golden light emission can be clearly executed with high brightness. By forming the surface side notation part using white and yellow, which has similar reflection efficiency, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be made almost uniform, and the light emitted from the LED can be converted to a specific decorative substrate. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of uneven illuminance by uniformly reflecting on the LED mounting surface of the above, and to enhance the effect of the golden effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, among the specific decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, the decorative boards other than the back-back-up first decorative board in which the five 7-segment display units of the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. Is equipped with a full-color LED, and when the above-mentioned golden effect is executed, it emits golden light. On the other hand, among the specific decorative boards, only the single-color light emitting (red in this example) LED is mounted on the first decorative board (not shown) on the back rear upper, and even when the golden effect is executed, the back rear upper In the five 7-segment display units of the movable decorative body 3210, characters, numbers, patterns, etc. are displayed in the same emission color as when the golden effect is not executed without emitting gold. Therefore, an effect different from the golden effect is executed. In other words, in the five 7-segment display units of the back-back upper movable decoration body 3210 that displays characters, numbers, patterns, etc., the characters, numbers, and patterns that are displayed by not changing the emission color even if the golden effect is executed. Information such as, etc. is displayed in a state that is easy for the player to see, and it is suppressed that erroneous information is transmitted to the player. It should be noted that during the execution of the golden effect, the monochromatic light emitting LED mounted on the first decorative board on the back and back of the specific decorative board may not be controlled to emit light. In this case, the game board 5 or the door frame 3 may be used. Of the specific decorative boards provided in the above, the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative boards other than the first decorative board on the back and back are controlled to emit light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 is made to emit light in a unified emission color (golden emission). It is possible to enhance the production effect.

Further, both the monochromatic light emitting LED and the full-color LED may be mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board, and in this case, among a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board. For the monochromatic LED, even if the golden effect is being executed, the LED is emitted with the same emission color as when the golden effect is not executed without emitting golden light, or it is turned off while the golden effect is being executed. On the other hand, the full-color LED among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-back upper first decorative substrate may be made to emit gold light.

In this example, a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LED of the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is mounted, and the LED of the specific decorative board is mounted. On the surface (LED mounting surface), characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with mounted electronic parts and other decorative boards, areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are placed, etc. The attributes of the surface-side electronic component (further, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included). The front surface side notation portion shown is screen-printed using ink of a color having high lightness and saturation (for example, a light color such as yellow or yellowish green). Further, in this example, a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the specific decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 on which the LED is not mounted, and further, the specific decorative substrate is further coated. On the back side (LED non-mounted side) where the LED is not mounted, the above-mentioned back side notation is screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, bright color such as yellow or yellow-green). Is given by. Therefore, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on other decorative boards (a decorative board other than the specific decorative board, or other specific decorative boards among the plurality of specific decorative boards) may be mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the specific decorative board. When light is emitted from the LED, the irradiated light can be reflected with high efficiency and used efficiently, and a decrease in the amount of light is suppressed. It should be noted that a solder resist (protective material) having a color (for example, a dark color such as green or black) different from the front surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LED is mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) on which the LED of the specific decorative substrate is not mounted. ) May be coated, or the back side notation portion may be screen-printed using ink of a color having low lightness or saturation (for example, black or green).

Further, as described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a panel plate 1110 having an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer periphery of the front component 1000 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. As described above, the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100. As a result, the presence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front of the front component 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 (hereinafter,). It may be described as "transparent game panel 1100").

Further, as described above, the table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a. , Starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, and gate member 2800 are almost entirely transparent. It is formed. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, under normal conditions, the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decorative unit 3140, back front lower right inner decoration unit 3161, back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, back front lower right Good visibility of the outer decoration 3166, the back front lower logo decoration 3167, the back back upper movable decoration 3210, the back rear left side decoration 3220, the back rear right side decoration 3230, etc. In addition, the staging image displayed on the staging display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

For example, in the back front left decoration unit 3120, behind the transparent game panel 1100, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and the back front lower right A transparent decorative body called an inner decorative body 3165 and a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 is arranged, and a back front left decorative substrate 3128 is arranged behind the transparent decorative body. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the front left decorative substrate 3128. As described above, behind the transparent game panel 1100, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and A transparent decorative body called the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back front left decorative board 3128 are arranged in this order. The front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is formed by applying a white resist liquid to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). A white resist layer is formed. On the front (front surface) of the front left decorative substrate 3128, the part numbers of the front side electronic parts such as a plurality of full-color LEDs and the surface of the area indicating the position where the front side electronic parts are arranged are placed on the white resist coated solidly. The attributes of the side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The front side notation portion is printed by silk printing in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in the present embodiment) which are in contact with the game ball and have a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement. ) Is planted in the transparent game panel 1100, so that the attractiveness of the plurality of golden obstacle nails N can be utilized. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Through the transparent decorations of back front lower middle decoration body 3161, back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and back front lower right outer decoration body 3166. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 can be visually recognized, the yellow color (multiple obstacle nails N) is silk-printed on the white resist coated on the back front left decorative substrate 3128. It contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the surface side notation part (a color similar to the gold color of).

Similar to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the front side notation portion. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Through the transparent decorative body of the back front right decoration unit 3140, the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right decoration unit 3140 back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower decoration board 3152. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the back front is visible, silk printing is performed on the white resist coated on the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. It contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the surface side notation portion of yellow (a color similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstacle nails N).

Further, for example, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are turned off, the surface of the back front left decorative board 3128 is turned off. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the back front left decorative unit 3120 is the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, and the back front. A transparent decorative body called the lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the transparent game panel 1100, which is visible through the back front left decorative substrate. The white coating film formed on the surface of the 3128 serves as a white background, so that a golden obstacle nail is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128. The attractiveness of N naturally guides the line of sight from the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 to the golden obstacle nail N. As a result, even when the back front left decorative board 3128 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the surface of the back front left decorative board 3128 is attracted by the golden obstacle nail N. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the pachinko machine, the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, as with the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also suppress the deterioration of the decorativeness. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower decorative board 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are turned off, the back front The front right logo decoration of the back front right decoration unit 3140 is provided on the front right notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower right decorative board 3152. It is formed on the surface of the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower decorative board 3152, although it is visible through the transparent decorative body called the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 and the transparent game panel 1100. When the white coating film becomes a white background, an obstacle having a golden color is planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152. Due to the attractiveness of the nail N, the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 to the golden obstacle nail N. As a result, even when the back front upper right decorative board 3151 or the back front lower right decorative board 3152 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the golden obstacle nail N attracts the eyes. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front lower right decorative board 3152 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In this example, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a golden color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, but instead, a transparent cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. However, by applying a golden design (the same color as the golden color of multiple obstacle nails N or a color close to this golden color) to a part of this cell sheet, the attractiveness due to the part with this golden design is applied. Depending on the sex, for example, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, and the back front lower left outer decoration in the back front left decoration unit 3120 arranged behind this golden design portion. The front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 is visually recognized through the transparent decorative bodies 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166. If possible, through the transparent decorative body of the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right logo decoration part 3142 in the back front right decoration unit 3140 arranged behind this golden design part, the back front Even if the front surface (front surface) of the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front lower right decorative board 3152 in the right decorative unit 3140 can be visually recognized, the back front left decorative board 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the like. Yellow (similar to the gold color of the part designed on the cell sheet) that is silk-printed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower decorative board 3152 in the back front right decorative unit 3140. The existence of the notation on the surface side of the color) may be obscured.

Even in this configuration, the front (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120, the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back front right lower decorative board 3152 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 On the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission are turned off. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold is the back front left decoration unit 3120 back front lower middle decoration body 3161, back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, back front. The lower right inner decoration 3165 and the back front lower right outer decoration 3166 are transparent decorations, the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are transparent decorations, and the transparent game panel 1100. Although it becomes visible through, the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 becomes a white background, so that the back front left Due to the golden design of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decorative board 3128, the back front upper right decorative board 3151, and the back front lower right decorative board 3152. It is possible to naturally guide the line of sight from the surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 to the golden-designed portion of the cell sheet by the attractiveness. As a result, even when the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the golden color applied to the cell sheet is applied. The white coating film formed on the surfaces of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151, and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 can be made difficult to see by attracting the attention to the design portion of the above. The world view of the game machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, the surface of at least 7-segment display portion of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side (the surface of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211). Obstacle nails may not be planted on the game panel 1100 in front of (may be all). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the 7-segment display portion of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 from being obstructed by the obstacle nail N, and the 7-segment display portion of the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be displayed. Since the information such as displayed characters, numbers, and patterns can be easily seen by the player, the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit can be reliably transmitted to the player. In addition to this, the back-rear-upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the back-rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side is mounted with an LED for emitting and decorating the back-rear upper first decorative part 3211. For one decorative substrate, at least the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted may be coated with a dark color (black, green, purple, etc.) solder resist (protective agent) (the back surface on which the LEDs are not mounted). (LED non-mounting surface) may be coated with the same solder resist), thereby suppressing light interference on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back, rear, and upper first decorative substrates. As a result, the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs can be individually identified, so that information such as characters, numbers, and patterns can be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display unit. It should be noted that the back-back-upper-first decorative substrate has a translucent compartment (back-back-upper first) in which each of the plurality of LEDs is partitioned on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted to suppress light interference. It may be formed integrally with the decorative portion 3211, or it may be formed separately from the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211), and in this case, each of the plurality of LEDs may be provided. Since the light emitted from the LED can be more clearly identified, information such as characters, numbers, and patterns can be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display unit.

Further, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the back rear upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 has a metal decorative portion 3211a (net of FIG. 252) having a golden metallic luster so as to surround the periphery of the 7-segment display unit. The hanging part) is formed. The golden metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3211a can give a high-class feeling, and at the same time, the light emitted from the lamp or LED provided around the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and rear is reflected to increase the brightness. Can be done.

Further, even when the golden effect is executed as described above, the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not emit golden light, and the golden effect is achieved. Is designed to perform different effects (displaying characters, numbers, patterns, etc. with the same emission color as when the golden effect is not executed (red in this example)). In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the back-back-up first decorative unit 3211 in the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 do not emit gold even when the golden effect is executed, but are formed so as to surround the periphery of the 7-segment display unit. The metal decorative portion 3211a having a golden metallic luster reflects light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from a lamp or LED provided around the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and rear. It is configured so that it can emit light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from a lamp or LED provided around the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and rear, and has a golden metallic luster. By reflecting the light on the metal decorative portion 3211a, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the golden light is emitted.

The metal decorative portion 3211a is formed by stamping a metal foil having a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed back-back upper first decorative portion 3211 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device. At this time, above the intermediate product of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are formed. Is placed. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the intermediate product of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 to a position of a predetermined distance, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (stamped) by the heat of the hot plate. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3211a is formed on the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211.

In the hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decorative portion 3211a of the present embodiment, the portion of the hot plate that comes into contact with the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 that is the transfer destination of the metal leaf of the transfer sheet has elasticity. Therefore, even if the transfer destination (the front surface of the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and rear) is not flat and curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the portion having a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface can be formed. It is also possible to transfer (press the foil) the metal foil in good condition. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3211a can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment as compared with the case of forming the metal decorative portion 3211a by plating or thin-film deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed. A metal film may be formed on the surface of the intermediate product before the completion of the first decorative portion 3211 on the back and back by plating or thin film deposition.

Further, in this example, a metal decorative part (metal decorative part 3211a) having a golden metallic luster on a decorative body (first decorative part 3211 on the back and rear) equipped with a monochromatic light emitting LED that does not perform the golden effect during the execution of the golden effect. ) Is formed, but the metal decorative part having a golden metallic luster may be formed on a decorative body equipped with a full-color LED, not limited to a single-color light emitting LED, or the golden light emission may be executed during the execution of the golden effect. A metal decorative portion having a golden metallic luster may be formed on a part of the decorative bodies provided with the full-color LED. By forming a metal decoration part with a golden metallic luster on a decorative body equipped with a full-color LED, the metal decoration has a golden metallic luster when other effects are performed, although it does not emit golden light in the golden effect. When a full-color LED provided on a decorative body on which a portion is formed is made to emit light, it can be reflected by a metallic decorative portion formed around the LED to be recognized as a golden emission, so that a golden effect can be produced. It is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit and improve the game entertainment for the player who recognizes that the game is being executed. Further, when a metal decorative portion having a golden metallic luster is formed on a part of the decorative bodies provided with a full-color LED for performing a golden effect, the metal decorative portion having a golden metallic luster is formed. By reflecting the gold-like light (yellow in this example) emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around the decorative body on which the gold is formed, to the metal decorative part having a golden metallic luster, the player can see it. Not only is it easier to recognize that golden light is being emitted, but also light of a color similar to gold emitted from a full-color LED provided on a decorative body on which a metal decorative portion having a golden metallic luster is formed. Since (yellow in this example) can be reflected by the metal decorative portion formed around the LED to be recognized by the golden light emission, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the golden light emission is performed.

Further, in the above example, the emission effect of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) is executed during the execution of the golden effect, and the color corresponding to this emission color has a golden metallic luster. The one in which the metal decorative portion is formed on the decorative body is shown, but in a gaming machine capable of performing a specific effect of controlling light emission with a specific light emitting color, a color corresponding to the specific light emitting color (a color that can be recognized as the same or similar). A decorative portion having a gloss of color (for example, gray and silver) may be formed on the decorative body. With this configuration, among the plurality of types of effects executed by the gaming machine, an effect having a special value in which a specific emission color and a specific glossy color formed on the decorative portion of the decorative body are associated with each other. It is possible to make it guess that the expectation of a big hit is high when a specific effect of controlling light emission with a specific light emission color is executed, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. Further, when the specific effect is executed as described above, not only the light emission control of a plurality of light emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) with the specific emission color is performed, but also the characters, characters, and patterns displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed. In order to display a part or all of the above in a specific color, characters, characters, patterns, etc. displayed in the effect display device 1600 and a plurality of light emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) that emit light in the specific emission color are provided. In conjunction with this, it is possible to execute an effect that represents a specific color on the entire pachinko machine 1 (part of it may be a different color), and the specific color represented by the effect display device 1600 and the emission color of the light emitting means are used. Even if the specific color represented is not the same, the relevance can be easily recognized, and it is possible to recognize that the jackpot expectation is high and improve the game entertainment.

Further, the metal decorative portion 3211a (shaded portion in FIG. 252) having a golden metallic luster so as to surround the periphery of the 7-segment display portion on the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in the back rear upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. ) Is formed, so that the front surface (front surface) of the back rear upper first decorative substrate can be visually recognized through the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portion 3211a. However, it makes it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (similar to the golden color of multiple obstacle nails N) surface side notation that is silk-printed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the first decorative substrate on the back and back. Contributes to.

Further, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate on the back and back. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., they are conspicuous from the white coating film, but the first decorative substrate on the back and back due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3211a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decorative portion 3211a provided (formed) on the back rear upper first decorative substrate, the back rear upper first decorative substrate is provided (formed). By attracting the eyes to the metal decoration part 3211a, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc. You do not have to be constrained by the position, size, and number of holes and lands, you can increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative board on the back, back, and top, and shorten the time required for artwork work. Can also contribute to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, a metal decorative portion 3161a having a metallic luster is formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 provided in the back front lower effect unit 3160, and the metal decorative portion 3161a is formed. The whole except is transparently formed. The metal decorative portion 3161a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is silk-printed on a white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168. Since the surface side notation that makes it possible to identify a possible full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the surface notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3161a. There is.

A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the metal decorative portion 3161a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the metal decorative portion 3161a of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 corresponding to the transparent area of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 excluding the above.

Then, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 has a metallic luster among the back front lower middle decorative bodies 3161. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3161a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3168 in the front, front, bottom, and middle of the back serves as a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3161a, the line of sight is natural from the front surface (front surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 to the metal decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. Will be guided to. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3161. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the notation on the front surface side. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., the copper foil is exposed, so that it stands out from the white coating film. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3161, a through hole is formed on the front surface of the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168. , It is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of lands, etc. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the decorative substrate 3168 in the front, front, bottom, and middle, and it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during the execution of the golden effect (when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (various types provided in the door frame 3 by opening the door frame 3). When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LED of the decorative substrate), when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (acts such as hitting the pachinko machine 1). When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 vibrates, the LED of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emits light and the display of the effect display device 1600 is blurred and visually recognized. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball), the ball cut detection sensor 574 A minor error such as when a detection signal from the LED is input (an error with a low possibility that a goto action is being performed, such as when it is detected that a game ball does not exist in the guidance passage 570a) has occurred. In this case, when a radio wave irradiation goto is detected (noise is contained in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 due to electromagnetic waves or the like, or noise is contained in the display of the effect display device 1600. Case), when the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input when the second start port 2004 is not open, it is large when it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a serious error such as (an error with a high possibility that a goto action is being performed) such as when a detection signal from the winning opening sensor 2402 is input) occurs, etc.), the LED that emits golden light when the golden effect is executed. Of the specific decorative boards on which the above is mounted, the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 (the back front upper left decorative board 3129 for emitting and decorating the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, and the back front upper left). The back front left decorative board 3128 for light-emitting decoration of the logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123, the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for light-emitting decoration of the back front lower logo decoration body 3167, and the back. The back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for light-emitting decoration of the front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for light-emitting decoration of the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, and the back front lower left outer Back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for light emitting decoration of decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for light emitting decoration of back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer The back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for light-emitting decoration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141, and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 emit light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for decoration are turned off, and a specific decorative board (door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450) provided on the door frame 3 is turned off. Door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side lower decorative board 423 The dish left decorative board 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the dish right provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277. Multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board 278 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430) are controlled to emit light in an abnormal notification light emission mode (blinking light in red with maximum brightness (light amount)). It is designed to do.

On the other hand, among the specific decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the back rear upper first decoration provided on the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. For a plurality of LEDs mounted on a board (not shown), even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the golden effect, the LED is displayed without being turned off (the predetermined lighting pattern is continued). Alternatively, the lighting pattern may be changed based on the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, a display indicating the type of abnormality may be performed). In this way, the white solder resist (protective material) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is coated, and the electronic components mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LED of the specific decorative substrate is mounted. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as characters and symbols (component numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with components and other decorative boards, and areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed (further, the shape of surface-side electronic components). , The size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component on the surface side, and the model of the electronic component on the surface side may be included.) For example, among the specific decorative boards that are screen-printed using inks of bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green, the specific decorative boards that mount the LEDs that emit golden light when the golden effect is executed are finished from the golden emission. Although the light emission is controlled in the mode of turning off or abnormal, the back rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 in which the five 7-segment display portions of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. The display is continued (the predetermined lighting pattern is continued until the fluctuation time elapses). As a result, even when an abnormality occurs, information about the game can be displayed and the information can be known. In addition, when an extremely serious error that makes it difficult to continue the game due to an abnormality in the main control board 1310 among the above-mentioned serious errors occurs, the five 7-segment display units of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and rear are displayed. The lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board provided in the back rear upper first decorative part 3211 arranged side by side can be changed to display according to the type of abnormality, or the back rear can be displayed. Even if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board provided in the back rear upper first decorative section 3211 in which the five 7-segment display units of the upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side are turned off. Often, in this case, the degree of abnormality can be determined immediately.

Further, in this example, the operation of the light amount adjusting button 228 is accepted even during the execution of the golden effect, and at the timing when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are specified. The amount of light of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate can be changed (adjusted). Specifically, when the button with the letter "+" is pressed among the two buttons of the light amount adjustment button 228, the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is immediately used. The LED becomes brighter (increases the amount of light), and when the button with the letter "-" is pressed, the LED of the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 becomes dark (light amount) immediately. To weaken).

When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the light amount adjustment may be reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 253 (A), when the golden effect is executed as the variable effect in the variable display with a high expectation of big hit such as the decorative symbol reaching the reach (when the high expected golden effect is executed). When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated to change from the brightness 3 to the brightness 4 at the timing t'3 during the execution of the golden effect, the door frame is operated at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. Of the plurality of decorative boards provided in 3 and the game board 5, the brightness is changed to 4 at the timing t'4 when the golden effect is completed without changing (adjusting) the light intensity of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board. You may.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 253 (B), when the golden effect is not executed as the variable effect in the variable display with a high expectation of big hit such as the decorative symbol reaching, the low expected golden effect is executed. In the case), when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated to change from the brightness 3 to the brightness 4 at the timing t'3 during the execution of the golden effect, the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated at the timing t'3. Of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the light intensity of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board may be changed to the brightness 4.

In this way, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, so that the state of the gaming machine and the big hit Since it becomes possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of playing a game, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

It should be noted that, at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated in FIG. 253 (B), the light amount of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is changed. In that case, the low-expected golden effect is terminated at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and one of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (door frame 3 or the game board). The light emission mode of the LED mounted on all of the plurality of decorative boards provided in 5 or a predetermined number of decorative boards among the plurality of decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is changed (the light emitting mode of the LED may be changed. For example, the light may be turned on in white with a constant brightness, the light may be emitted in a light emission mode different from that of the golden light emission, the blinking interval may be changed (prolonged), and the like). This makes it possible to easily adjust the amount of light. That is, in a state where the LED mounted on the specific decorative board emits golden light among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the amount of light of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board increases with the passage of time. It is not suitable for adjusting the amount of light because it changes and it becomes difficult to grasp the current amount of light. The low-expected golden effect is finished at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and the LED mounted on any of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is white with a constant brightness, for example. It becomes easy to grasp the current amount of light and to easily adjust the amount of light to the player's preference. Further, at the timing t'3 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the low-expected golden effect is finished and any of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5). When changing the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the plurality of decorative boards to be mounted, or a predetermined number of decorative boards among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Any of a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 with the brightness adjusted according to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (all of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 may be used. However, the LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 or the plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be a predetermined number of decorative boards) may be made to emit light. In this case, the door frame 3 or the game board may be made to emit light. The brightness after adjustment is confirmed by the light emission of the LED mounted on any of the plurality of decorative substrates provided in 5, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, as a specific condition in which the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated as described above, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the high-expected golden effect. Or, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the low expectation effect, the result of the light amount adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation golden effect or the low expectation golden effect, or the light amount is adjusted during the execution of the specific reach effect. When the button 228 is operated, the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected after the end of the specific reach effect, and the above-mentioned abnormal state (not limited to all abnormal states but the specific abnormal state (for example, opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4) is opened. When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the occurrence of (such as when it is detected), the light amount adjustment result is reflected after the end of the abnormal state, and the light amount adjustment button 228 is used during the execution of the setting change process. When it is operated, it may be any one or any combination of those that reflect the result of the light intensity adjustment after the setting change processing is completed. In this case as well, the state of the gaming machine, the presence or absence of the possibility of a big hit, and the like can be determined by the timing of reflecting the result of the light amount adjustment, so that the deterioration of the gaming interest can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the operation of the volume control button 227 is accepted even during the execution of the golden effect, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are operated at the timing when the volume control button 227 is operated. It is possible to change (adjust) the volume of the sound for directing such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass. Specifically, when the button with the letter "+" is pressed among the two buttons of the volume control button 227, the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass of the main body frame 4 are immediately pressed. The volume of the sound for directing such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the main body frame speaker 622 becomes loud, and when the button with the letter "-" is pressed, the top center speaker of the door frame 3 and the top center speaker and The volume of the sound for directing the music, voice, effect sound, etc. output from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 is reduced.

When the volume control button 227 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the volume control may be reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the volume control button 227 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), when a golden effect is executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit such as a decorative symbol reaching a reach (when a high expected golden effect is executed). When the volume control button 227 is operated to change from volume 3 to volume 4 at the timing t "3 during execution of the golden effect, the door is doored at the timing t" 3 when the volume control button 227 is operated. Without changing (adjusting) the volume of the sound for staging such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The volume may be changed to 4 at the timing t "4 when the golden effect is finished, or may be changed to the volume 4 at the timing t" 5 when the variable effect is finished.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), when the golden effect is not executed as the variable effect in the variable display with high expectation of big hit such as the decorative symbol reaching, the low expected golden effect is executed. In the case), when the volume control button 227 is operated to change from the volume 3 to the volume 4 at the timing t "3 during the execution of the golden effect, the volume control button 227 is operated at the timing t" 3. The volume of the sound for directing the music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 is changed to the volume 4. You may.

In this way, when the volume control button 227 is operated under specific conditions, the result of the volume control is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the volume control button 227 is operated, so that the state of the gaming machine and the jackpot can be achieved. Since it becomes possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of playing a game, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing pachinko.

In addition, the music output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 at the timing t "3 when the volume control button 227 is operated in FIG. 254 (B). , When changing the volume of the sound for effect such as voice and sound effect, the low expected golden effect may be ended at the timing t "3 when the volume control button 227 is operated. This makes it possible to easily adjust the volume. That is, when the LED mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emits golden light, the player cannot concentrate on the volume control and the volume is adjusted to the player's preference. It is not suitable for volume adjustment because it is difficult to adjust or the sound for production changes with the passage of time, making it difficult to grasp the current volume. The low-expected golden effect is finished at the timing t "3 when the volume control button 227 is operated, and the LED mounted on any of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is white, for example, with a constant brightness. By making it emit light or making it so that the sound for directing is not output, it becomes easier to concentrate on the volume adjustment and it becomes easier to adjust the volume to the player's favorite. In addition, the timing t when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. If you want to end the low-expected golden effect at 3 and make the effect sound not output, you may output the confirmation sound at the adjusted volume according to the operation of the volume control button 227. In this case, it becomes easy to confirm the adjusted volume by the confirmation sound and adjust the volume to the player's preference.

Further, as a specific condition in which the result of the volume adjustment is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated as described above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution of the high expectation golden effect. Or, if the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution of the low expectation effect, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation gold effect or the low expectation gold effect, or the volume is adjusted during the execution of the specific reach effect. When the button 227 is operated, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the specific reach effect, and the above-mentioned abnormal state (not limited to all abnormal states but the specific abnormal state (for example, opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4) If the volume control button 227 is operated while (such as when it is detected) is occurring, the volume control button 227 reflects the result of the volume control after the end of the abnormal state, and the volume control button 227 is being executed during the setting change process. Any one or any combination may be used, such as one that reflects the result of volume adjustment after the completion of the setting change process when operated. In this case as well, the state of the gaming machine, the presence or absence of the possibility of a big hit, and the like can be determined by the timing of reflecting the result of the volume adjustment, so that the deterioration of the gaming interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the above example, the specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) was operated among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1. When the detection is performed by the specific detection means (for example, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the above golden effect is produced. We have shown that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether it ends or continues, but the operation of the effect operation unit 350 in the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600. (Operation promotion display, for example, "press a button!") Is displayed, and the effect display device 1600 is operated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is operated within a predetermined valid period after the display is performed. The first of the plurality of operation units provided on the pachinko machine 1 during the period when the button effect for changing the display content (display mode (appearance of character, change of background color, change of display color, etc.)) is not executed. When the specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, etc.) is operated, or among a plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the first specific detection means (for example, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start). When the detection is made by the mouth sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.), the light emission mode (emission color, brightness, light emission pattern) of the first specific light emitting means (for example, LED364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button) provided in the pachinko machine 1. , Whether or not one or more of the blinking interval, switching between the lighting state and the extinguishing state, etc.) changes, and the second specific operation unit (for example, among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1). When the volume control button 227, the light amount control button 228, the handle 195, etc.) is operated, or by the second specific detection means (for example, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1. When the detection is made, the first specific light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 provided in the game board 5 and the LED of the door frame top center decorative board 455 provided in the door frame 3). Etc.) can be a big hit depending on whether or not the light emission mode (light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between lighting state and extinguishing state, etc.) changes or not. It may be possible to determine the presence or absence of sex. ..

For example, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the execution of the above-mentioned high-expected golden effect, the light emitting mode of the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button is not changed (the change in the light emitting mode is not allowed). When the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times) during the execution of the low-expected golden effect, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button is turned off from the lighting state. The central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, that is, the pressing operation portion 303 may be changed from the lit state to the extinguished state (emission color) by changing to the state (allowing the change of the light emitting mode). , Brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between lighting state and extinguishing state, etc.), or when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the above-mentioned high-expected golden effect. Does not change the light emission mode of the LED that is mounted on the specific decorative board and emits golden light among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (does not allow the change in the light emission mode), while producing a low-expected golden effect. When the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during execution, the brightness of the LED that is mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and emits golden light is changed compared to before the operation ( (Allows changes in light emission mode) (may be one or more of emission color, brightness, emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between lighting state and extinguishing state, and the like). Further, in this case, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (may be once or a plurality of times) during the execution of the low-expected golden effect to turn off the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button from the lit state to the extinguished state. After changing to, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times), the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button is changed from the off state to the on state. Alternatively, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button may be alternately changed between a lighting state and an extinguishing state each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (may be once or a plurality of times). Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed for a predetermined period after changing the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button from the lit state to the extinguished state, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button is turned on. You may return it, or change the brightness step by step according to the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (pressing the "+" side changes the brightness toward 6 and pressing the "-" side turns it toward brightness 1. It may be changed).

It should be noted that the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 may be any as long as the light emitting effect such as the high expected gold effect and the low expected gold effect is executed at the timing of pressing the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303. After the end of the low-expected golden effect when the button is pressed, the brightness of the LED that is mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and emits gold is changed. May be good. That is, in the low-expected golden effect, when the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the specific decorative substrate among the plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Although the change is allowed, the change in the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the specific decorative board among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is not limited to the one performed during the execution of the low expectation golden effect. , It may be performed after the end of the low-expected golden effect.

Further, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 provided in the effect operation unit unit 350, the annular button outer decorative substrate 355, and the button inner decorative substrate 364 are surface-mounted surfaces (a surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, LEDs). The mounting surface) is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the white solder resist coated on the surface mounting surface is confused with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid The surface-side notation that indicates the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component and the model of the front-side electronic component may include a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow, yellow-green, etc., or yellow-green). Etc.) is applied by screen printing using ink.

On the other hand, the board on which the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are provided has a dark color (green, black, etc.) solder resist (protective material) on the front mounting surface (the surface on which the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are provided). ) Is coated, and on the dark solder resist coated on the surface mounting surface, letters and symbols (component numbers of electronic components) and electronic components to avoid confusion with the electronic components mounted and other decorative substrates are used. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating) is applied by screen printing using white ink. As described above, in this example, the substrate on which the first specific light emitting means provided in the first specific operation unit and changing the light emitting mode when the first specific operation unit is operated is mounted, and the second specific operation unit. Is a substrate on which the first specific light emitting means whose light emitting mode changes at the time of operation is mounted in order to make the color of the solder resist and the surface side notation part different from that of the substrate provided with, or the second specific operation unit at the time of operation. It becomes easy to determine whether or not the board is mounted with the second specific operation unit that changes the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the specific board on which the is not provided. A plurality of LEDs may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the board on which the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are provided. In this case, the volume may be increased even when the light intensity control button 228 is operated. The brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface mounting surface of the substrate on which the adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are provided may not be changed, and the light may always be emitted at a constant brightness.

Further, among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the execution of the movable effect for operating the movable decorative body, the specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, and the light amount adjustment button 228). , Handle 195, etc.) or detection by a specific detection means (for example, first start port sensor 3002, second start port sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among a plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1. If it is done, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether the movable effect ends or continues. For example, during execution of a high-expected movable effect that has a high probability of becoming a big hit or may become a big hit (for example, from the ascending position to the descending position where the back-rear-upward movable decorative body 3210 covers a part of the front of the effect display device 1600). When a specific operation unit (for example, a pressing operation unit 303, a contact operation unit 302, a volume control button 227, a light amount adjustment button 228, a handle 195, etc.) is operated among a plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 (in a moved state). When detection is performed by a specific detection means (for example, first start port sensor 3002, second start port sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among a plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the highly expected movable While the effect is not terminated, a low-expected movable effect that is unlikely to be a big hit or is unlikely to be a big hit is being executed (for example, the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 moves a part in front of the effect display device 1600 from the ascending position. A specific operation unit (for example, a pressing operation unit 303, a contact operation unit 302, a volume control button 227, a light amount adjustment button 228, a handle 195, etc.) among a plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 in a state of being moved to a lowering position to cover). When the detection is performed by the specific detection means (for example, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1. The low-expected movable effect may be terminated. In this case, if the low-expected movable effect is executed, the specific operation unit is operated while covering a part of the front of the effect display device 1600, or the front of the effect display device 1600 is detected by the specific detection means. Since it changes to the open state, it is possible to surely recognize that the low-expected movable effect is being executed.

Further, in the above example, the pressing operation is performed as a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) among the plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1. Although the light emitting mode of the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button provided inside the pressing operation unit 303 is changed when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the present invention is not limited to this, but the specific operating unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303, A light emitting body (for example, the outer peripheral decoration of the effect operation unit) provided in the operation unit (for example, the effect operation unit 300 including the press operation unit 303) including the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc. LED mounted on any of the board 320, the decorative board outside the button 355, the decorative board 364 inside the button, etc.) and the light emitter provided near the specific operation unit (dish left decorative board 273, dish right). Light emission modes (emission color, brightness, emission pattern, blinking interval, lighting state and extinguishing state) of the decorative substrate 278, the handle decorative substrate 184, the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168, etc. Any one or more of the switching and the like may be changed). Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the execution of the high-expected golden effect, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 provided in the effect operation unit 300 including the pressing operation unit 303, and the outside of the button. While the light emitting mode of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 355 and the decorative substrate 364 in the button is not changed, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (either once or a plurality of times) during the execution of the low-expected golden effect. Good) One of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, the button outer decorative substrate 355, and the button inner decorative substrate 364 provided in the effect operation unit 300 provided with the effect operation unit 303 when the press operation is performed. One or more of the light emission modes (emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between the on state and the off state, etc.) such as changing the LED mounted on the lamp from the on state to the off state may be used. ) May be changed. That is, when the specific operation unit is operated, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit by changing the light emitting mode of the LED arranged near the specific operation unit.

Further, although the golden effect has been described in the above example, the present technical idea is not limited to this, and the surface mounting surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the substrate on which the light emitting body is mounted on the surface mounting surface. Then, a light-colored (yellow, yellow-green, light blue, etc.) surface-side notation portion is formed on the white solder resist, and the illuminant mounted on the surface mounting surface emits light having the same or similar color as the surface-side notation portion. Color (for example, yellow emission color for the yellow surface side notation, gold emission color for the yellow surface notation, yellow-green emission color for the yellow surface notation, yellow-green surface During the execution of the effect of emitting light with a yellow-green emission color for the side notation, a yellow emission color for the yellow-green surface side notation, and a golden emission color for the yellow-green surface side notation). When a specific operation unit (for example, a pressing operation unit 303, a contact operation unit 302, a volume control button 227, a light amount adjustment button 228, a handle 195, etc.) is operated among a plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1, the light emitter It is a concept including a thing that makes it possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit depending on whether or not the light emission mode changes. That is, by coating the surface mounting surface on which the light emitter is mounted with a white solder resist, not only the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface can be maintained high, but also the ink having the same or similar color as the light emitting color of the light emitting body can be maintained. By forming the front surface side notation portion, the reflection efficiency of the light emitter can be enhanced by the surface side notation portion and the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface can be suppressed, and the surface side notation portion becomes the emission color when the light emitting body emits light. It becomes familiar and inconspicuous, and has the effect of making it difficult for the player to see the surface side notation, which enhances the reflection efficiency and makes it difficult for the player to see the surface side notation. In order to be able to determine the presence or absence of the possibility, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the possibility of a big hit without making the player visually recognize unnecessary information.

Further, although the high-expected golden effect and the low-expected golden effect are exemplified as the golden effect, the golden display (high-expected gold display) and the door frame 3 displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the high-expected gold effect is executed. Of the plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the game board 5, gold light emission (highly expected gold light emission) that causes the LED mounted on the specific decorative board to emit light, and display on the effect display device 1600 when the low expected gold effect is executed. The gold color display (low expectation gold color display) and the gold color light emission (low expectation gold color light emission) that causes the LED mounted on the specific decorative board to emit light among the plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are: The display mode and the light emitting mode are not limited to the same one or both, and one or both of the display mode and the light emitting mode may be partially the same (common). One or both colors (display color, emission color) of the display mode and the light emission mode may be the same or similar (common). For example, although the display contents differ between the high-expected gold display and the low-expected gold display, at least a part of the display content may display a gold color common to both the high-expected gold display and the low-expected gold display. However, although the emission patterns differ between the high-expected gold emission and the low-expected gold emission, at least a part of the emission pattern may include yellow emission common to both the high-expected gold emission and the low-expected gold emission. That is, the present technical idea can be applied as long as the high-expected golden effect and the low-expected golden effect have at least a common aspect.

[Information display]
Next, a modification using the information display will be described. In recent years, the number of players has been declining remarkably, and it is urgent to attract new players. However, the game itself is more complicated than before, and new players may avoid playing games. There is. Hereinafter, a modified example of providing an information display for displaying information related to the game will be described.

In this example, an information display using a dot matrix display unit is provided in place of the five 7-segment display units of the above-mentioned back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 by operating the operation unit such as the staging operation unit 301. Then, it is possible to switch between a state in which information about the game is displayed as the display content of the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and back (game information display mode) and a state in which the game effect is executed (game effect mode). Has been done. Further, in this example, when the operating means is operated during a specific period, the display content of the information display of the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 can be switched. For example, the control of switching the display contents when the operation unit such as the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, and the operation of the operation means that can be operated only by the game clerk (for example, the back surface of the pachinko machine 1). When the RAM clear switch provided on the side is pressed or the setting key switch 1311a is operated (for example, when the setting key cylinder is rotated from the initial position and is turned on, or when the setting key is turned on, the setting key cylinder is initially rotated from the rotation position. Set to return to the position When the key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise and turned OFF, etc.), the display of the information display of the movable decoration body 3210 on the back and back is switched to display information about the game. Control to display (start) and hide the display of the information display of the movable decoration body 3210 on the back and back when the operation unit such as the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the effect display device 1600 is executing the variable effect. Fluctuation by operating the operation unit such as the effect operation unit 301 Control to switch the display content after the end of the effect effect and the variation when the operation unit such as the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the effect display device 1600 is executing the effect effect. During the production, the display contents were not switched, and the running modes (game information display mode, game production mode) were continuously displayed according to each mode, and the operation units such as the production operation unit 301 were operated. One or any combination of the control of switching the display content after the end of the variation effect may be executed.

Further, in the state of displaying the information related to the game (game information display mode) as shown in FIGS. , "Right-handed →" and other information about the game are displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2004 during the time saving time (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as probabilistic change state)). Aimed games (so-called "right-handed") are being played. In addition, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened during the time saving, and the starting prize (to the first starting port 2002) is higher than the normal time (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state). (Winning of the game ball, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004), which is advantageous to the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed if the player does not play a game (so-called "right-handed") aimed at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 in a short time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), when the time is shortened, the player plays a game (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. As an instruction display, "right-handed →" is displayed on the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and back. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not enjoying the advantageous state despite the time saving, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

On the other hand, in normal time (low probability non-time saving state (also called normal state), high probability non-time saving state), a game (so-called "left-handed") aimed at winning a game ball to the first starting port 2001 is performed. It has become like. Further, in addition to the fact that the second starting port 2004 is rarely opened in the normal state, the period in which the second starting port 2004 is opened is extremely short as compared with the time saving time, so that the player normally enters the second starting port 2004. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage by playing a game aimed at entering a game ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), as a display instructing the player to play a game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2001, the back and back are displayed. "Left-handed ←" is displayed on the information display of the movable decorative body 3210. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged during normal times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this modification, left-handed (operation of driving a game ball to the left side of the center accessory 2500) or right-handed by the information displayed in the dot matrix of the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210. Instruct (striking with a strength that abuts against the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a), or notify to that effect when a big hit occurs. Then, by instructing the player to play a game aiming at entering the big winning opening 2005, not only a skilled player but also an inexperienced player is not disadvantaged.

The information display may be a dedicated display for displaying information about the game. In this case, the information to be displayed may be switched when the operating means is operated during a specific period. Further, as the information related to the game, the information for guiding the game as shown in FIGS. 255 (B) and (C) (right-handed, left-handed, etc.) and the variable effect as shown in FIG. 255 (A). Information on lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) (big hit, miss, probability change big hit, time saving big hit, etc.) and setting information related to winning lottery probability (pachinko machine 1 set by setting change processing) The number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 (depending on the out port 1008 of the game balls fired in the game area 5a) and the setting value of One or any combination of the collected game balls and the specific winning device (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, large winning opening 2005, general winning opening 2001, etc.) (at all) Good), for example, the number of game balls that have won in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 (the number of game balls that have won in the second start port 2004, etc.) It may be any combination of the number of game balls played).

In this example, the information display is configured to be provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, but it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, the degree of freedom in design in the inner region of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 is increased, and a structure or a movable object can be provided to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of the effect. Further, although the example of using the dot matrix display unit has been described in the above-described modification, the information related to the game may be displayed by using the 7-segment display unit as well as the dot matrix display unit. Further, not only the information display for new players but also the information display for game clerk may be provided. In this case, the information display is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. You may do so.

In addition, a single color light emitting LED is mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board of the information display, and the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 does not emit gold light even during the execution of the above-mentioned golden effect. In addition, it emits light in a color different from the golden emission (in this example, it is red, but it may be emitted in another color (blue, etc.) as long as it is a clearly visible emission color even during golden emission). You may let it. This makes it possible to clearly see the information displayed on the information display even while the golden light emission is being executed.

Further, since the information display of this example displays important information related to the game as described above, the surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the information display to clarify the display contents. (The insulating film of the same color may be formed on the back surface on which the LED is not mounted, or the insulating film of a different color from the front surface may be formed on the back surface). , Black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed (resist treatment). As a result, light interference can be suppressed on the surface on which the LEDs of the first decorative substrate are mounted, and the light from each of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized independently. Various information can be displayed clearly. In addition, a bright (white in this example) insulating film is formed on the surface of the substrate on which the LED that emits golden light is provided when the golden effect is executed, whereas important information is displayed for the player and the game clerk. The same insulating film may be formed on the front surface of the back rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (the same insulating film may be formed on the back surface on which the LED is not mounted, or the front surface and the front surface. In the case where an insulating film of a different color is formed on the back surface), a dark-colored (for example, green, black, purple, dark blue, etc.) insulating film is formed, so that when a problem occurs in the light emission of the LED. The color of the insulating film formed on the surface of the substrate makes it easy to determine whether or not the LED plays an important role.

Further, on the front surface (front surface) on which the LEDs of the first decorative substrate are mounted, the component numbers corresponding to each LED and the attributes of the electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the LEDs are arranged (further, the electronic components The front side notation indicating the shape, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component may be included) is white (not limited to white, but yellow or black may be used). It is silk-printed with the paint of. Of the area occupied by the front surface (front surface) where the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted, the surface side notation part (the area where white (not limited to white, yellow, black, etc.) paint is silk-printed) The area occupied by the resist (for example, the insulating film of a dark color (for example, green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.)) is smaller than the area occupied by the resist. Therefore, the reflection efficiency on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate on the back and rear is mounted is the case where only the resist is formed on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate on the back and rear is mounted. Similarly, since it is possible to make the light substantially uniform, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light emission unevenness, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of suppressing the interference of the light emitted from each of the plurality of mounted LEDs.

For the front side notation part silk-printed on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted, the same type of electronic components may be collectively displayed for each predetermined group. .. For example, one front side notation portion such as "LEDs 1 to 5" may be provided for five LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate on the back and back. In this case, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the LED on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted on the back, back, and top of the front surface side notation, as compared with the case where the front surface side notation is provided for each of the electronic components. Therefore, the reflection efficiency on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted can be made more uniform. Further, the front side notation may not be silk-printed on the front surface (front surface) on which the LED of the first decorative substrate is mounted, and in this case, the back surface side notation may be provided on the back surface on which the LED is not mounted. It may be formed by silk printing, foil-removed characters, resist-removed characters, etc. , It may be formed by a character without resist, etc.

Further, as described above, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during the execution of the golden effect (when the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (the door frame 3 is provided by opening the door frame 3). When it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards), when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (such as hitting the pachinko machine 1). When it is detected that the act of When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball), the ball out detection is detected. A minor error such as when a detection signal from the sensor 574 is input (an error with a low possibility that a goto action such as when it is detected that a game ball does not exist in the guidance passage 570a) is generated. When it occurs, when it detects a radio wave irradiation goto (noise is included in the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 due to electromagnetic waves, etc., or noise is included in the display of the effect display device 1600. ), When the magnet goto is detected, when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input when the second start port 2004 is not open, when it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a serious error (an error with a high possibility of a goto action such as when a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2402 is input) occurs, etc.), the above-mentioned golden effect is displayed. Among the LEDs that emit gold light at the time of execution, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 emit light in an abnormality notification light emission mode (blinking light in red with maximum brightness (light amount)). It is designed to be controlled.

On the other hand, the display of the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and back is continued without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the golden effect. In this way, the surface of the specific decorative substrate (white solder resist (protective material) coated with the specific decorative substrate (white solder resist (protective material)) that is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and emits golden light during the execution of the golden effect, and on which the LED of the specific decorative substrate is mounted. On the (LED mounting surface), characters and symbols (component numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed. (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included). The LED mounted on the part is screen-printed with ink of a high-brightness or highly saturated color (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green) has a golden effect (for example, when an abnormality occurs). Although it ends the golden emission), it is mounted on the first decorative substrate on the back and upper side where the insulating film of the information display (for example, green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) of the information display (for example, green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) of the movable decorative body 3210 is formed. The LED) continues to display even if an abnormality occurs (continues a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses). As a result, even when an abnormality occurs, information about the game can be displayed and the information can be known. If an extremely serious error occurs that makes it difficult to continue the game due to an abnormality in the main control board 1310 among the above-mentioned serious errors, the back side provided on the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back side and the upper side. Rear-upper first The lighting pattern of multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board can be changed to display according to the type of abnormality, or the back-upper first movable decorative body 3210 can be provided on the information display of the back-upper movable decorative body 3210. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate may be turned off, and in this case, the degree of abnormality can be immediately determined.

Further, depending on the type of abnormality, it may be possible to change whether to continue displaying the information display of the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 or to turn off the information display to hide it, for example, as described above. If a minor error occurs, the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and back will continue to be displayed, and if the above-mentioned serious error occurs, the information display will be turned off and hidden. You may. This makes it possible to determine the degree of abnormality.

Further, as described above, the LED that emits golden light when the golden effect is executed is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 by the peripheral control unit steady processing performed about every 33.3 ms, whereas the back and rear tops. The LED of the first decorative board on the back and rear provided in the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 is controlled by the main control side timer interrupt process performed about every 4 ms by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. ing. In this way, the information of the back-back upper movable decoration 3210 has a shorter cycle than the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LED that executes golden light emission based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. The display content of the display can be updated, and even if a problem occurs and the information display of the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 displays content different from the original display content, it is immediately (4 ms). The display content can be updated to the original display content later), which does not give a disadvantage to the player or the like. That is, the information display of the back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 that displays important (highly important) information about the game is shorter than the LED that is controlled to emit light according to the variation effect such as the golden effect. In order to update the light emission mode of the LED by outputting a control signal at a cycle, even if there is a problem with the display content of the information display of the movable decoration body 3210 on the back and back, the display content should be changed to the normal display content immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the content different from the original one is displayed. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the information display of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back and rear based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 and the periphery There is a possibility that a communication error may occur with the control board 1510 and a problem may occur in the information displayed by the information display of the back / rear / upper movable decoration body 3210. In this example, the main control board 1310 is the back / rear / upper movable decoration. By directly controlling the information display of the body 3210, the information of the back / rear / upper movable decoration 3210 is compared with the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the information display of the back / rear / upper movable decoration 3210. It is possible to prevent the information displayed by the display from being defective and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to emit golden light when the golden effect is executed are provided on a decorative body or the like (may be a case or a cover) formed of a translucent material. On the other hand, the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, a cover, etc.) provided with the back-rear upper first decorative substrate provided in the information display that does not emit golden light when the golden light is emitted does not have translucency. It may be formed of a material, and in this case, an LED that plays an important role depending on whether or not the decorative body (which may be a case or a cover) provided with the substrate has translucency is mounted. It is possible to determine whether or not it is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 256, the back side is provided with the back side upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, a cover, etc.) provided with the back side upper side first decorative substrate provided in the information display which does not emit gold color when the gold color emission is executed. The rear upper first decorative substrate may be firmly accommodated. For example, the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210a covering the surface (LED mounting surface) of the back-rear upper first decorative substrate and the back-rear upper first decorative substrate of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (may be a case or a cover). If the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210b that covers the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) is firmly adhered by welding or the like and a part of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is not destroyed, the back-rear upper first decorative substrate is used. It may be configured so that it cannot be detached. On the other hand, a decorative body or the like (which may be a case or a cover) provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 and provided with various decorative substrates that emit golden light when the golden effect is executed destroys a part of the decorative body. The decorative substrate may be detachable without any problem. In the information display that displays important information in this way, the first decorative board on the back and back cannot be removed unless a part of the movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case or cover) is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means such as the LED, which plays an important role, from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, regarding light emitting means (light emitting means less important than the information display) such as LEDs that are provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 and emit gold light when the golden effect is executed without displaying important information. Since the light emitting means can be replaced without damaging the decorative body or the like (may be a case or a cover), maintenance is facilitated.

Further, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-back-top first decorative board inside the back-back-top movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, a cover, etc.) provided with the back-back-top first decorative board provided in the information display. Interference suppressing means for suppressing the interference of the light emitted by each may be formed. For example, as shown in FIG. 256B, a plurality of tubular portions are formed inside the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210a that abuts on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the back-rear upper first decorative substrate. The surface (LED mounting surface) of the back-back upper first decorative substrate may be partitioned so that one LED is arranged inside each of the plurality of tubular portions. As a result, the traveling direction of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear upper first decorative board is restricted, and the light is mounted adjacent to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the back-rear upper first decorative board. Interference with the light emitted from the LED is suppressed, and the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually. Further, since the LED that is on and the LED that is off can be clearly distinguished in the information display, the information can be clearly displayed on the information display.

Further, the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210b that covers the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the back / rear / upper movable decorative substrate 3210 is formed so as to have only a minimum opening. You may. For example, as shown in FIG. 256B, for connecting the electric wiring to the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210b that covers the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the back-rear upper first decorative board and the back-rear upper first decorative board. Only openings for connectors may be formed. As a result, light is suppressed from entering the tubular portion formed in the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210a from the back-back side of the back-back-up movable decoration body 3210, and erroneous information is displayed on the information display. Since this can be suppressed, the reliability of the information displayed on the information display is improved.

Further, when an abnormality occurs as described above, among the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board and emitting golden light when the golden effect is executed, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, while the information display is used. Since the light is emitted while maintaining the normal brightness, the brightness inside the game window can be reduced to make the light emitted by the information display stand out in the event of an abnormality, so that the information displayed on the information display can be easily visually recognized. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, among the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate and emitting golden light when the golden effect is executed, the LED provided on the door frame 3 is displayed in red with the abnormality notification light emission mode (maximum brightness (light amount)). Light emission is controlled by blinking light), but the interference of light emitted by each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear upper first decorative board inside the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (may be a case, cover, etc.) Since it has an interference suppressing means for suppressing, even in a situation where the LED provided in the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light in an abnormal notification light emitting mode (blinking light in red with the maximum brightness (light amount)), the first decorative substrate on the back and back. It is easy to determine the light emission state of each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the.

Further, in this example, since the surface on which the LED of the first decorative substrate on the back and rear is mounted is coated with a dark solder resist, the light emitted from the LED provided in the penetrating portion leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion. Even in some cases, the diffusion of light can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment (all embodiments including modifications), a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which a plurality of LEDs of the specific decorative substrate are mounted, and the white solder resist is used. On the (protective material), characters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) to avoid confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative boards, and surfaces such as areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are placed. The attributes of the side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). A screen-printed front side notation using yellow ink to perform a golden effect (gold emission) that causes multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative substrate to emit light in a color similar to the yellow of the front notation. As shown, this technical idea can be applied to other productions. For example, the front side notation part is screen-printed with yellow-green ink, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate are made to emit light in a color similar to the yellow-green color of the front side notation part. May be good. That is, the present technical idea can be applied as long as it emits light in a color similar to the emission color of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate and the color of the notation portion on the front surface side.

Further, for electronic components other than the LED mounted on the specific decorative board, the front side notation may not be screen-printed, or the back side notation may be screen-printed on the back surface on which the LED is not mounted. .. In addition, the surface on which multiple LEDs of the specific decorative substrate are mounted is white (including beige, ivory, cream, natural, off-white, and other colors that are recognized as white (similar)) or light. Only mount electronic components with exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) (eg, one or more (eg, any combination) of LED elements with white packages, connectors with white housings, etc.) On the other hand (including those that mount only LED elements with a white package and do not mount other electronic components), electronic components that do not have at least a white or light-colored exterior on the back surface where multiple LEDs are not mounted (for example) A resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a connector with a housing in a color different from white (light blue, yellow, etc.), etc.) (Not limited to those in which only electronic parts that do not have a white or light-colored exterior are placed on the back surface, but also electronic parts that do not have a white or light-colored exterior and white or light-colored exteriors can be mounted. It may be the one that arranges one or both of the electronic parts that it has). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific decorative substrate. At the same time, it is possible to perform an impactful production, which improves the entertainment of the game.

In addition, the color of the package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the specific decorative substrate may be white (including a color recognized as white (similar) such as beige, ivory, cream, natural, off-white, etc.). In this case, it is possible to suppress the decrease in reflection efficiency due to the exterior color of the LED itself mounted on the specific decorative substrate, so that the amount of light of the specific decorative substrate can be increased. Further, as a specific decorative board, a first specific decorative board that mounts both a plurality of LEDs having a white package on one surface and a connector having a white housing, and a plurality of LEDs having a white package on one surface. May be provided with a second specific decorative substrate on which a connector having a housing having a color different from white (for example, light blue or yellow) is mounted on the other surface. In this case, the connector having a white housing, which has a high effect of suppressing the decrease in reflection efficiency, is mounted on the same surface as the surface on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface (also referred to as front mounting surface)), while being mounted. For a connector having a housing other than white, which has a low effect of suppressing the decrease in reflection efficiency (which may reduce the reflection efficiency), a surface different from the surface on which the LED is mounted (also referred to as an LED non-mounting surface (also referred to as a back mounting surface)). )), It becomes possible to maintain high reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted. It should be noted that this technical idea does not exclude the mounting of electronic components having a white exterior such as connectors having a white housing on the LED non-mounting surface, and the LED non-mounting surface also for electronic components having a white exterior. Since it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency from being lowered by electronic components other than the LED on the LED mounting surface by mounting on the LED mounting surface, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is maintained high and the light emission of the LED is efficiently used to reduce the amount of light. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the above example, all the specific decorative substrates on which the LED whose emission is controlled by the golden effect is mounted are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, but the present invention is not limited to this. A solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black) is coated on the surface of some of the specific decorative boards on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the golden effect is mounted. Alternatively, all or part of the specific decorative substrate on which the LED whose light emission is controlled by the golden effect is mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) only on the surface on which the LED is mounted. , The back surface on which the LED is not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black). Further, the board connected to the specific decorative board by the harness (the relay board, the driver board, other boards such as the decorative board on which the LED is mounted) has the same configuration as the connected specific decorative board, that is, the specific decorative board. A white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface, and letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic parts) and electronic parts are placed to avoid confusion with mounted electronic parts and other decorative boards. Includes attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component. If the front side notation indicating (in some cases) is screen-printed using ink of a color with high lightness or saturation (for example, bright color such as yellow or yellowish green), the specified decorative board and harness may be used. The surface of the board to be connected (relay board, driver board, other board such as decorative board on which LEDs are mounted) is coated with white solder resist (protective material), and the notation on the front side has brightness and saturation. Screen printing may be performed using a high color ink (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellowish green). That is, since the substrate coated with the white solder resist (protective material) and the substrate coated with the green solder resist (protective material) are mixedly mounted on the game board 5, for example, on a specific decorative substrate. When a problem occurs and the harness of the specific decorative board is checked or the connection is checked, the board connected to the specific decorative board is coated with a solder resist (protective material) of the same color as the specific decorative board. Or, by screen-printing the notation on the front side using the same color ink, you can quickly find the board connected to the specific decorative board and other boards (green solder resist (protective material) coated). It can be confirmed without making a mistake with the board).

Further, a connector having an exterior of the same color may be used for each of the specific decorative board and the board connected by the harness. In this case, the specific decorative board is also connected by the exterior color of the connector. Since the substrate can be identified, the substrate connected to the specific decorative substrate can be quickly found. In addition, a connector mounted on the surface mounting surface (the surface facing the front of the game machine) of a board (relay board, driver board, other board such as a decorative board on which an LED is mounted) connected to a specific decorative board by a harness. Also, the connector should have a white exterior, and the connector with an exterior of a color different from white should be mounted on the back mounting surface (the surface facing the rear of the game machine) of the board connected to the specific decorative board by the harness. (Except for mounting a connector with a white exterior on the non-mounting surface of the LED). As a result, the board connected to the specific decorative board can be found more accurately and quickly, and the decrease in reflection efficiency can be suppressed on the surface mounting surface of the board connected to the specific decorative board by the harness. It is possible to efficiently use the light emitted by a light emitting body such as an LED provided in the game machine to suppress a decrease in the amount of light.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc. ) Is shown as a hole-shaped one that penetrates, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slit-shaped one or a notch-shaped one may be used.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums using a game medal ( It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 209, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box body) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to make the front door (front frame) 6002 the main body. It can be released from the part (box body) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to form the main body (box body) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal columnar cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. It comprises a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and the rear end is mounted on the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is located at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of notched notches. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to be rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other in a state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, it is made of metal. The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and the main body part (via the door frame metal ground wire (not shown)). Box body) It is electrically connected to the grounding board provided inside the 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall. The island of the game hall is connected to the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to the ground of the equipment.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This release switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not located near the metal locking device, and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An release switch is arranged on the portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. As described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise invades the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are plated on the front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and since it has conductivity, electromagnetic noise may invade. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004. An electrostatic eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative parts are not coated with decorative plating at all, and the front and back sides are provided. Some of the decorative parts are decoratively plated on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The grounding board provided inside the main body (box body) 6004 was electrically connected to the grounding of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment grounding wire. Instead of electrically connecting to the ground board, electrically connect to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box body) 6004, and connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board. May be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with AC 24V from the island equipment in the game hall. This alternating current 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly drops and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , It has the performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. ..

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, a bet button 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also houses a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted, together with the main control board 1310. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, the setting key switch is used. The 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, or the main body. It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 has a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. The setting display 1310g composed of the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z and the like may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, a staging device (not shown), and the like are shown. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached to and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the staging device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The staging device includes a plurality of movable staging bodies (not shown), the staging display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable staging bodies, the drawing control of the staging display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and in the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium, and the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the tray 6026.

(Solution A1)
As described above, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the game board (game board 5) and the lottery means (main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) for performing a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of the lottery conditions are provided. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process)). A gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison with a random number or a second special random number read by the second special symbol normal processing). The game board covers the specific light emitting board (back front lower middle decorative board 3168) on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the front mounting surface, and the front mounting surface of the specific light emitting board, and has a transparent region. Based on the specific decorative unit (the back front lower middle decorative body 3161) having the , The CPU of the peripheral control IC lamp-drives the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 or the game board 5. A specific color region (metal decorative portion) having a golden metallic luster at a predetermined position is provided in the specific decorative portion (a portion transmitted from the serial I / O port for the substrate to each decorative substrate of the game board 5). 3161a) is formed, a white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate, and a notation unit (notation unit) for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means is formed on the white coating film. Characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates) are formed in yellow, and the light emission control means may be used in the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. The light emitting means of the above can be controlled to emit light in a golden light emitting mode (for example, golden light emitting). As a result, the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board can maintain high reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface, and the light emission of a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board can be emitted. It can be used efficiently to suppress a decrease in the amount of light. Further, when the plurality of light emitting means are turned off, the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is passed through a transparent region of the specific decorative portion excluding the specific color region having a metallic luster. Although it can be visually recognized, the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate serves as a white background, and the surface mounting of the specific light emitting substrate is due to the attractiveness of the color (golden color) of the specific color region. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface to the specific color area provided in the specific decorative portion. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate.

(Solution A2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution A1, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate are recognized as white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated color, off-white color, etc.) (similar). The surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate has a white color (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated color, off-white color, etc.) including the plurality of light emitting means. Only electronic components with an exterior (including recognized (similar) colors) (such as LED elements with a white package and connectors with a white housing) are mounted and white on the back mount surface of the specified light emitting board. Electronic parts other than electronic parts with a black exterior (for example, a circuit that controls the emission of a resistor with a black exterior or the emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a color different from white (for example) It is characterized in that a connector having a housing (such as light blue or yellow) is also mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific light emitting substrate, so that the light emitting effect can be executed without light emission unevenness. It is possible to perform high-impact production and improve the entertainment of the game.

(Solution A3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means A1 or the solution means A2, the golden light emitting mode controls all of the plurality of light emitting means to emit yellow light, but the light and darkness is gradually different for each predetermined number of light emitting means. It is characterized in that it is a light emitting mode in which light is emitted. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the golden light emission is being performed.

(Solution A4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means A1 to the solution means A3, the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is covered with a lens-cut single or double diffusing portion. As a result, light from a plurality of light emitting means is diffused, and a region where light is collected to have high brightness and a region where light is avoided and low brightness is generated to create a glittering feeling, such as gold or metal. It is also possible to express a glossy feeling, and by arranging such a lens-cut diffuser, it is possible to recognize that golden light is being emitted, and the visibility behind the diffuser can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board and the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game. ..

(Solution A5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means A1 to the solution means A4, a special light emitting board (a special light emitting board in which a white coating film is formed on a surface mounting surface and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The back and back upper first decorative substrate) is further provided, and the light emitting control means differs from the golden light emitting mode in that a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. It is characterized in that light emission is controlled in a special light emission mode (for example, red light emission). In order to control the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board in the special light emitting mode without controlling the light emitting in the golden light emitting mode, the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board is mounted on the specific light emitting board. It becomes easy to distinguish from the light emission by the plurality of light emitting means, and it is possible to easily visually recognize the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate.

(Solution A6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution A5, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board. The light emitting means of the above is characterized in that the brightness cannot be changed even when the operation unit is operated. Since the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board cannot be changed, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. It becomes easy to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the substrate to the brightness of the player's preference.

(Solution A7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means A5 or the solution means A6, when a special period occurs in the light emission control in the golden light emitting mode, the golden color by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board is used. It is characterized in that while the light emission control in the light emission mode is terminated, the light emission control in the special light emission mode by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate can be continued without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a win even if the light emission control in the golden light emission mode is completed, and anxiety and distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the golden light emission mode can be felt. You can avoid giving it.

(Solution B1)
In addition, a game board (game panel 1100) in which a plurality of obstacle nails (obstacle nails) are planted on the front surface, and a lottery means (main of the main control board 1310) for drawing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions. When the control MPU 1310a is provided with (a portion where the hit determination process of step S305 is executed) and the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process)). As a result of comparison with the first special random number or the second special random number read by the second special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that it is a big hit), it is controlled to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A specific light emitting board (such as a back front upper right decorative board 3151 and a back front lower right decorative board 3152) which is arranged behind the game board and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the lottery means. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 and the game board 5 based on various commands received from the main control board 1310 to control the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result. A portion for transmitting light emission data on the game board side for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5). A white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate, and a yellow notation portion for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means is formed on the white coating film. (Characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) are formed, and the light emission control means has the plurality of light emission control means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. It is possible to execute a specific light emission control (gold light emission) that controls light emission of the light emitting means to a golden light emission mode, and the obstacle nail has a color (gold color) similar to both the notation portion and the golden light emission mode. It is characterized by. As a result, even when a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate are controlled to emit gold light by having a color similar to the golden light emitting mode, the obstacle nail interferes with the golden light emitting mode. If the obstacle nail and the notation part have similar colors, the notation part will be turned off when multiple light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board are turned off. It becomes less noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game.

(Solution B2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution B2, a special light emitting means is arranged behind the game board, a dark color coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface, and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the dark color coating film. A substrate (first decorative substrate on the back and rear) is further provided, and the light emitting control means includes a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. Is to control light emission in a different special light emitting mode (for example, red light emission), and the obstacle nail is planted in a specific mounting area overlapping the specific light emitting board in the game board, while the special light emitting in the game board. The obstacle nail is not planted in the special mounting area that overlaps with the light emitting substrate. As a result, the notation can be made inconspicuous for the specific light emitting board on which the plurality of light emitting means controlled by the golden light emitting mode is mounted, and the special light emitting means by mounting the plurality of light emitting means not controlled by the golden light emitting mode can be made inconspicuous. With respect to the substrate, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the light emitted by a plurality of light emitting means.

(Solution B3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means B1 or the solution means 2, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the special light emitting board can be changed. The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the above are characterized in that the brightness cannot be changed even when the operation unit is operated. Since the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board cannot be changed, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. It becomes easy to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the substrate to the brightness of the player's preference.

(Solution B4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means B1 to the solution means B3, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate are white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated, off-white). The surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate has a white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generation) including the plurality of light emitting means. Therefore, only electronic parts (LED elements having a white package, connectors having a white housing, etc.) having an exterior (including a color recognized as white (similar) such as off-white) are mounted, and the specific light emitting substrate is mounted. The back mounting surface has an electronic component other than an electronic component having a white exterior (for example, a circuit that controls the emission of a resistor having a black exterior or a plurality of LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), and a brown exterior. It is characterized in that a capacitor, a connector having a housing having a color different from white (light blue, yellow, etc.), etc.) is also mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific light emitting substrate, so that the light emitting effect can be executed without light emission unevenness. It is possible to perform high-impact production and improve the entertainment of the game.

(Solution B5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means B1 to the solution means B4, the golden light emitting mode controls all of the plurality of light emitting means to emit yellow light, but the light and darkness is gradually changed for each predetermined number of light emitting means. It is characterized in that it is a light emitting mode that emits light in a different yellow color. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the golden light emission is being performed.

(Solution B6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means B1 to the solution means B5, the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is covered with a lens-cut single or double diffusing portion. As a result, light from a plurality of light emitting means is diffused, and a region where light is collected to have high brightness and a region where light is avoided and low brightness is generated to create a glittering feeling, such as gold or metal. It is also possible to express a glossy feeling, and by arranging such a lens-cut diffuser, it is possible to recognize that golden light is being emitted, and the visibility behind the diffuser can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board and the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game. ..

(Solution C1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit. A plurality of light emitting substrates on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a special decorative portion (back rear upper movable decorative body 3210) in which a specific golden color region (metal decorative portion 3211a) is partially formed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the decoration unit 3211) and the light emission control means (light emission control means that controls the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (various commands received from the main control board 1310). And the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. A white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the surface mounting surface of the plurality of light emitting substrates, and the plurality of portions are provided on the white coating film. A yellow notation (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) is formed to specify each of the light emitting means, and the light emitting control means is based on the lottery means. Specific light emission control (for example, golden light emission) that controls light emission of a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board (back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168) in a golden light emitting mode when the lottery result is a hit. ) Can be performed, and the front mounting surface of the special light emitting board (back rear upper first decorative board) different from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards is covered with the special decorative portion. The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board provided in the special decorative portion are mounted on the specific light emitting board by the special decorative portion, although the light emitting means is not controlled in the golden light emitting mode during the specific light emitting control. It is characterized in that it can reflect light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the golden light emitting mode emitted from the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the light emitting substrate provided around the special decorative portion can be reflected in the specific golden color region, whereby the light emitting colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be reflected. Not only the light reflected from the specific color region or the color of the specific color region itself makes it easy to recognize that the light is emitted in the golden emission mode.

(Solution C2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution C1, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate are recognized as white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated color, off-white color, etc.) (similar). The surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate has a white color (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated color, off-white color, etc.) including the plurality of light emitting means. Only electronic components with an exterior (including recognized (similar) colors) (such as LED elements with a white package and connectors with a white housing) are mounted and white on the back mount surface of the specified light emitting board. Electronic parts other than electronic parts with a black exterior (for example, a circuit that controls the emission of a resistor with a black exterior or the emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a color different from white (for example) It is characterized in that a connector having a housing (such as light blue or yellow) is also mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific light emitting substrate, so that the light emitting effect can be executed without light emission unevenness. It is possible to perform high-impact production and improve the entertainment of the game.

(Solution C3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means C1 or the solution means C2, the golden light emitting mode controls all of the plurality of light emitting means to emit yellow light, but the light and darkness is gradually different for each predetermined number of light emitting means. It is characterized in that it is a light emitting mode in which light is emitted. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the golden light emission is being performed.

(Solution C4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means C1 to the solution means C3, a special light emitting board (a special light emitting board in which a white coating film is formed on a surface mounting surface and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The back and back upper first decorative substrate) is further provided, and the light emitting control means differs from the golden light emitting mode in that a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. It is characterized in that light emission is controlled in a special light emission mode (for example, red light emission). In order to control the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board in the special light emitting mode without controlling the light emission in the golden light emitting mode, the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board is mounted on the specific light emitting board. It becomes easy to distinguish from the light emission by the plurality of light emitting means, and it is possible to easily visually recognize the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate.

(Solution C5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution C4, the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board. The light emitting means of the above is characterized in that the brightness cannot be changed even when the operation unit is operated. Since the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board cannot be changed, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. It becomes easy to change the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the substrate to the brightness of the player's preference.

(Solution C6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means C4 or the solution means C5, when a special period occurs in the light emission control in the golden light emitting mode, the golden color by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board is used. It is characterized in that while the light emission control in the light emitting mode is terminated, the light emitting control in the special light emitting mode by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate can be continued without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a win even if the light emission control in the golden light emission mode is completed, and anxiety and distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the golden light emission mode can be felt. You can avoid giving it.

(Solution D1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a plurality of first light emitting means are implemented. A white coating film and a bright color coating film having a bright color different from white are formed on the surface mounting surface so that the occupancy ratio of the white coating film is higher than the occupancy ratio of the bright color coating film. The white coating film comprises a specific light emitting substrate (decorative substrate 3168 in the lower front and lower middle of the back) and a white coating film and a dark color coating film having a dark color different from white on the front mounting surface on which a plurality of second light emitting means are mounted. When it has a special light emitting substrate (first decorative substrate on the back and rear) formed so that the occupancy ratio is lower than the occupancy ratio of the dark color coating film, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. While it is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect that controls the light emission of the first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate to the bright color (for example, golden light emission), the special light emission is performed even during the execution of the specific light emitting effect. The second light emitting means mounted on the substrate is characterized in that it can control light emission to a special color (for example, red) different from the light color without controlling light emission to the bright color. As a result, the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board can be maintained high, and the light emission of a plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board is efficiently used to suppress the decrease in the amount of light. It is possible to execute the specific light emission effect. On the other hand, although the reflection efficiency of the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting board is low, the interference of light on the surface mounting surface can be suppressed, so that the light emission control of the special color can be easily visually recognized.

(Solution D2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution D1, the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate are recognized as white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated color, off-white color, etc.). It has an exterior (including (similar) colors), and the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate is white (beige color, ivory color, cream color, generated, off-white) containing the plurality of first light emitting means. Only electronic parts (LED elements having a white package, connectors having a white housing, etc.) having an exterior (including a color recognized as white (similar)) are mounted, and the back mounting surface of the specific light emitting board is mounted. Electronic components other than electronic components with a white exterior (for example, a resistor with a black exterior or a circuit that controls the emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, white and Is also characterized in that a connector having a housing of a different color (light blue, yellow, etc.) is also mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface mounting surface on which a plurality of first light emitting means are mounted and increase the amount of light of the specific light emitting substrate. It is possible to perform an impactful production as well as to improve the game entertainment.

(Solution D3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means D1 or the solution means D2, the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board can change the brightness when a predetermined operation unit is operated, and the special light emission can be changed. The plurality of second light emitting means mounted on the substrate are characterized in that the brightness cannot be changed even when the operation unit is operated. Since the brightness of the plurality of second light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board cannot be changed, it can be used as an index when changing the brightness of the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board. It is possible to easily change the brightness of the plurality of first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board to the brightness desired by the player.

(Solution D4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solution means D1 to the solution means D3, when a special period occurs during the execution of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board is used. The second light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting substrate can be continued without ending the light emitting in the special color, while the specific light emitting effect for controlling the light emission to the bright color is terminated. And. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a hit even after the specific light emission effect is completed, and it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust due to the end of the specific light emission effect. ..

(Solution E1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which are formed and capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (decorative board, etc.) and various commands received from the main control board 1310. And the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. Based on the portion transmitted to each decorative board of 5), the display means capable of displaying an image (effect display device 1600), and the display control means (main control board 1310) for display control of the display means. , The part where the CPU of the peripheral control IC sends control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512), and the player operates it. The display control means can display a specific mode (specific image information 1600a) on the display means when the operation means is operated, including a possible operation means (pressing operation unit 303, etc.). The light emission control means has a specific light emission effect (gold color effect) that controls light emission of the specific light emission means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emission board among the plurality of light emission boards in a specific light emission mode (gold color light emission). As the specific light emitting effect, the first specific light emitting effect (low expected golden effect) that allows the display means to display the specific mode, and the display means displaying the specific mode. When the second specific light emission effect is executed, including the unacceptable second specific light emission effect (highly expected golden effect), the first specific light emission effect is performed. It is characterized by a higher expectation of hitting than when it is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the hit expectation degree depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is executed or the second specific light emitting effect is executed, and it is special when the second specific light emitting effect is executed. Expectations for the gaming state can be improved.

(Solution E2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means E1, the display control means causes the display means to display the specific mode according to the operation of the operation means, and then the specific mode is according to the further operation of the operation means. It is characterized by being able to change. As a result, even when the first specific light emitting effect having a low hit expectation is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the change in the specific mode and suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(Solution E3)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means E1 or the solution means E2, the sound output means (top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3, the main body frame 4) capable of outputting a specific sound according to the operation of the operation means. The main body frame speaker 622 for bass, etc.) is further provided, and the display control means may display a specific mode on the display means after the specific sound is output by the sound output means when the operation means is operated. , Characterized by that. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the specific aspect may be displayed by a specific sound and have the player recognize it in advance, and then display the specific aspect, and whether or not the specific aspect is displayed. It is possible to draw attention to.

(Solution F1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (the winning determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when it is determined that it is a big hit), and a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which are formed and capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of light emitting boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (decorative board, etc.) (various commands received from the main control board 1310). And the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. A portion to be transmitted to each decorative substrate of No. 5), an operating means (light amount adjusting button 228) that can be operated by the player, and a brightness changing means (brightness changing means) that changes the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means according to the operation of the operating means. The peripheral control board 1510 comprises a portion where the peripheral control board 1510 changes the default luminance of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in response to a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a), and the light emission control means is one of the plurality of light emitting boards. It is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect (golden effect) in which the specific light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board is controlled to emit light in a specific light emitting mode (golden light emission). The first specific light emitting effect (low expected golden effect) that allows the brightness to be changed and the second specific light emitting effect (high expected golden effect) that does not allow the brightness of the specific light emitting means to be changed. A gaming machine including, when the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the hit expectation is higher than when the first specific light emitting effect is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the degree of hit expectation depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is executed or the second specific light emitting effect is executed, and it is special when the second specific light emitting effect is executed. Expectations for the gaming state can be improved.

(Solution G1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which are formed and capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (decorative board, etc.) (various commands received from the main control board 1310). And the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. (Parts to be transmitted to each decorative substrate of 5) and sound output means (top center speaker and top side speaker of door frame 3, main body frame speaker 622 for bass of main body frame 4, etc.) and sound output means for executing predetermined sound output. A sound control means for controlling the sound output means (a portion that executes sound data output processing of the CPU of the peripheral control IC) and an operation means that can be operated by the player (pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are provided. The sound control means can output a specific sound from the sound output means when the operation means is operated, and the light emission control means is a specific light emitting board (back front) among the plurality of light emitting boards. A specific light emitting effect (golden effect) is executed in which the specific light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the lower middle decorative substrate 3168, etc.) is controlled to emit light in a specific light emitting mode (golden light emission), and the sound output is performed as the specific light emitting effect. A first specific light emission effect (low expectation golden effect) that allows the specific sound to be output from the means, and a second specific light emission effect (high expectation) that does not allow the specific sound to be output from the sound output means. When the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the hit expectation is higher than when the first specific light emitting effect is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the degree of hit expectation depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is executed or the second specific light emitting effect is executed, and it is special when the second specific light emitting effect is executed. Expectations for the gaming state can be improved.

(Solution H1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which are formed and capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (decorative board, etc.) (various commands received from the main control board 1310). And the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. 5 is provided with a portion to be transmitted to each decorative substrate), and the light emitting control means is mounted on a front mounting surface of a specific light emitting board (back front, lower middle, middle decorative board 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting boards. It is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect (golden effect) in which the specific light emitting means is controlled to emit light in a specific light emitting mode (golden light emission), and as the specific light emitting effect, a preset specific operation (for example, lowering to a lower moving end) is possible. When the detection means (for example, the pressing detection sensor 373) for detecting the pressing operation unit 303 is detected (for example, the pressing detection sensor 373), the first specific light emitting effect (low) that terminates the light emitting control in the specific light emitting mode is terminated. The expected golden effect) and the second specific light emission effect (highly expected golden effect) that continues without ending the light emission control in the specific light emission mode even when the detection by the detection means is performed. When the second specific light emitting effect is executed, the hit expectation is higher than when the first specific light emitting effect is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the degree of hit expectation depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is executed or the second specific light emitting effect is executed, and it is special when the second specific light emitting effect is executed. Expectations for the gaming state can be improved.

(Solution H2)
Further, in the gaming machine according to the solution means H1, the light emission control means has a predetermined period (a predetermined period of time) after the first specific light emission effect is completed based on the detection of the specific operation by the detection means. It is characterized in that the first specific light emission effect can be executed again based on the elapse of (for example, 30 seconds, etc.). As a result, it is possible to add fun to determine whether the first specific light emitting effect is being executed or the second specific light emitting effect is being executed again even after the specific operation is performed and the first specific light emitting effect is completed. It is possible to deter the decline in the game interest.

(Solution I1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating is applied to the surface mounting surface. A plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which are formed and capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film). The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the door frame 3 based on the light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (decorative board, etc.) (various commands received from the main control board 1310). And the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. The portion to be transmitted to each decorative substrate of 5), the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards, and the preset specific operation (for example, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved downward so as to be lowered to the lower moving end). A specific operation means (for example, a pressing operation unit 303) having a specific detection unit (for example, a pressing detection sensor 373) capable of detecting a pressing operation) is provided, and the light emitting control means is mounted on the special light emitting substrate. It is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect (golden effect) in which a plurality of light emitting means are controlled to emit light in a specific light emitting mode (golden light emission), and the specific light emitting effect is the case where the specific operation is detected by the specific detection unit. The first specific light emitting effect (low expected golden effect) that allows the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board to be changed, and the case where the specific operation is detected by the specific detection unit. Also includes a second specific light emitting effect (highly expected golden effect) that does not allow the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board to be changed, and the second specific light emitting effect is executed. In this case, the hit expectation is higher than that in the case where the first specific light emission effect is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the degree of hit expectation depending on whether the first specific light emitting effect is executed or the second specific light emitting effect is executed, and it is special when the second specific light emitting effect is executed. Expectations for the gaming state can be improved.

(Solution J1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating (white coating on the surface mounting surface). A white solder resist) is formed, and a plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are gold-colored) in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film. A peripheral control IC based on a specific decorative substrate capable of emitting light (such as a specific decorative substrate) and a light emitting control means (light emitting control means for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means according to the lottery result by the lottery means (various commands received from the main control board 1310). Serial I for the lamp drive board for the CPU of the game board to output a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The part transmitted from the / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and the state detection means for detecting the state of the game machine (for example, the main control MPU1310a executes fraud detection processing, the door frame opening switch and the main body frame). A portion that detects a detection signal from the release switch 4b), and is provided on the white coating film on the front mounting surface of the specific light emitting board (the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting boards. A notation unit (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) is formed in yellow to specify each of the plurality of light emitting means, and the light emitting control means is , Specific light emission control (golden effect) in which the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the front mounting surface of the specific light emitting board are controlled to emit light in a golden light emitting mode (golden light emitting) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. Is executed, and during the specific light emission control, the plurality of light emission mounted on the front mounting surface of the special light emitting board (back rear upper first decorative board) different from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards. The means is controlled to emit light in a special light emitting mode (red) different from the golden light emitting mode, and the state detecting means is in a specific state (an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during the specific light emitting control). When it is detected that the condition is), the specific light emitting control is terminated and the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board is changed, while the light emitting mode of the special light emitting board is changed. It is characterized in that the light emission control of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the surface mounting surface in the special light emitting mode can be continued. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emission control in the special light emission mode by a plurality of light emission means mounted on the special light emission board even in a specific state, and the lottery result is obtained even if the light emission control in the golden light emission mode is completed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the hit has occurred, and it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the golden light emission mode.

(Solution K1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a white coating (white coating on the surface mounting surface). A white solder resist) is formed, and a plurality of light emitting boards (a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are gold-colored) in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the white coating film. A specific decorative board capable of emitting light, and a state detecting means for detecting the state of the gaming machine (for example, the main control MPU1310a executes fraud detection processing, or is detected from the door frame opening switch or the main body frame opening switch 4b). The plurality of light emitting substrates include a specific light emitting substrate (a portion for detecting a signal), and a specific light emitting substrate (such as a decorative substrate 3168 in front of the back and lower middle) in which a white coating film (white solder resist) is formed on the front mounting surface. And a special light emitting substrate (for example, a first decorative substrate on the back of the information display) on which a dark coating film (for example, a green or black solder resist) is formed on the front mounting surface, and further, the specific light emitting substrate. On the white coating film on the surface mounting surface of the above, a notation portion (characters for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates) for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting means by yellow The specific light emission control (gold color effect) in which the symbol) is formed and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board are controlled to emit light in a golden light emitting mode (gold light emission), and the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the special light emitting board. It is possible to execute non-specific light emission control in which light emission control of the above light emitting means is controlled in a special light emission mode (for example, red) different from the golden light emission mode, and the state detection means is in a specific state (for example) during the specific light emission control. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in an abnormal state, etc.), the specific light emission control is terminated, while the state detecting means is detected to be in the specific state during the non-specific light emission control. It is characterized in that the non-specific light emission control is continued even in the case. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emission control in the special light emission mode by a plurality of light emission means mounted on the special light emission board even in a specific state, and the lottery result is obtained even if the light emission control in the golden light emission mode is completed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the hit has occurred, and it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the golden light emission mode.

(Solution L1)
Further, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). , And the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or read by the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and a plurality of light emitting means on the surface mounting surface. According to a plurality of light emitting boards (such as a specific decorative board capable of executing golden light emission among a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted) and a lottery result by the lottery means. Light emitting control means for controlling light emission of the plurality of light emitting means (based on various commands received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The part where the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5) and the player. An operable operating means (pressing operation unit 303, etc.) and a brightness changing means for changing the brightness of the plurality of light emitting means according to the operation of the operating means (peripheral control board according to a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a). 1510 is provided with a portion that changes the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED), and the front mounting surface of the specific light emitting board (the back front, the lower middle, the decorative board, 3168, etc.) among the plurality of light emitting boards is provided. A white coating film (white solder resist) is formed, and a notation unit (an electronic component such as a mounted LED or another decorative substrate) that identifies each of the plurality of light emitting means by yellow on the white coating film is formed. (Characters and symbols for avoiding confusion) are formed, and the light emitting control means has a golden light emitting mode (gold color) for the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting board when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. If a special light emission control (golden effect) that controls light emission by (light emission) is executed and a special period (such as a state in which an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1) occurs during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is performed over the special period. The plurality of light emitting means mounted on the specific light emitting substrate have a special light emitting mode different from the golden light emitting mode (abnormality notification light emitting mode (flashing light in red with maximum brightness (light amount))). Etc.), and when the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission substrate with the brightness changed by the brightness changing means can be executed. While the light emission of the plurality of mounted light emitting means is performed at the operation timing, when the operation means is operated during the special light emission control, the specific light emitting substrate has the brightness changed by the brightness changing means. It is characterized in that light emission of a plurality of mounted light emitting means is performed at a timing delayed from the operation timing. As a result, the state of the gaming machine can be determined by the timing at which the plurality of light emitting means emit light at the brightness changed by operating the operating means, and the operation of the operating means can be accepted even in a specific state. It is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result is a hit even if the light emission control in the golden light emission mode is completed, and it does not give anxiety or distrust due to the end of the light emission control in the golden light emission mode. Can be done.

(Solution M1)
In addition, a game board (game board 5) and a lottery means for performing a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of lottery conditions (a portion where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the hit determination process in step S305). ), And when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit (in the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol normal process). As a result of comparison with the second special random number read out), it is a gaming machine that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when it is determined to be a big hit), and is provided on the game board. A specific circuit board (game board) is provided with a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the plurality of light emitting boards are formed with a bright color coating board (white solder resist) made of white on the surface mounting surface. Of the plurality of decorative boards provided in 5, which mount a plurality of LEDs, a specific decorative board capable of emitting golden light, etc., and a dark-colored coating board consisting of green or black on the surface mounting surface (for example, a green or black solder resist). ) Is formed, and the light emitting means is specified on the white coating film on the front mounting surface of the specific circuit board. The notation part (characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic parts such as mounted LEDs and other decorative boards) is formed in a specific color (for example, yellow), and the specific circuit board among the plurality of light emitting means is described. The first light emitting means mounted on the above is capable of controlling light emission in a specific light emitting mode (gold light emitting mode) that is the same as or similar to the specific color when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, and the plurality of light emitting means. Of these, the second light emitting means mounted on the special circuit board can change the light emitting mode based on the operation of a predetermined operating means and display game information by light emission, and is the specific color. It is characterized in that the emission is controlled to a different special color (for example, red). As a result, since the game information is emitted and displayed based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1804 Decorative body (decorative body)
1804a Chamfered portion 1804b Glue surface (glue surface)
1805 Decorative body (decorative body)
1805a Chamfered part 1806 Decorative body (decorative body)
1806a Notch 1807L Decorative body left (decorative body)
1807R Decorative body right (decorative body)
1808 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809a Notch 1823 First member (pedestal member)
1823a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1823b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1823c Separation hole (separation hole)
1823e Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
1824 First member (pedestal member)
1824a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1824b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1824c Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
1825 First member (pedestal member)
1825a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1825b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1825c Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
1826L 1st member left (pedestal member)
1826R First member right (pedestal member)
1826a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1826b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1826c Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
1827 First member (pedestal member)
1827a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1827b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1827c Separation hole (separation hole)
1827d Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
1828 First member (pedestal member)
1828a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1828b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1828c Separation hole (separation hole)
1828d Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
2000 Table unit 2810 Gate body (pedestal member)
2810a Front plate part (flat plate part)
2810b Sticking recess (mounting recess)
2810c Mis-sticking prevention part (mis-sticking prevention part)
2810d Separation hole (separation hole)
2811 Gate seal (decorative body)
2811a Notch 3000 Back unit

Claims (2)

A game that includes a game board and a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win. It ’s a machine,
A staging display device that can display images and
Multiple light emitting boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, and
An effect control means for controlling the effect display device and a plurality of light emitters according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
Equipped with a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board provided on the game board among the plurality of light emitting boards, and a notation unit for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting bodies by yellow on the white coating film. Is formed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the specific light emission control for controlling a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board into a pseudo-golden light emission mode in which yellow light emission having different brightness or color tone is mixed. While you can do
The pseudo-golden light emitting mode is a plurality of light emitting bodies mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting board provided on the game board separately from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards during the specific light emitting control. It executes special light emission control that controls different special light emission modes.
When it is detected that the state detecting means is in an abnormal state during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mount surface of the specific light emission board has not been completed. Also, the specific light emission control is terminated to control the abnormal light emission mode different from the pseudo-golden light emission mode, while the special light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emission substrate is terminated. It is possible to continue until the special light emission control is completed without
The light emitter mounted on the specific light emitting board is capable of multicolor light emission.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A lottery means capable of drawing a winning or not based on the operation of the start lever is provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied for the player. It is a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous special gaming state,
A staging display device that can display images and
Multiple light emitting boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, and
An effect control means for controlling the effect display device and a plurality of light emitters according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
Equipped with a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine,
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting substrate among the plurality of light emitting substrates, and a notation portion for specifying each of the plurality of light emitting bodies is formed on the white coating film by yellow.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the specific light emission control for controlling a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting board to a pseudo-golden light emission mode in which yellow light emission having different brightness or color tone is mixed. While you can do
A plurality of light emitting bodies mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emitting board provided separately from the specific light emitting board among the plurality of light emitting boards during the specific light emitting control are different from the pseudo-golden light emitting mode. It executes special light emission control to control
When it is detected that the state detecting means is in an abnormal state during the specific light emission control, the specific light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mount surface of the specific light emission board has not been completed. Also, the specific light emission control is terminated to control the abnormal light emission mode different from the pseudo-golden light emission mode, while the special light emission control for a plurality of light emitters mounted on the surface mounting surface of the special light emission substrate is terminated. It is possible to continue until the special light emission control is completed without
The light emitter mounted on the specific light emitting board is capable of multicolor light emission.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images